Agrofarm 85

Agrofarm 85
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001

Agrofarm 100
Agrofarm 100 -> 5001
Workshop manual
CONTENTS
0 - Introduction
0.1 - Introduction 0-2
0.1.1 - Safety notes 0-2
0.1.2 - General safety rules 0-2
0.1.3 - Safety precautions for removal and refitting operations 0-3
0.1.4 - Lifting instructions 0-4
0.1.5 - Tightening torques 0-5
0.1.6 - Threadlockers, adhesives, sealants and lubricants 0-8
0.1.7 - Conversion factors 0-10
10 - Technical characteristics
10.1 - Engine 10-2
10.1.1 - Technical data 10-2
10.2 - Transmission 10-4
10.2.1 - Transmission (Agrofarm 85) 10-4
10.2.2 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100) 10-11
10.2.3 - Transmission (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-18
10.2.4 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-30
10.2.5 - Rear P.T.O. 10-42
10.2.6 - 2 and 4-speed PTO and Groundspeed PTO 10-47
10.3 - Front axle 10-49
10.3.1 - Front axle 10-49
10.4 - Hydraulic system 10-54
10.4.1 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 85) 10-54
10.4.2 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 100) 10-59
10.4.3 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-63
10.4.4 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-70
10.4.5 - Steering circuit pump - lift circuit 10-78
10.4.6 - Power steering valve 10-80
10.4.7 - Remote control valve 10-82
10.4.8 - Hydraulic lift control valve (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-84
10.4.9 - Hydraulic lift control valve (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-91
10.4.10 - Braking system 10-98
10.4.11 - Separate-Brakes valve 10-99
10.4.12 - Trailer braking valve 10-104
10.4.13 - Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 10-108
10.4.14 - Services solenoid valves assembly - Pressure holding valves (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-110
10.4.15 - Shuttle solenoid valves assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-113
20 - Calibrations and electronic diagnosis

20.1 - Diagnostic tools 20-2
20.1.1 - All Round Tester (ART®) 20-2
20.1.2 - Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-6
20.1.3 - Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-6
20.1.4 - All-Round Tester Manual - Introduction (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-8
20.1.5 - All-Round Tester Manual - Monitor Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-9
III
CONTENTS
20.1.6 - All-Round Tester manual - Parameters Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 20-12
20.1.7 - All-Round Tester Manual - Calibrations Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 20-13
20.1.8 - All-Round Tester Manual - Alarms Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-16
20.1.9 - All-Round Tester Manual - Test Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-18
20.1.10 - SDF Analyser 20-19
20.1.11 - SDF Analyser - Diagnostic socket 20-22
20.2 - Diagnostic tool screens 20-24
20.2.1 - ECU interrogation 20-24
20.2.2 - Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-26
20.2.3 - Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 20-28
20.3 - Commissioning and calibrating the tractor 20-32
20.3.1 - Putting the tractor into service (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-32
20.3.2 - Putting the tractor into service (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-37
20.3.3 - Calibration of the clutch pedal (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-57
20.4 - ECU alarms 20-60
20.4.1 - Hydraulic shuttle alarms 20-60
20.4.2 - Instrument panel alarms 20-87
20.4.3 - Transmission alarms 20-97
20.4.4 - Canbus alarms 20-98
30 - Method of intervention
30.1 - B0 - Engine 30-2
30.1.1 - Engine - Separation from the transmission (B0.00.02) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-2
30.1.2 - Engine - Separation from the transmission (B0.00.02) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001) 30-6
30.1.3 - Engine (B0.00.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-10
30.1.4 - Engine (B0.00.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-14
30.1.5 - Checking the compression pressure 30-18
30.1.6 - Dismantling of engine 30-20
30.1.7 - Re-assembly of engine 30-32
30.1.8 - Removing and installing front cover 30-77
30.1.9 - Repair of front cover 30-81
30.1.10 - Repair of crankcase 30-83
30.1.11 - Repair of mass balancing shaft 30-90
30.1.12 - Checking the crankshaft 30-90
30.1.13 - Fan and air conditioning compressor drive belts 30-93
30.1.14 - Tension adjustment of the fan and air conditioning compressor drive belt 30-93
30.1.15 - Alternator, fuel pump and water pump drive belt 30-94
30.1.16 - Tension adjustment of the alternator, fuel pump and water pump drive belt 30-95
30.1.17 - Removing and installing the flywheel 30-95
30.1.18 - Repair of flywheel 30-98
30.1.19 - Checking the piston 30-98
30.1.20 - Repair of connecting rod 30-101
30.1.21 - Checking the camshaft 30-105
30.1.22 - Checking the gearcase 30-106
IV
CONTENTS
30.1.23 - Checking and setting the valve clearance 30-106
30.1.24 - Checking rocker arm bracket 30-108
30.1.25 - Checking the cylinder head 30-110
30.1.26 - Repair of hydraulic pump drive 30-115
30.1.27 - Repair of hydraulic pump with fastening flange 30-118
30.1.28 - Removal and re-installation of injection pump 30-120
30.1.29 - Determining commencement of delivery 30-127
30.1.30 - Check injectors 30-135
30.1.31 - Repair of control rod 30-142
30.2 - C0 - Engine accessories 30-143
30.2.1 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (C0.01.02) 30-143
30.2.2 - Radiator - Tractor without front PTO 30-144
30.2.3 - Radiator - Tractor with front PTO (C0.01.01) 30-146
30.2.4 - Fuel tank (C0.03.01) 30-149
30.2.5 - Fuel cooler 30-151
30.2.6 - Starter motor 30-151
30.2.7 - Silencer (C0.06.01) 30-152
30.2.8 - Exhaust pipe - Tractor with cab (C0.06.02) 30-153
30.2.9 - Repair of air compressor 30-154
30.2.10 - Removing and installing the thermostat 30-155
30.2.11 - Control and adjustment thermostat 30-155
30.3 - D0 - Transmission 30-157
30.3.1 - Changing the transmission oil (D0.00.01) 30-157
30.3.2 - Range selector assembly 30-158
30.3.3 - Disassembly of the range selector 30-159
30.3.4 - Clutch plate (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-161
30.3.5 - Clutch thrust bearing (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-162
30.3.6 - Clutch housing - assembly (D0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-162
30.3.7 - Clutch housing - assembly (D0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-166
30.3.8 - Front gearbox - Separation from the transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 30-170
30.3.9 - Shuttle assembly - complete unit (D0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 30-174
30.3.10 - Disassembly of the shuttle unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-176
30.3.11 - Disassembly of the cover unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-179
30.3.12 - Disassembly of the forward drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-181
30.3.13 - Disassembly of the forward drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-185
30.3.14 - Disassembly of the reverse drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-189
30.3.17 - Gearbox and Hi-Lo assembly (D0.04.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-203
30.3.18 - Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-205
30.3.19 - Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-210
30.3.20 - Disassembly of the Lo range clutch housing (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 30-212
30.3.21 - Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit output shaft (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-222
30.3.22 - Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit output shaft (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-223
30.3.23 - Shuttle shaft (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-224
V
CONTENTS
30.3.24 - Disassembly of the gearbox input shaft (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-227
30.3.25 - Torsional spring plate (D0.05.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-229
30.3.26 - Disassembly of the main shaft- Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-230
30.3.27 - Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-231
30.3.28 - Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-232
30.3.29 - Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001) 30-233
30.3.30 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001) 30-234
30.3.31 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
100 -> 5001) 30-238
30.3.32 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-242
30.3.33 - Secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-245
30.3.34 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-249
30.3.35 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-253
30.3.36 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-256
30.3.37 - Gearbox and shuttle assy. - complete unit (D0.09.05) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-259
30.3.38 - Disassembly of gearbox and shuttle assy. - complete unit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-261
30.3.39 - Range gearbox and differential assembly - complete assembly 30-264
30.3.40 - Complete gearbox assembly - Version with Hi-Lo (D0.09.04) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-264
30.3.41 - Complete gearbox assembly - Version with Hi-Lo (D0.09.05) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-266
30.3.42 - Disassembly of complete gearbox unit - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-267
30.3.43 - Front gearbox oil seal (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-270
30.3.44 - Gearbox support and gear selector rods 30-271
30.3.45 - Adjustment of the differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85) 30-274
30.3.46 - Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100) 30-282
30.3.47 - Adjustment of the differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-290
30.3.48 - Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-298
30.3.49 - Disassembly of the rear pinion (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-306
30.3.50 - Disassembly of the rear pinion (Agrofarm 100) 30-310
30.3.51 - Disassembly of rear pinion (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-314
30.3.52 - Disassembly of the 4WD output shaft 30-318
30.3.53 - PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-320
30.3.54 - PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-324
30.3.55 - PTO clutch disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-328
30.3.56 - Disassembly of the PTO clutch (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-332
30.3.57 - Disassembly of the PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-336
30.3.58 - Pump drive PTO - Outer gear (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-340
30.3.59 - Pump drive PTO - Outer gear (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-342
30.3.60 - Pump drive PTO - Inner gear (Agrofarm 85) 30-344
30.3.61 - PTO. pumps drive - Inner gear (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-346
30.3.62 - PTO pumps drive - Inner gear (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-348
30.3.63 - PTO output shaft. - 4-speed version 30-350
30.3.64 - PTO output shaft - 2-speed version 30-352
VI
CONTENTS
30.3.65 - Disassembly of the PTO output shaft - 4-speed version 30-355
30.3.69 - Disassembly of the Groundspeed PTO output shaft 30-366
30.3.70 - Disassembly of the Groundspeed PTO engagement device 30-368
30.3.71 - Disassembly of the parking brake 30-369
30.3.72 - Disassembly of the 4WD engagement device 30-370
30.3.73 - Four-wheel drive engagement device - Easyshift (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 30-372
30.4 - E0 - Rear axle 30-376
30.4.1 - RH rear axle (E0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-376
30.4.2 - RH rear axle (E0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-378
30.4.3 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 85) 30-381
30.4.4 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-384
30.4.5 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 100) 30-386
30.4.6 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-390
30.4.7 - Disassembly of LH/RH rear axle (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-393
30.4.8 - Disassembly of LH/RH rear axle (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-398
30.4.9 - Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-403
30.4.10 - Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-404
30.4.11 - Rear differential 30-405
30.4.12 - Disassembly of the rear differential (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-408
30.4.13 - Disassembly of the rear differential (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-410
30.4.14 - Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear brakes (E0.03.01) 30-412
30.4.15 - Rear axle brake discs 30-414
30.4.16 - Disassembly of the rear axle brake piston (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-414
30.4.17 - Rear axle brake piston disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-415
30.5 - F0 - Front axle 30-417
30.5.1 - Front pivot bracket (F0.01.01) 30-417
30.5.2 - 4WD front axle (F0.03.01) 30-419
30.5.3 - Adjusting the front axle end float 30-421
30.5.4 - Steering cylinders 30-423
30.5.5 - Steering cylinders disassembly 30-425
30.5.6 - Steering knuckle housing and axle shaft 30-428
30.5.7 - Adjustment of steering knuckle housing and axle shaft 30-433
30.5.8 - Differential unit 30-435
30.5.9 - Differential disassembly 30-436
30.5.10 - Differential unit adjustment 30-439
30.5.11 - Disassembly of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-442
30.5.12 - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-446
30.5.13 - Adjustment of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-451
30.5.14 - Adjustment of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-460
30.5.15 - Disassembly of the differential (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-469
30.5.16 - Disassembly of the differential (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-470
30.5.17 - 4WD shaft (F0.04.01) 30-473
30.5.18 - Planetary reduction gear (F0.06.01) 30-475
30.5.19 - Disassembly of the planetary reduction gear 30-477
VII
CONTENTS
30.5.20 - Front brake discs 30-482
30.5.21 - Front axle brake piston 30-482
30.6 - G0 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform 30-484
30.6.1 - Cab (G0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-484
30.6.2 - Cab (G0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-490
30.6.3 - Front hood and side panels 30-496
30.6.4 - Cab access steps (G0.03.03) 30-497
30.6.5 - Fenders (G0.04.01) 30-497
30.6.6 - Front instrument panel (G0.06.04) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-497
30.6.7 - Front instrument panel (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-500
30.6.8 - Right-hand console (G0.06.01) 30-503
30.6.9 - Left-hand console (G0.06.02) 30-505
30.6.10 - Heating and air conditioning assembly - Version with standard roof 30-506
30.6.11 - Air conditioning system controls - High-visibility roof system (G0.09.01) 30-509
30.6.12 - Air conditioning system - Standard roof version 30-512
30.6.13 - Air conditioning compressor 30-514
30.6.14 - Condenser - Version with high-visibility roof 30-515
30.6.15 - Receiver drier - Version with high visibility roof 30-516
30.6.16 - Air-conditioning evaporator - Version with high-visibility roof 30-517
30.6.17 - Heater matrix - Version with high-visibility roof 30-517
30.6.18 - Expansion valve - Version with high visibility roof 30-518
30.6.19 - Antifreeze sensor - Version with high visibility roof 30-519
30.6.20 - Condenser cooling fans - Version with high-visibility roof 30-520
30.6.21 - Condenser fan control pressure switch - Version with high visibility roof 30-520
30.6.22 - Clutch master cylinder (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-521
30.6.23 - Clutch piston (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-523
30.6.24 - Clutch control circuit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-523
30.6.25 - Brake master cylinders 30-524
30.6.26 - Adjustment of the control levers (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-526
30.6.27 - Adjustment of the control levers (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-529
30.6.28 - Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 85) 30-532
30.6.29 - Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 100) 30-535
30.6.30 - Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-538
30.6.31 - Adjustment of rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-541
30.6.32 - Remote valve control cables 30-545
30.7 - H0 - Hydraulic system 30-546
30.7.1 - Pump for hydraulic lift and auxiliary services (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-546
30.7.2 - Pump for hydraulic lift and auxiliary services (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 30-547
30.7.3 - Power steering (H0.02.01) 30-549
30.7.4 - Pressure relief valve setting 30-551
30.7.5 - Power steering disassembly 30-552
30.7.6 - Power steering pump (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-564
30.7.7 - Power steering pump (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-565
30.7.8 - Gearbox oil coolers - Version with front PTO 30-567
30.7.9 - Gearbox oil coolers - Version without front PTO 30-568
30.7.10 - Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-568
30.7.11 - Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 100) 30-570
VIII
CONTENTS
30.7.12 - Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-573
30.7.13 - Bleeding the braking circuit (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-576
30.7.14 - Bleeding the braking circuit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-577
30.7.15 - Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-579
30.7.16 - Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-581
30.8 - L0 - Electrical system 30-585
30.8.1 - Battery - Version without front PTO 30-585
30.8.2 - Alternator 30-586
30.8.3 - Clutch pedal potentiometer 30-587
30.8.4 - Shuttle output speed sensor (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-588
30.8.5 - Steering column switch (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-590
30.8.6 - Steering column switch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-591
30.8.7 - Shuttle ECU and forward/reverse selector 30-592
30.9 - M0 - Front PTO 30-593
30.9.1 - Front PTO (M0.00.01) 30-593
30.9.2 - PTO assembly. 30-597
30.9.3 - Pump assembly 30-606
30.9.4 - Clutch-brake assembly 30-607
30.9.5 - Solenoid valve assembly 30-612
30.10 - N0 - Front lift 30-614
30.10.1 - Front lift 30-614
30.10.2 - Disassembly of front lift cylinders 30-616
30.11 - R0 - Rear lift 30-619
30.11.1 - Lift - Complete assembly (R0.02.03) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-619
30.11.2 - Lift - Complete assembly (R0.02.03) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-621
30.11.3 - Disassembly of the lift - complete assembly (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-624
30.11.4 - Disassembly of the lift- complete assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-628
30.11.5 - Lift cylinder (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-632
30.11.6 - Bushes (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-633
30.11.7 - Auxiliary lift cylinders 30-633
30.11.8 - Hydraulic lift control valve 30-635
30.11.9 - Disassembly of the lift control valve (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-635
30.11.10 - Disassembly of the lift control valve (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-641
30.11.11 - Mechanical draft sensor (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-646
30.11.12 - Mechanical draft sensor disassembly (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-646
30.11.13 - Mechanical draft sensor (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-648
30.11.14 - Mechanical draft sensor disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-649
30.11.15 - 3-point linkage 30-650
30.12 - S0 - Wheels 30-653
30.12.1 - Front wheels (S0.01.01) 30-653
30.12.2 - Rear wheels (S0.02.01) 30-653
30.13 - V0 - Ballast - towing hitches 30-655
30.13.1 - Towing hitch slide (V0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-655
30.13.2 - Towing hitch slide (V0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-655
IX
CONTENTS
40 - Wiring diagrams
40.1 - Introduction 40-2
40.1.1 - Structure of the unit 40-2
40.1.2 - Wiring and components index (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-6
40.1.3 - Index of wiring looms and components (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-11
40.1.4 - Basic electronics for mechanics (1/2) 40-19
40.1.5 - Basic electronics for mechanics (2/2) 40-21
40.1.6 - Electrical and electronic components (1/2) 40-27
40.1.7 - Electrical and electronic components (2/2) 40-35
40.2 - Components 40-40
40.2.1 - Components (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-40
40.2.2 - Components (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-50
40.3 - Systems 40-61
40.3.1 - Earthing points 40-61
40.3.2 - Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-64
40.3.3 - Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-65
40.3.4 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-67
40.3.5 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 40-68
40.3.6 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-69
40.3.7 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001) 40-71
40.3.8 - Diagnostic accessories - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-72
40.3.9 - Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001) 40-74
40.3.10 - Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-76
40.3.11 - Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-78
40.3.12 - Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-79
40.3.13 - Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-81
40.3.14 - Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-82
40.3.15 - Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-84
40.3.16 - Worklights - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-86
40.3.17 - Work lights - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)40-88
40.3.18 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-90
40.3.19 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 40-91
40.3.20 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-92
40.3.21 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001) 40-94
40.3.22 - Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-95
40.3.23 - Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-96
40.3.24 - Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-97
40.3.25 - Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-98
40.3.26 - A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-100
40.3.27 - A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-101
40.3.28 - A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-103
X
CONTENTS
40.3.29 - A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
40-105
40.3.30 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-106
40.3.31 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-108
40.3.32 - PTO (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-110
40.3.33 - PTO (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-111
40.3.34 - Brakes (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-113
40.3.35 - Brakes (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-114
40.3.36 - CAN BUS (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-116
40.3.37 - CAN BUS (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-117
40.4 - Wiring harnesses 40-119
40.4.1 - Hood lights wiring - 0.014.8107.4/20 40-119
40.4.2 - Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-120
40.4.3 - Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 40-121
40.4.4 - Engine wiring - version with front battery - 0.014.8629.4/20 40-122
40.4.5 - Engine wiring connector positions - version with front battery (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
40-124
40.4.6 - Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with front battery (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-126
40.4.7 - Engine wiring (version with lateral battery) - 0.015.1597.4/20 40-128
40.4.8 - Engine wiring connector positions - version with lateral battery (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85) 40-131
40.4.9 - Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with lateral battery (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-133
40.4.10 - Battery wiring - 0.014.8806.4/20 40-135
40.4.11 - Battery wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-136
40.4.12 - Battery wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-139
40.4.13 - Preheating wiring - 0.014.9195.4/20 40-142
40.4.14 - Pre-heating wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-143
40.4.15 - Pre-heat wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-145
40.4.16 - Power supply wiring - 0.015.1983.4/10 40-147
40.4.17 - Power supply wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-148
40.4.18 - Power wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-149
40.4.19 - Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-150
40.4.20 - Positions of instrument panel wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-153
40.4.21 - Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/40 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)40-157
40.4.22 - Location of instrument panel wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001) 40-161
40.4.23 - RH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.8630.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-166
40.4.24 - RH drivetrain wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-167
40.4.25 - RH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.8630.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-168
40.4.26 - Location of RH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 40-170
40.4.27 - LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-171
40.4.28 - LH drivetrain wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-172
40.4.29 - LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-173
40.4.30 - Location of LH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
XI
CONTENTS
5001) 40-174
40.4.31 - Drivetrain shuttle wiring - 0.015.1998.4/10 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)40-176
40.4.32 - Position of drivetrain shuttle lever wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001) 40-177
40.4.33 - Cab shuttle wiring - 0.015.1418.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-179
40.4.34 - Positions of cab shuttle lever wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 40-181
40.4.35 - Power supply wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.014.9375.4/20 40-183
40.4.36 - Power supply wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab 40-184
40.4.37 - Roof wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7850.4/50 40-185
40.4.38 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85) 40-187
40.4.39 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-189
40.4.40 - Heating wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.2147.2 40-192
40.4.41 - Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85) 40-192
40.4.42 - Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-194
40.4.43 - Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.2153.2 40-195
40.4.44 - Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85) 40-196
40.4.45 - Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-196
40.4.46 - Air conditioning condenser fan wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7853.3/20 40-198
40.4.47 - Air conditioner exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
(Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-200
40.4.48 - Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with
standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-201
40.4.49 - Cab power supply wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.014.9376.4/10 40-202
40.4.50 - Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
100, Agrofarm 85) 40-203
40.4.51 - Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-206
40.4.52 - Roof wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3606.4/50 40-207
40.4.53 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
100, Agrofarm 85) 40-209
40.4.54 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-211
40.4.55 - Heating system wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.010.2554.2 40-213
40.4.56 - Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm
100, Agrofarm 85) 40-214
40.4.57 - Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-216
40.4.58 - Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.010.2560.0 40-217
40.4.59 - Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85) 40-219
40.4.60 - Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
XII
CONTENTS
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-221
40.4.61 - Air conditioning cooler fan wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3610.3/20 40-223
40.4.62 - Air conditioning exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
40.4.63 - Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high
visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-226
40.4.64 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7851.4/50 40-227
40.4.65 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
40.4.66 - Location of front-rear work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
(Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-230
40.4.67 - Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.015.1435.4/10 40-232
40.4.68 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab 40-233
40.4.69 - Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.4516.3 40-234
40.4.70 - Windscreen wiper connector positions wiring - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85) 40-235
40.4.71 - Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
40.4.72 - Loudspeaker wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.011.0729.4/10 40-238
40.4.73 - Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85) 40-239
40.4.74 - Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-241
40.4.75 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3595.3/10 (Agrofarm
100, Agrofarm 85) 40-243
40.4.76 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.015.2979.4 (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-244
40.4.77 - Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
100, Agrofarm 85) 40-245
40.4.78 - Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-246
40.4.79 - Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.015.1437.4/10 40-247
40.4.80 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab 40-249
40.4.81 - Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3597.3 40-251
40.4.82 - Windscreen wiper wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm
100, Agrofarm 85) 40-252
40.4.83 - Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
40.4.84 - Loudspeaker, radio, rear wiper, flashing light and clock wiring - Tractor with high-visibility
cab - 0.011.3596.3/40 40-254
40.4.85 - Location of connectors of wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing
beacon and clock - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-255
40.4.86 - Location of connectors of wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing
beacon and clock - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001) 40-257
40.4.87 - Front lights wiring - Tractor with cab - 0.010.8189.3/40 40-259
40.4.88 - Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with cab 40-260
40.4.89 - Wiring for lower front lights - Tractor with cab - 0441.1923.4 40-261
XIII
CONTENTS
40.4.90 - Lower front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85) 40-262
40.4.91 - Location of lower front lights wiring loom - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-263
40.4.92 - Front lights wiring - Tractor with platform - 0.015.3094.4 40-265
40.4.93 - Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform 40-266
40.4.94 - Worklights wiring - Tractor with platform - 0.014.9281.4 40-267
40.4.95 - Worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform 40-268
40.4.96 - Rotating beacon wiring - 0.012.9909.4 40-269
40.4.97 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-269
40.4.98 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001) 40-271
40.4.99 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring - 0.014.1645.4/10 40-273
40.4.100 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-274
40.4.101 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001) 40-275
XIV
0 - Introduction
0-1
Introduction
0.1 - Introduction
The purpose of this workshop manual is to provide instruction for repair technicians and a practical guide to improving the quality
of repairs. This manual enables repair technicians to acquire a thorough knowledge of the machine, indicating the correct methods
for fault diagnosis, for working in safety and for accurate dimensional checks and visual inspections. The instructions also indicate
the products to use, the tightening torques and the adjustment data. The technical material contained in this manual is reserved to
Authorised Dealers and Service Centres who will be duly informed of any technical changes to the machines in question through the
issue of documents regarding modifications, updates and supplements for optional equipment. All technicians and their colleagues
are expressly forbidden from reproducing any part of this manual in any form or from communicating the contents to third parties
without the express written permission of the Manufacturer, who remains the sole owner of this document with all rights reserved in
accordance with applicable laws.
0.1.1 - Safety notes
To ensure that machines entrusted to Authorised Service Centres for repair or overhaul continue to function correctly, it is very impor-
tant that all repair work is carried out in the prescribed manner. The procedures for checks and repairs indicated in this manual are
safe and effective. Some of the operations described require the use of special tools and equipment; these tools have been specifally
designed for the intended purpose and may be ordered directly from the Manufacturers. DO NOT USE MAKESHIFT TOOLS; not
only is there a risk of personal injury, but such tools are rarely suited to the purpose for which they are used. In potentially hazardous
situations, always give priority to personal safety and take the necessary actions to eliminate the danger
0.1.2 - General safety rules
l Even if you have a thorough knowledge of the machine as regards its components, operation and controls, always take spe-
cial care when carrying out the following operations; Remember that the machine you are working on is in need of repair or
overhaul and consequently may not always behave as expected.
l Before starting work, clean the tractor thoroughly to remove all mud, dust and road dirt. Also clean the cab to remove all traces
of oil, snow and ice from the access steps and grab rails.
l When climbing up to or down from the cab, always ensure you maintain three points of contact at a time (foot or handholds)
in order to keep your balance and prevent accidental falls.
l Always take special care when carrying out fault diagnosis operations; these operations often require two persons, who must
never stand in front of the wheels when the engine is running.
l When carrying out checks and repairs, wear close-fitting clothing, safety goggles and protective gloves that are suitable for
the task (cleaning, draining fluids, repairs). When working near moving parts, long hair should be gathered up and tied back
safely under a cap to prevent the risk of entanglement and severe injury.
l Do not allow anyone who is not directly involved in the work to come near the tractor; ensure that they remain at a safe dis-
tance.
l Keep well clear of moving parts; when the engine is running, some moving parts are not easily visible and therefore present a
risk of entanglement, even if protected by safety guards.
l Ensure that the area is well ventilated before starting the engine in order to avoid the formation of dangerous concentrations
of toxic gases; always connect suitable fume extraction equipment to the exhaust pipe.
l Do not start the engine with the safety guards removed under any circumstances; all repair and adjustment operations must
be carried out with the engine stopped.
l Do not top up fuel, oil or coolant levels when the engine is running.
l Never smoke and ensure there are no naked flames nearby when topping up fuel or oil. Always remove the battery from the
machine before recharging.
l Before checking or removing the battery, stop the engine and remove the key from the starter switch.
l Remove the battery and recharge in a well-ventilated area where the temperature exceeds 0°C.
l When checking or recharging the battery, do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity as the hydrogen gas given off by
the battery is highly explosive.
l The liquid (electrolyte) contained in the battery is very harmful if it comes into contact with the skin and the eyes; for this rea-
son, always wear gloves and safety goggles with side shields when checking or topping up the battery. Should any electrolyte
accidentally come into contact with your skin, wash the affected areas immediately with plenty of fresh water; if electrolyte
comes into contact with your clothing, this should be removed as soon as possible. In case of accidental ingestion of electro-
lyte, drink copious amounts of water, milk or vegetable oil and take antacids such as magnesium, bicarbonate, etc. and seek
medical attention immediately.
l Before working on the electrical systems, always disconnect the battery terminals.
0-2
Introduction
DANGER
Always disconnect the negative lead (--) before the positive lead (+); when re-connecting the battery on completion of
the work, first connect the positive terminal (+) and then the negative (--).
l Before carrying out any arc welding (permitted only on implements attached to the machine) always disconnect the battery
terminals and unplug all the connectors of the electronic control units and the alternator.
l When topping up lubricants, always wear suitable protective gloves.
l Do not wear clothing contaminated by engine or hydraulic oil; prolonged contact with the skin can be harmful and may cause
allergic reactions.
l Used engine oil and hydraulic oil must be disposed of properly; recover used lubricants and dispose of them in accordance
with the applicable regulations.
l Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic or pneumatic systems, discharge all residual pressure from the circuits.
l Before carrying out any work on the hydraulic system or engine, allow the oil and engine coolant to cool down.
l When removing and refitting certain assemblies, it will be necessary to support the tractor; use stands, jacks or blocks capable
of supporting the weight and arrange them in a triangular pattern to prevent the machine from overturning.
l To lift heavy components, use a hoist or crane. Check that wire ropes, chains or fibre slings are not worn and that hooks are
not damaged.
l Always use lifting equipment of suitable capacity for the weight of the components to be removed. Ensure lifting equipment is
attached correctly.
l When lifting or supporting an assembly or component, manoeuvre the parts slowly and carefully to avoid swinging movements
or collision with other components.
l Never work on components suspended from a hoist or crane.
l When removing the retaining bolts of a component that could fall, always leave two opposing bolts in place for safety; before
removing these last two bolts, attach the component to suitable lifting equipment or position support blocks.
l Any oil or fuel spilled during removal or dismantling operations should be cleaned up as soon as possible to prevent the risk
of slipping and fire.
l When refitting electrical wiring looms and wires, ensure that they are properly secured with their original retaining straps or
brackets to prevent the possibility of damage caused by vibration.
l Never insert your fingers or hands to check the alignment between fixing holes in components; always use a suitable dowel
of soft material.
l When refitting assemblies or components, always use the specified tightening torques; the tightening torques indicated in the
paragraphs regarding assembly/refitting operations have been determined through experimentation and must be scrupulously
adhered to.
l When refitting parts that are subject to vibration or that rotate at high speed, take particular care when carrying out final instal-
lation checks.
0.1.3 - Safety precautions for removal and refitting operations

When removing or refitting parts, always take the following safety precautions.
Precautions for removal operations
l Unless otherwise indicated, lower the lifting equipment until it the component or assembly rests on the ground.
l After disconnecting hydraulic and fuel system pipes, always fit plugs to the open ends of the pipes to prevent ingress of dirt.
l Before removing a cylinder, fully retract the piston and secure it in this position using a retaining strap.
l Use containers of sufficient capacity when draining oil, coolant or fuel.
l Before removing a part from the machine, check for alignment markings indicating the correct assembly position. If necessary,
make new markings to ensure correct assembly.
l When unplugging electrical connectors, always grip the connectors firmly to avoid pulling on the wires.
l Where necessary, label wires and pipes before removal to avoid confusion when reconnecting.
l Check the number and thickness of any shims removed and keep them together in a safe place.
l To lift the tractor or any of its main components, use lifting equipment of suitable capacity.
l When using eyebolts for lifting components, first check that they are not deformed or damaged; screw them fully home and
then turn the bolt so that the eye is aligned with the lifting hook.
l Before removing a part, clean the surrounding area and, after removing the part, cover it to protect it from dirt and dust.
0-3
Introduction
Precautions for refitting operations
l Tighten nuts and screws to the specified tightening torques.
l When refitting flexible pipes and cables, take care not to twist or tangle them.
l Always fit new seals, O-rings, split pins and safety stop rings; make sure that the ends of the cotter pins are separated and
bent back so that the pin cannot be withdrawn from the hole.
l Ensure that circlips are correctly installed in their seatings.
l When applying threadlocking compound, first clean the part to remove all oil and grease, then cover the thread evenly apply-
ing a few drops of the compound.
l When applying sealant, first clean the surface removing all traces of oil and grease and check for dirt or indentations, then
apply the sealant evenly making sure that it forms a continuous film around any fixing holes.
l Clean all parts, removing dirt, oxidisation, carbon deposits, burrs and indentations.
l Coat all moving parts with a thin film of engine oil.
l When reconnecting electrical wiring connectors, first remove all traces of oil, dust and water from the inside of the connector
and then push the two halves together firmly; connectors with locking tabs should be pushed together until the tab engages
the keeper.
l Bolt down flanged fittings evenly, tightening the screws gradually in a crosswise pattern.
Precautions to be taken on completion of removal/refitting operations
l If coolant has been drained from the engine, refit the drain plug and pour in new coolant to the correct level. Start the engine
to circulate the coolant and then check the level again and top up.
l After removing hydraulic components, top up the hydraulic oil to the specified level. Start the engine to circulate the oil in the
hydraulic circuits and then recheck the level and top up as necessary.
l After having removed a variable displacement pump, connect the drain pipe and fill the pump casing with oil through the filler
hole provided.
l Grease stub axle housings, cylinder pivot mountings and drive shafts thoroughly after assembly.
0.1.4 - Lifting instructions

DANGER
Components weighing over 25 kg or of significant size must be supported and removed using suitable lifting equip-
ment with wire rope or polyester slings.
Wire ropes - slings

l Use wire ropes or polyester slings of suitable capacity for the parts to be lifted, referring to the following tables:
Table 1
WIRE ROPES (standard twisted “S” or “Z” type) POLYESTER SLINGS (eye-and-eye - simple loop)
Ø rope mm Capacity (kg) Width (mm) Capacity (kg)
8 650 620 500 25 500 400 860 700

10 1000 1740 1420 50 1000 800 1730 1410
12 1450 2500 2050 62 1250 1000 2160 1760
14 2000 3460 2820 75 1400 1120 2420 1980
16 2600 4500 3670 100 2000 1600 3460 2820
18 3300 5710 4660 150 2500 2000 4330 3530
Lifting capacities are calculated with a safety coefficient.
l The lifting hook should be attached to the central part of the rope or sling; if the hook is attached near the ends of the rope/
sling, this could cause the load to slip during lifting.
l Never lift a heavy load using a single rope; always use two or more symmetrically arranged ropes.
0-4
Introduction
DANGER
Suspension of a load from a single rope could cause the load to start rotating and consequently cause the rope
strands to untwist or the load to slip; this could lead to serious injury.
l Never lift a heavy load when the two legs of the ropes form a wide angle. the permitted load (kg) decreases in inverse propor-
tion to the angle of suspension; the table below indicates how the permitted load varies according to the angle of suspension
for two Ø 10 mm ropes each with a load capacity of 1000 kg.
Fig. 1
0.1.5 - Tightening torques

Bolts and nuts
DANGER
The tightening torques for certain specific components and special tightening methods are indicated in the relative
assembly paragraphs.
The tightening torques indicated below refer to screws and nuts assembled without lubrication and, where applicable, with anaerobic
threadlocking compound. the values apply to tightening on steel or cast iron components; for soft materials such as aluminium, cop-
per, plastic, sheet metal or panels, the indicated tightening torques must be reduced by 50%.
Table 2
BOLT SIZE BOLT CLASS
8.8 10.9 12.9
Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft. Nm lb.ft.
M6x1 8.0 – 8.8 5.9 – 6.5 11.8 – 13.0 8.7 – 9.6 13.8 – 15.2 10.2 – 11.2
M8x1.25 19.4 – 21.4 14.3 – 15.8 28.5 – 31.5 21.0 – 23.2 33.3 – 36.9 24.5 – 27.2
M10x1.5 38.4 – 42.4 28.3 – 31.2 56.4 – 62.4 41.6 – 46.0 67.4 – 74.4 49.7 – 54.8
M12x1.75 66.5 – 73.5 49.0 – 54.2 96.9 – 107 71.4 – 78.9 115 – 128 84.8 – 94.3
M14x2 106 – 117 78.1 – 86.2 156 – 172 115.0 – 126.8 184 – 204 135.6 – 150.3
M16x2 164 – 182 120.9 – 134.1 241 – 267 117.6 – 196.8 282 – 312 207.8 – 229.9
M18x2.5 228 – 252 168.0 – 185.7 334 – 370 246.2 – 272.7 391 – 432 288.2 – 318.4
M20x2.5 321 – 355 236.6 – 261.6 472 – 522 347.9 – 384.7 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3
M22x2.5 441 – 487 325.0 – 358.9 647 – 715 476.8 – 527.0 751 – 830 553.5 – 611.7
M24x3 553 – 611 407.6 – 450.3 812 – 898 598.4 – 661.8 950 – 1050 700.2 – 773.9
M27x3 816 – 902 601.4 – 664.8 1198 – 1324 882.9 – 975.8 1419 – 1569 1045.8 – 1156.4
0-5
Introduction
FINE M8x1 20.8 – 23.0 15.3 – 17.0 30.6 – 33.8 22.6 – 24.9 35.8 – 39.6 26.4 – 29.2
M10x1.25 40.6 – 44.8 29.9 – 33.0 59.7 – 65.9 44.0 – 48.6 71.2 – 78.6 52.5 – 57.9
M12x1.25 72.2 – 79.8 53.2 – 58.8 106 – 118 78.1 – 87.0 126 – 140 92.9 – 103.2
M12x1.5 69.4 – 76.7 51.1 – 56.5 102 – 112 75.2 – 82.5 121 – 134 89.2 – 98.8
M14x1.5 114 – 126 84.0 – 92.9 168 – 186 123.8 – 137.1 199 – 220 146.7 – 162.1
M16x1.5 175 – 194 129 – 143 257 – 285 189.4 – 210.0 301 – 333 221.8 – 245.4
M18x1.5 256 – 282 188.7 – 207.8 375 – 415 276.4 – 305.9 439 – 485 323.5 – 357.4
M20x1.5 355 – 393 261.6 – 289.6 523 – 578 385.5 – 426.0 611 – 676 450.3 – 498.2
M22x1.5 482 – 532 355.2 – 392.1 708 – 782 521.8 – 576.3 821 – 908 605.1 – 669.2
M24x2 602 – 666 443.7 – 490.8 884 – 978 651.5 – 720.8 1035 – 1143 762.8 – 842.4
Fittings
The tightening torques indicated below refer to fittings assembled on any material.
Table 3
MET- Straight end fittings T” end fittings L” end fittings 90° end fittings
RIC
Thread size Wrench Torque Nm Wrench Torque Nm Wrench Torque Nm Wrench Torque Nm
±10% ±10% ±10% ±10%
M10x1.25 17 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
19 14 17 14 17 14
M12x1.25 19 30 17 30 17 30 17 30
M14x1.5 19 40 19 40 19 40 19 40
M16x1.5 22 48 22 48 22 48 22 48
M18x1.5 24 58 24 58 24 58 24 58
M20x1.5 27 65 27 65 27 65 27 65
M22x1.5 30 73 30 73 30 73 30 73
M26x1.5 36 95 36 95 36 95 36 95
M27x2 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
M33x2 41 160 41 160 41 160 41 160
M42x2 50 250 50 250 50 250 50 250
M48x2 60 305 60 305 60 305 60 305
G 1/8” 17 13 14 13 14 13 14 13
19 13
G 1/4” 19 37 19 37 19 37 19 37
22 37
G 3/8” 24 53 24 53 24 53 24 53
G 1/2” 27 73 27 73 27 73 27 73
30 73
G 3/4” 36 100 36 100 36 100 36 100
G 1” 41 160 41 160 41 160 41 160
46 160
G 1 1/4” 50 250 50 250 50 250 50 250
G 1 1/2” 60 305 60 305 60 305 60 305
Plugs
Table 4
Hex plugs Threaded plugs with hex socket head
Thread size Wrench Torque Nm ±10% Wrench Torque Nm ±10%
0-6
Introduction
MET- M6x1 10 10 – –
RIC M8x1 13 12 – –
M10x1 13 14 5 14
M10x1.25 13 14 – –
M10x1.5 13 14 – –
M12x1.25 17 30 – –
M12x1.5 17 30 6 30
M12x1.75 17 30 – –
M14x1.5 19 40 6 40
M14x2 19 40 – –
M16x1.5 22 48 8 48
M16x2 22 48 – –
M18x1.5 17 58 10 58
M18x2.5 17 58 – –
M20x1.5 19 65 – –
M22x1.5 – – 12 73
M24x1.5 22 80 12 80
M24x2 22 80 – –
M27x2 22 100 – –
M28x1.5 – – 17 110
M30x1.5 22 130 – –
M32x1.5 – – 19 150
M35x1.5 – – 22 180
M40x1.5 – – 24 225
G 1/8” 14 13 – –
G 1/4” 19 37 – –
G 3/8” 22 53 – –
G 1/2” 19 73 – –
G 5/8” 22 85 – –
G 3/4” 22 100 – –
G 1” 22 160 – –
Fittings with seal at 37°
Table 5
Thread size Wrench Torque Nm ±10%

7/16” - 20 14 13
1/2” - 20 16 19
9/16” - 18 17 28
3/4” - 16 22 47
7/8” - 14 27 76
1 1/16” - 12 32 110
36 110
1 3/16” - 12 36 138
1 5/16” - 12 38 155
1 5/8” - 12 50 215
1 7/8” - 12 60 290
2 1/2” - 12 75 345
0-7
Introduction
Fittings for pipes with banjo union
These tightening torques refer to tightening the fitting with new copper sealing washers.
Table 6
Unions for one-way fittings Unions for three-way fittings Unions for four-way fittings
Thread size Wrench Torque Nm Wrench Torque Nm Wrench Torque Nm

±10% ±10% ±10%
M8x1 – 12 14 – –
M8x1.25 13 14
M10x1 – – 14 20 14 20
M10x1.25 13 20 – – – –
M12x1.25 17 30 – – – –
M12x1.5 – – 17 30 17 30
M14x1.5 19 40 19 40 19 40
M16x1.5 22 48 22 48 22 48
M18x1.5 22 58 24 58 24 58
M20x1.5 27 65 – – – –
M22x1.5 – – 27 73 27 73
M24x1.5 32 80 – – – –
M26x1.5 – – 32 95 32 95
M28x1.5 36 110 – – – –
M30x1.5 – – 36 130 36 130
M35x2 41 180 – – – –
M38x1.5 – – 46 200 46 200
M42x2 50 250 – – – –
M45x1.5 – – 55 280 55 280
M50x2 60 320 – – – –
M52x1.5 – – 60 320 60 320
M65x2 – – 75 450 75 450
0.1.6 - Threadlockers, adhesives, sealants and lubricants

Table 7
FUNCTION NAME DESCRIPTION
THREADLOCKER Loctite 222 Colour: opaque fluorescent Anaerobic product suitable for low-strength locking of retaining,
purple adjustment and precision fasteners. All traces of lubricant must
first be removed using the specific activator.
Loctite 242 Colour: fluorescent blue Anaerobic product that prevents loosening of all types of nut and
bolt; used in place of conventional mechanical locking systems.
Used for medium-strength locking. All traces of lubricant must
Loctite 243 Colour: opaque fluorescent Alternative product to 242 ; oil tolerant and so can be used on
blue lightly lubricated surfaces without prior use of activator.
Loctite 270 Colour: fluorescent green Anaerobic product for high-strength locking of bolts and studs
that do not normally require disassembly. Parts must be heated
to approximately 80°C for removal. All traces of lubricant must
0-8
Introduction
DEGREASERS Loctite 703 Product used for degreasing and cleaning parts prior to applica-
AND ACTIVATORS tion of Loctite anaerobic products; after drying, promotes uniform
curing of threadlockers
Loctite 747 Product used specifically for treatment of passive metals prior to
use of slow-cure anaerobic threadlockers (series 5 and 6). Can
also be used to increase cure speed at low temperatures or in ap-
plications where there are large gaps between the parts.
SEALANTS (for Loctite 510 Colour: red Super-rapid anaerobic sealant for sealing between rigid metal
faces and fittings) faces; can eliminate the need for conventional gaskets as it can
fill gaps up to 0.4 mm. Does not shrink and therefore fasteners
do not need re-tightening to specified torque values after curing.
Loctite 542 Colour: Brown Anaerobic product used as a liquid sealant for threaded fittings
up to 3/4” gas; rapid curing and parts may be disassembled with
ordinary tools.
Loctite 554 Colour: red Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing cool-
ing and industrial fluid circuits. Slow curing, also suitable for use
on non-ferrous alloys
Loctite 572 Colour: White Anaerobic sealant and locking compound used for sealing pipes
and threaded fittings up to 2” in diameter. Very slow curing on
most metal surfaces.
Loctite 573 Colour: green Thixotropic anaerobic product used for sealing joints between
metal faces. Ensures total contact between surfaces with maxi-
mum tolerance of 0.10 mm, filling microvoids caused by flatness
errors. Very slow curing on most metal surfaces and requires
prior application of an activator.
Loctite 576 Colour: brown Anaerobic product used as a liquid thread sealant for large diam-
eter threaded fittings (up to 2”). Very slow curing; also suitable for
non-ferrous alloys and parts requiring subsequent removal.
INSTANT ADHE- Loctite 401 Colour: colourless Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a wide range
SIVES of acidic and porous materials including, ceramics, wood, rub-
ber and plastic (excluding polyolefin). Curing takes place in a few
seconds as an effect of the condensed humidity present on the
surfaces to be bonded, and is independent of environmental con-
ditions.
Loctite 495 Colour: colourless Cyanoacrylate instant adhesive suitable for bonding a rubber,
plastics and metal in any combination.
SEALANTS SILI- Silastic 738 (Dow Corning) Colour: milky One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, non dhrinking, ready for use.
CONE white Cures on exposure to air to form a rubbery solid and obviates the
need for conventional seals on flexible joints, filling gaps greater
than 1 mm.
Dirko Transparent Colour: transparent One-part silicone adhesive/sealant, shrinking, ready for use.
Cures rapidly when exposed to humidity in the air to form a rub-
bery solid; resistant to high temperatures.
SEALANTS POL- Betaseal HV3 (Gurit Essex) Colour: black Polyurethane prepolymer based adhesive/sealant, high viscosity,
URETHANE suitable for permanent, high-strength flexible bonding. Slow cur-
ing, used for bonding glass to frames, wire mesh, metal plates,
etc. surfaces must be degreased with primer.
0-9
Introduction
RETAINING COM- Loctite 601 Colour: fluorescent green Anaerobic, fast-curing, high-strength adhesive. Suitable for seal-
POUNDS ing and retaining cylindrical assemblies with gap clearances of
up to 0.10 mm; used for retaining rotors, gears, bearings, pulleys,
bushes etc. on shafts.
Loctite 638 Colour: fluorescent green Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, very high strength;
suitable for bonding cylindrical parts in non-ferrous alloys.
Loctite 648 Colour: fluorescent green Anaerobic structural adhesive, quick-curing, high-strength; suit-
able for bonding cylindrical parts, permanent retention of thread-
ed parts, sealing of refrigeration systems, retention of bearings,
etc. Alternative to Loctite 601 in high-temperature applications.
Loctite 986/AVX Colour: Fluorescent red Anaerobic sealant/retaining compound for metal cylindrical parts.
Slow-curing, high-strength, heat-resistant and resistant to chemi-
cal attack. Parts must be first treated with an activator.
LUBRICANTS Grease (NLGI 2 EP ASTM D217: 265/295) Multi-purpose Lithium grease used for lubrication of seals, to pre-
vent oxidization and to facilitate assembly operations.
Molikote (Dow Corning) Anti-wear compound, contains Molybdenum bisulphate, used
neat or diluted with engine oil for assembly of main engine bear-
ings.
Vaseline Neutral pH compound used to protect battery terminals against
oxidization and corrosion.
Engine oil 10W - 30 Used to dilute Molikote anti-wear lubricant during assembly of
main engine bearings.
0.1.7 - Conversion factors

Conversion from British to metric units
Table 8
inch x 25.40 = mm
foot x 0.305 =m
yard x 0.914
Eng.miles x 1.609 = km
Sq.in. x 6.452 = cm²
Sq.ft. x 0.093 = m²
Sq.yard x 0.835
Cu.in. x 16.39 = cm³
Cu.ft. x 28.36 = m³
Cu.yard x 0.763
Imp.gall. x 4.547 = litres
US gall. x 3.785
pint x 0.568
quart x 1.137
US.gpm x 3.785 = ,/min
oz. x 0.028 = kg
lb. x 0.454
lb.ft. x 0.139 = kgm
lb.in. x 17.87 = kg/m
psi x 0.070 = kg/cm²
lb./Imp.gall x 0.100 = kg/,
lb./US.gall x 0.120
lb./cu.ft. x 16.21 = kg/m³
lb.ft. x 1.356 = Nm
psi x 1.379 = bar
Conversion from metric to British units
Table 9
mm x 0.0394 = inch
m x 3.281 = foot
m x 1,094 = yard
km x 0.622 = Brit.miles
cm² x 0.155 = Sq.in.
m² x 10.77 = Sq.ft.
0-10
Introduction
m² x 1.197 = Sq.yard
cm³ x 0.061 = Cu.in.
m³ x 0.035 = Cu.ft
m³ x 1.311 = Cu.yard
litres x 0.220 = Imp.gall.
litres x 0.264 = US gall.
litres x 1.762 = pint
litres x 0.880 = quart
,/min x 0.2642 = US.gpm
kg x 35.25 = oz.
kg x 2.203 = lb.
kgm x 7.233 = lb.ft.
kg/m x 0.056 = lb.in.
kg/cm² x 14.22 = psi
kg/, x 10.00 = lb./Imp.gal.
kg/, x 8.333 = lb./US.gal.
kg/m³ x 0.062 = lb./cu.ft.
Nm x 0.737 = lb.ft.
bar x 14.503 = psi
0-11
Introduction
PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK
0-12
10 - Technical
characteristics
10-1
Technical characteristics
10.1 - Engine
10.1.1 - Technical data
Table 10
Technical data BF4M 2012 BF4M 2012 C BF6M 2012 C
Engine weight acc. to DIN 380 380 495
70020 - A approx. kg w/o cooling system w/o cooling system w/o cooling system
Engine swept volume cm cubic 4.040 4.040 6.060
Bore mm 101 101 101
Stroke mm 126 126 126
Direction of rotation When facing flywheel counter- When facing flywheel counter- When facing flywheel counter-
clockwise clockwise clockwise
Rated speed rpm 2500 2500 2500
Minimum idling speed rpm 800 800 800
Working cycle Four-stroke diesel Four-stroke diesel Four-stroke diesel
Combustion principle Direct Injection Direct Injection Direct Injection
Compression ratio 19 19 19
Compression pressure bar 30 - 38 30 - 38 30 - 38
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2 1-5-3-6-2-4
Dimension of engine with stan-
dard adapter housing
Max. lenght mm 910 921 1038
Max. widht mm 643 643 628
Max. height mm 771 833 908
Valve timing without tappet and
valve clearance
Inlet opens before TDC degrees 46 46 46
Inlet closes after BDC degrees 56 56 56
Exhaust opens before BDC de- 96 96 96
grees
Exhaust closes after TDC de- 50 50 50
grees
Pressurestat bar 4 +/- 0.4 4 +/- 0.4 4 +/- 0.4
Lube oil pressure at low idling. 0.8 0.8 0.8
Temperature approx. 120 °C oil
SAE 15W/40 min. bar
Crankshaft position 1
Turn engine until valves of cylinder No. 1 overlap.
Not ready for adjustment.
10-2
Fig. 2
Crankshaft position 2:
Turn engine further by one complete revolution (360°).
Ready for adjustment.
Fig. 2
10-3
10.2 - Transmission
10.2.1 - Transmission (Agrofarm 85)
Introduction
This tractor series can be supplied in a version with 5 synchronised speeds and 4 ranges (20 FWD + 20 REV).
The rear transmission casing also houses the drive train for the rear P.T.O., which is supplied in the following versions which is sup-
plied in the following versions:
1. 2-speed P.T.O. (540 - 1000)
2. 4-speed P.T.O. (540 - 540E - 1000 - 1000E)
3. Groundspeed P.T.O. supplied with the versions of points 1 and 2.
All P.T.O. versions are mechanical with unsychronised gears and electrohydraulic engagement control, while the Groundspeed P.T.O.
is engaged by means of a mechanical control.
Main assemblies
Fig. 3 - Main assemblies

1. Clutch housing
2. Hi-Lo unit
3. Gearbox, reverse shuttle, underdrive and ranges assembly
4. Differential unit
5. Rear P.T.O.
Description
Transmission is dirven by the combustion engine and the gearbox (4) transmits drive to the bevel gear pair (5) via the clutch assembly
(1), the gear and shuttle assembly (2), and the Hi-Lo unit (3). Drive is then transmitted to final drive reduction units (6) and then to
wheels (7). Between bevel gear pair (5) and final drive reduction unit (6) is installed braking device (8) that acts as the main service
brake, while the parking brake is fitted on the 4WD output shaft (9).
10-4
Fig. 4 - Power flow diagram

Clutch housing
10-5
Fig. 5 - Clutch housing

1. Rear P.T.O. drive shaft
2. Steering wheel
3. 12” main clutch disk
4. Main clutch thrust bearing
5. Main clutch sleeve
6. Sleeve support
7. Gearbox drive shaft
8. Main clutch lever
9. Reaction pin
10. Clutch piston
10-6
Shuttle gearbox assembly
Fig. 6 - Shuttle gearbox assembly

1. Cover
2. Gearbox support
3. Reverse driving gear
4. Shuttle synchronizer
5. Forward driving gear
6. Gearbox input shaft
7. Main shaft
8. Secondary shaft
9. 5th speed driven gear
10. 4th-5th speed synchronizer
12. 3rd speed driven gear
13. 2nd-3rd speed synchronizer
14. 2nd speed driven gear
15. 1st speed driven gear
16. 1st speed synchronizer
10-7
Bevel pinion and range gearbox assembly
2 3 4
1
V L
9
N SR
D0036342
8 7 6 5
Fig. 7 - Bevel pinion and range gearbox assembly

1. High-Low range synchronizer
2. Lo-creeper range idler gear
3. 4WD drive gear
4. Pinion
5. 4WD driven gear
6. Creeper range driven gear
7. Medium or creeper range selector
8. Medium-low range idler gear
9. 4WD shaft
10-8
Four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly
Fig. 8 - Four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

1. Sleeve
2. 4WD output hub
3. 4WD selector fork
4. Parking brake cam
5. Parking brake lever
6. 4WD engagement lever
7. Friction shoe
8. Steel disc
9. Spacer
Differential unit
1 2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3
10
D0025200
8 7 6 5
Fig. 9 - Differential unit
10-9
1. Pinion
2. Pinion bearing
3. Differential carrier
4. Differential cage
5. Differential lock sleeve
6. Side gear
7. Planet pinion
9. Side gear
10. Differential crown wheel
11. Spring
12. Spacer
13. Spring pin
14. Rod
15. Differential lock fork
16. Spring
17. Piston
Brakes and rear axle assembly
Fig. 10 - Brakes and rear axle assembly

1. Half-shaft
2. Dust seal
3. Oil seal
4. Bearing
5. Bearing
6. Ring gear
7. Pin (Qty. 3)
8. Brake cylinder
9. Piston
10. Friction disc
11. Half-shaft
12. Planet pinion
13. Planet carrier
10-10
10.2.2 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100)
Introduction
This tractor series can be supplied in a version with 5 synchronised speeds and 4 ranges (20 FWD + 20 REV).
The rear transmission casing also houses the drive train for the rear P.T.O., which is supplied in the following versions which is sup-
plied in the following versions:
1. 2-speed P.T.O. (540 - 1000)
2. 4-speed P.T.O. (540 - 540E - 1000 - 1000E)
3. Groundspeed P.T.O. supplied with the versions of points 1 and 2.
All P.T.O. versions are mechanical with unsychronised gears and electrohydraulic engagement control, while the Groundspeed P.T.O.
is engaged by means of a mechanical control.
Main assemblies

1. Clutch housing
2. Hi-Lo unit
3. Gearbox, reverse shuttle, underdrive and ranges assembly
5. Rear P.T.O.
Description
Transmission is dirven by the combustion engine and the gearbox (4) transmits drive to the bevel gear pair (5) via the clutch assembly
(1), the gear and shuttle assembly (2), and the Hi-Lo unit (3). Drive is then transmitted to final drive reduction units (6) and then to
wheels (7). Between bevel gear pair (5) and final drive reduction unit (6) is installed braking device (8) that acts as the main service
brake, while the parking brake is fitted on the 4WD output shaft (9).
10-11

Clutch housing
10-12
Fig. 13 - Clutch housing

2. Steering wheel
3. 13” transmission clutch disk
4. Main clutch thrust bearing
5. Main clutch sleeve
6. Sleeve support
7. Gearbox drive shaft
8. Main clutch lever
9. Reaction pin
10. Clutch piston
10-13
Shuttle gearbox assembly
Fig. 14 - Shuttle gearbox assembly

1. Cover
2. Gearbox support
4. Shuttle synchronizer
7. Main shaft
8. Secondary shaft
10-14

1. High-Low range synchronizer
3. 4WD drive gear
4. Pinion
5. 4WD driven gear
9. 4WD shaft
10-15
Four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly
A
2
4 9 7 8 7 6 5
D0036350
A -A
Fig. 16 - Four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

1. Sleeve
2. 4WD output hub
7. Friction shoe
8. Steel disc
9. Spacer
Differential unit
10-16
1 2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3
10
D0047810
8 7 6 5

1. Pinion
2. Pinion bearing
6. Side gear
7. Planet pinion
9. Side gear
11. Spring
12. Spacer
13. Spring pin
14. Rod
16. Spring
17. Piston
10-17
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5
10
12
11
D0047820

1. Half-shaft
2. Dust seal
3. Bearing
4. Oil seal
5. Bearing
6. Ring gear
7. Brake cylinder
8. Piston
9. Friction disc
10. Half-shaft
11. Planet pinion
12. Planet carrier
10.2.3 - Transmission (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

Introduction
l This tractor series can be supplied in a version with 5 synchronised speeds and 4 ranges (20 FWD + 20 REV).
l The rear transmission casing also houses the drive train for the rear P.T.O., which is supplied in the following versions which
is supplied in the following versions:
m 2-speed P.T.O. (540 - 1000)
m 4-speed P.T.O. (540 - 540E - 1000 - 1000E)
m Groundspeed P.T.O. supplied with the versions of points a and b.
l All P.T.O. versions are mechanical with unsychronised gears and electrohydraulic engagement control, while the Ground-
speed P.T.O. is engaged by means of a mechanical control.
10-18
1 2 3 4 5
D0040540

Key
1. Shuttle unit
2. Hi-Lo unit
3. Main gearbox and range gearbox assembly
5. Rear P.T.O.
Description
l The transmission receives drive from the combustion engine and transmits it through the shuttle unit (1), gearbox (2), Hi-Lo
unit (3) and range gearbox (4) to bevel gear pair (5). Drive is then transmitted to final drive reduction units (6) and then to
wheels (7). Between bevel gear pair (5) and final drive reduction unit (6) is installed braking device (8) that acts as the main
service brake, while the parking brake is fitted on the 4WD output shaft (9).
10-19
AV
IN
E V L 5
6
3
N SR
7
2 9
4 D0040550
10-20
Shuttle unit
Fig. 21 - Shuttle unit

Key
1. Steering wheel
2. Torsional spring plate
3. Shuttle speed sensor
4. Support
5. Reverse gear drive shaft
6. Forward gear drive shaft
8. Reverse drive piston
10-21
9. Reverse drive clutch
10. Forward drive clutch
11. Flange
12. Forward drive piston
13. Pulse wheel
Hi-Lo unit
Fig. 22 - Hi-Lo unit

Key
2. Cover
3. Hi speed piston return spring
4. Hi speed clutch cylinder
5. Planet pinion
6. Secondary shaft
7. Hi-Lo unit output shaft
8. Planet carrier
9. Hi speed clutch
10. Hi speed clutch
11. Lo speed clutch
12. Lo speed piston
13. Lo speed engagement springs
14. Bearing
15. Nut
16. Cover
10-22
Gearbox assembly
Fig. 23 - Gearbox assembly

Key
1. Reverse gear input shaft
2. Cover
4. Gearbox support
8. Main shaft
10-23
9. Secondary shaft
Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo
Fig. 24 - Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo
10-24
Key
3. Gearbox support
7. Main shaft
9. Gearbox output shaft
10-25

Key
1. Hi-Lo range engagement
3. 4WD drive gear
4. Pinion
5. 4WD driven gear
9. 4WD shaft
10-26
Mechanical four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly
Fig. 26 - Mechanical four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Key
1. Sleeve
2. 4WD output hub
7. Friction shoe
8. Steel disc
9. Spacer
Electrohydraulic four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly
Fig. 27 - Electrohydraulic four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Key
1. 4WD output hub
2. 4WD engagement sleeve
3. 4WD engagement spring
10-27

6. Friction shoe
7. Steel disc
8. Spacer
Differential unit

Key
1. Pinion
2. Pinion bearing
10-28

6. Side gear
7. Planet pinion
9. Side gear
11. Spring
12. Spacer
13. Spring pin
14. Rod
16. Spring
17. Piston
10-29

Key
1. Half-shaft
2. Dust seal
3. Bearing
4. Oil seal
5. Bearing
6. Ring gear
7. Pin (Qty. 3)
8. Brake cylinder
9. Piston
10. Friction disc
11. Half-shaft
12. Planet pinion
13. Planet carrier
10.2.4 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)

Introduction
l This tractor series can be supplied in a version with 5 synchronised speeds and 4 ranges (20 FWD + 20 REV).
l The rear transmission casing also houses the drive train for the rear PTO, which is supplied in the following versions:
m 2-speed P.T.O. (540 - 1000)
m 4-speed P.T.O. (540 - 540E - 1000 - 1000E)
m Groundspeed P.T.O. supplied with versions in points a and b.
l All the P.T.O. versions are mechanical with non-synchronized gears and electrohydraulic engagement control while the
Groundspeed P.T.O. is operated by a mechanical control.
10-30
1 2 3 4 5
D0040540

Main assemblies
1. Shuttle unit
2. Hi-Lo unit
3. Main gearbox and range gearbox assembly
5. PTO. engage/disengage control
Description
l The transmission receives drive from the engine and transmits it through the shuttle unit (1), gearbox (2), Hi-Lo unit (3) and
range gearbox (4) to bevel gear pair (5). Drive is then transmitted to final drive reduction units (6) and then to wheels (7). Be-
tween bevel gear pair (5) and final drive reduction unit (6) is installed braking device (8) that acts as the main service brake,
while the parking brake is fitted on the 4WD output shaft (9).
10-31
AV
IN
E V L 5
6
3
N SR
7
2 9
4 D0040550
10-32
Shuttle unit
6
7
13
D0040570
1 2 12 11 10 9 4 8
Fig. 30 - Shuttle unit

Key
1. Steering wheel
2. Torsional spring plate
3. Shuttle speed sensor
4. Support
5. Reverse gear drive shaft
7. P.T.O. control shaft engage/disengage control
8. Reverse drive piston
10-33
9. Reverse drive clutch
10. Forward drive clutch
11. Flange
12. Forward drive piston
13. Pulse wheel
Hi-Lo unit
Fig. 31 - Hi-Lo unit

Key
2. Cover
3. Hi speed piston return spring
4. Hi speed clutch cylinder
5. Planet pinion
6. Secondary shaft
8. Planet carrier
9. Hi speed clutch
10. Hi speed clutch
11. Lo speed clutch
12. Lo speed piston
13. Lo speed engagement springs
14. Bearing
15. Nut
16. Cover
10-34
Gearbox assembly
5 6
1 2 3
D0040580
14 13 12 11 10
17
16 15

Key
2. Cover
4. Gearbox support
7. PTO control shaft. engage/disengage control
8. Main shaft
9. Secondary shaft
10-35
4
5 6
1 2 3
D0040580
14 13 12 11 10
17
16 15

10-36
Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo

Key
3. Gearbox support
6. PTO control shaft. engage/disengage control
7. Main shaft
9. Gearbox output shaft
10-37
1 2 3 4
V L
9
M SR
D0040620
8 7 6 5

Key
1. Hi-Lo range engagement
3. 4WD drive gear
4. Pinion
5. 4WD driven gear
9. 4WD shaft
10-38
Mechanical four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly
A
2
4 9 7 8 7 6 5
D0036350
A -A
Fig. 35 - Mechanical four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Key
1. Sleeve
2. 4WD output hub
7. Friction shoe
8. Steel disc
9. Spacer
10-39
Electrohydraulic four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly
2 3
4 8 7 6 7 5
D0040630
A -A

Key
1. 4WD output hub
2. 4WD engagement sleeve
3. 4WD engagement spring
6. Friction shoe
7. Steel disc
8. Spacer
10-40
Differential unit
1 2
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3
10
D0047810
8 7 6 5

Key
1. Pinion
2. Pinion bearing
6. Side gear
7. Planet pinion
9. Side gear
11. Spring
12. Spacer
13. Spring pin
14. Rod
16. Spring
17. Piston
10-41
6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5
10
12
11
D0025210

Key
1. Half-shaft
2. Dust seal
3. Bearing
4. Oil seal
5. Bearing
6. Ring gear
7. Brake cylinder
8. Piston
9. Friction disc
10. Half-shaft
11. Planet pinion
12. Planet carrier
10.2.5 - Rear P.T.O.

Description
The rear power take-off allows drive to be transmitted to an implement at a predetermined rotation speed. Rotary drive is taken
directly from the engine and the operator controls engagement of the P.T.O. via the pushbutton on the right-hand side of the driving
position. Engagement of the rear P.T.O. , for the speeds 540, 540 ECO, 1000 and 1000 ECO, is controlled by the P.T.O. clutch unit
and is electro-hydraulic, while it is via a mechanical control for the Groundspeed P.T.O. (for tractors fitted with this option). The P.T.O.
speed is a selected by mechanical controls.
The rear P.T.O. is supplied in 2 versions with two or four rotation speeds:
l 540-1000 P.T.O.
l P.T.O. 540 - 540 ECO - 1000 and 1000 ECO
and a further shaft can be fitted for the groundspeed P.T.O. The characteristic of the groundspeed velocity is that of being directly
proportional to the rotation speed of the rear wheels according to a fixed ratio of the P.T.O. shaft revolutions and the wheel revolutions.
10-42
Power flow diagram
Fig. 39 - 2-speed P.T.O.
Fig. 40 - 4-speed P.T.O.
10-43
P.T.O. clutch assembly.
Fig. 41 - P.T.O. clutch assembly.

1. Hub
2. P.T.O. clutch.
3. Clutch housing
4. Body
5. P.T.O. brake clutch piston.
6. P.T.O. brake clutch.
7. P.T.O. engagement piston.
8. Piston return spring
9. Accumulator cylinder
10. Accumulator spring
11. Accumulator piston
12. Pressure relief valve
10-44
Operation
The following text describes what happens when the P.T.O. is engaged.
l When the operator activates P.T.O. engagement, solenoid valve (1) is energized and the pressurized oil from regulator valve
(2) flows in line A.
l The pressurized oil from regulator valve (2) is thus introduced into chamber b of accumulator (3).
l As the pressure in chamber b, increases, the force exerted by the pressure on piston (4) compresses springs (5). The in-
creased stroke of piston (4) corresponds to an increase in the pressure in chamber b and chamber c of piston (6). For this
reason, the clutch engagement pressure is modulated within the range of 2 to 12 bar. Simultaneously the oil in passage d is
returned to tank and the pressure acting on piston (7) decreases, thereby allowing the hub to rotate (8).
Fig. 42 - P.T.O. engagement.

The following text describes what happens when the P.T.O. is disengaged.
l The P.T.O. is disengaged by de-energizing solenoid valve (1).
l The pressurised oil in line a is sent to the return circuit through solenoid valve (1).
l Because of the decrease in pressure in passage a, piston (4) is pushed to the right by springs (5) and force of spring (9)
pushes piston (6) to the right, bringing it to the rest position. At the same time, the pressurised oil from regulator valve (2) flows
into passage d. For this reason, the piston (7) is moved to the right, thus activating the P.T.O. brake and stopping rotation of
hub (8).
10-45
Fig. 43 - P.T.O. disengagement.
10-46
10.2.6 - 2 and 4-speed PTO and Groundspeed PTO
2-speed PTO and Groundspeed PTO
Fig. 44 - 2-speed PTO and Groundspeed PTO

1. Drive shaft
2. Bearing
3. 1000 PTO driving gear
4. Bearing
5. Cover
6. Bearing
7. 540-1000 PTO output shaft
8. Groundspeed PTO output shaft
9. Bearing
10. 540 PTO driven gear
12. Bearing
13. Selector sleeve
14. Fork
15. Speed selector lever
16. Shoe
10-47
4-speed PTO and Groundspeed PTO
Fig. 45 - 4-speed PTO and Groundspeed PTO

1. PTO input shaft
2. Normal/ECO PTO selector sleeve
3. ECO PTO drive shaft
4. Flange
5. Normal PTO driving gear
6. ECO PTO driving gear
7. Bearing
8. Cover
9. Bearing
10. 540-1000 PTO. output shaft
11. Groundspeed PTO output shaft
12. Bearing
13. ECO -1000 PTO driven gear
14. 540/1000 PTO selector sleeve
16. Bearing
17. Fork
18. Shoe
19. Normal/ECO PTO selector lever
20. 540/1000 PTO selector lever
21. Shoe
22. Fork
10-48
10.3 - Front axle
10.3.1 - Front axle
X–2
1769
D0024080
Fig. 46 - Steering angle “A”

l Single-acting steering cylinders version: 50°
l Double-acting steering cylinders version: 55°
10-49
Final drive
5
4 6
3 7
2
8
1
9
22
21
20
19 10
11
12
18 17 16 15 14 13
D0036570
Fig. 47 - Final drive

1. Planet carrier
2. Oil seal
3. Ring gear
4. Brake disc
5. Steering knuckle housing
6. Upper kingpin
7. Gasket
8. Top bearing
9. Axle shaft
10. Needle roller bearings
11. Oil seal
12. Lower bearing
13. Gasket
14. Lower kingpin
15. Brake piston
16. Steel disc
17. Friction disc
18. Bearing
19. Cover
20. Protective disc
10-50
5
4 6
3 7
2
8
1
9
22
21
20
19 10
11
12
18 17 16 15 14 13
D0036570
Fig. 47 - Final drive

21. Planet gear
22. Planet shaft
10-51
Pinion, differential and differential lock
1 2 3 4
18
5
19
7 6
23
22
21
24
20
17 8
16 3 9
D0025260
15 10
11
14
12
13
Fig. 48 - Pinion, differential and differential lock

1. Axle housing
3. Planet gear
4. Sun gear
6. Differential lock device
7. Axle shaft
8. Bearing
9. Bearing
10. Spacer
11. Bearing
12. Oil seal
13. Oil seal
14. Oil seal
15. Nut
16. Pinion
18. Bearing
19. Sun gear
21. Piston
22. Shock absorber spring
23. Return spring
24. Differential lock engagement lever
10-52
1 2 3 4
18
5
19
7 6
23
22
21
24
20
17 8
16 3 9
D0025260
15 10
11
14
12
13
Fig. 48 - Pinion, differential and differential lock

25. Shoe
10-53
10.4 - Hydraulic system
10.4.1 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 85)
Description
The tractors in this series are equipped with a hydraulic system that comprises two main circuits:
l Steering and services circuit.
l Lift and remote control valve circuit.
Each of these circuits is supplied with oil by a hydraulic gear pump that converts the power supplied by the engine into hydraulic
energy. The oil flow generated by the pumps is sent to the devices that control the distribution of the oil pressure to the actuators,
where the hydraulic energy is converted into mechanical energy.
7 8 9 10 11 12
A 13
B
6
14
5
15
2 3 16
4 17
D0025320
Fig. 49 - Hydraulic system diagram

1. Suction line filter
2. Steering circuit gear pump
3. Lift gear pump
5. Power steering valve
6. Steering cylinders
7. HML solenoid valve assembly
8. Hydraulic reverse shuttle solenoid valves assembly
9. 4WD engagement device
10. Differential lock engagement device
11. Rear P.T.O. clutch.
12. Services solenoid valve assembly
13. Remote control valve
14. Hydraulic lift control valve
10-54
7 8 9 10 11 12
A 13
B
6
14
5
15
2 3 16
4 17
D0025320

15. Lift cylinder
16. HML and secondary shaft assembly lubrication
17. Ejector
10-55
Hydraulic system diagrams
Hydraulic steering and services diagram
Fig. 50 - Hydraulic steering and services diagram

1. Suction line filter (25 μm)
2. Hydraulic pump (14 cc/rev)
3. Resonator
6. Oil cooler
7. Rear P.T.O. clutch control
10-56
9. Pressure holding valves
10. Filter
Hydraulic lift and remote control valve circuit diagram - basic version
Fig. 51 - Hydraulic lift and auxiliary services directional control valve circuit diagram (basic version)
2. Hydraulic pump (22.5 cc/rev)
3. Free drain
4. 4-way remote control valve
6. Lift cylinders
10-57
Hydraulic lift and remote control valve circuit diagram - full optional version
Fig. 52 - Hydraulic lift and remote control valve circuit diagram - full optional version
3. Hydraulic trailer braking valve
4. 6-way auxiliary services control valve
5. Free drain
6. Front lift
7. Damper valve assembly
8. Rate of drop control valve
9. Electronic lift directional control valve
10. Lift cylinders
10-58
10.4.2 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 100)
Description
l Steering and services circuit.
l Lift and remote control valve circuit.
7 8 9 10 11 12
A 13
B
6
14
5
15
2 3 16
4 17
D0025320
Fig. 53 - Hydraulic system

3. Lift gear pump
7. HML solenoid valve assembly
11. Rear P.T.O. clutch.
15. Lift cylinder
16. HML and secondary shaft assembly lubrication
17. Ejector
10-59
Hydraulic system diagrams
Hydraulic steering and services diagram

3. Resonator
6. Oil cooler
7. Pressure holding valve
8. Hi-Lo unit engage control solenoid valve
10-60
10. Filter
Fig. 55 - Hydraulic lift and remote control valve circuit diagram - basic version
3. Free drain
6. Lift cylinders
10-61
4. Free drain
6. Front lift
9. Lift cylinders
10-62
10.4.3 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

Description
1. Steering and services circuit.
2. Lift and remote control valve circuit.
7 8 9 10 11 12
14
A B
15
5
16
4
13
2
19 17
1
18
D0040650

Key
3. Resonator
6. Pressure line filter
8. Hi-Lo solenoid valves assembly
11. Rear P.T.O. clutch
13. Lift gear pump
16. Lift cylinder
10-63
7 8 9 10 11 12
14
A B
15
5
16
4
13
2
19 17
1
18
D0040650

17. Transfer pump
18. Filter
19. Shuttle lubrication
10-64
Hydraulic diagram
Hydraulic steering and services diagram (standard version)

Key
3. Resonator
6. Pressure line filter (19 μm - ß>1000)
10-65

11. Oil cooler
12. Accumulator
13. Shuttle solenoid valves assembly
14. Shuttle unit
16. Transfer pump
17. Washable filter with metal mesh
18. P.T.O. and shuttle shaft lubrication
10-66
Hydraulic steering and services diagram - full optional version
Fig. 59 - Hydraulic steering and services diagram - full optional version

Key
3. Resonator
11. Oil cooler
10-67

12. Accumulator
14. Shuttle unit
16. Transfer pump
19. Hi-Lo unit
10-68
Fig. 60 - Hydraulic lift and remote control valve circuit diagram

Key
3. Free drain
6. Lift cylinders
7. Lift cover
8. Brake discs lubrication
9. P.T.O. bearing lubrication system.
10-69
Key
5. Free drain
6. Front lift
10. Lift cylinders
11. Lift cover
13. P.T.O. bearing lubrication system.
10.4.4 - Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)

Description
1. Steering and services circuit.
2. Lift and remote control valve circuit.
10-70
7 8 9 10 11 12
14
A B
15
5
16
4
13
2
19 17
1
18
D0040650

Key
3. Resonator
6. Pressure line filter
8. Hi-Lo solenoid valves assembly
13. Lift gear pump
16. Lift cylinder
17. Transfer pump
18. Filter
10-71
Hydraulic diagram
Hydraulic steering and services diagram (standard version)

Key
3. Resonator
10-72

12. Shuttle unit
13. Hydraulic shuttle lubrication
15. Transfer pump
17. Oil cooler
10-73
Hydraulic steering and services diagram - full optional version

Key
3. Resonator
9. Rear PTO clutch
10. Rear PTO. shaft lubrication
10-74

12. Shuttle unit
13. Hydraulic shuttle lubrication
15. Transfer pump
17. Hi-Lo unit
10-75
Fig. 65 - Hydraulic lift and remote control valve circuit diagram - basic version
Key
3. Free drain
6. Lift cylinders
7. Lift cover
9. PTO bearing lubrication system.
10-76
Key
4. Free drain
6. Front lift
9. Lift cylinder
10. Lift unit auxiliary cylinder
12. Lift cover
14. PTO bearing lubrication system.
10-77
10.4.5 - Steering circuit pump - lift circuit
Steering circuit gear pump
Fig. 67 - Steering circuit gear pump

l Displacement: 14 cc/rev
l Maximum operating pressure: 155 bar
10-78
Lift circuit gear pump
Fig. 68 - Lift circuit gear pump

l Displacement: 22.5 cc/rev
l Maximum operating pressure: 190 bar
10-79
10.4.6 - Power steering valve
Fig. 69 - Power steering valve

Operation
l The power steering system consists of a control valve with a rotary spool; these components feature hydrostatic operation.
l When the steering wheel is turned, the rotary spool control valve sends the oil from the pump to one side or the other of the
steering cylinder. The rotary spool ensures that that the volume of oil delivered to the cylinder is proportional to the angle
through which the steering wheel is turned.
l In the event of a malfunction of the power steering pump, the rotary spool valve automatically functions as a manual pump to
ensure emergency steering.
l Pressure relief valve setting: 150 ... 155 bar
l Displacement: 80 cc/rev
l Anticavitation valves: nr.2 (Included)
l Check valve: Included
l Threaded holes
m “P” and “T” = M 22 x 1.5
m “L” and “R” = M 18 x 1.5
l Spool adjustment angle: 15°
10-80
Power steering hydraulic diagram
Fig. 70 - Power steering hydraulic diagram
10-81
10.4.7 - Remote control valve
Remote control valve - 4-way version
1 2
B1 B2
A1 A2
4
3 2 4 1
B1 A1 B2 A2
190 bar
T
H.P.C.
1 1
P 0 0
2 2
1
0
D0036620
Fig. 71 - Remote control valve - 4-way version

Key
1. Detent section
2. Double-acting section
4. Double/single acting conversion screw
10-82
Remote control valve - 6-way version
Fig. 72 - Remote control valve - 6-way version

Key
1. Double-acting section
2. Detent section
3. Float section
5. Check valve
10-83
10.4.8 - Hydraulic lift control valve (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Hydraulic lift control valve
Fig. 73 - Hydraulic lift control valve - View of sections
10-84
Fig. 74 - Hydraulic lift control valve (1/2)

Components
1. Relief valve
2. Pipe union
3. Rate of drop control valve spool (Valvematic)
4. Plunger
5. Rate of drop regulator valve spring
6. One-way valve actuator piston
7. Spool
8. Check valve
10-85

Components
1. Lift control spool
2. Check valve
3. Choke
4. Lift control spool return spring
5. Spacer
6. Enabling valve
7. Enabling valve spring
8. Pilot/enabling valve
9. Pilot/enabling valve spring
10. Spacer
11. Inlet valve
Connections
l P - Control valve supply
l A - Lift control
10-86
Function
l The function of the lift control valve is to direct oil pressure to the lifting cylinder, thereby allowing the implement to be raised
and lowered. This contains the following valves:
m Check valve (1)
m Rate of drop control valve (Valvematic) (2)
m Inlet valve (3)
m Enabling valve (4)
m Pilot/enabling valve (5)
m Relief valve (6)
Fig. 76 - Lift control valves

Operation
When the lift control is in neutral position
l The pressurised oil from pump (1) flows to line a. As all the passages are closed, the pressure increases and when the force
exerted on enabling valve (2) overcomes that of spring (3), valve (2) shifts to the right to allow oil to flow to tank.
10-87
Fig. 77 - Operation in neutral position

When the lift is lowered
l When spool (4) is shifted to the right, lift lowering begins; this can be divided into two stages:
STAGE 1
l When spool (4) is shifted to the right, this connects:
m line b with line c thereby allowing piston (6) to move to the right.
m line d with discharge line h thus enabling a reduction in the pressure in line e.
10-88
Fig. 78 - Operation in ‘lower’ position - Stage 1

STAGE 2
l As piston (6) moves to the right, ball (7) is also shifted to the right, thereby connecting chamber m of check valve (8) with line
e. Consequently the pressure in chamber m is decreased and the force exerted on piston (6) by the pressure in chamber n
pushes valve (8) to the right thereby connecting line p with line e and allowing the oil to flow and the lift to be lowered. Valve
(9) is used to regulate the rate of drop; when moved downwards, it limits the flow of oil between port t and line p.
10-89

When the lift is raised
l When spool (4) is shifted to the left, this opens the connecting passages between lines b and d, f and g, a and e. When the
forces exerted by the pressure in line e overcomes the force exerted by the pressure in chamber m, valve (8) is shifted to the
right and oil can flow into line p and from there, through valve (9), to port t and lifting cylinder (10). To increase the lifting speed
i.e. the flow of oil to lifting cylinder (10), a one-way valve (11) is installed in parallel with spool (4); this ensures that oil is only
supplied during the lifting stage
10-90
Fig. 80 - Operation in ‘raise’ position

10.4.9 - Hydraulic lift control valve (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Hydraulic lift control valve
Fig. 81 - Hydraulic lift control valve - View of sections
10-91

Components
1. Spacer
2. Pilot/enabling valve spring
3. Pilot/enabling valve
4. Enabling valve
5. Enabling valve spring
6. Lift control spool return spring
7. Lift control spool
10-92

Components
1. Relief valve
2. Plug
3. Rate of drop control valve spool (Valvematic)
4. Plunger
5. Rate of drop regulator valve spring
6. One-way valve actuator piston
7. Spool
8. Check valve
9. Inlet valve
Connections
l P - Control valve supply
l T - Drain
l A - Lift control
l T1 - Drain
10-93
Function
l The function of the lift control valve is to direct oil pressure to the lifting cylinder, thereby allowing the implement to be raised
and lowered.
l This contains the following valves:
m Check valve (1)
m Rate of drop control valve (Valvematic) (2)
m Inlet valve (3)
m Enabling valve (4)
m Pilot/enabling valve (5)
m Relief valve (6)
Fig. 84 - Lift control valve

Operation
When the lift control is in neutral position
l The pressurised oil from pump (1) flows to line a. As all the passages are closed, the pressure increases and when the force
exerted on enabling valve (2) overcomes that of spring (3), valve (2) shifts to the right to allow oil to flow to tank.
10-94
Fig. 85 - Operation in neutral position

When the lift is lowered
l When spool (4) is shifted to the right, lift lowering begins; this can be divided into two stages:
STAGE 1
l When spool (4) is shifted to the right, this connects:
m line b with line c thereby allowing piston (6) to move to the right.
m line d with discharge line h thus enabling a reduction in the pressure in line e.
10-95

STAGE 2
l As piston (6) moves to the right, ball (7) is also shifted to the right, thereby connecting chamber m of check valve (8) with line
e. Consequently the pressure in chamber m is decreased and the force exerted on piston (6) by the pressure in chamber n
pushes valve (8) to the right thereby connecting line p with line e and allowing the oil to flow and the lift to be lowered. Valve
(9) is used to regulate the rate of drop; when moved downwards, it limits the flow of oil between port t and line p.
10-96

When the lift is raised
l When spool (4) is shifted to the left, this opens the connecting passages between lines b and d, f and g, a and e. When the
forces exerted by the pressure in line e overcomes the force exerted by the pressure in chamber m, valve (8) is shifted to the
right and oil can flow into line p and from there, through valve (9), to port t and lifting cylinder (10). To increase the lifting speed
i.e. the flow of oil to lifting cylinder (10), a one-way valve (11) is installed in parallel with spool (4); this ensures that oil is only
supplied during the lifting stage
10-97
Fig. 88 - Operation in ‘raise’ position

10.4.10 - Braking system
Description
The braking system is composed of 4 braking devices (1 for each wheel) operated by two hydraulic master cylinders with mechanical
control. Each master cylinder supplies oil to the brakes on one side of the tractor (right or left), allowing the operator to apply the
brakes on one side only and thus reduce the turning radius. The Separate-Brakes valve in the braking circuit allows braking on the
rear wheel only when the operator requires.
10-98
Fig. 89 - Braking system diagram

1. Front axle
2. Master cylinder for RH side brakes
3. Master cylinder for LH side brakes
4. Separate-Brakes valve
5. Rear axle
10.4.11 - Separate-Brakes valve

Function
The Separate-Brakes valve serves to exclude front wheel braking when the operator presses only one of the brake pedals.
10-99
Fig. 90 - Separate-Brakes valve

Key
1. Left pedal
2. Right pedal
3. Both pedals
10-100
Components
Fig. 91 - Valve components

Key
1. Control shaft
2. End cover
3. Flange
4. Control knob
5. Piston
6. Spring
7. Plunger
8. Ball
9. Spring
10. Spring
11. Ball
10-101
Operation
When the valve is not activated
l In the following explanation it is assumed that the operator presses just one of the brake pedals; operation with both pedals
pressed is the same.
Fig. 91 - Operation with valve not activated

l When the valve is not activated, piston (1) in the lower position and the force of springs (2) push spools (3) downwards.
l When one of the brake pedals is pressed (e.g. the RH pedal), the oil pressure pushes plunger (3) upwards against piston (1),
thereby opening the connecting passage between chambers a and b.
l This allows the oil pressure to reach both brakes on the side corresponding to the pedal that is pressed.
When the valve is activated and just one brake pedal is pressed
l When the valve is activated, pistons (1) are in their high position.
l When one of the brake pedals is pressed (e.g. the left pedal), the oil pressure pushes plunger (3) upwards, overcoming the
force of spring (2).
l At the same time ball (4) is pushed upwards by spring (5) so that it closes the connecting passage between chambers a and b.
l As a result, the oil flow from the pump is directed only towards the rear wheel brake.
10-102
Fig. 92 - Operation with the valve activated and just one pedal pressed
When the valve is activated and both brake pedals are pressed
l When the valve is activated and both brake pedals are pressed, the oil flow is directed to chambers c and d.
l As the pressure acting on plungers (3) is the same, they are pushed downward exclusively by the force of springs (2).
l As a result, the oil flow from the master cylinders is directed to the front and rear brakes on both sides of the tractor.
l Even if the operator forgets to deactivate the valve after finishing field work, as soon as both brake pedals are pressed, braking
on all four wheels is ensured.
10-103
Fig. 93 - Operation with the valves activated and both brake pedals pressed
10.4.12 - Trailer braking valve
ITALY version
Function
The trailer braking valve is fitted when hydraulic trailer braking is required.
10-104
Operation
Fig. 94 - Trailer braking valve - ITALY version

Valve control lever in position “1”.
l When lever (1) is in position “1” (valve activated) and the brake pedals are not pressed, there is a pressure of 12.5 bar (181.3
psi) available at port B.
l This pressure is supplied constantly to the trailer to release the parking brake. In this condition, the pressure detected by pres-
sure switch (2) is higher than the pressure setting and consequently indicator light (3) on the instrument panel is switched off.
l When the driver applies the handbrake, this operates lever (4). The pressure at port B is thus eliminated and pressure switch
(2), on detecting the lack of pressure, illuminates indicator light (3) on the instrument panel.
l The pressure at port B is directly proportional to the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.
Valve control lever in position “O”.
l When lever (1) is in position “O” (valve deactivated), there is no pressure at port B. As a result, pressure switch (2) detects the
lack of pressure and illuminates indicator light (3) on the instrument panel. In this condition, the pressure at port B remains null
regardless of the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.
10-105
Fig. 95 - Connections
Connections
l P - Supply to valve
l N - To remote control valve
l B - To trailer brake
l T - Drain
l Y1-Y2 - Connection to tractor braking system
l E - Parking brake pressure switch
l Maximum operating pressure at port N: 200 bar (2900 psi)
l Minimum constant pressure at port B: 12.5±2 bar (181.3±29 psi)
l Maximum pressure at port B: 135±5 bar (1885±72.5 psi)
l Oil supply flow rate: 20-80 ,/min (5.3 - 79.7 US.gpm)
EXPORT version
Function
The trailer braking valve is fitted when hydraulic trailer braking is required.
10-106
Operation
Fig. 96 - Trailer braking valve - EXPORT version

l When the brakes are not applied there is no pressure at port B.
l When the operator applies the tractor brakes, the pressure in the circuit pilots the braking valve and the pressure at port B
increases proportionally to the pressure in the tractor braking circuit.
Fig. 97 - Connections
Connections
l P - Supply to valve
l N - To remote control valve
l B - To trailer brake
l T - Drain
l Y1-Y2 - Connection to tractor braking system
l Maximum operating pressure at port N: 200 bar (2900 psi)
l Minimum constant pressure at port B: 0 bar (0 psi)
l Maximum pressure at port B: 130-135 bar (1885÷1957.5 psi)
10-107
l Oil supply flow rate: 20-80 l/min (5.3 - 8.7 US.gpm)
10.4.13 - Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 98 - Services solenoid valve assembly

Components
1. P.T.O. engage control solenoid
2. Differential lock engagement solenoid valve
3. Filter
Connections
l H - Oil supply (from holding valve unit)
l T - Drain
l A - To rear P.T.O. clutch
l B - To rear P.T.O. brake clutch
l C - To differential lock engagement device
10-108
Pressure holding valves
Fig. 99 - Pressure holding valves

Components
1. Check valve
2. Services circuit supply pressure control valve
3. Cooler by-pass valve
4. Lubrication pressure control valve (5 bar)
5. Regulator valve control pressure point (21 bar)
6. Cooler bypass valve control pressure point (12 bar)
Connections
l P1 - Oil supply
l T - Drain
l H - Services solenoid valve supply
l L - To lubrication
l C1 - To cooler
10-109
10.4.14 - Services solenoid valves assembly - Pressure holding valves (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Services solenoid valve assembly
Fig. 100 - Services solenoid valve assembly

Components
1. 4WD control solenoid valve
2. P.T.O. engagement solenoid valve.
3. Differential lock engagement solenoid valve
4. Hi-Lo control solenoid valve
5. Pressure switch (11 bar)
Connections
10-110
l H - Oil supply (from pressure holding valves)
l T - Drain
l A - To rear P.T.O. clutch
l B - To rear P.T.O. brake clutch
l C - To differential lock engagement device
Pressure holding valves assembly
Fig. 101 - Pressure holding valves assembly (1/2)

Components
1. Check valve
2. Services circuit supply pressure control valve
3. Cooler by-pass valve
4. Lubrication pressure control valve
5. Pressure control valve test point
6. Cooler by-pass valve pressure test point
10-111
Fig. 102 - Pressure holding valves assembly (2/2)

Connections
l P1 - Oil supply
l T - Drain
l H - Services solenoid valve supply
l L - To lubrication
l C1 - To cooler
10-112
10.4.15 - Shuttle solenoid valves assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 103 - Shuttle solenoid valves assembly (1/2)

Components
1. HML lubrication pressure test point
3. Proportional solenoid valve
4. Reverse gear solenoid valve
5. Forward gear solenoid valve
6. Forward gear pressure test point
7. Reverse gear pressure test point
8. Shuttle lubrication pressure test point
9. Temperature sensor
10-113

Connections
l P - Supply
l T - Drain
l LI - Shuttle lubrication
l RM - To reverse drive clutch
l AV - To forward drive clutch
l L - Lubrication supply
10-114

Components
1. Accumulator
3. Solenoid-operated proportional valve
4. Reverse gear solenoid valve
5. Forward gear solenoid valve
6. Forward gear pressure test point
7. Reverse gear pressure test point
8. Shuttle lubrication pressure test point
9. Temperature sensor
10-115

Connections
l P - Supply
l T - Drain
l LI - Shuttle lubrication
l RM - To reverse drive clutch
l AV - To forward drive clutch
l L - Lubrication supply
10-116
20 - Calibrations and
electronic diagnosis
20-1
Calibrations and electronic
diagnosis
20.1 - Diagnostic tools
20.1.1 - All Round Tester (ART®)
Description
To facilitate the operations of fault diagnosis, putting the vehicle into service and testing electrical components of the engine and lift,
the technician is provided with a test instrument called All Round Tester (hereinafter ART®). Using the ART® the technician can:
l display errors (faults) that have occurred;
l calibrate the sensors;
l display data detected by the electronic control units (e.g. status of the sensors) managing the systems.
Data is exchanged between the ART® and the ECUs by way of a diagnostic socket incorporated in the combine wiring. The ART® is
supplied with a number of different interface cables, which are to be selected in accordance with the type of vehicle and the methods
described in the relative workshop manual or in the CD supplied with the tester.
Description of the kit
the ART® is supplied to authorised service centres in a case containing:
l Case, complete (P/N 5.9030.730.6/30)
m 1 - All Round Tester (P/N 5.9030.730.0)
m 2 - Diagnostic cable for BOSCH EHR4 rear hydraulic lift - Diagnosis
and programming cable of electronic regulator, original type - Diag-

nostic cable for SBA system, original type (P/N 5.9030.681.3/10)
m 3 - Adapter cable for radar connector (P/N 5.9030.681.7)
m 4 - Adapter cable for wheel speed sensor connector (P/N
5.9030.681.5)
m 5 - Cable for diagnostic socket (P/N 5.9030.681.4) (As from 01/01/06
Fig. 107
the cable has been modified to allow the ART® to connect to all
control units. Contact the Technical Assistance Service for further
information)
m 6 - Adapter cable for diagnosis socket on armrest (P/N 0.011.6178.4)
m 7 - Cable for connection to diagnosis socket in engine, gearbox, and
lift ECUs zone (P/N 0.011.5445.4)

m 8 - EPROM port box (P/N 0.010.2154.2)
m 9 - CD ROM (P/N 307.1056.8/60)
*
Notes on use
The ART® is protected against battery polarity inversion and positive and negative over voltages of brief duration (1 msec). Do not
attempt to connect the ART® to any sockets other than those specifically designed for use with the tester and do not use extension
leads. The display is permanently backlit to ensure visibility on all light conditions. The knob on the side of the tester allows contrast
adjustment. If the display appears blank, it is possible that the contrast knob is positioned in such a way that the data are not visible
on the screen. The tester operates correctly at temperatures between 0 and 40°C; it is advisable to switch the tester off every 30
minutes to help prolong its service life. Before disconnecting the ART® from the diagnostic socket, turn the starter key to the “O”
(OFF) position.
20-2
diagnosis
Description of the tester
The ART® comprises:
1. Liquid crystal display featuring permanent backlighting
2. 16-key alphanumeric keypad
3. Contrast adjustment knob. Serves to adjust the contrast of the display. If the
display appears blank, it is possible that the contrast knob is positioned in
such a way that the data are not visible on the screen.
4. Parallel port (used to connect the ART® to systems with electronic control
units that do not have microprocessors).
5. Serial port (used to connect the ART® to systems with electronic control
units incorporating microprocessors).
Fig. 108
General notes on connecting and powering up the Tester

1. To connect the tester to the vehicle’s electronic system, proceed as follows:
2. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch;
3. Connect the ART® to a diagnostic;
4. Insert the key in the starter switch and turn it to “I” (ON).
5. On power up, the ART® will display the battery charge level test. If the volt-
age is below 10V, the ART® will not have sufficient voltage to connect to
the ECUs, while voltages in excess of 15V could damage the ART®. After
a few seconds, the tester will attempt to connect to the electronic system
and will display a screen (which may vary according to the vehicle type
or the connector to which it is connected) from which the technician can
choose to connect to an ECU and test the operation of components.
Fig. 109
Selection of the display language

1. The ART® has the possibility to display information in a number of different languages (factory setting: ITALIAN). To change
the display language, proceed as follows.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch
3. Connect the ART® to a diagnostic socket
4. While holding pressed key A on the keypad, turn the starter key to “I” (ON).
20-3
diagnosis
5. Enter the password 1 2 3 F.
Fig. 110
6. Press “1 - Language SEL.”.
Fig. 111
7. Press “C to change” and then the key corresponding to the desired lan-
guage. In the example above, key “2 - ENGLISH” was pressed to select
English.
Press “E EXIT” twice to quit
Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and disconnect the ART® from the diag-
nostic socket.
Fig. 112
20-4
diagnosis
Serial ports configuration
1. The vehicle electronic systems to which the ART® can be connected differ from one another and utilize different pinouts at
the diagnostic socket.
For this reason, the serial ports must first be configured so as to guarantee full compatibility of the ART® with all SAME elec-
tronic systems.
To change the configuration of the serial ports, proceed as follows.
2. Switch off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch
3. Connect the ART® to a diagnostic socket
4. While holding pressed key A on the keypad, turn the starter key to “I” (ON)
5. Enter the password 1 2 3 F.
Fig. 112
6. Press “2 - Serial Ports”.
Fig. 113
7. Enable all the serial ports by pressing “1 - Port Enable” seven times.
Press “E EXIT” twice to quit.
Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF) and disconnect the ART® from the diag-
nostic socket.
Fig. 114
20-5
diagnosis
20.1.2 - Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Connecting ART® to the hydraulic lift and engine control units
1. CAUTION
Before connecting the ART(r), switch off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch.
2. Connect cable (1) (code. 5.9030.861.4) to ART (2) (code. 5.9030.730.0).

Insert connector (3) in connector X62 located inside the LH console.
Check that connectors (3) and X62 are securely connected.
Fig. 115
3. Insert the key in the starter switch and turn it to “I” (ON) to switch on the tester.
4. On power up, the ART® will perform the battery level test and then display
the following screen:
Fig. 116
5. The technician should now press the key corresponding to the control unit to be tested.
6. CAUTION
Do not start the engine unless this is required for subsequent operations.
20.1.3 - Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
1. CAUTION
Before connecting the ART(r), switch off the engine and remove the key from the starter switch.
20-6
diagnosis
2. Connect cable (1) (code. 5.9030.861.4) to ART (2) (code. 5.9030.730.0).
Plug connector (3) into the connector located inside the instrument panel
on the left-hand side.
Check that wiring connector(3) is properly connected.
Fig. 116
3. Insert the key in the starter switch and turn it to “I” (ON) to switch on the tester.
4. On power up, the ART® will perform the battery level test and then display
the following screen:
Fig. 117
5. The technician should now press the key corresponding to the control unit to be tested.
6. CAUTION
Do not start the engine unless this is required for subsequent operations.
20-7
diagnosis
20.1.4 - All-Round Tester Manual - Introduction (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
Menu organisation
Table 11
Main menu Menu Submenu Operation Paragraph
Main menu Monitors I/O Analog input 20-9
Digital input
input frequency
Power
Outputs
Transmission
CAN
Parameters Optionals Hi/Lo 20-12
Clutches FWD eng. end
REV eng. end
FWD Tfill
REV Tfill
Calibrations Pedal 20-13
Shuttle Automatic
Manual
Alarms TCU active alarms 20-16
TCU passive alarms
Cancelling TCU active alarms
Tests Solenoid valves 20-16
Presentation screen
The presentation screen shows the prelimimaru information on the ECU, and more
specifically:
l Software version
l Software date of issue
l Transmission model
Fig. 118
If the transmission ECU has not yet been put into service, the configuration will
not be permanent.
Fig. 119
20-8
diagnosis
Main Menu
After the presentation screen, the tester displays the main menu, which contains
the following options:
l 1. Monitors: allows you to monitor the operation of all the sensors
l Parameters: allows you to set the tractor operating parameters
l Calibrations: allows you to perform automatic and manual calibration pro-
cedures
l Alarms: displays all active and passive alarms
l Tests: allows you to test operation of the various actuators
Fig. 120
20.1.5 - All-Round Tester Manual - Monitor Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
This menu contains the parameters used for control of the tractor.
l 1. I/O (Input/Output)
l 2. Transmission
l 3. CAN
Fig. 121
I/O (Input/Output)
This submenu contains the input data received by the control unit and the status
of the outputs.
Fig. 122
20-9
diagnosis
Analog inputs
This menu displays the analog sensors managed by the ECU. The following pa-
rameters are displayed:
l ClutchPedal: Clutch pedal potentiometer (Volt)
l OilTemp: Transmission oil temperature (Volt)
l Seat: Seat sensor (Volts)
Fig. 123
Digital inputs
This menu displays the digital sensors managed by the ECU. The following pa-
l ComfClutch: Comfort Clutch button (ON / OFF)
l ClutchSwitch: Clutch pedal travel limit switch (ON / OFF)
l Lever neutral: Lever neutral position switch (ON / OFF)
l Lever forward: Lever forward position switch (ON / OFF)
l Lever reverse: Lever reverse position switch (ON / OFF)
l Seat: Seat sensor switch (ON / OFF)
l Prx 4Bar Svp: Pressure switch downstream of Svp (ON / OFF)
l Prx 11Bar Svp: Services pressure switch (ON / OFF)
Fig. 124
input frequency
This menu displays the speed sensors controlled by the ECU. The following pa-
l Shuttle: Frequency of shuttle output shaft speed sensor, the sign deter-
mines the direction of rotation (Hz)
l Wheels: Frequency of wheel speed sensor (Hz)
Fig. 125
20-10
diagnosis
Power supplies
This menu displays the power inputs and outputs of the ECU. The following pa-
l 12V: 12 Volt power from starter keyswitch (Volts)
l 5V: 5Volt power output from ECU (Volts)
Fig. 126
Outputs
This menu displays the statuses of the outputs of the ECU. The following param-
eters are displayed:
l Control: Status of solenoid valve control (ON / OFF)
l Current: Current draw of solenoid valve (mA)
Fig. 127
Transmission
This menu contains all the information relative to the operating status of the trans-
mission. The following parameters are displayed:
l DesDir: Direction desired (N - F or R)
l Real: Actual direction (N - F or R)
l PedalPos: Clutch pedal position (%)
l SvF: Status of Forward solenoid valve (ON / OFF)
l SvR: Status of Reverse solenoid valve (ON / OFF)
l SvP Curr: Svp current draw (mA)
l PrxSvp: Svp pressure status (ON / OFF)
l Engine: Engine speed (rpm)
l Shuttle: Shuttle speed (rpm)
l Wheels: Tractor speed (km/h)
l Ratio: Engaged gear ratio (n°)
l Oil Temp: Transmission oil temperature (°C)
Fig. 128
20-11
diagnosis
CAN
This menus summarises the information relative to the status of the CanBus. The
following parameters are displayed:
l Can-Instrument: Status of “CAN” communication with on-board instrument
panel (ON / OFF)
Fig. 129
20.1.6 - All-Round Tester manual - Parameters Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001)
This menu contains all the optional equipment of the tractor and the clutch pa-
rameters.
l Options
l Clutches
Fig. 130
Options
In this menu you can enable/disable the various items of optional equipment in-
stalled on the tractor. The following parameters are displayed:
l Hi-Lo: Hi-Lo status (0= function deactivated; 1=function activated
Fig. 131
20-12
diagnosis
Clutches
From this menu you can display and edit the tractor’s calibration parameters. The
l FWD eng. end Forward clutch engagement end current (mA)
l REV eng. end Reverse clutch engagement end current (mA)
l Fwd TFill: Forward clutch fill time (mSec)
l Rev TFill: Reverse clutch fill time (mSec)
Fig. 132
20.1.7 - All-Round Tester Manual - Calibrations Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)
From the Calibrations menu you can configure the electronic control unit according
to the type of transmission installed on the tractor and calibrate the clutches and
the clutch pedal.
l TCU model
l Pedal
l Shuttle
Fig. 133
Pedal
From this submenu you can calibrate the clutch pedal. The following parameters
are displayed:
l Clutch Switch: Status of clutch pedal switch (ON / OFF)
l Min.Pos.: Value saved in memory for pedal pressed (Volts)
l Current value: Current value of clutch pedal potentiometer (Volts)
l Max.Pos.: Value saved in memory for pedal released (Volts)
Fig. 134
20-13
diagnosis
Shuttle
In the Shuttle submenu you can perform automatic or manual calibration of the
clutches and alter the comfort parameters. ?
l Automatic
l Manual
l Param. Comfort
Fig. 135
Automatic
This screen defines the conditions in which the tractor must be placed before
proceeding with calibration of the clutches. Press “E” to go to the automatic clutch
calibration menu.
Fig. 136
In this submenu you can perform automatic clutch calibration procedure. The fol-
lowing parameters are displayed:
l Oil Temp.: Transmission oil temperature (°C)
l EngineRpm: Engine speed (rpm)
l Peak curr.: Peak current (mA)
l Engag. end Curr.: Clutch engagement end current (mA)
l Correct: Compensation applied at temperatures other than 40°C (mA)
Fig. 137
20-14
diagnosis
Manual
in this menu you can manually calibrate tractor and clutch operating parameters.
l FWD/Rev balance
l Shuttle response
l Shuttle acceleration
Fig. 138
FWD/Rev balance
In this submenu you can compensate for a difference in the behaviour of the for-
ward and reverse clutches. The following parameters are displayed:
l Key [D] : Increases responsiveness of the Forward clutch
l Key [C] : Decreases responsiveness of the Forward clutch
l Key [7]: Increases responsiveness of the Reverse clutch
l Key [A]: Decreases responsiveness of the Reverse clutch
Fig. 139
Shuttle response
In this submenu you can alter the responsiveness of the shuttle. The following
parameters are displayed:
l Key [7]: Makes the shuttle more responsive
l Key [A]: Makes the shuttle less responsive
Fig. 140
20-15
diagnosis
Shuttle Accelerat.
In this submenu you can alter the speed at which travel direction inversion is ef-
fected. The following parameters are displayed:
l Key [7]: Makes direction inversion faster
l Key [A]: Makes direction inversion more gradual
Fig. 141
In this menu you can alter the comfort parameters associated with the various
manoeuvres. The following parameters are displayed:
l Response: Determines the initial response of the clutches in the various
manoeuvres, in the stage immediately subsequent to the clutch fill time.
l Accelerat: Determines the speed at which the tractor performs the various
manoeuvres.
Fig. 142
20.1.8 - All-Round Tester Manual - Alarms Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
From the Alarms menu you can check all the active and passive alarms recorded
by the TCU, and also cancel passive alarms.
l TCU active alarms
l TCU passive alarms
l Cancelling
Fig. 143
20-16
diagnosis
TCU active alarms
In this submenu you can display all the active alarms detected by the TCU. The
l SPN: Number identifying the faulty device.
l FMI: The reason the device failed.
l Cnt: Number of times the fault has occurred.
Fig. 144
TCU Passive alarms

In this submenu you can display all the passive alarms detected by the TCU. The
l SPN: Number identifying the device at fault.
l FMI: The cause of the fault.
l Cnt: Number of times the fault has occurred.
Fig. 144
Cancelling
From the Cancellation menu you can cancel all the passive alarms of TCU.
l Cancelling TCU passive alarms
Fig. 145
20-17
diagnosis
Cancelling TCU
Press key “1” to cancel all passive alarms.
Fig. 146
20.1.9 - All-Round Tester Manual - Test Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
From the Test Menu you can test the operation of the actuators (solenoid valves)
connected to the TCU.
l 1. Solenoid valves
Fig. 147
Solenoid valves
In this submenu you can check all the solenoid valves connected to the TCU. The
l Key [1]: Deactivates the proportional valve.
l Key [2]: Activates the proportional valve at 50% ( ~ 500 mA).
l Key [3]: Activates the proportional valve at 100% ( ~ 1000 mA).
l Key [4]: Deactivates the Reverse valve.
l Key: [5]: Activates the Reverse valve.
l Key [7]: Deactivates the Forward valve.
l Key [8]: Activates the Forward valve.
Fig. 148
20-18
diagnosis
20.1.10 - SDF Analyser
Description
The SDF Analyser instrument lets the technician troubleshoot and commission the tractor correctly, and test the functions of the
electric components of the tractor’s on-board systems and engine.
Data is exchanged between the instrument and the electronic control units on the tractor via a diagnostic socket installed on the
tractor wiring harness.
The SDF Analyser lets the technician perform the following:
l View data received from the different electronic control units (e.g. sensor, button and potentiometer states etc.) managing the
tractor systems.
l Test the functions of the electric components installed on the tractor. (e.g. buttons, potentiometers, solenoid valves etc.)
l Perform the operations necessary for commissioning the tractor, calibrating the hydraulic reverse shuttle and calibrating sen-
sors.
l View errors (faults).
-
Advantages
Using the SDF Analyser offers a number of significant advantages because:
l It has a screen refresh rate two time faster than previous diagnostic systems.
l It is compatible with all laptop operating systems in use today. It is faster than the ART® (All Round Tester).
l It functions as an active interface, with its own microprocessor and flash memory. New software updates are easily installable
with a guided menu.
l It may be used on both old and new tractors, using the specific adapter cables included following the instructions given in the
relative training and workshop manuals.
l May be connected to the laptop either with a USB cable or by Bluetooth connection within a 10 metre range.
-
Description of Kit
The SDF Analyser is delivered to Authorised Service Centres in a case containing the following:
1. Complete SDF Analyser carrier case (P/N 5.9030.997.0) 6 7
2. Analyser tool (P/N 5.9030.997.1) 8
3. Base PC Tester diagnostic cable (P/N 5.9030.997.2)
4. Base EDS diagnostic cable (P/N 5.9030.997.4) 4
5. Bluetooth dongle (P/N 5.9030.997.5)
6. EDS adapter cable, first type (P/N 5.9030.997.6)
7. PC Tester adapter cable for Deutz (P/N 5.9030.997.7)
8. PC Tester adapter cable for Rubin /Iron (P/N 5.9030.997.8)
9. Case containing: 9
m CD-Rom for installing software on laptop and

10
m Multi-language handbook with installation instructions. 3 2
1 5
10. USB connection cable
Fig. 149
-
Installing the software
The minimum requisites for the laptop for installation of the SDF Analyser base
software and the PC diagnostic software are indicated in the multi-language hand-
book included in the case. The installation procedure is also described in the hand-
book. Installing the SDF Analyser software is simple and only takes a few minutes.
Once the software is installed, the icons for launching the 3 functions of the soft-
ware will be displayed on the desktop of the host laptop.
Fig. 150
20-19
diagnosis
-
Functions
The SDF Analyser software consists of 3 functions:
PC Tester
Generally used for connection to electronic control units on tractors with CANBUS network. There are
certain exceptions, however, which are described in detail in the specific training courses.
PCTester
CVT Diag
For connection to “Infocenter” on-board instruments.
CVT Diag
SDF Analyser
For connection to ZF electronic control units on tractors without CANBUS network.
SDF Analyser
-
Connecting tool and launching software
Side: Tool-Tractor
Connect the SDF Analyser to the electronic system of the tractor as follows:
1. Switch the tractor off and remove the ignition key,
2. Connect the SDF Analyser interface to the correct adapter cable (in relation to tractor diagnosed), then connect the cable to
the diagnostic socket on board the tractor,
3. Turn the ignition switch to “On”.
-
Tool-Laptop side
Connect the SDF Analyser to the laptop as follows:
l Use the Bluetooth dongle to connect via Bluetooth, or
l Enable Bluetooth on your laptop (if laptop has integrated Bluetooth module), or
l Connect the SDF Analyser interface to the laptop with the USB connector cable.
-
Launching functions
To launch any of the functions, double-click the respective icon on the desktop.
-
Basic settings in PC Tester
The user may configure a number of basic settings (e.g. language, COM ports, screen layout etc.) for the PC Tester function before
starting to use the function itself. Proceed as follows:
20-20
diagnosis
Double-click the relative icon on the desktop and wait for the start screen.
Select “Tools” and then “Setup” from the option menu.
Fig. 151
-
Menus available:
l “Interface” / Interface,
l “Lines Selection” / Lines Selection,
l “Interface” / Interface.
-
“Interface” / Interface menu
The following may be selected from this menu:
l Interface and COM ports, and
l display language.
Fig. 152
-
“Visual Style” / Visual Style menu
l Background colour of screens,
l Font colour,
l Font type, and
l Enable “Microsoft Word” function
(reproduces PC Tester screens in a Word document.)
Fig. 153
-
“Lines Selection” / Lines Selection menu
l Tractor ECU pin mapping in manual mode.
Fig. 154
20-21
diagnosis
-
Base settings in SDF Analyser
The user may configure a number of basic settings for (e.g. language, COM ports, screen layout etc.) for the SDF Analyser function
before starting to use the function itself. Proceed as follows:
Double-click the relative icon on the desktop and wait for the start screen.
Select “Continue” / Continue from the options menu, then select “Configuration” /
Configuration.
Fig. 155
-
“Configuration” / Configuration menu
l Interface,
l Display language,
l COM ports,
l Font type, and
l Window layout.
Fig. 156
-
20.1.11 - SDF Analyser - Diagnostic socket
SDF Analyser - Diagnostic socket
Table 12
Components Image From: To:
SDF Analyser - -
Fig. 157
20-22
diagnosis
Components Image From: To:
Cable for diagnostic socket (P/N SDF Analyser Tractor diagnostic
5.9030.997.2); A = Connection to SDF socket
Analyser; B = Connection to diagnostic
socket
Fig. 158
Tractor diagnostic socket - -
Fig. 159
20-23
diagnosis
20.2 - Diagnostic tool screens
20.2.1 - ECU interrogation
Diagnostics
Diagnostics is the set of analytical and reporting activities which, through the measurement of certain physical parameters characteri-
sing the machine monitored, provide significant information on the status of the machine itself and on how its status varies over time,
to enable the evaluation and prediction of both short and long term reliability.
How diagnostics works
When connected to the diagnostic sockets of tractors with specific cables, the All Round Tester (ART®) and SDF Analyser tools con-
nect to and interrogate the different ECUs in the machine, and display the relative data acquired on screen.
ECUs interrogated by the All Round Tester (ART®) and SDF Analyser
The All Round Tester (ART®) and SDF Analyser tools may acquire and analyse data from the following electronic control units. Rear
hitch (EKR), front suspension, HPSA, HLHP1, HLHP2, PTO, Pre-heat, Hydraulic reverse shuttle (“Smart Lever”), Transmission, ZF
transmissions (TCU/VDC, SGR/FMGR), SLH engines, Instrument CLUSTER: INFOCENTER.
WARNING
The primary diagnostic functions of Deutz-AG ECUs are performed with the Serdia 2000/Serdia 2010 diagnostic tools.
WARNING
However, certain procedures are accessible and certain information viewable also with the All Round Tester (ART®)
and SDF Analyser diagnostic tools.
How to select the ECU interrogated

All Round Tester (ART®)
1. Switch the tractor off and remove the ignition key;
2. Connect the ART® to the diagnostic socket;
3. Turn the ignition switch to “I” (ON);
4. When the ART® tool switches on, the battery charge level test screen is displayed.
WARNING
A voltage of less than 10V is insufficient for the ART® to connect to the ECUs, whereas voltages above 15V may
damage the tool itself.
5. After a few seconds, the tester attempts to connect to the electronic system of
the tractor, and displays a screen (which differs in relation to tractor model and the - - - - - - M E N U - - - - - -
diagnostic connector used) in which the technician may select which ECU to con-
nect to, and analyse functions of components.
1 - E N G I N E E C U
=> The image aside shows an example of a selection screen visible when using
2 - S M A R T L E V E R
the All Round Tester (ART®), in this case connected to the Agrofarm 115G tractor 3 - C L U S T E R
1 - “Engine ECU” / SHL Tier3a engine ECU,
2 - “Smart Lever” / Hydraulic reverse shuttle ECU integrated in “Smart Lever”
shuttle lever,
3 - “Cluster” / Digital on-board instrument cluster.
[ E ] E X I T
Fig. 160
WARNING
To change from one ECU to another, switch the tractor off, reconnect and select the new ECU.
20-24
diagnosis
---
SDF Analyser
1. Switch the tractor off and remove the ignition key;
2. Connect the SDF Analyser to the diagnostic socket;
3. Turn the ignition switch to “I” (ON);
4. Launch the diagnostic programme on your computer;
5. After scanning the channels, the tester attempts to connect to the electronic
system of the tractor, and displays a screen (which differs in relation to tractor
model and the diagnostic connector used) showing the technician a list of the
ECUs recognised. Press “End”.
=> The image aside shows an example of a selection screen visible when using
the SDF Analyser, in this case connected to the Dorado³ 100 tractor:
● “Cluster” / Digital on-board instrument cluster.
● “Smart Lever” / Hydraulic reverse shuttle ECU integrated in “Smart Lever” shut-
tle lever,
● “Engine ECU” / SHL Tier3a engine ECU,
Fig. 161
WARNING
To interrogate a different ECU, simply select the name of the de-
sired ECU
(the image aside shows an example of a selection screen visible when using the
SDF Analyser -
in this case connected to the Dorado³ 100 tractor).
Fig. 162
Menus available for each ECU

The number of ECUs listed varies in relation to the model of tractor the tool is connected to.
After selecting an ECU, the list of options available usually consists of either
5 choices: M E N U M E N U
1. “Monitors”/Monitor Menu: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Analyses all sensors in monitor mode. View data received from the different
electronic control units (e.g. sensor, button and potentiometer states etc.)
managing the tractor systems. 1 - M O N I T O R S
2. “Parameters”/Parameter Menu: 2 - P A R A M E T R E S
For setting certain machine options. 3 - C A L I B R A T I O N S
3. “Calibrations”/Calibration Menu: 4 - T E S T S
For calibrating the different subsystems of the machine, performing the op- 5 - A L A R M S
erations necessary for commissioning the tractor, calibrating the hydraulic
reverse shuttle and calibrating sensors.
4. “Tests”/Test Menu:
For testing actuators and testing the functions of the electric components
installed on the tractor. (e.g. buttons, potentiometers, solenoid valves etc.)
[ E ] E X I T
5. “Alarms”/Alarm list:
Displays all active and passive alarms. Alarms may also be cancelled from Fig. 163
this menu.
or
20-25
diagnosis
4 choices: M A I N M E N U
1. “Monitors”/Monitor Menu: - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
Analyses all sensors in monitor mode. View data received from the different
electronic control units (e.g. sensor, button and potentiometer states etc.)
managing the tractor systems. 1 - M O N I T O R S
2. “Calibrations”/Calibration Menu: 2 - C A L I B R A T I O N S
For calibrating the different subsystems of the machine, performing the op- 3 - T E S T S
erations necessary for commissioning the tractor, calibrating the hydraulic 4 - A L A R M S
reverse shuttle and calibrating sensors.
3. “Tests”/Test Menu:
For testing actuators and testing the functions of the electric components
installed on the tractor. (e.g. buttons, potentiometers, solenoid valves etc.)
4. “Alarms”/Alarm list:
Displays all active and passive alarms. Alarms may also be cancelled from
[ E ] E X I T
this menu.
Fig. 164
---
Hidden menus are also available for certain ECUs, which can only be accessed by M E N U M E N U
entering a specific password. - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 - M O N I T O R S
2 - P A R A M E T R E S
3 - C A L I B R A T I O N S
4 - T E S T S
5 - A L A R M S
C - I N I T I A L I T .
[ E ] E X I T
Fig. 165
20.2.2 - Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Instrument panel
The instrument panel installed on these tractors is designed and programmed to manage and display the information needed by the
operator to control the operation of the tractor in various work conditions, displaying the performance values in real time and signal
any faults detected by the engine and transmission ECUs by means of the display located on the right-hand side. The instrument
panel comprises a single unit that mounts three digital displays supplying information by means of a text message display and ana-
logue instruments showing engine revs, fuel level, etc. The instrument panel also incorporates indicator lights showing the operating
status of various tractor systems, or the presence of faults (e.g. clogged oil filters, etc.). The instrument panel also has the function
of managing the engine pre-heating.
20-26
diagnosis
Fig. 166
Description of the preheating system
The preheating system is managed by a logic system in the instrument panel and it is designed to ensure that the engine starts
correctly when the coolant temperature is below +5°C. A special feature of the system is that the preheating cycle is activated auto-
matically and only if the coolant temperature is below + 5 °C. The preheating cycle does not terminate with the starting of the engine,
but continues for a certain time through a so-called postheating stage that heats the combustion air drawn into the engine in order to
reduce the amount of white exhaust smoke typically produced during this stage. The post-heating stage is only activated if the tem-
perature of the coolant is below + 25°C. The air drawn into the engine is preheated by a heating element (flange located on the intake
manifold containing an electrical resistance). The instrument panel, powered on when the starter key is turned, indicates operation
of the preheating by means of a yellow light, and ensures the system operation by means of a series of sensors and air preheating
device. The sensors connected to the control unit are respectively: the cooling liquid temperature sensor (specific for the preheating
system), the altnerator that sennds the “W” signal and the starter key (that sends the starting signal). The preheating device compri-
ses a power relay for the heater and the heater itself.
Operation
Operation of the preheating device is automatic, and the device is activated only when the coolant temperature is below + 5°C. When
the operator turns the starter key to “I” (ON) without starting up the engine, the instrument panel reads the coolant liquid temperature
and if this is below + 5°C, the yellow preheating indicator illuminates (permanently lit) warning the operator that the engine can only
be started at the end of the preheating phase. The operator must therefore wait until the light turns off to attempt to start the engine
(time envisaged for the preheating phase). At the end of the preheating phase, the operator can start the engine and as soon as the
control unit receives the alternator charge signal “W” and the coolant temperature is below + 25°C, it activates the post-heating phase
(yellow indicator permanently lit). The duration of the postheating phase can vary between 35 seconds to a maximum of 320 seconds,
depending on the temperature of the coolant.
Important:
The control unit activates the post-heating phase only after receiving the W signal indicating that the engine is running
and that the battery charging warning light off.
If the red battery charging warning light does not go out, due, for example, to the engine idle speed being too low, the post-heating
phase will not be activated. If the engine start attempt is unsuccessful, in order to repeat the start procedure the operator must return
the starter key to “O” (OFF) and then repeat the procedure from the beginning. The instrument panel has an integrated diagnostics
20-27
diagnosis
system to detect any malfunctions of components managed, and notofies the user of the fault by means of a message and code on
the right-hand display.
Fig. 167
1. Alternator
2. Preheater power relay
3. Preheating device
4. Engine coolant temperature sensor.
20.2.3 - Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)
Instrument panel
The instrument panel installed on these tractors is designed and programmed to manage and display the information needed by the
operator to control the operation of the tractor in various work conditions, displaying the performance values in real time and signal
any faults detected by the engine and transmission ECUs by means of the display located on the right-hand side. The instrument
panel comprises a single unit that mounts three digital displays supplying information by means of a text message display and ana-
logue instruments showing engine revs, fuel level, etc. The instrument panel also incorporates indicator lights showing the operating
status of various tractor systems, or the presence of faults (e.g. clogged oil filters, etc.). The instrument panel also has the function
of managing the engine preheating.
20-28
diagnosis
Fig. 167 - Instrument panel

Description of the preheating system
The preheating system is managed by a logic system in the instrument panel and it is designed to ensure that the engine starts
correctly when the coolant temperature is below +5°C. A special feature of the system is that the preheating cycle is activated auto-
matically and only if the coolant temperature is below + 5 °C. The preheating cycle does not terminate with the starting of the engine,
but continues for a certain time through a so-called postheating stage that heats the combustion air drawn into the engine in order to
reduce the amount of white exhaust smoke typically produced during this stage. The post-heating stage is only activated if the tem-
perature of the coolant is below + 25°C. The air drawn into the engine is preheated by a heating element (flange located on the intake
manifold containing an electrical resistance). The instrument panel, powered on when the starter key is turned, indicates operation
of the preheating by means of a yellow light, and ensures the system operation by means of a series of sensors and air preheating
device. The sensors connected to the control unit are respectively: the cooling liquid temperature sensor (specific for the preheating
system), the altnerator that sennds the “W” signal and the starter key (that sends the starting signal). The preheating device compri-
ses a power relay for the heater and the heater itself.
Operation
Operation of the preheating device is automatic, and the device is activated only when the coolant temperature is below + 5°C. When
the operator turns the key to “I” (ON) without starting the engine, the instrument panel reads the temperature of the coolant and, if lo-
wer than +5°C, illuminates the yellow indicator light (flashing) thereby alerting the operator to the fact that that the engine should only
be started on completion of the preheating phase. The operator must therefore wait for around 10 seconds before attempting to start
the engine (this is the time required for completion of the preheating phase). On termination of the preheating phase, the operator
can start the engine and, if the coolant temperature is less than + 25°C, the control unit starts the postheating phase (flashing yellow
light) as soon as it receives the W signal from the alternator. The duration of the postheating phase can vary between 35 seconds to
a maximum of 320 seconds, depending on the temperature of the coolant.
Important:
The control unit activates the post-heating phase only after receiving the W signal indicating that the engine is running
and that the battery charging warning light off.
If the red battery charging warning light does not go out, due, for example, to the engine idle speed being too low, the post-heating
phase will not be activated. If the engine start attempt is unsuccessful, in order to repeat the start procedure the operator must return
the starter key to “O” (OFF) and then repeat the procedure from the beginning. The instrument panel has an integrated diagnostics
20-29
diagnosis
system to detect any malfunctions of components managed, and notofies the user of the fault by means of a message and code on
the right-hand display.
Fig. 167 - Instrument panel operation

Key
1. Alternator
2. Preheater power relay
3. Preheating device
4. Engine coolant temperature sensor.
Shuttle ECU
The function of the shuttle ECU is to supervise the correct operation of the hydraulic shuttle and the HML system.
Hydraulic shuttle electronic control system
The hydraulic shuttle system has the task of managing engagement and disengagement of the clutch and to invert the gear input
shaft movement automatically according to the commands sent by the operator. The ECU receives the drive direction signal from the
operator control and, in accordance with the signals from the engine speed sensor and the wheel speed sensor, activates a propor-
tional solenoid valve and a 3-position solenoid valve to engage the selected drive direction automatically. Alternatively the operator
can modulate start-up by pressing the clutch pedal and overriding the automatic control. The ECU signals information regarding the
operation of the system and any malfunctions on a display on the instrument panel.
20-30
diagnosis
Fig. 168 - Operation of the shuttle ECU

Key
1. Instrument panel
2. Operator present sensor
3. H/L lever
4. Wheel speed sensor
5. Clutch pedal pressed switch
6. Reverse gear selection solenoid
7. Reverse gear selection solenoid
8. Forward gear selection solenoid
9. Clutch oil pressure switch
10. Oil temperature sensor
11. Shuttle sensor
12. Clutch pedal position sensor
13. Not used
20-31
diagnosis
20.3 - Commissioning and calibrating the tractor
20.3.1 - Putting the tractor into service (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
introduction
This chapter contains all the information required to establish or restore correct operation of the tractor’s various electronic systems.
Whenever an electronic control unit of the tractor is changed or a calibration-sensitive electronic component replaced, the tractor
must be put into service as if from new. The necessary procedures must be carried out by a skilled technician, who in turn must follow
the instructions in the manual precisely.
Renewal of the instrument panel
Each time the instrument panel is renewed, the Technician must carry out these operations:
l Programming the type of tractor
l enter the wheels constant
l set speed conversion factors
The tractor type and wheels constant settings serve to inform the ECU of the parameters to be used to display information. To perform
the configuration, connect the ART to the connector on the left-hand side of the instrument panel, then select the instrument panel
(CLUSTER) from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu and proceed as described.
Programming the type of tractor
1. From the opening menu press “E” to open the “MAIN MENU”.
2. From the main menu, press “2 - CALIBRATION” to open the “PARAME-
TERS MENU”.
Fig. 169
3. From the parameters menu press “1- PARAMETERS” on the ART.
Fig. 170
20-32
diagnosis
4. From the calibrations menu, press “3 - CONFIGURAT.”.
Fig. 171
5. Enter parameter “7” corresponding to the tractor to be configured.
Press “E” to save the value and “C” to confirm and return to the main menu.
Fig. 172
20-33
diagnosis
enter the wheels constant
TERS MENU”.
Fig. 172
Fig. 172
4. From the calibrations menu, press “1 - WHEELS(mm)”.
Fig. 173
20-34
diagnosis
5. Type the “WHEELS” parameter recording the value corresponding to the
tyre fitted on the rear of the tractor according to the following table:
Fig. 173
6. Table 13
Tyre Constant
85HP 100 HP
13.6 R38 5098 4671
14.9 R 38 - 4518
16.9 R30 5429 -
16.9 R34 5168 4735
16.9 R38 - 4348
18.4 R30 5277 -
18.4 R34 - 4489
230/95 R44 5064 4640
230/95 R48 - 4348
340/85 R38 5098 4671
380/85 R38 - 4489
420/85 R30 5429 -
420/85 R34 5064 4640
420/85 R38 - 4348
460/85 R30 - -
460/85 R34 - 4489
480/70 R30 5429 -
480/70 R34 5064 4640
480/70 R38 - 4348
520/70 R34 - 4489
520/70 R34 - 4489
540/65 R30 5429 -
540/65 R34 5064 4640
540/65 R38 - 4348
20-35
diagnosis
set speed conversion factors
TERS MENU”.
Fig. 173
Fig. 173
4. From the calibrations menu, press “4 - SPEED(1=MPH)”.
Fig. 174
20-36
diagnosis
5. Enter “0” to display the speed values according to the metric system (km/h)
or “1” to display the speed values according to the Imperial system (mph).
Fig. 174
20.3.2 - Putting the tractor into service (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Introduction
This chapter provides all information required to restore correct operation of all electronic systems on the tractor. Whenever an elec-
tronic control unit of the tractor is changed or a calibration-sensitive electronic component replaced, the tractor must be recomissio-
ned. The necessary procedures must be carried out by a skilled technician, who must follow the instructions in the manual precisely.
Renewal of the instrument panel
Each time the instrument panel is renewed, the technician must perform the following operations:
l Programming the type of tractor
l enter the wheels constant
l set speed conversion factors
The purpose of identifying the type of tractor and setting the wheels constant is to inform the control unit of the parameters it must use
to display correct information. To perform the configuration, connect the ART to the connector on the left-hand side of the instrument
panel, then select the instrument panel (CLUSTER) from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu and proceed as described.
Programming the type of tractor
1. From the introduction menu, press key “E” to access the “MAIN MENU”.
2. From the main menu, press key “2 - CALIBRATION” to access the “PA-
RAMETERS MENU”.
Fig. 174
20-37
diagnosis
3. From the parameters menu, press key “1 - PARAMETERS” on ART .
Fig. 174
4. From the calibration menu, press key “3 - CONFIGUR.” .
Fig. 174
5. Enter the parameter value corresponding to the tractor to be configured.
Table 14
parameter version
9 Tractor without Hi-Lo
11 Tractor with Hi-Lo
6. Press “E” to save the value and “C” to confirm and return to the main menu.
Fig. 174
20-38
diagnosis
enter the wheels constant
RAMETERS MENU”.
Fig. 174
Fig. 174
4. From the calibration menu, press key “1 - WHEELS(mm)” .
Fig. 174
20-39
diagnosis
5. Type the “WHEELS” parameter recording the value corresponding to the
tyre fitted on the rear of the tractor according to the following table:
Fig. 174
6. Table 15
tyre constant
85HP 100HP
13.6 R38 5098 4671
14.9 R38 4518
16.9 R30 5429
16.9 R34 5064 4640
16.9 R38 4348
18.4 R30 5240
18.4 R34 4489
340/85 R38 5098 4671
380/85 R38 4489
420/85 R30 5429
420/85 R34 5064 4640
420/85 R38 4348
460/85 R30 5240
460/85 R34 4489
480/70 R30 5429
480/70 R34 5064 4640
480/70 R38 4348
520/70 R34 4489
540/65 R30 5429
540/65 R34 5064 4640
540/65 R38 4348
20-40
diagnosis
set speed conversion factors
RAMETERS MENU”.
Fig. 174
Fig. 174
4. From the calibration menu, press key “4 - SPEED(1=MPH)” .
Fig. 174
20-41
diagnosis
5. Enter “0” to display the speed values according to the metric system (km/h)
or “1” to display the speed values according to the Imperial system (mph).
Fig. 174
Renewal of the shuttle control unit

Each time the shuttle control unit is renewed, the technician must carry out the following operations:
1. Initialization of the ECU;
2. line end programming
3. automatic calibration of the shuttle clutches
4. Procedure for manual calibration of the shuttle clutches
To perform these operations, connect the ART to the connector on the left-hand side of the instrument panel, select the shuttle ECU
(SMART LEVER) from the “AVAILABLE TESTS” menu and proceed as described below.
DANGER
The operations for ECU initialisation, clutch pedal calibration and configuration of optional devices are required after
renewal of the ECU and must be performed with the engine switched off, the gear and speed range levers in neutral
and the parking brake engaged.
Initialization of the ECU
1. IMPORTANT
This procedure must be carried out each time the shuttle ECU is renewed.
2. From the main menu, press “0” twice to enable password entry.
Fig. 175
20-42
diagnosis
3. Enter the sequence “1-2-3-4-5-6”, then press “E” to return to the main
menu.
Fig. 176
4. Press key “C” to access the menu “Initialisation”.
Fig. 177
5. Press “1” to start the ECU initialization procedure.
Fig. 178
20-43
diagnosis
6. Press “C” to continue or “E” to abort the operation.
CAUTION
If you continue with the procedure, all data in memory will be
overwritten with the default values and the ECU will have to
be completely reprogrammed.
Fig. 179
7. On completion of the procedure, press “E” to return to the main menu and
proceed with the “line end programming” operation starting from point 5.
Fig. 180
20-44
diagnosis
line end programming
1. IMPORTANT
This procedure must be carried out each time the shuttle ECU is renewed but only after the initialization pro-
cedure has been carried out.
2. From the main menu, press “0” twice to enable password entry.
Fig. 180
3. Enter the sequence “1-2-3-4-5-6”, then press “E” to return to the main
menu.
Fig. 180
4. Press key “C” to access the menu “Initialisation”.
Fig. 180
20-45
diagnosis
5. Press “2” to start the “line end programming” procedure.
Fig. 180
6. Press “C” start the procedure or “E” to abort it.
Fig. 181
7. Press “1” to access the menu “TRANSMISSION TYPE”
Fig. 182
20-46
diagnosis
8. Enter the value corresponding to the type of transmission installed on the
tractor, then press “C” and “E” to continue.
IMPORTANT
On selecting the transmission type, the program automati-
cally proceeds with calibration of the clutch pedal.
Table 16
configuration transmission type

1 100HP with hydraulic shuttle
2 85HP with hydraulic shuttle
Fig. 183
9. Fully depress the clutch pedal and press “B” to save the value in the mem-
ory.
Fig. 184
10. If the clutch pedal travel limit switch is not operated when key “B” is pressed,
the ECU will display an error message.
Press “B” to memorise the data and continue with calibration.
Fig. 185
20-47
diagnosis
11. Release the pedal and press “A” to save the value.
Press “E” to proceed with the programming of the ECU.
Fig. 185
12. If the clutch pedal travel limit switch is operated when key “A” is pressed,
Press “A” to save the value and continue with the calibration.
Fig. 186
13. Press “1” to access the menu “1-Hi-Lo”.
Fig. 187
20-48
diagnosis
14. Enter the value corresponding to the tractor configuration, then press “E” to
confirm the parameter.
IMPORTANT
If you enter the wrong value by mistake, press “D” to cancel
the operation.
Table 17
configuration value
0 Hi-Lo absent
1 Hi-Lo present
Fig. 188
15. Press “C” to confirm the configuration or press “A” to cancel the operation
and return to the “OPTIONS” menu in order to repeat the procedure from
point 12 onwards.
Fig. 189
16. If the procedure was successful, a screen confirming the configuration will
be displayed.
Press “E” to go back to the main menu.
Turn the starter key “O” (OFF) and then back to “I” (ON) and proceed with
the calibration of the shuttle clutches.
NOTE
At the end of the procedure, the alarm T10 is displayed,
whicn requests the technician to perform clutch calibration.
Fig. 190
20-49
diagnosis
Notes on the clutch calibration procedure
The shuttle clutch must be calibrated by the technician in the following cases:
l a -After renewal of one or both shuttle clutches
l b - After renewing the clutch engage control proportional solenoid valve
l c - After the clutch has settled (in the case of new or revised tractors) or after years of use, if the clutch or automatic direction
change (without the use of the clutch pedal) is too sudden or slow.
l d - Whenever the shuttle ECU is renewed.
l e - When the line programming procedure is carried out
The technician has the option of two calibration procedures.
l Automatic calibration, in which the control unit independently sets the characteristic parameters for clutches engagement.
l Manual calibration, where the technician can alter the parameter settings and thus create a personalised clutch engagement
curve to obtain a smoother, more comfortable response from the tractor during travel direction changes.
Automatic calibration of the shuttle clutches
1. IMPORTANT
This procedure should only be carried out if the technician finds during a test drive that shuttle clutch engage-
ment is either too sudden or too slow when moving off from stationary or during direction changes without using
the clutch pedal.
2. Start the engine and bring the transmission oil level to approximately 40°C.
3. Park the tractor on a flat tarmac surface with at least 5 metres free front clearance, and perform the following operations.
m Put the shuttle lever in neutral.
m Take the engine revs to 1500 rpm.
m Select 2nd gear in the fast range (hare symbol).
m If the Hi-Lo unit is present: select HI speed (hare symbol).
4. From the main menu, press key “3” to access the menu “CALIBRATION” .
Fig. 191
5. From the “CALIBRATION” menu, press key “2” to access the menu “CALI-
BRATE SHUTTLE” .
Fig. 192
20-50
diagnosis
6. From the “SETTING” menu, press “1” to access the automatic clutch cali-
bration menu.
Fig. 193
7. Press any key on ART. Select the travel direction to be calibrated (for ex-
ample FORWARD).
Fig. 194
8. The tractor moves forward intermitttently and the values shown on screen
change until the optimal values are found. When the calibration procedure
is complete, the message “CALIB. TERMINATED” is displayed. If you wish
to repeat the procedure, return the shuttle lever to neutral and then move it
back to the travel direction selected previously. To save the values obtained
during calibration, press “E”.
Fig. 195
20-51
diagnosis
9. Press “C” to save the data or press A” to quit without saving.
Repeat the calibration procedure from point 5 to point 8 for the other travel
direction, then test the results by carrying out manoeuvres using the shut-
tle. If the result is not satisfactory, proceed with the manual calibration of
the shuttle clutches.
Fig. 196
Manual calibration of the shuttle clutches

m Take the engine revs to1500 rpm.
m Select 2nd gear in the fast range (hare symbol).
Notes on how to edit parameter settings during manual calibration

1. When the technician performs automatic clutch calibration, the ECU calculates the operating parameter values by applying
an algorithm to define the ideal conditions. In some cases, these parameters, even if correct from a hydraulic or mechanical
point of view, make the tractor response too sudden when the clutch is engaged. In this case, the technician should first at-
tempt to define the type of response by performing in automatic mode (i.e without using the clutch pedal) a number of direction
manoeuvres and standing starts in both directions and at various engine speeds (e.g. 1000, 1500, 2000 and max rpm) and in
the calibration conditions (for details, see calibration procedures).
The possible responses are:
m Different response when inverting between forward and reverse gears (balancing):
when changing direction from forward to reverse the tractor behaves differently than when changing from reverse to
forward.
m Inversion too sudden (or too slow) (response):
the tractor engages the direction requested by the technician, but too suddenly and the tractor starts off in jerks rather
than gradually (in more simple terms, as in a car if the clutch pedal was released too soon).
m Inversion too slow (or too fast) (acceleration):
the tractor engages the direction requested by the Technician but takes too long to execute the command and without
intervals.
The corrective actions are as follows:
m Sudden and fast engagement:
reduce the pressure parameter and where relevant increase the time parameter.
m Sudden and delayed engagement:
increase the pressure parameter. If results are not satisfactory, increase the time parameter slightly.
m Correct but delayed engagement:
increase the pressure parameter.

IMPORTANT
If the pressure parameter is INCREASED by 0.1, REDUCE the time parameter by 0.2.
IMPORTANT
If the pressure parameter is REDUCED by 0.1, INCREASE the time parameter by 0.2.
20-52
diagnosis
Procedure for manual calibration of the shuttle clutches
1. IMPORTANT
This procedure should only be carried out if the technician finds during a test drive that shuttle clutch engage-
ment is either too sudden or too slow when moving off from stationary or during direction changes without using
the clutch pedal.
m Take the engine revs to1500 rpm.
m Select 2nd gear in the fast range.
4. From the main menu, press key “3” to access the menu “CALIBRATION” .
Fig. 196
5. From the “CALIBRATION” menu, press key “2” to access the menu “CALI-
BRATE SHUTTLE” .
Fig. 196
20-53
diagnosis
6. From the “SHUTTLE CALIBRATION” menu, press “2” to access the clutch
manual calibration menu.
Fig. 196
7. Per balance the response to forward and reverse direction changes.
Press “1” to access the menu “FWD/REV BALANCE”.
Fig. 197
8. Press “C” or “D” to increase or reduce speed of the shuttle response when
shifting from reverse to forward or “A” or “7” to increase or reduce speed
of the shuttle response when shifting from forward to reverse. Press “E” to
continue.
Fig. 198
20-54
diagnosis
9. Press “F” to save the data or “A” to quit without saving.
Fig. 199
10. To alter the speed of the response to direction change requests
IMPORTANT
The “RESPONSE” parameter controls the quality of the ini-
tial stage of direction change manoeuvres. This parameter
can be adjusted to eliminate any jerkiness in the operation
of the shuttle clutches or the sensation of failed engage-
ment.
Press “2” to access the menu “SHUTTLE RESPONSE”.
Fig. 199
11. Press “7” or “A” to increase or reduce the speed of the shuttle response.
Press “E” to continue.
Fig. 200
20-55
diagnosis
Fig. 200
13. To change the response speed of the shuttle clutches.
IMPORTANT
The “ACCELERATION” parameter regulates speed at which
the direction change manoeuvre is brought to a conclusion.
This parameter should be changed when the time taken to
complete a direction change manoeuvre is either too long
or too short.
Press “3” to access the “SHUTTLE ACCELERAT. menu.”
Fig. 200
14. Press “7” or “A” to increase or reduce the speed of the shuttle. Press “E”
to continue.
Fig. 201
20-56
diagnosis
Fig. 201
20.3.3 - Calibration of the clutch pedal (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
1. To carry out this operation, connect the ART to the connector on the left side of the instrument panel, select the shuttle ECU
(SMART LEVER) from the “AVAILABL TESTS ” menu and follow the instructions.
DANGER
The clutch pedal calibration operation must be carried out with the engine off, the main gear and range gear
levers in neutral and the parking brake applied.
IMPORTANT
This procedure must be carried out each time the shuttle ECU is renewed.
2. From the presentation screen, press “E” to access the main menu.
Fig. 201
20-57
diagnosis
3. Press “3” to access the calibrations menu.
Fig. 202
4. Press “1” to access the clutch pedal menu.
Fig. 203
5. Fully depress the clutch pedal and press “B” to save the value in the mem-
ory.
Fig. 203
20-58
diagnosis
6. If the clutch pedal travel limit switch is not operated when key “B” is pressed,
Press “D” to save the value and continue with the calibration.
Fig. 203
7. Release the pedal and press “A” to save the value.
Press “E” to proceed with the programming of the ECU.
Fig. 203
8. If the clutch pedal travel limit switch is operated when key “A” is pressed,
Press “A” to save the value and continue with the calibration.
Fig. 203
20-59
diagnosis
20.4 - ECU alarms
20.4.1 - Hydraulic shuttle alarms
Shuttle ECU alarm - code 0.015.0363.4/20
The shuttle ECU (SMART LEVER) signals a malfunction of the components it controls using the display on the lower right of the
instrument panel. Faults are indicated using a system of coded flash sequences that identify the affected device or system.
List of alarms displayed on the instrument panel
List of alarms regarding components
Table 18
code on display on ART Alarm description
instrument
panel
T9 SPN 5561 - FMI 13 The ECU indicates that the tractor commissioning phase has not been -
completed.
T10 SPN 5560 - FMI 13 The ECU indicates that the clutch calibration procedure must be per- -
formed
T12 SPN 177 - FMI 3 The control unit indicates that the transmission oil temperature sensor is 20-64
disconnected or shorting to a positive feed.
T13 SPN 177 - FMI 3 The control unit detects that the transmission oil temperature sensor is 20-65
shorting to earth.
T15 SPN 1504 - FMI 4 The control unit detects that the operator presence sensor (seat sensor) 20-71
is disconnected or shorting to earth.
is shorting to a positive feed.
is faulty.
T47 SPN 191 - FMI 12 The control unit detects that the wheel speed sensor is disconnected. 20-67
T48 SPN 191 - FMI 3 The control unit detects that the wheel speed sensor is shorting to a 20-66
positive feed.
T50 SPN 160 - FMI 12 The control unit detects that the shuttle speed sensor is disconnected. 20-62
T51 SPN 160 - FMI 3 The control unit detects that the shuttle speed sensor is disconnected or 20-61
shorting to earth or a positive feed.
T64 SPN 5110 - FMI 2 The control unit detects a conflict in the information received from the 20-72
clutch pedal position sensor and clutch pedal depressed sensor, regard-
ing the position of the pedal.
T65 SPN 5110 - FMI 4 The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is discon- 20-74
nected or shorting to earth.
T66 SPN 5110 - FMI 3 The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is shorting 20-73
to a positive feed.
T67 SPN 1079 - FMI 2 The control unit detects a short circuit in 5V power feed to the clutch 20-68
pedal position sensor and the operator seat sensor.
T70 SPN 5110 - FMI 13 The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor signal is not 20-75
correctly calibrated.
T73 SPN 5130 - FMI 4 The control unit detects that the clutch disengagement button (comfort 20-75
clutch) is short-circuiting to earth (equivalent to the button being continu-
ously pressed).
T76 SPN 5350 - FMI 5 The control unit detects that the solenoid operated proportional valve of 20-78
the shuttle is disconnected
T77 SPN 5350 - FMI 4 The control unit detects a short to earth in the control line of the reverse 20-77
gear solenoid operated proportional valve.
T79 SPN 5370 - FMI 5 The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid is disconnected. 20-81
T80 SPN 5370 - FMI 4 The control unit detects a short-circuit in the control line of the forward 20-80
drive solenoid valve.
T82 SPN 5380 - FMI 5 The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid is disconnected 20-84
T83 SPN 5380 - FMI 4 The control unit detects a short to earth in the control line of the reverse 20-83
gear solenoid valve.
T85 SPN 5140 - FMI 2 The control unit detects that the shuttle control lever is faulty. 20-76
T93 SPN 168 - FMI 2 The control unit detects the power supply is absent. 20-63
20-60
diagnosis
instrument
panel
T94 SPN 5350 - FMI 3 The control unit detects a short to a positive feed in the control line of the 20-76
shuttle solenoid operated proportional valve.
forward gear solenoid valve.
reverse gear solenoid valve.
T99 SPN 5512 - FMI 2 The control unit has detected an error during configuration. 20-85
List of alarms regarding components
Table 19
instrument
panel
T101 SPN 5910 - FMI 9 The control unit detects a data transmission error on the CAN BUS. 20-85
T102 SPN 5920 - FMI 9 The control unit detects a data transmission error on the CAN BUS. 20-86
Shuttle ECU alarms - SPN Code 160 FMI 3
Description
l The control unit detects that the shuttle speed sensor is disconnected or shorting to earth or a positive feed.
ECU response
l The system continues to function, but moving off from stationary and changes in drive direction are only possible using the
clutch pedal.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X115” of the shuttle speed sensor are
not loose or corroded.
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “X115” and to the frame earth and test
the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: infinity).
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “X115” and to the frame earth and check
that there is no voltage present (test meter reading: 0 V).
l Check that the shuttle speed sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
l Cancel all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still
present, the control unit must be renewed.
20-61
diagnosis
Fig. 204

Description
l The control unit detects that the shuttle speed sensor is disconnected.
ECU response
clutch pedal.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X115” of the shuttle speed sensor are
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power feed to the wheel speed sensor is correct (approx. 12 V
across pin 2 (positive) of connector “X115” and the transmission earth).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 1 of connector “X115” and to pin 7 of connector
“X130” and test the resistance to check for electrical continuity (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
l Check that the shuttle speed sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
20-62
diagnosis
Fig. 205

Description
l The control unit detects the power supply is absent.
ECU response
l The system inhibits all operation of the shuttle unit and puts the transmission in neutral.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit are not loose or corroded.
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “X130” disconnected from the control unit, connect a test meter to
pin 15 of connector “X130” and check that it is receiving power correctly.
20-63
diagnosis
Fig. 206

Description
l The control unit detects that the transmission oil temperature sensor is disconnected or shorting to a positive feed.
ECU response
l The system continues to function, but the tractor tends to move in sudden jerks when changing gear or direction.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and “X116” of the transmission oil temperature sensor
are not loose or corroded.
l Check that the oil temperature sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “X130” disconnected from the control unit, connect a test meter
to pin 1 of connector “X116” and to pin 5 of connector “X130” and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter
reading: 0 Ohm).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “X130” disconnected from the control unit, connect a test meter to
pin 2 of connector “X116” and to the frame earth and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
pin 1 of connector “X116” and to the frame earth and check that there is no voltage present (test meter reading: 0 V).
20-64
diagnosis
Fig. 207

Description
l The control unit detects that the transmission oil temperature sensor is shorting to earth.
ECU response
l The system continues to function, but the tractor tends to move in sudden jerks when changing gear or direction.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X116” of the transmission oil tempera-
ture sensor are not loose or corroded.
l Check that the oil temperature sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “X130” disconnected from the control unit, connect a test meter
to pin 1 of connector “X116” and to the transmission earth, test the resistance to check for shortcircuits (test meter reading:
infinity).
20-65
diagnosis
Fig. 208

Description
l The control unit detects that the wheel speed sensor is shorting to a positive feed.
ECU response
l The system continues to function, but changes in travel direction are controlled on the basis of the engine rpm rather than the
tractor’s ground speed and moving off from stationary is only possible using the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT
The wheel speed sensor is also connected in parallel to the instrument panel. Before proceeding with fault
analysis check for the presence of other alarms concerning the wheel speed sensor in the instrument panel
and, if so, deal with these alarms first.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X19 ” of the wheel speed sensor are
l Check that the wheel speed sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
across pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative) of connector “X19”).
20-66
diagnosis
Fig. 209

Description
l The control unit detects that the wheel speed sensor is disconnected.
ECU response
l The system continues to function, but changes in travel direction are controlled on the basis of the engine rpm rather than the
tractor’s ground speed and moving off from stationary is only possible using the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT
The wheel speed sensor is also connected in parallel to the instrument panel. Before proceeding with fault
analysis, check for the presence of other alarms concerning the wheel speed sensor in the instrument panel
and, if so, deal with these alarms first.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X19 ” of the wheel speed sensor are
l Check that the wheel speed sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
across pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative) of connector “X19”).
20-67
diagnosis
Fig. 210
Shutt - SPN code 1079 FMI 2

Description
l The control unit detects a short circuit in 5V power feed to the clutch pedal position sensor and the operator seat sensor.
ECU response
l The system inhibits all operation of the tractor.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit, connector “X131” of the clutch pedal position and con-
nector “X36” of the operator seat sensor are not loose or corroded.
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, and connectors”X131” and “X36” disconnected, check that the voltage between
pin 1 (positive) and pin 3 (negative) of connector “X36” is approx. 5 V.
20-68
diagnosis
Fig. 211

Description
l The control unit detects that the operator presence sensor (seat sensor) is faulty.
ECU response
l The tractor can travel only using the clutch pedal.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X36” of the operator seat sensor are
l Check that the operator present sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “X130” connected to the control unit, connect a test meter to pin 1
and to pin 3 of connector “X36” and check that the the sensor is receiving power correctly (voltage across pin 1 (positive) and
pin 3 (negative) of connector “X36” approx. 5 V).
20-69
diagnosis
Fig. 212

Description
l The control unit detects that the operator presence sensor (seat sensor) is shorting to a positive feed.
ECU response
Test
20-70
diagnosis
Fig. 213

Description
l The control unit detects that the operator presence sensor (seat sensor) is disconnected or shorting to earth.
ECU response
Test
pin 2 of connector “X36” and to the frame earth and test the resistance to check for shorting to earth (test meter reading infinity)
reading: 0 Ohm).
20-71
diagnosis
Fig. 214

Description
l The control unit detects a conflict in the information received from the clutch pedal position sensor and clutch pedal depressed
sensor, regarding the position of the pedal.
ECU response
clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT
If the alarms T65 (SPN 5110 – FMI 4) or T66 (SPN 5110 – FMI 3) regarding the clutch pedal position sensor
are also present, first diagnose and remedy the causes of these alarms, then, if the original alarm persists,
diagnose and remedy this.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle ECU, connector “X73” of the clutch pedal pressed sensor and con-
nector “X115” of the clutch pedal position sensor are not loose or corroded.
l Check correct operation of the clutch pedal depressed sensor (for details see section 40).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 2 (red/green wire) of connector “X73” and to the
frame earth and test the resistance to check for shorting to earth (test meter reading: infinity).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position, connect a test meter to pin 3 (black wire) of connector “X73” and to the frame
earth and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
20-72
diagnosis
pin 2 of connector “X73” (red/green wire) and to pin 19 of connector “X130” and test the resistance to check for short circuits
(test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
Fig. 215

Description
l The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is shorting to a positive feed.
ECU response
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X131” of the clutch pedal position sen-
sor are not loose or corroded.
l Check the correct operation of the clutch pedal position sensor (for details see section 40).
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position, check that the power feed to the clutch pedal position sensor is correct (approx. 5
V measured across pin 1 (positive) and pin 2 (negative)).
pin 1 and to pin 4 of connector “X131” and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: infinity).
20-73
diagnosis
Fig. 216

Description
l The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor is disconnected or shorting to earth.
ECU response
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X131” of the clutch pedal position sen-
sor are not loose or corroded.
l Check the correct operation of the clutch pedal position sensor (for details see section 40).
pin 2 and to pin 4 of connector “X131” and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: infinity).
pin 4 of connector “X131” and to the frame earth and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: infinity).
20-74
diagnosis
Fig. 217

Description
l The control unit detects that the clutch pedal position sensor signal is not correctly calibrated.
ECU response
Test
l Turn the starter key to “O” (OFF), and then back to “I” (ON) and proceed with the calibration of the clutch pedal.
Description
l The control unit detects that the clutch disengagement button (comfort clutch) is short-circuiting to earth (equivalent to the
button being continuously pressed).
ECU response
l The system puts the transmission in neutral and then disables the “Comfort clutch” function
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X47” of the gear lever are not loose or
corroded.
l Check that the gear lever functions correctly (for details see section 40).
20-75
diagnosis
Fig. 218

Description
l The control unit detects that the shuttle control lever is faulty.
ECU response
Test
l Check with the ART that the lever functions correctly. If more than one drive direction is signalled simultaneously, or if no drive
direction is signalled in any of the lever positions, renew the shuttle control lever and carry out the procedure to put the tractor
into service.
Description
l The control unit detects a short to a positive feed in the control line of the shuttle solenoid operated proportional valve.
ECU response
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X120” of the shuttle solenoid operated
proportional valve are not loose or corroded.
20-76
diagnosis
l Test the internal resistance of the solenoid (for details, see section 40).
Fig. 219

Description
l The control unit detects a short to earth in the control line of the reverse gear solenoid operated proportional valve.
ECU response
Test
20-77
diagnosis
Fig. 220

Description
l The control unit detects that the solenoid operated proportional valve of the shuttle is disconnected.
ECU response
Test
reading: 0 Ohm).
reading: 0 Ohm).
20-78
diagnosis
Fig. 221

Description
l The control unit detects a short to a positive feed in the control line of the forward gear solenoid valve.
ECU response
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X118” of the forward drive solenoid
valve are not loose or corroded.
20-79
diagnosis
Fig. 222

Description
l The control unit detects a short-circuit in the control line of the forward drive solenoid valve.
ECU response
Test
20-80
diagnosis
Fig. 223

Description
l The control unit detects that the forward drive solenoid is disconnected.
ECU response
Inspection
l Check the internal resistance of the solenoid valve.
reading: 0 Ohm).
pin 1 of connector “X118” and to the transmission earth and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading:
0 Ohm).
20-81
diagnosis
Fig. 224

Description
l The control unit detects a short to a positive feed in the control line of the reverse gear solenoid valve.
ECU response
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “X130” of the shuttle control unit and connector “X119” of the reverse drive solenoid
20-82
diagnosis
Fig. 225

Description
l The control unit detects a short to earth in the control line of the reverse gear solenoid valve.
ECU response
Test
20-83
diagnosis
Fig. 226

Description
l The control unit detects that the reverse drive solenoid is disconnected.
ECU response
Test
pin 1 of connector “X119” and to pin 25 of connector “X130” and test the resistance to check for shorting to earth (test meter
reading: 0 Ohm).
reading: 0 Ohm).
20-84
diagnosis
Fig. 227

Description
l The control unit has detected an error during configuration.
ECU response
Test
l Carry out the procedure for putting the tractor into service and, if the alarm reappears, renew the ECU.
Description
l The control unit detects a data transmission error on the CAN BUS.
ECU response
l The system continues to function, but it is only possible to move off from stationary and change the drive direction using the
clutch pedal.
Test
l Cancel all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position and check if the alarm is still
present, in which case the control unit must be renewed
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “X130” connected to the control unit, connect a test meter to pin
3 and to pin 4 of connector X128 and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 60 Ohm).
pin 3 and to pin 4 of connector X128” and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 120 Ohm)
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test me-
ter to pin 3 and to pin 4 of connector X128” and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 120 Ohm)
20-85
diagnosis
Fig. 228

Description
l The control unit detects a data transmission error on the CAN BUS.
ECU response
l The system continues to function, but it is only possible to move off from stationary and change the drive direction using the
clutch pedal.
Test
l Cancel all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position and check if the alarm is still
present, in which case the control unit must be renewed
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “X130” connected to the control unit, connect a test meter to pin
3 and to pin 4 of connector X128 and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 60 Ohm).
pin 3 and to pin 4 of connector X128” and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 120 Ohm).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test me-
ter to pin 3 and to pin 4 of connector X128” and test the resistance to check for short circuits (test meter reading: 120 Ohm).
20-86
diagnosis
Fig. 229
20.4.2 - Instrument panel alarms

Instrument panel alarm - code 2.8339.248.0
The instrument notifies the operator of a malfunction on one of the components managed via the display on the right-hand side. The
unit uses codes to indicate the faults, referring to the relative device involved.
List of alarms displayed on the instrument panel
Table 20
instrument
panel
18 18 The instrument panel detects that the coolant temperature sensor is 20-88
shorting to earth.
19 19 The instrument panel detects that the coolant temperature sensor is 20-88
shorting to a positive feed.
20 20 The instrument panel detects that the fuel level sensor is shorting to a 20-89
positive feed.
21 21 The instrument panel detects that the alternator is faulty or disconnected 20-90
(does not receive the “W” signal).
22 22 Alarm available but not utilized -
23 23 The instrument panel detects that the preheating relay control is not con- 20-91
nected.
20-87
diagnosis
instrument
panel
24 24 The instrument panel detects that the preheating control relay is shorting 20-92
to earth.
to positive feed.
to positive feed or is disconnected.
36 36 The instrument panel detects that the preheating device is active when 20-95
it should be off.
37 37 The instrument panel detects that the preheating device is not active 20-96
when it should be on.
Instrument panel alarms - ART code 18
Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the coolant temperature sensor is shorting to earth.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “5K” of the instrument panel and connector “X5” of the coolant temperature sensor are
l Check that the temperature sensor is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test meter
to pin 2 of connector “X5” and to the frame earth and test the resistance to check for shortcircuits (test meter reading: infinity).
present, the control unit must be renewed
Fig. 230

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the coolant temperature sensor is shorting to a positive feed.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “5K” of the instrument panel and connector “X5” of the coolant temperature sensor are
20-88
diagnosis
l With the starter key in the “I” (ON) position and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test meter
to pin 2 of connector “X5” and tio the frame earth and check that there is no voltage (test meter reading: 0 V).
Fig. 231

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the fuel level sensor is shorting to battery positive.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “5K” of the instrument panel and “X10” of the fuel level sensor are not loose or corroded.
l With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test meter
to pin 3 of connector “X10” and to the earth on the tractor frame and perform a resistance test to check for 0 voltage (meter
reading: 0 V).
20-89
diagnosis
Fig. 232

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the alternator is faulty or disconnected (does not receive the “W” signal).
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “5K” of the instrument panel and “W” of the alternator are not loose or corroded.
l Check that the alternator is functioning correctly.
l With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test meter to
connector “W” of the alternator and to pin 24 of connector “5K” and perform a resistance test to check for electrical continuity
(test meter reading: 0 Ohm).
20-90
diagnosis
Fig. 233

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the preheating control relay is disconnected.
Test
l Check that the contacts on connector “5K” of the instrument panel and “RL42” of the preheating control relay are not corroded
or loose.
l Check that the preheating control relay is functioning correctly (for details, see section 40).
l With the starter key in the “O” (OFF) position and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test
meter to pin 2 of connector “RL42” and pin 19 of connector “5K” and test the resistance to check for continuity (meter reading:
0 Ohm).
20-91
diagnosis
Fig. 234

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the preheating control relay is shorting to earth.
Test
or loose.
l With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test meter
to pin 2 of connector “RL42” and to the earth on the tractor frame and perform a resistance test to check for shorts (meter
reading: infinity).
20-92
diagnosis
Fig. 235

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the preheating control relay is shorting to battery positive.
Test
or loose.
l With the starter key in position “I” (ON) and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test meter to
pin 2 of connector “RL42” and to the earth on the tractor frame and check for 0 voltage (meter reading: 0 V).
20-93
diagnosis
Fig. 236

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the preheating control relay is short-circuiting to battery positive or disconnected.
Inspection
l Check that the contacts on connector “5K” of the instrument panel and “RL42” of the preheating control relay are not oxidised
and are firmly secured.
l With the starter key in position “O” (OFF) and connector “5K” disconnected from the instrument panel, connect a test meter
to pin 2 of connector “RL42” and to the earth on the tractor frame and perform a resistance test to check for shorts (meter
reading: infinity).
l Clear all alarms, turn the starter key first to “O” (OFF) and then back to the “I” (ON) position again, and if the alarm is still pres-
ent, the control unit must be renewed
20-94
diagnosis
Fig. 237

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the preheating device is on, even though it should be off.
Test
or loose.
20-95
diagnosis
Fig. 238

Description
l The instrument panel indicates that the preheating device is off, even though it should be on.
Test
or loose.
l Connect a test meter to connector “X113” of the pre-heating device and to pin 15 of connector “5K” and, with the diodes test,
check that the diode is functioning (place the negative probe of the meter on pin 15 of connector “5K” and the positive probe
on connector “X113”).
20-96
diagnosis
Fig. 239
20.4.3 - Transmission alarms

P.T.O. selfdiagnosis indicator light.
The light integrated in the instrument panel (1) also serves to indicate the type of
fault on the control by means of intermittent flashes.
Fig. 240
When the tractor engine is started, the indicator light will flash to show that the control system has been activated.
Table 21
Code (number of flashes) Description
2 Solenoid valve disconnected
3 Pushbutton control continuously activated
4* Speed sensor faulty
5 Solenoid control output signal shorted to earth or in overcurrent
6* Speed excessive
7 Internal ECU fault in power stage
8 Sensor presence detected in configuration where not required
*: Alarms present in U.S.A. configuration only.
If a fault occurs on the control, the electronic control unit inhibits operation of the P.T.O.
20-97
diagnosis
20.4.4 - Canbus alarms
Canbus alarms (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
In order to remedy any problems signalled on the CANBUS by one or more of the control units, it is first necessary to fully under-
stand the method by which the control units are connected to the CANBUS. The CANBUS physically consists of two braided wires,
designated CAN_H and CAN_L, along which data is transmitted by the control units. Between these two wires there are two 120
Ohm resistors, each connected in parallel, and therefore the resistance measured at any point in the system should be 60 Ohm.
The resistors are physically located inside the instrument panel and the shuttle control unit (SMART LEVER), which therefore can
be considered as termination control units. The supplementary CANBUS connector is connected in parallel to the line connecting
the two termination control units. Should one of the two resistors blow, a resistance reading measured at any point of the system
will be 120 Ohm. In this event, the CANBUS will continue to function, but the external interference created by high tension cables,
radio transmitters and other devices that generate radio signals will cause CANBUS alarms. These alarms will generally be erased
automatically, but may also return very frequently. These means that problems could arise with some of the tractor systems which
cannot be solved by an electrical/electronic diagnosis of the components associated with the defective system but only by resolving
the problem with the CANBUS. When one of the two termination control units is disconnected, or if a CANBUS wire comes loose
from a connector of one these two control units, as in the previous case, a resistance of 120 Ohm may be measured at any point of
the system, but the cause of the problem may be removed by repairing the control unit connection. If the two CANBUS wires were
shortcircuited to each other, the resistance would be zero (0 Ohm). In this case all the control units would signal all the detectable
faults. The same would happen if one of the two wires should short to earth or to a positive feed of one of the two CANBUS wires.
20-98
30 - Method of intervention
30-1
Method of intervention
30.1 - B0 - Engine
30.1.1 - Engine - Separation from the transmission (B0.00.02) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85)
Previous operations:
See para. 30.2.1 - Changing the coolant a... - page 30-143 - (C0.01.02)
See para. 30.6.11 - Air conditioning syste... - page 30-508 - (G0.09.01)
See para. 30.6.5 - Fenders - page 30-497 - (G0.04.01)
See para. 30.2.8 - Exhaust pipe - Tractor... - page 30-153 - (C0.06.02)
See para. 30.2.7 - Silencer - page 30-152 - (C0.06.01)
See para. 30.5.17 - 4WD shaft - page 30-473 - (F0.04.01)
See para. 30.4.14 - Bleeding air from the ... - page 30-412 - (E0.03.01)
Separating the engine from the transmission
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the negative terminal (–) of the battery and apply the parking brake.
2. Remove screw (1) and remove bracket (2).

Disconnect pipes (3).
m Label the pipes to avoid confusion on refitting.
Fig. 241
3. For versions with front PTO
Disconnect cable clamp (5) from battery positive terminal (4).
Disconnect relay support assy (7) from battery support (6).
Fig. 242
4. For versions with air conditioning
Disconnect air conditioning pipes (8) and (9).
Fig. 243
30-2
5. For versions with cab
Remove nuts (10) and disconnect pipes (11) and (12) from bracket (13).
Loosen clamps (14) and disconnect heater pipes (15).
Fig. 244
6. For all versions
Disconnect connectors (16), remove screw (17) and move brake and clutch
fluid compensation tank (18) towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 245
7. Remove screw (19) and move bracket (13) forwards.
Fig. 246
8. Loosen nut (20) and remove clamp (21).
Fig. 247
9. Disconnect connector (22) and power connectors (23).
Fig. 248
30-3
10. Loosen clamps (24) and (25). Disconnect fuel delivery and return pipes
(26) and (27).
Fig. 249
11. Disconnect accelerator cable (28).
Fig. 250
12. Remove screws (29) and tilt hood support (30) towards the front of the
tractor.
Fig. 251
13. Remove surround (31).
Fig. 252
14. For versions with trailer air braking
Remove union (32) and disconnect pipe (33) from compressor (34).
m Renew the copper washers on reassembly.
Fig. 253
30-4
15. For versions with front lift control only
Disconnect pipes (35), remove screw (36) and overturn valves assy (37)
towards the front of the tractor.
Before disconnecting pipes (35), close valves (37) (turning coun-
terclockwise) and operate lift control lever to discharge all residual
pressure in the circuit.
Plug the pipes to prevent the entry of impurities.
Fig. 254
16. Position a trolley jack “A” under the engine sump and a stand “B” under the
clutch housing.
Drive two wedges “C” between the front axle support and the axle to pre-
vent the engine dropping when it is moved.
Fig. 255
17. Remove screw (38) and nuts (39) (n°2) on both sides.
Fig. 256
18. Remove upper screws (40) and separate the engine from the clutch hous-
ing by applying force to both front wheels.
Fig. 257
30-5
Connection
Connect transmission and engine by performing the separation steps in reverse order:
Procedure 22
l To facilitate instillation of the shafts, turn the crankshaft slightly in both directions.
Before inserting the transmission input shaft in the clutch assembly, insert the rear PTO control shaft and make sure that it is
correctly engaged in the flywheel.
Screws: M12 = 102±5 Nm - M16 = 254±12 Nm
Nuts: 254±12 Nm
Apply a film of lubricant to the locating dowels and mating surfaces.
Mating surfaces and dowels: oil
Procedure 6
l Delivery (5/8”-18UNF): 13.6÷20.3 Nm (10-15 lb.ft.)
Return (7/8”-14UNF): 35.3÷42.0 Nm (26-31 lb.ft.)
Bleed the air from the hydraulic clutch system.
Bleed the air from the brake circuits.
30.1.2 - Engine - Separation from the transmission (B0.00.02) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Separating from the transmission
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal (-) and apply the parking brake.

IMPORTANT
Label the hoses to avoid confusion on refitting.
Fig. 257
Disconnect relay support assembly (7) from battery support (6).
Fig. 257
30-6
Fig. 257
Fig. 257
6. For all versions
Fig. 257
Fig. 257
Fig. 258
30-7
9. Loosen clips (22) and (23). Disconnect fuel supply and return pipes (24)
and (25).
Fig. 259
Fig. 260
11. Remove screws (27) and tilt hood support (28) forwards.
Fig. 261
Fig. 262
Fig. 263
30-8
14. For versions with front lift
Disconnect pipes (33), remove screw (34) and tilt valves assembly (35)
towards the front of the tractor.
IMPORTANT
m Before disconnecting pipes (33), close valves (35) (turning coun-

terclockwise) and operate lift control lever to discharge all residual Fig. 264
IMPORTANT
Plug the pipes to prevent the ingress of dirt.
15. Position a trolley jack “A” under the engine sump and a stand “B” under the
clutch housing.
Drive two wedges “C” between the front axle support and the axle to pre-
vent the engine dropping when it is moved.
Fig. 265
16. Remove screw (36) and the two nuts (37) on both sides.
Fig. 266
17. Remove upper screws (38) and separate the engine from the clutch hous-
ing by pushing both front wheels.
Fig. 267
30-9
Reconnection
Reconnect the transmission and engine by reversing the separation procedure:
Procedures 16 - 17
l To facilitate installation of the shafts, turn the crankshaft slightly in both directions.
l Screws: M12 = 102±5 Nm - M16 = 254±12 Nm
l Nuts: 254±12 Nm
l Apply a film of lubricant to the locating dowels and mating surfaces.
l Mating surfaces and dowels: oil
Procedure 5
l Delivery (5/8”-18UNF): 13.6-20.3 Nm (10-15 lb.ft.)
l Return (7/8”-14UNF): 35.3-42.0 Nm (26-31 lb.ft.)
IMPORTANT
30.1.3 - Engine (B0.00.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)

See para. 30.5.1 - Front pivot bracket - page 30-417 - (F0.01.01)
See para. 30.1.1 - Engine - Separation fr... - page 30-2 - (B0.00.02)
REMOVAL
Fig. 268
Disconnect relay support assy (7) from battery support (6).
Fig. 269
30-10
Fig. 270
Fig. 271
5. For all versions
Fig. 272
Fig. 273
7. Loosen nut (20) and remove clamp (21).
Fig. 274
30-11
Fig. 275
9. Loosen clamps (24) and (25). Disconnect fuel delivery and return pipes
(26) and (27).
Fig. 276
Fig. 277
tractor.
Fig. 278
Fig. 279
30-12
Fig. 280
14. Position a stand “A” under the clutch housing.
Fig. 281
15. Remove screw (35) and nuts (36) (n°2) on both sides.
Fig. 282
16. Position a suitable jack under engine (37).
Fig. 283
17. Remove the two upper screws (38) (n°2) and remove engine assembly
(37).
Fig. 284
30-13
Installation
Refitting is the reverse of removal. Use caution in relation to the following procedures:
Procedure 17
l To facilitate instillation of the shafts, turn the crankshaft slightly in both directions.
Before inserting the transmission input shaft in the clutch assembly, insert the rear PTO control shaft and make sure that it is
correctly engaged in the flywheel.
Procedures 15-17
l Screws: M12 = 102±5 Nm - M16 = 254±12 Nm
Nuts: 254±12 Nm
Apply a film of lubricant to the locating dowels and mating surfaces.
Mating surfaces and dowels: oil
Procedure 3
l Delivery (5/8”-18UNF): 13.6÷20.3 Nm (10-15 lb.ft.)
Return (7/8”-14UNF): 35.3÷42.0 Nm (26-31 lb.ft.)
30.1.4 - Engine (B0.00.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
See para. 30.5.1 - Front pivot bracket - page 30-417 - (F0.01.01)
Removal
IMPORTANT
Fig. 284
Disconnect relay support assembly (7) from battery support (6).
Fig. 284
30-14
Fig. 284
Fig. 284
5. For all versions
Fig. 284
Fig. 284
7. Disconnect connector (20) and power supply connectors (21).
Fig. 285
30-15
8. Loosen clamps (22) and (23). Disconnect fuel feed and return pipes (24)
and (25).
Fig. 286
Fig. 287
10. Remove screws (27) and tilt hood support (28) forwards.
Fig. 288
Fig. 289
IMPORTANT
Renew the copper washers on reassembly.
Fig. 290
30-16
13. Position a stand “A” under the clutch housing.
Fig. 291
14. Remove screw (33) and the two nuts (34) on both sides.
Fig. 292
15. Position a suitable jack under the engine (35).
Fig. 293
16. Remove the two upper screws (36) and remove the completely engine as-
sembly (35).
Fig. 294
30-17
Refitting
Refit by following the removal steps in reverse order and carry out the following procedures:
Procedure 16
l To facilitate installation of the shafts, turn the crankshaft slightly in both directions.
Procedures 14-16
l Screws: M12 = 102±5 Nm - M16 = 254±12 Nm
l Nuts: 254±12 Nm
l Apply a film of lubricant to the locating dowels and mating surfaces.
l Mating surfaces and dowels: oil
Procedure 3
l Delivery (5/8”-18UNF): 13.6-20.3 Nm (10-15 lb.ft.)
l Return (7/8”-14UNF): 35.3-42.0 Nm (26-31 lb.ft.)
IMPORTANT
30.1.5 - Checking the compression pressure

Special tools:
l Adapter: 5.9035.113.0
Remove injectors,
See para. 30.1.30 - Check injectors - page 30-135
.
Check and adjust valve clearance if necessary,
See para. 30.1.23 - Checking and setting t... - page 30-106
.
Compression pressure
1. Install connecting piece 5.9035.113.0 with sealing ring.
Fig. 295
2. Fit claws in place. Tighten bolt.
Fig. 296
30-18
3. Screw on adapter for connecting element 5.9035.113.0.
Fig. 297
4. Connect compression gauge 5.9035.101.0.
Crank engine with starter.
Fig. 298
5. Carry out a compression measurement for each cylinder.
Compression: 30 – 38 bar
The measured compression depends on the speed of the starter during the
measurement and on the altitude of the site of installation of the engine.
Limit values cannot be specified exactly therefore.
A compression measurement should be considered hence only as a com-
parative measurement of all cylinders of an engine. If the measurement
results in a variation of more than 15%, trouble shooting should take place
in form of a complete disassembly of the cylinder unit.
Fig. 299
6. Remove compression tester 5.9035.101.0 and connecting element
5.9035.113.0.
Install injectors ,
See para. 30.1.30 - Check injectors - page 30-135
Fig. 300
30-19
30.1.6 - Dismantling of engine
Special tools:
l Engine assembly stand 5.9035.096.0
l Angled clamping plate 5.9035.147.0
l Extractor 5.9035.126.0
l Special wrench 5.9035.129.0
l Dolly for torsional vibration damper 5.9035.142.0
l Extractor pulling device 5.9035.143.0
l Dolly for center nut, fan 5.9035.144.0
l Open jawed wrench 5.9035.145.0
The repair operations described refers to the standard version i.e. components for customizing the engine are not considered.
Dismantling
1. Mount angled clamping plate 5.9035.147.0.
Fig. 301
2. Chuck engine in double sided swiveltype assembly stand 5.9035.096.0 and
align. Tighten bolts.
Drain and collect residual oil and coolant and dispose of properly in accor-
dance with anti-pollution regulations.
Fig. 302
3. NOTE:
Caution: left hand thread!
Remove fan using open jaw wrench 5.9035.145.0 and dolly 5.9035.144.0.
For partial disassembly turn engine by 180° and remove crankcase breath-
er first. Collect residual oil and coolant and dispose of in accordance with
anti-pollution regulations.
Fig. 303
30-20
4. CAUTION
Fan must not be placed down in horizontal position!
Place fan down in upright position.
Fig. 304
5. NOTE:
Remove ribbed V-belt via pulley 2 first.
Relieve pressure of ribbed V-belt via pulley 1 in direction of the arrow.
Fig. 305
6. Pull-off cable connector from generator set and screw-off terminal end.
Fig. 306
7. Remove generator set, fuel line and fuel pump.
Fig. 307
30-21
8. Remove fan drive.
Fig. 308
9. Remove coolant pump
Fig. 309
10. Remove tensioning pulley.
Fig. 310
11. Remove bracket and suspension plate.
Fig. 311
30-22
12. NOTE:
Collect escaping fuel and dispose of in accordance with
Remove fuel feed line
Fig. 312
13. NOTE:
Replace connecting socket by a new one.
Remove connecting socket and fan bracket.
Fig. 313
14. NOTE:
Close apertures of exhaust turbocharger.
Remove breather pipe. Slacken hose collar using spring clamp pliers
5.9035.112.0 to this end. Remove lube oil pipe, oil return pipe and exhaust
turbocharger.
Fig. 314
15. Slacken terminal on starter and pull-off. Remove starter.
Fig. 315
30-23
16. Remove exhaust manifold.
Fig. 316
17. Release cable connector and pull off from temperature sensor. Remove
fixing clamp.
Fig. 317
18. Release and pull off cable connector from cut-off solenoid and governor.
Fig. 318
19. Remove control line.
Fig. 319
30-24
20. Remove governor
Fig. 320
21. Remove pressure control valve.
Fig. 321
22. Remove cover plate and inspection cover.
Fig. 322
23. Remove retainer (arrow) and charge air pipe.
Fig. 323
30-25
24. Remove pressure holding valve and fuel line.
Fig. 324
25. NOTE:
Collect coolant and dispose of in accordance with anti-pol-
lution regulations.
Remove oil dip stick. Remove water box and plug-in element.
Fig. 325
26. NOTE:
Collect fuel and dispose of in accordance with anti-pollution
regulations.
Remove fuel filter housing. Remove heating rod.
Fig. 326
27. NOTE:
Collect residual oil and coolant and dispose of in accor-
Remove oil cooler housing.
Fig. 327
30-26
28. NOTE:
Plug opening.
Remove cut-off solenoid.
Fig. 328
29. NOTE:
Use claw grip wrench 5.9035.104.0.
Remove injection pipes
Fig. 329
30. NOTE:
Use extractor pulling device 5.9035.143.0 in combina-
tion with tool 5.9035.126.0 if jammed. Use extractor
5.9035.130.0 for pulling out the sealing ring.
Remove tensioning claws and take out injector valves
Fig. 330
31. Remove rocker arms and lift out pushrods
Fig. 331
30-27
32. NOTE:
Use Torx wrench socket E14, 5.9035.106.0.
Remove cylinder head.
Fig. 332
33. NOTE:
Plug openings.
Take out cylinder head gasket. Remove injection pump flange and pull out
injection pumps
Fig. 333
34. Pull out roller tappet together with shims.
Fig. 334
35. NOTE:
Retain torsional vibration damper with dolly 5.9035.142.0 and remove.
Fig. 335
30-28
36. NOTE:
Use Torx wrench sockets E20, 5.9035.107.0 and E14,
5.9035.106.0.
Remove adapter housing.

Retain flywheel and remove.
Fig. 336
37. NOTE:
Collect residual oil and coolant and dispose of in accor-
Turn engine by 180°.

Remove oil pan.
Fig. 337
38. Remove front cover.
Fig. 338
39. Remove timing case cover.
Fig. 339
30-29
40. Remove idler gear and guide bushing. Take out control rod.
Fig. 340
41. Remove piston together with connecting rod.
Fig. 341
42. Remove main bearing cap. Take out crankshaft together with crankshaft
bearing and thrust washers.
Fig. 342
43. Remove drive gears for compensation shafts, if any.
Fig. 343
30-30
44. Remove thrust covers for compensation shafts, if any.
Fig. 344
45. Remove compensation shafts, if any.
Fig. 345
46. NOTE:
Hook up engine on one side in assembly stand for this pur-
pose.
Press down all tappets. Remove camshaft.
Fig. 346
47. Take out tappets.
Fig. 347
30-31
48. Turn engine by 180°.
Press out oil jet nozzles.
Check oil ducts for free passage.
Fig. 348
30.1.7 - Re-assembly of engine

Special tools:
l Dial gauge M2T 5.9035.116.0
l Measuring bar 5.9035.117.0
l Device for measuring and locking control rod 5.9035.118.0
l Adjusting pin for mass balancing shafts 5.9035.119.0
l Measuring device 5.9035.121.0
l Graduated disk 5.9035.122.0
l Adapter for graduated disk 5.9035.123.0
l Pointer for graduated disk 5.9035.124.0
l Tightening angle dial indicator 5.9035.125.0
l Special wrench for injection line 5.9035.129.0
l Piston ring compressor dia. 98 mm 5.9035.136.0
l Piston ring compressor dia. 101 mm 5.9035.137.0
l Piston ring compressor rear 5.9035.136.0
l Piston ring compressor front 5.9035.138.0
l Dolly for torsional vibration damper 5.9035.142.0
l Dolly for center nut, fan 5.9035.144.0
l Open jawed wrench 5.9035.145.0
Oil injection nozzles
1. Press-in oil injection nozzles as far as they will go.
Fig. 349
30-32
Tappets/camshaft
1. Insert tappets.
Fig. 350
2. NOTE:
Hook up engine on one side in assembly stand for this pur-
pose.
Install camshaft
Fig. 351
Crankshaft bearing
1. Set internal dial gauge to 32.2 mm.
Fig. 352
2. Gauge width of crankshaft thrust bearing and note down dimension “a”.
Standard journal width: 32.2 + 0.04 mm
Limit for oversize: 32.6 + 0.04 mm
Fig. 353
30-33
3. Insert bearing shells.
Fig. 354
4. Insert bearing shell in main bearing cap.
Fig. 355
5. Place half thrust rings on thrust bearing cap. Gauge and note down width.
Dimension “b”.
Fig. 356
6. Determine end float.
Example:
m Dimension a = 32.23 mm
m Dimension b = 32.37 mm
Dimension a – dimension b = end float = 0.14 mm

Allowable end float: 0.10 – 0.28 mm
7. Mark crankshaft prior to installation.
Fig. 357
30-34
8. Mark and position camshaft.
Fig. 358
9. Introduce crankshaft. Marks must be exactly in line after installation.
Fig. 359
10. NOTE:
The overlay sides of the thrust washers must point towards
the cheeck surface of the crankshaft.
Insert half thrust rings without guide nose.
Fig. 360
11. NOTE:
The overlay sides of the thrust washers must point towards
the check surface of the crankshaft.
Bond thrust washer halves to the locating bearing cap by means of the
guide nose using a small quantity of grease.
Fig. 361
30-35
12. NOTE:
Bearing cap No. 1 at flywheel end.
Mount thrust bearing cap.
Fig. 362
13. Mount main bearing caps paying attention to the numbering.
Fig. 363
14. Tighten main bearing bolts to the specified tightening torque:
Initial tightening torque: 50 Nm
1st lock down angle 90°
2nd lock down angle 90°
Fig. 364
30-36
Mass balancing shafts BF4M 2012 (if any)
1. NOTE:
Turn out plug bolts.
Fig. 365
2. NOTE:
The load weight side must point towards the oil pan sealing
surface.
Fit mass balancing shaft.
Fig. 366
3. NOTE:
Bore of mass balancing shaft must be in line with bore on
crankshaft housing.
Screw adjusting pin 5.9035.119.0 for mass balancing shafts into crankcase
as far as it will go.
Fig. 367
4. Fit thrust washer and align relative to shaft axis. Tighten bolt.
Specified tightening torque: 29 Nm
Fig. 368
30-37
5. Set crankshaft cylinder 1 to TDC. TDC is reached once the marking on the
crankshaft coincides with the connection line of the centre points of crank-
shaft and camshaft.
Fig. 369
6. Fit idler gear and slightly press into recess of crankshaft gear.
Fig. 370
7. Mark opposite teeth.
Fig. 371
8. Turn crankshaft clockwise passing 3 teeth.
Fig. 372
30-38
9. Turn crankshaft counter-clockwise until bores overlap.
Fig. 373
10. NOTE:
Check centered position of bearing journal in bore by alter-
nate movement of the crankshaft.
Insert bearing journal.
Fig. 374
11. Fit new O-ring.
Fig. 375
12. Fit mounting disk.
Fig. 376
30-39
13. Tighten bolt
Fig. 377
14. NOTE:
The load weight side must face the oil pan sealing surface.
Install second mass balancing shaft
Fig. 378
15. NOTE:
Bore of mass balancing shaft must overlap with bore in
crankcase.
Screw adjusting pin 5.9035.119.0 for mass balancing shafts into crankcase
as far as it will go.
Fig. 379
16. Mount thrust disk and align relative to axis of shaft.
Fig. 380
30-40
17. Tighten bolt.
Fig. 381
18. Insert idler gear so as to make bores overlap.
Fig. 382
19. Insert bearing journals
Fig. 383
20. Fit mounting disk.
Fig. 384
30-41
21. Tighten bolt
Fig. 385
22. Remove both adjusting bolts.
Fig. 386
23. Turn in screw plugs together with new Cu sealing rings and tighten.
Specified tightening torque: 9 + 4 Nm
Fig. 387
30-42
Idler gear / governor
1. NOTE:
Lightly oil bearing point of intermediate gear. Oil must not
come into contact with the locking compound for the fasten-
ing bold.
Wet threaded bore of fastening bolt in crankcase with specifing locking
compound. Insert intermediate gear for governor complete with bearing
journal.
Fig. 388
2. Insert fastening bolt and tighten.
Tightening specification:
Initial tightening torque 30 Nm
Final tightening angle 90°
Fig. 389
Control rod
1. Fit control rod with guide bushing
Fig. 390
2. Screw in screw and tighten according to tightening specification.
Fig. 391
30-43
Timing case cover
1. Apply some specific sealing compound to sealing surface of timing case
cover.
Fig. 392
2. Fit timing case cover. Tighten bolts finger tight and align timing case cover
relative to oil pan sealing surface.
Fig. 393
3. Tighten bolts.
Specified tightening torque: 30 ± 3 Nm
Fig. 394
Front cover
1. Slightly grease rotors in front cover.
Fig. 395
30-44
2. Glue on gasket for front cover using some grease.
Fig. 396
3. Make sure the tension bush is in place.
Fig. 397
Turn engine by 180°. Sealing surface of oil pan must face downwards.
1. Position rotor relative to crankshaft.
Fig. 398
2. Fit front cover. Press cover upwards and align relative to oil pan sealing
surface. Start bolts.
Fig. 399
30-45
3. Tighten bolts.
Fig. 400
Shaft oil seal rings -front-

1. Fit guide bushing using tool 5.9035.138.0
Fig. 401
2. Slightly oil seal lip. Carefully fit new shaft seal ring . Add spacer washers
according to mounting depth.
2 washers -> Initial installation
1 washer -> 1st repair mounting depth
without washers -> max. mounting depth
Fig. 402
3. NOTE:
Shaft oil seal ring is now in its pre-selected mounting depth.
Fit mounting sleeve and press into device as far as it will go.
Fig. 403
30-46
- flywheel end -
1. Fit guide bushing using tool 5.9035.136.0
Fig. 404
2. Slightly oil seal lip. Carefully fit new shaft seal ring. Add spacer washes ac-
cording to mounting depth.
2 washers -> Initial installation
1 washer -> 1st repair mounting depth
without washers -> max. mounting depth
Fig. 405
3. NOTE:
Shaft oil seal ring is now in its preselected mounting depth.
Fit mounting sleeve and press into device as far as it will go.
Make sure the centering bush is in place, insert as necessary.
Fig. 406
30-47
Piston complete with connecting rod
1. Incorporate big end bearing shells in connecting rod.
Fig. 407
2. Piston ring gaps must be staggered by 90 – 120° relative to each other.
Fig. 408
3. NOTE:
Flywheel symbol must face towards flywheel.
Turn engine by 90°. Introduce piston complete with connecting rod into
cylinder crankcase.
Use piston ring compressor size according to piston diameter.
Piston ring compressor 98 mm 5.9035.136.0
Piston ring compressor 101 mm 5.9035.137.0
Fig. 409
4. Press connecting rod against crankpin. Fit pertinent big-end bearing cap.
Fig. 410
30-48
5. Tighten new connecting rod bolts.
Specified tightening torque:
Initial tightening torque: -> 30 Nm
1st lock down angle -> 60°
2nd lock down angle -> 30°
Fig. 411
6. Make sure that connecting rods can be easily moved back and forth on the
crankpin.
Fig. 412
Install injection pumps

Gauge control rod travel path without injection pumps
1. Turn engine by 90°.
Fit measuring device 5.9035.118.0 for control rod.
Fig. 413
2. Measure distance from device to stop position of control rod.
Fig. 414
30-49
3. Measure distance from device to start position of control rod.
The difference start- to stop position is the control rod travel path.
Example:
Stop position: 30.7 mm
Start position 13.4 mm
Control rod travel path 17.3 mm
Specified size: 17.0 mm – 17.5 mm
Fig. 415
4. Turn device. Use stop bolt for pressing control rod manually into stop posi-
tion.
Fig. 416
5. Fit graduated disc 5.9035.122.0 to flywheel flange.
Fig. 417
6. Fit pointer 5.9035.124.0.
Fig. 418
30-50
Determine firing TDC of piston corresponding to the injection pump to be set
1. Position measuring bar 5.9035.117.0 with spacers for gauging TDC and
piston projection. Turn crankshaft in the sense of rotation of the engine until
the pointer of dial gauge 5.9035.116.0 has reached its point of reversal. Set
dial gauge to “0”.
Fig. 419
2. Turn crankshaft by approx. 90° in opposite direction to the sense of rota-
tion of the engine. Turn crankshaft then again in direction of the sense of
rotation of the engine until 8 mm before TDC (dial gauge point of reversal).
Set graduated disc to “0”.
Fig. 420
3. Turn crankshaft by approx. 90° in the sense of rotation of the engine until
8 mm before TCD (dial gauge point of reversal). Read-off indicated value.
Example: 50°
Fig. 421
4. Divide indicated value by 2. This value is the TCD value.
Example: (0° + 50°)/2 = 25° specified value
Turn crankshaft to this halved value.
Fig. 422
30-51
5. Crankshaft must not be moved any longer.
Slacken the 2 knurled head screws and set graduated disc to “0”.
Fig. 423
6. Insert roller tappets.
Fig. 424
Determine fuel delivery cut-in point - Bosch injection pump

1. Set dial gauge 5.9035.116.0 in measuring device 5.9035.121.0 to O under
pre-tension.
The fuel delivery cut-in point and the type of camshaft are indicated on the
name plate.
Reference dimension: 124 mm
Fig. 425
2. Set roller tappets corresponding to the injection pump to be adjusted to
base circle measurement. Turn crankshaft by approx. 90° in opposite direc-
tion of the engine rotation.
Fig. 426
30-52
3. Carefully insert measuring device.
Fig. 427
4. Gauge dimension “L” and note down in the table,
See para. 30.1.7 - Re-assembly of engine - page 30-32
Fig. 428
5. NOTE:
When the pre-stroke has been set, the sense of rotation
may not be changed any longer.
Turn dial gauge by means of the external ring to zero position of the pointer.
Fig. 429
6. Turn crankshaft in direction of rotation of engine until dial gauge indicates
size of pre-stroke.
See Table 1.
Example: Fuel delivery cut-in point: 9°
Camshaft type L
Pre-stroke 3.95 mm
Fig. 430
30-53
7. Read off ACTUAL fuel delivery cut-in point and enter in Table 1,
Fig. 431
8. Read-off size “A” = index for injection pump length and enter in Table ,
Fig. 432
9. Remove measuring device.
Determine shim size,
Fig. 433
10. NOTE:
Measurements described under items 48 – 63 to be carried
out for each injection pump.
Place shim as determined on roller tappet.
Fig. 434
30-54
Injection pump
1. NOTE:
Assembly steps described under items 64 - 70 to be carried
out for each injection pump.
Turn injection pump control lever more or less to centre position.
Fig. 435
2. Place roller tappets of corresponding cylinder on base circle.
Apply specific compound to mounting bore in crankcase and O-rings of in-
jection pump. Insert injection pump steering lever carefully into control rod.
Fig. 436
3. NOTE:
Chamfered end must face to injection pump body.
Fit flange.
Fig. 437
4. Slightly oil bolts and tighten uniformly to a tightening torque of 5 Nm.
Fig. 438
30-55
5. Slacken bolts again by 60°.
Fig. 439
6. Carefully turn injection pump anti-clockwise up to a noticeable stop using
a wrench.
Fig. 440
7. NOTE:
Start with the corresponding external bolt – the one remot-
est from the flywheel.
Turn-in bolts again by 60° and gradually tighten to a tightening torque of 7

Nm, 10 Nm and 30 Nm.
Fig. 441
30-56
Gauge control rod travel path with injection pumps
1. Remove retaining bolt from device. Turn device.
Fig. 442
2. Gauge distance from device to control rod stop position.
Fig. 443
3. Gauge distance from device to control rod start position.
The difference between start and stop positions is the control rod travel
path.
Example:
Stop position: 30.5 mm
Start position: 13.4 mm
Control rod travel path 17.1 mm
Control rod travel path minimum 16.8 mm
Fig. 444
Check ease of movement of control rod

1. Slow insertion of the control rod may not give rise to any irregular resis-
tance.
After release the control rod must be pressed back into home position from
any other position.
Fig. 445
30-57
2. Remove retaining device, pointer and graduated disc.
Fig. 446
Gauge control rod recess dimension for governor adjustment

1. Gauge recess dimension timing case cover – stop position.
This dimension must be indicated for a replacement or repair of the gov-
ernor.
Fig. 447
Flywheel
1. NOTE:
Bolts if proven to be fit for use can be re-used max. 5 times.
Fit flywheel, using a self-made guide mandrel.

Retain flywheel. Tighten bolts.
Initial tightening torque:
All bolts: 30 Nm
1st lock down angle:
Fig. 448
All bolts: 60°
2nd lock down angle:
Bolts, 30 mm long 30°
Bolts 35 – 85 mm long 60°
2. Knock locking plugs into thread bores if necessary.
Fig. 449
30-58
Adapter housing
1. NOTE:
Use Torx wrench socket E14, 5.9035.106.0 and E20,
5.9035.107.0.
Insert tension bushings.

Fit adapter housing and tighten bolts cross-wise.
Bolts M12: 99 Nm
Bolts M16: 243 Nm
Fig. 450
Ribbed V-belt pulley / torsional vibration damper

1. Insert tension bushing and tension pin as necessary.
Fig. 451
2. When fitting the torsional vibration damper, the markings on crankshaft and
torsional vibration damper must overlap.
Fig. 452
3. NOTE:
Use Torx wrench socket 5.9035.107.0. Bolts if proven to be
fit for use can be re-used 5 times.
Fit torsional vibration damper and retain using dolly 5.9035.142.0.

Tighten bolts.
1st lock down angle -> 60°
2nd lock down angle -> 60°
Fig. 453
30-59
Cylinder head
1. Select cylinder head gasket.
Place measuring bar with spacers 5.9035.117.0 on sealing surface of cylin-
der crankcase and set dial gauge 5.9035.116.0 to “0”.
Fig. 454
2. NOTE:
All pistons must be gauged.
Place dial gauge on reference points of piston and determine largest piston
projection.
Fig. 455
3. Observe reference points.
Fig. 456
4. Compare highest value with that of table and select the corresponding cyl-
inder head gasket.
Table 22
Piston projection Code on cylinder head gasket

0.33 - 0.55 mm 1 hole
0.56 - 0.65 mm 2 holes
0.66 - 0.76 mm 3 holes
Fig. 457
30-60
5. NOTE:
Sealing surface of cylinder head gasket must be clean and
free from oil. Make sure mounting sleeves are fitted.
Fit new cylinder head gasket.
Fig. 458
6. Mount cylinder head.
Fig. 459
7. NOTE:
Sealing surfaces must be clean and free from oil. Make sure
tension pins are fitted. Cylinder head screws – if proven to
be fit for use - can be re-used 5 times.
Slightly oil short cylinder head screws, tighten finger-tight and insert thrust
rods.
Fig. 460
8. Mount rocker arm brackets and align relative to thrust rods/ valves.
Fig. 461
30-61
9. NOTE:
Cylinder head screws – if proven to be fit for use - can be
re-used 5 times.
Slightly oil long cylinder head screws, tighten finger – tight and insert thrust
rods. Insert M8 screws and tighten.
Fig. 462
10. Tighten M8 bolts to a tightening torque to 21 Nm.
Fig. 463
11. NOTE:
Observe sequence for the tightening of the cylinder head
screws and use tightening angle dial indicator 5.9035.125.0.
See para. 10.1.1 - Technical data - page 10-2
Fig. 464
30-62
Charge air pipe
1. NOTE:
Gaskets are kept in place by the bolts.
Place charge air pipe with sealing surface showing upwards.

Insert bolts into the charge air pipe from below and slide new gaskets onto
screw thread.
Fig. 465
2. Place charge air pipe together with gaskets onto cylinder head.
Start all bolts first.
Fig. 466
3. Tighten bolt for charge air pipe holder.
Fig. 467
Exhaust manifold
1. NOTE:
Tighten nuts starting from the location hole bore (centric)
and proceed in spiral form in outward direction. Coat nuts
with specific Never Seize Compound.
Fit exhaust manifold with new gaskets.
Fig. 468
30-63
Exhaust gas turbocharger
1. NOTE:
Apply specific Never Seize Compound to nuts.
Fit exhaust gas turbocharger with new seal.

Fig. 469
Oil return pipe

1. Mount upper part of oil return pipe with new gasket to turbocharger and
tighten.
Fig. 470
2. NOTE:
Apply specific compound to O-rings. Slide oil return pipe
components together. Press lower part of oil return pipe into
crankcase.
Mount new O-rings to lower part of oil return pipe.
Fig. 471
3. Fix lower part of oil return pipe to crankcase by use of the mounting bracket.
Fig. 472
30-64
4. NOTE:
Pre-oil exhaust gas turbocharger by putting some drops of
engine oil into the oil feed bore.
Fit lube oil pipe.

Fit hollow screws with new Cu seals.
Fig. 473
5. Fix upper part of oil return pipe to lower part of oil return pipe and mount
lube oil line to oil return line by screwing.
Fig. 474
Starter
1. Mount starter, start and tighten bolts.
Fig. 475
2. NOTE:
Install cable so as to produce no tensile stress and fix to
holders.
Fix cable connector (terminal 50).

Specified tightening torque: 1.3 Nm
Fig. 476
30-65
Governor
1. NOTE:
Sealing surface must be free from oil and grease.
Apply ample quantities of specific Sealing Compound to timing case

grooves.
Fig. 477
2. NOTE:
Sealing surface must be free from oil and grease. Slightly
turn governor gear, if necessary, to permit meshing.
Apply specific sealing compound to governor. Thickness of sealing bead

1.5 mm.
Fig. 478
Fit governor.
1. NOTE:
When replacing the governor, existing dimension of control
rod recess must be set on the new governor.
Specified tightening torque: 17 ± 1.5 Nm

Bolt tightening sequence: 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5.
Fig. 479
Injection valves / injection lines

1. NOTE:
The notch on the injection valve must face away from the
tensioning claw.
Slide new sealing ring to injection valve using some grease and insert injec-
tion valve.
Fig. 480
30-66
2. Mount tensioning claw and slightly screw in.
Fig. 481
3. NOTE:
Re-bending is not allowed. Injection lines must not be used
twice.
Fit new injection lines with sealing rubber elements. Fit cap screw finger-
tight.
Fig. 482
4. Tighten bolts of claws.
Fig. 483
5. NOTE:
Use claw grip wrench 5.9035.104.0
Pre-tighten cap nuts of injection lines on injection pump and injection valves
to a tightening torque of approx. 5 Nm.
Tighten cap nuts now.
Specified tightening torque: 25 + 3.5 Nm
Fig. 484
30-67
Engine stop device
1. NOTE:
Slightly oil O-ring.
Mount new O-ring.
Fig. 485
2. Press control rod into stop position using the stop lever and retain. Install
engine stop device. Tighten bolts.
Fig. 486
Oil cooler casing

1. Fit new profiled seals and a shaped seal.
Fig. 487
2. NOTE:
The sealing surface must be clean.
Mount oil cooler casing.

Tighten bolts crosswise.
Final tightening torque: 30 Nm
Fig. 488
30-68
Heating rod – coolant preheating
1. Fit heating rod with new O-ring and tighten.
Fig. 489
Fuel filter housing

1. Fit fuel filter housing.
Fig. 490
Water box
1. NOTE:
Apply specific mounting compound to O-rings.
Fit plug-in element with new O-rings.

Fit oil pressure sensor with new sealing ring.
Fig. 491
2. Slide water box with new seal onto plug-in element and mount.
Fig. 492
30-69
3. Fit fuel line and pressure holding valve with new Cu-seals.
Pressure holding valve: 30 Nm
Hollow screw: 39 Nm
Fit pipe collar to water box.
Fig. 493
Inspection cover
1. Fit new gasket and align.
Fig. 494
2. NOTE:
Make sure sealing rubber elements are properly seated in
inspection cover.
Fit inspection cover and cover plate.

Tighten bolts.
Fig. 495
Control line
1. Fit control line.
Hollow screw: 18 Nm
Pipe collar: 13 Nm
Fig. 496
30-70
Pressure control valve
1. Fit pressure control valve with a new O-ring.
Fig. 497
2. NOTE:
Use spring clamp pliers 5.9035.112.0
Fit bleeder hose.
Fig. 498
3. Mount bleeder tube.
Fig. 499
4. Tighten pipe collar.
Fig. 500
30-71
Fan bracket
1. Apply specific sealing compound.
Fig. 501
2. NOTE:
Clean sealing surfaces before mounting and check locking
plug for tightness.
Fit fan bracket with new sealing rings.

Fig. 502
3. NOTE:
Provide for a complete new connecting socket.
Install new connecting socket for fuel feed line.

Fig. 503
30-72
Coolant pump
1. NOTE:
Apply specific mounting compound to O-ring. Observe prop-
er position of installation.
Fit coolant pump with new sealing ring.

Fig. 504
Bracket / generator
1. Mount bracket, suspension plate and generator.
Fig. 505
2. Fit flat plug pin and fix cable end ear.
Fig. 506
Fuel pump
1. Install fuel pump
Fig. 507
30-73
2. Fit fuel line with new Cu sealing rings.
Fig. 508
Tensioning pulley
1. Install tensioning pulley.
Fig. 509
Fan drive
1. Fit fan drive.
Fig. 510
Ribbed V-belt
1. Press tensioning pulley 1 in direction of the arrow. Mount ribbed V-belt –
last on pulley 2.
Release tensioning pulley in opposite direction of the arrow until ribbed V-
belt is under tension.
Fig. 511
30-74
2. When re-using ribbed V-belt make sure wear limits are not exceeded.
Gauge distance “a” between the nose of the mobile tensioning arm and the
stop of the stationary tensioner housing.
If distance “a” is inferior to 3 mm, replace ribbed V-belt by a new one.
Fig. 512
Fan
1. NOTE:
Caution! Left hand thread – oiled
Fit fan using open jawed wrench 5.9035.145.0 and dolly 5.9035.144.0.
Fig. 513
2. Plug cable connector to cut-off solenoid and governor.
Fig. 514
3. Plug cable connector to temperature sensor.
Fig. 515
30-75
Oil pan
1. NOTE:
NOTE:
Sealing compound must not penetrate into oil suction bore.
Apply specific sealing compound to sealing surface and notches. Thick-

ness of sealing compound bead 3.6 mm Fig. 516
2. NOTE:
Make sure that O-ring and sealing bead are not displaced.
Place new gasket and fit oil pan.
Fig. 517
3. Tighten bolts alternately.
Fig. 518
30-76
30.1.8 - Removing and installing front cover
Special tools:
l Assembly tool for rear crankshaft seal 5.9035.139.0
l Assembly tool for front crankshaft seal 5.9035.138.0
l Dolly / torsional vibration damper 5.9035.142.0
- Front cover -
- V-belt
1. Remove V-belt.
V-belt for generator
Slacken bolts 1, 2 and 4. Release bolt 3 until V-belt is clear. Remove V-belt.
Fig. 519
2. V-belt for coolant and fuel pumps Slacken bolts 1 and 2. Press fuel pump 3
in direction of the arrow until V-belt is clear. Remove V-belt.
Fig. 520
- Ribbed V-belt
1. Press tensioning pulley 1 into direction of the arrow until ribbed V-belt is
clear. Remove ribbed V-belt – take off on pulley 2 first.
Fig. 521
2. NOTE:
Retain torsional vibration damper using dolly 5.9035.142.0 and remove.
Fig. 522
30-77
3. NOTE:
Apply a thick layer of grease to drill to prevent the ingress of
chips into the crankcase.
Drill a hole – approx. 3 mm dia. – for a self tapping screw into shaft seal
ring.
Fig. 523
4. NOTE:
Remove chips, if any, left from drilling.
Screw a self tapping screw of the corresponding size into the bore hole
and pull out using a suitable tool such as valve spring assembly lever
5.9035.111.0.
Fig. 524
5. Fit guide bushing.
Use assembly tool 5.9035.138.0.
Fig. 525
6. NOTE:
Sealing lip faces crankshaft.
Slightly oil seal lip. Carefully put on new shaft seal.
Fig. 526
30-78
7. Place spacer washers
2 washers: Initial assembly
1 washer: 1st repair mounting depth
0 washers: max. mounting depth
Fig. 527
8. NOTE:
The shaft seal sits now in its pre-selected mounting depth.
Mount assembly tool for front crankshaft seal 5.9035.138.0 and press into
device as far as it will go.
Fig. 528
9. Make sure the centering bush is installed in the crankshaft, install as nec-
essary.
Fig. 529
10. When mounting the V-belt / ribbed
V-belt pulley make sure that markings on the crankshaft and torsional vibra-
tion damper overlap.
Fig. 530
30-79
11. NOTE:
Use Torx wrench socket E20, 5.9035.107.0. Bolts – if prov-
en to be fit for use – can be re-used 5 times.
Fit torsional vibration damper and retain using dolly 5.9035.142.0.

Tighten bolts.
Initial tightening torque: 40 – 50 Nm
1st lock down angle: 60°
2nd lock down angle: 60°
Fig. 531
12. Mount V-belt and tension V-belt.
V-belt for generator
Adjust generator 5 in direction of the arrow by turning bolt 3 until the correct
V-belt tension has been achieved. Tighten bolts 1, 2 and 4.
V-belt tension:
Initial assembly: 450 ± 50 Nm
after 15 minutes operation
under load conditions 300 ± 50 Nm
re-used V-belts 300 ± 50 Nm
Fig. 532
13. V-belts for coolant and fuel pumps
Press fuel pump 3 in direction of the arrow until the correct V-belt tension
has been achieved. Tighten bolts 1 and 2.
V-belt tension:
Initial assembly: 450 ± 50 Nm
after 15 minutes operation
under load conditions 300 ± 50 Nm
re-used V-belts 300 ± 50 Nm
Fig. 533
14. Mount ribbed V-belt and tension V-belt.
Press tensioning pulley 1 in direction of the arrow. Mount ribbed V-belt –
last on pulley 2. Release tensioning pulley in opposite direction of the direc-
tion of the arrow until ribbed Vbelt is tensioned.
Fig. 534
30-80
15. Make sure that wear limits are not exceeded when re-using ribbed V-belts.
Guate distance “a” between the nose of the mobile tensioning arm and the
stop of the stationary tensioner housing.
If distance “a” is inferior to 3 mm, replace ribbed V-belt by a new one.
Fig. 535
30.1.9 - Repair of front cover

1. NOTE:
Refer to Chapter 4 for the installation of a new shaft oil seal
ring.
Knock out shaft oil seal ring.
Fig. 536
2. NOTE:
Rotors must turn freely.
Visually inspect front cover and replace as necessary.
Fig. 537
3. Remove lube oil pump for cleaning of front cover.
Fig. 538
30-81
4. Replace the complete front cover in the case of visible wear or damage of
individual components.
Fig. 539
5. NOTE:
The groove at the internal rotor must point to the inside.
Insert external and internal rotors.
Fig. 540
6. NOTE:
Observe the mounting direction of the internal rotor.
Put cover in place. Tighten bolts.

Specified tightening torque: 8.5 ± 1 Nm
Fig. 541
30-82
30.1.10 - Repair of crankcase
Special tools:
l Assembly tool for control rod sleeves 5.9035.128.0
l Assembly tool for MAG sleeves 5.9035.140.0
l Assembly tool for camshaft sleeves 5.9035.141.0
Clean crankcase and inspect for damage
1. Remove locking screws. Clean crankshaft and subject to a visual inspec-
tion for damage.
Fig. 542
Gauge bearing bores / bearing shells (if necessary)

1. Mount bearing cover /bearing shells and tighten bolts.
1st lock down angle 90°
2nd lock down angle 90°
Fig. 543
2. Use internal dial gauge for measuring bearing bores / bearing shells at
points “1” and “2” on planes “a” and “b”.
Nominal bore diameter:
Bearing bores 89.0 – 89.022 mm
Bearing shells 84.3 – 84.072 mm
Clearance bearing / crankshaft 0.03 – 0.092 mm
Fig. 544
30-83
Gauging of cylinders
1. NOTE:
For cylinder gauging, bearing covers must be properly in-
stalled.
Set internal dial gauge to 101 mm.
Fig. 545
2. Gauge cylinder diameter:
Nominal diameter: 101 + 0.02 mm
Wear limit: 101.1 mm
Fig. 546
3. Gauge cylinders in the longitudinal axis “a” and transversal axis “b” of en-
gine
Fig. 547
4. and also in planes 1-3
Crankcases can be honed up to oversize cylinders Ø 101.5 mm in our
Service
Centers if cylinders are worn out.
Fig. 548
30-84
Gauge camshaft bearing bushes
1. Set internal dial gauge to 63 mm.
Fig. 549
2. Schematic drawing for gauging bearing bushes at points 1 and 2 in planes
“a” and “b”.
Fig. 550
3. Gauge bearing bushes, replace by new ones, if necessary.
Nominal diameter: 63 + 0.054 mm
Fig. 551
Replace camshaft bearing bushes

1. Remove camshaft bearing bushes.
Use extractor tool 5.9035.141.0
Fig. 552
30-85
2. NOTE:
Observe correct position of lube oil bores. The lube oil bores
of the bearing on the flywheel end must be in line.
Fit new bearing sleeve from the flywheel end.
Fig. 553
3. Schematic drawing: Mounting position of the bearing sleeves.
Fig. 554
4. Insert bearing sleeve.
Use press-in tool 5.9035.141.0.
Fig. 555
30-86
Mass balancing – gauge bearing sleeves
Fig. 556
2. Schematic drawing showing how bearing sleeves are gauged at points 1
and 2 in planes “a” and “b”.
Fig. 557
3. Gauge bearing sleeves and replace as necessary
Nominal diameter: 54.06 – 54.105 mm
Fig. 558
Mass balancing – replace bearing balancer bushes

1. Pull out bearing bushes.
Use assembly tool for engine balancer bushes 5.9035.140.0
Fig. 559
30-87
2. Fit new bearing bush, mark accordingly and make sure that lube oil bores/
center bores are in line.
Use assembly tool 5.9035.140.0.
Fig. 560
3. Insert bearing bush.
Use assembly tool 5.9035.140.0
Fig. 561
Replace guide bushes for control rod

1. NOTE:
Use short assembly tool for engine balancer bushes
5.9035.128.0, outer Ø 25 mm.
Knock out front guide bush.
Fig. 562
2. NOTE:
Use long assembly tool 5.9035.128.0 for the guide bushes,
outer Ø 28 mm.
Knock guide bushing out from the flywheel end (only for BF6M engines).
Fig. 563
30-88
3. Place guide bushes onto short assembly tool 5.9035.128.0 with the cham-
fered side facing the crankcase.
Fig. 564
4. Fit centering device to front side of crankcase using assembly tool
5.9035.128.0.
Fig. 565
5. Insert guide bushing as far as it will go. Use assembly tool 5.9035.128.0.
Fig. 566
6. Only for BF6M engines.
Insert guide bush on the flywheel end as described under items 8.3 – 8.4,
however, from the flywheel end using the long assembly tool 5.9035.128.0.
Fig. 567
30-89
Mount screw plugs
1. NOTE:
Provide for new components for items 6, 7, 8 and 18 after
disassembly as a rule.
Check oil ducts for free passage.

Tighten screw plugs.
Provide for new O-rings for items 4 and 14.
Item 6: 95 ± 9.5 Nm
Item 7: 75 ± 7.5 Nm
Fig. 568
Items 4,8 and 14 35 ± 3.5 Nm
Item 18 10 ± 2 Nm
30.1.11 - Repair of mass balancing shaft

BF4M 2012
1. Gauge bearing journal.
Outer diameter: 53.98 – 54.00 mm
Fig. 569
2. Visually inspect gear for wear.
Fig. 570
30.1.12 - Checking the crankshaft

A worn out crankshaft can be repaired in our Service-Centers.
Crankshaft
1. Chuck crankshaft up on prism stand.
Fig. 571
30-90
2. NOTE:
Use the table of the measuring device for a conversion of
the measured values.
Check bearing journals for hardness.

Limit value: 500 HV 1
Fig. 572
3. Schematic drawing for the gauging of main bearing journals and crankpins
at points “1” and “2” in planes “a” and “b”.
Fig. 573
4. Gauge main bearing journal
Journal diameter 83.98 – 84.00 mm
Each undersize 0.25 mm
Limit for undersize 83.73 mm
Wear limit
Journal ovality 0.01 mm
Fig. 574
5. Gauge width of thrust bearing journal
Journal width 32.2 – 32.24 mm
Each oversize 0.4 mm
Limit for oversize 32.64 mm
Fig. 575
30-91
6. Gauge crankpins
Crankpin diameter 62.98 – 63.00 mm
Limit for undersize 62.73 mm
Wear limit
Crankpin ovality 0.01 mm
Fig. 576
7. Check crankshaft for true running
Out of roundness max.: 0.10 mm
Fig. 577
8. NOTE:
In the case of an existing groove mark the shaft seal can be
relocated.
Visually inspect running surfaces of shaft seals
Fig. 578
30-92
30.1.13 - Fan and air conditioning compressor drive belts
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Loosen nut (1) and unscrew tie rod (2) to slacken off drive belt (3).
Fig. 579
Using a pin punch, drive out pin (4) and withdraw PTO drive shaft (5) to-
wards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 580
4. For all versions
Remove the drive belt .
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Adjust the tension of the fan drive belt.
30.1.14 - Tension adjustment of the fan and air conditioning compressor drive belt
Tension adjustment
1. m Before adjusting the tension, carefully examine the drive belt for signs of wear. The belt must be renewed immediately
at the first sign of cracking, fraying or separation of the plies.
m Always replace both drivebelts at the same time.
DANGER
If new drivebelts are fitted, re-adjust the tension after approx. 50 operating hours.
30-93
2. Loosen nuts (1) and screws (2).
Fig. 581
3. Tighten tie-rod (3) forcing it gradually until obtaining belt deflection of 10-15
mm (0.4-0.6 in.) when applying a load of 10 kg (22 lb.) on the long section
of the belt.
mIn the case of a new belt, deflection should be 7-9 mm (0.276 - 0.355
in.).
Secure compressor (4) in place and re-check belt tension.
Fig. 582
30.1.15 - Alternator, fuel pump and water pump drive belt

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Loosen screws (1) and (2) securing the fuel pump, disengage alternator
drive belt (3) and remove it by passing it between the bottom of the crank-
shaft pulley and the front axle support.
Fig. 583
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Adjust drive belt tension.
30-94
30.1.16 - Tension adjustment of the alternator, fuel pump and water pump drive belt
Tension adjustment
1. Tension the belt using a “T” bar with a 3/4” drive extension, or a 3/4” angle
drive bar inserted in the aperture in the support of fuel pump (1).
Tension the drive belt by turning the bar clockwise and then tighten down
screws (2) and (3).
Fig. 584
2. To check that the tension is correct, use the tool and procedure indicated
in the engine manual.
Static deflection “A” on first fitting
m 13 mm belt: 450±50 N
Static deflection “A” after 15 minutes
m 13 mm belt: 300±50 N
DANGER
This check should be carried out with the engine cold.
Fig. 585
30.1.17 - Removing and installing the flywheel

- flywheel end -
1. Retain flywheel and remove.
Fig. 586
2. Proceed as described under items 5 – 6 for the removal of the shaft sealing
ring on the flywheel end.
Use valve spring assembly lever 5.9035.111.0.
Fig. 587
30-95
3. Fit guide bush.
Use assembly tool for rear crankshaft seal 5.9035.139.0.
Fig. 588
4. NOTE:
Seal lip faces crankshaft.
Slightly oil seal lip. Carefully fit new shaft seal.
Fig. 589
5. Fit spacer washers
2 washers: Initial assembly
1 washer: 1st repair mounting depth
0 washers: max. mounting depth
Fig. 590
6. NOTE:
Shaft seal now sits in its pre-selected mounting depth.
Fit assembly tool 5.9035.139.0 and press into device as far as it will go.
Fig. 591
30-96
7. Mount flywheel using a self made guide mandrel. Start bolts.
Fig. 592
8. NOTE:
Bolts if proven to be fit for use can be re-used 5 times.
Retain flywheel. Tighten bolts.

Initial tightening torque:
Bolts 30 – 45 mm long => 20 – 30 Nm
Bolts 50 – 85 mm long => 30 – 40 Nm
1st lock down angle:
Fig. 593
Bolts 30 – 85 mm long => 60°
2nd lock down angle:
Bolts 30 mm long => 30°
Bolts 35 – 85 mm long => 60°
9. Knock lock plugs into thread bores as far as they will go.
Fig. 594
30-97
30.1.18 - Repair of flywheel
Replace starter ring gear
1. NOTE:
Do not damage flywheel.
Bore out starter ring gear.
Fig. 595
2. Remove starter ring gear.
Fig. 596
3. Clean flywheel and visually inspect supporting flange.
Fig. 597
4. NOTE:
The bevelled side of the gears pointing away from the fly-
wheel.
Heat ring gear to max. 210 °C.

Position ring gear and bring to stop at flange.
Fig. 598
30.1.19 - Checking the piston

Special tools:
l Piston ring pliers 5.9035.134.0
l Trapezoidal groove wear gauge (Piston Ø 101 mm) 5.9035.135.0
l Trapezoidal groove wear gauge (Piston Ø 98 mm) 5.9035.148.0
30-98
Disassembly of connecting rod-piston unit
1. Remove circlips. Take out piston pin.
Fig. 599
2. Adjust piston ring pliers 5.9035.134.0 to piston diameter. Remove piston
rings.
Fig. 600
Inspect and gauge piston

1. Clean and visually inspect piston and ring grooves.
Fig. 601
2. NOTE:
Measurements to be carried out on a cylinder which does
not show any signs of wear.
Measure ring gap with feeler gauge.

Wear limits:
1st ring gap 0.80 mm
2nd ring gap 2.50 mm
3rd ring gap 1.15 mm
Fig. 602
30-99
3. Gauge piston ring trapezoidal groove with trapezoidal groove wear gauge
5.9035.135.0/5.9035.148.0.
Fig. 603
4. If the gap between the trapezoidal groove wear gauge
5.9035.135.0/5.9035.148.0 and the piston corresponds to “S2”, the piston
is fit for further use.
Fig. 604
5. If the trapezoidal groove wear gauge 5.9035.135.0/5.9035.148.0 has con-
tact with the piston, the piston must be replaced.
Fig. 605
6. NOTE:
Measurement to be made on new piston rings.
Measure second and third piston groove with feeler gauge.

Wear limits:
2nd ring gap 0.15 mm
3rd ring gap 0.10 mm
Fig. 606
30-100
7. Check piston pin for wear.
Piston pin diameter: 37.994 – 38.00 mm
Fig. 607
Piston assembly
1. Sequence and position of piston rings:
1.1. Keystone ring, tip facing combustion chamber
1.2. Tapered compression ring, top facing combustion chamber
1.3. Bevelled-edge slotted oil control ring, top facing combustion cham-
ber
Fig. 608
2. NOTE:
Spring gap of bevelled-edge ring to be offset by 180° rela-
tive to the ring gap. Use piston ring pliers 5.9035.134.0.
Fit piston rings.
Fig. 609
30.1.20 - Repair of connecting rod

Gauge big end bearing bore
1. NOTE:
Make sure dowel pins are in place.
Make sure that big end bearing cap mates with connecting rod.
Fig. 610
30-101
2. Mount big end bearing cap. Tighten bolts.
Initial tightening torque: 30 – 40 Nm
1st lockdown angle 60°
2nd lockdown angle 30°
Fig. 611
3. Set internal dial gauge to 66.6 mm
Fig. 612
4. Use internal dial gauge for gauging big end bearing bore at points “1” and
“2” in planes “a” and “b”.
Fig. 613
5. NOTE:
If the measured values deviate only slightly, additional mea-
surements are to be carried out with new bearing shells fit-
ted.
If the gauge readings agree with the specified readings, the necessary pre-
load will be obtained after fitting the bearing shells.
Fig. 614
30-102
6. Remove big end bearing cap and provide for new bearing shells. Mount big
end bearing cap. Tighten bolts.
Pre-load value: 30 – 40 Nm
1st lockdown angle 60°
2nd lockdown angle 30°
Fig. 615
7. NOTE:
If the readings do not exceed bearing tolerances by more
than 0.015 mm, the rod can be used further. Beyond this lim-
it value the connecting rod must be replaced by a new one.
Set internal dial gauge. Gauge bearing shells at points “1” and “2” in planes
“a” and “b”.
Limit for undersize: 62.776 – 62.815 mm
Wear limit for big end bearings: Fig. 616
Big end bearing clearance: 0.12 mm
Gauge small end bush

Fig. 617
2. Schematic drawing showing how the small end bush is gauged at points “1”
and “2” in planes “a” and “b”.
Fig. 618
30-103
3. NOTE:
Worn out small end bushes can be repaired in our Service
Centers.
Gauge small end bush

Specified value: 38.025 – 38.035 mm
Wear limit:
Small end bush clearance: 0.08 mm
Fig. 619
Gauge parallel alignment of bearing bores

1. Permissible tolerance “A” to “B” 0.04 mm over a distance of 100 mm
Fig. 620
2. NOTE:
Straightening of the connecting rod not allowed.
Permissible tolerance “C” to “D” 0.04 mm over a distance of 100 mm
Fig. 621
Assembly of connecting rod and piston

1. Insert the first circlip.
Fig. 622
30-104
2. Mount piston together with connecting rod. The symbol of a flywheel on the
piston and the dowel pins of the connecting rod must be on one and the
same side.
Fig. 623
3. Insert the second circlip.
Fig. 624
30.1.21 - Checking the camshaft

1. Visually inspect bearing journals and cams for wear, gauge – as necessary.
Bearing journal
diameter: 62.98 – 62.93 mm
Cam stroke:
Inlet valve: 6.9 ± 0.08 mm
Exhaust valve: 7.0 ± 0.08 mm
Fig. 625
2. Visually inspect camshaft gears for wear.
Fig. 626
30-105
30.1.22 - Checking the gearcase
1. Knock out shaft oil seal ring.
Fig. 627
2. NOTE:
Insert new shaft oil seal ring.
Visually inspect timing case and replace as necessary.
Fig. 628
30.1.23 - Checking and setting the valve clearance

Special tools:
l Turning gear 5.9035.114.0
l Cranking device 5.9035.115.0
Valve clearance can be adjusted on the engine in cold or warm condition allowing the engine to cool down for 0.5 h at a minimum.
Oil temperature < 80 °C
Valve clearance
1. Remove pressure control valve and inspection cover.
Fig. 629
30-106
2. NOTE:
Valve overlap means: Exhaust valve about to close, inlet
valve about to open.
Use cranking device 5.9035.115.0 for turning the engine until valves of cyl-
inder No. 1 overlap.
For carrying out valve clearance adjustment
Fig. 630
3. If engine is not freely accessible at V-belt pulley , turning gear 5.9035.114.0
may be used, however, hydraulic pump must be removed before.
Fig. 631
4. NOTE:
In cases where the cylinder head gasket has been replaced,
increase valve clearance by 0.1 mm. Standard valve clear-
ance to be set after 1500 operating hours.
Adjust valve clearance on respective cylinder using a feeler gauge.
Inlet valve: 0.3 mm
Exhaust valve: 0.5 mm
Fig. 632
5. Tighten locknut.
Check valve clearance with feeler gauge once again.
Fig. 633
30-107
6. Fit new gasket in place.
Fig. 634
7. Fit inspection cover and supporting plate. Tighten bolts. Make sure that
sealing rubber elements are correctly installed in inspection cover.
Fit pressure control valve. Tighten bolts.
Fig. 635
30.1.24 - Checking rocker arm bracket

1. Dismantle rocker arm bracket.
Check all parts for wear and replace as necessary.
Fig. 636
2. Use internal dial gauge for gauging bore of rocker arm , replace rocker arm
bracket as necessary.
Rocker arm bore: 21.02 – 21.053 mm
Fig. 637
30-108
3. Use external screw type micrometer for gauging bearing journal, replace
rocker arm bracket as necessary.
Bearing journal: 21.052 mm
Fig. 638
4. Check oil ducts for free passage.
Fig. 639
5. Assemble rocker arm bracket.
Fig. 640
30-109
30.1.25 - Checking the cylinder head
Special tools:
l Dial gauge 5.9035.116.0
l Clamping stand 5.9035.131.0
l Clamping plate 5.9035.132.0
l Sleeve for fitting valve stem sealing 5.9035.133.0
Preparatory measures
1. Mount cylinder head on fixture.
Use clamping stand 5.9035.131.0 and clamping plate 5.9035.132.0.
Fig. 641
Remove valves
1. NOTE:
Arrange removed parts so as to prevent confusion and facili-
tate re-fitting to the same points.
Remove cone clamp, valve spring cap, valve springs and valves. Use valve
spring assembly lever 5.9035.111.0.
Fig. 642
2. NOTE:
Use valve sealing pliers 5.9035.105.0.
Remove valve stem sealing
Fig. 643
30-110
Assess valve condition
1. Clean and visually inspect valves.
Gauge valve stem diameter.
Inlet valve: 7.965 - 7.98 mm
Exhaust valve: 7.945 - 7.96 mm
Fig. 644
2. Gauge valve rim thickness:
Wear limit:
Inlet valve: 1.8 mm
Fig. 645
Assess condition of cylinder head

1. Clean and visually inspect cylinder head for damage.
Fig. 646
2. Visually inspect valve seat inserts.
Gauge width of valve seats
Wear limit:
Inlet valve: 2.70 mm
Fig. 647
30-111
3. NOTE:
For measuring valve stem clearance, the valve stem end
must end up flush with the valve guide bush.
Insert valves and gauge valve stem clearance.

Wear limit:
Fig. 648
4. Gauge valve recess between valve disc to cylinder head seal surface.
Wear limit:
Fig. 649
5. Worn out valve seat inserts, valve guides or cylinder head gasketing sur-
faces can be repaired in our Service Centers.
Fig. 650
30-112
Reworking of cylinder head
1. Provided wear limits for valve seat and valve recess have not yet been
reached, re-work valve seat using the special tool for the reworking of valve
seats.
Fig. 651
2. Reworking of valve seat inserts
Valve seat angle:
Inlet valve seat 30°
Exhaust valve seat 45°
Valve seat width limit dimension:
Inlet valve seat 2.70 mm
Outlet valve seat 2.10 mm
Fig. 652
3. Measure valve recess from valve disc to cylinder head seal surface.
Limit dimensions:
Inlet valve: 1.4 mm
Fig. 653
Assess condition of valve springs

1. Gauge length of valve spring.
Zero load length, standard 59 ± 1.9 mm
Fig. 654
30-113
Install valves
1. NOTE:
Before assembly of valve stem seal, valve splines must be
covered by a protective sleeve or a masking tape.
Oil valve stem. Insert valve and retain. Slide protective sleeve over valve
stem.
Fig. 655
2. Slide new valve stem seal onto protective sleeve. Remove protective
sleeve.
Fig. 656
3. Press-in valve stem sealing as far as it will go. Use sleeve for fitting valve
stem seal 5.9035.133.0.
Fig. 657
Assemble cylinder head

1. NOTE:
The narrowly coiled end of the valve spring marked in yellow
must face cylinder head.
Mount valve spring and valve spring plate.
Fig. 658
30-114
2. Fit valve assembly lever 5.9035.111.0, insert clamping cone.
Fig. 659
30.1.26 - Repair of hydraulic pump drive

Special tools:
l Dolly for air compressor gear and hydraulic pump drive 5.9035.146.0
Hydraulic pump drive
1. Remove thrust washer.
Use dolly 5.9035.146.0
Fig. 660
2. Visually inspect all pa rts and replace, repair as necessary.
Fig. 661
3. Gauge bearing bushes at points “1” and “2” in planes “a” and “b”.
Internal diameter: 60 + 0.054 mm
Wear limit: 60 + 0.080 mm
Fig. 662
30-115
4. Replace bushes as necessary.
Fig. 663
5. Schematic drawing: Insertion dimensions and mounting position of bearing
bushes.
Fig. 664
6. Press in bearing bushes as shown by schematic drawing, Item 5.
Fig. 665
7. Slightly oil gear shaft and bushes and install.
Fig. 666
30-116
8. Re-install thrust washer.
Fig. 667
9. Tighten bolts.
Specified tightening torque: 8.5 ± 1 Nm
Use dolly 5.9035.146.0.
Fig. 668
10. Fit a new O-ring.
Fig. 669
30-117
30.1.27 - Repair of hydraulic pump with fastening flange
1. NOTE:
Use protective aluminium jaws for gear clamping.
Unscrew retaining nut.
Fig. 670
2. Pull off gear.
Fig. 671
3. Visually inspect all parts and replace as necessary.
Fig. 672
4. Install new O-ring.
Fig. 673
30-118
5. Mount new gasket and fastening flange to hydraulic pump.
Fig. 674
6. NOTE:
Before mounting the gear make sure that cones of gear and
shaft are clean and free from grease and defects.
Mount gear.
Fig. 675
7. NOTE:
Used exclusively retaining nut type specified. Use protective
aluminium jaws for gear clamping.
Tighten retaining nut.

Fig. 676
30-119
30.1.28 - Removal and re-installation of injection pump
Replacement of the injection pump for service
This repair method is intended for a replacement of the injection pumps only.
If other components need be replaced such as roller tappets, governor etc., proceed as described under
See para. 30.1.28 - Removal and re-install... - page 30-120
.
Special tools:
l Press-on device for control rod 5.9035.120.0
l Extractor pulling device 5.9035.118.0
l Extractor pulling device for injection valve 5.9035.126.0
Replacement of the injection pump for service
1. Remove pressure control valve and inspection cover. Pull off cable connec-
tor from cut-off solenoid, governor and temperature sensor.
Swivel holding plate sideways.
Fig. 677
2. Remove engine cut-off device or lock cover.
Fig. 678
3. Press control rod into stop position using the stop lever. Insert press-on
device for control rod 5.9035.120.0 and tighten by bolts.
Fig. 679
30-120
4. NOTE:
Tighten knurled lock bolt finger tight.
Press control rod into stop position using the knurled lock bolt.
Use press-on device for control rod 5.9035.120.0.
Fig. 680
5. NOTE:
as viewed in direction of the flywheel.
Set cylinder of the injection pump to be removed to firing TCD.

Turn crankshaft by approx. 120° opposite to the direction of rotation of the
engine. (Zünd OT – firing TCD)
Fig. 681
6. NOTE:
Use claw grip wrench 5.9035.104.0 for the injection line.
Use extractor pulling device 5.9035.143.0 with puller
5.9035.126.0 for injection valve if jammed. Pull out O-ring if
necessary, using extractor 5.9035.130.0.
Remove the corresponding injection line, injection pump and injection
valve.
Fig. 682
7. Carefully extract shim with bar magnet.
Fig. 683
30-121
8. NOTE.
For determining new shim.
Fig. 684
9. Place newly determined shim on roller tappet.
Fig. 685
10. Turn injection pump steering lever to center position more or less.
Fig. 686
11. NOTE.
The roller tappet for the respective injection pump must be
on the base circle of the camshaft.
Apply specific compound to location hole in crankcase and to O-rings of

injection pump. Mount injection pump and insert injection pump steering
lever carefully into control rod.
Fig. 687
30-122
12. NOTE.
Chamfered end must face injection pump body.
Put on flange.
Fig. 688
13. Slightly oil bolts and tighten to a tightening torque of 5 Nm
Fig. 689
14. Release bolts again by 60°.
Fig. 690
15. Carefully turn injection pump counter clockwise up to a noticeable stop us-
ing serrated wrench 5.9035.109.0.
Fig. 691
30-123
16. NOTE:
Start with the outer bolt remotest from flywheel.
Turn bolts in again by 60° and gradually tighten to a tightening torque of 7

Nm, 10 Nm and 30 Nm.
Fig. 692
17. NOTE:
Check smooth movement of control rod from stop position to
start position. Actuate cut-off lever to this end.
Turn knurled lock bolt back again. Remove press on device 5.9035.120.0.
Fig. 693
18. NOTE:
Slightly oil O-ring.
Mount new O-ring.
Fig. 694
19. Press control rod into stop position using the cut-off lever and retain.
Install engine shut-off device. Tighten bolts. Plug in cable connector.
Fig. 695
30-124
20. NOTE:
The notch on the injection valve must face away from the
claw. Marking faces exhaust gas end.
Slide sealing ring onto injection valve using some grease and insert injec-
tion valve.
Fig. 696
21. Mount claws and turn in bolts loosely.
Fig. 697
22. NOTE:
Sealing cones must be exactly in line when mounting the
injection line. Re-bending is not allowed. Injection lines must
not be used twice.
Fit new injection line with sealing rubber. Tighten cap nut finger-tight.
Fig. 698
23. Tighten bolt of claws.
Fig. 699
30-125
24. NOTE:
Use claw grip wrench 8018.
Pre-tension cap nuts of injection line on injection pump and injection valve
to a tightening torque of approx. 5 Nm. Tighten cap nuts then.
Specified tightening torque: 25 ± 3.5 Nm
Fig. 700
25. Fit gasket.
Fig. 701
26. Fit inspection cover and supporting plate. Tighten bolts. Make sure sealing
rubbers are correctly seated.
Fit pressure control valve with a new seal, if necessary.
Tighten bolts.
Fig. 702
27. Plug in cable connector on cut-off solenoid and governor.
Fig. 703
30-126
28. Plug in cable connector to temperature sensor.
Fig. 704
30.1.29 - Determining commencement of delivery

NOTA:
Camshaft type K, L, H, Q or P is also indicated in the inscription field for the commencement of delivery. It is absolutely
necessary to take this into account for the basic setting of the injection pumps, see table 1.
Fig. 705
Determining shim thickness for commencement of delivery.

Table 1
Table 23
Engine type Commecement of Camshaft type Pre-stroke (Vh) Pre-stroke cor- Basic dimension
delivery nom./ nom. value (mm) rection factor inj. pump (L0) (mm)
tol. (°C/A BTDC) (mm/°C/A)
BFM 2012 0.0 K 4.80 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 1.0 K 4.62 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 2.0 K 4.44 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 3.0 K 4.27 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 4.0 K 4.11 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 5.0 K 3.95 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 2.0 L 5.14 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 3.0 L 4.97 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 4.0 L 4.80 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 5.0 L 4.62 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 6.0 L 4.44 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 7.0 L 4.26 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 8.0 L 4.11 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 9.0 L 3.95 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 1.0 H 5.52 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 2.0 H 5.36 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 3.0 H 5.20 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 4.0 H 5.05 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 5.0 H 4.89 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 6.0 H 4.73 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 7.0 H 4.58 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 8.0 H 4.43 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 2.0 Q 5.31 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 3.0 Q 5.14 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 4.0 Q 4.97 0.14 117.5
30-127
BFM 2012 5.0 Q 4.80 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 6.0 Q 4.62 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 7.0 Q 4.44 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 8.0 Q 4.26 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 9.0 Q 4.11 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 10.0 Q 3.95 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 2.0 P 5.23 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 3.0 P 5.08 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 4.0 P 4.92 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 5.0 P 4.76 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 6.0 P 4.61 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 7.0 P 4.46 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 8.0 P 4.31 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 9.0 P 4.16 0.14 117.5
BFM 2012 10.0 P 4.01 0.14 117.5
Table 2
Table 24
Theor. thickness “Ts” (mm) Shim thickness “Ss” (mm)
0.95 - 1.049 1.0
1.05 - 1.149 1.1
1.15 - 1.249 1.2
1.25 - 1.349 1.3
1.35 - 1.449 1.4
1.45 - 1.549 1.5
1.55 - 1.649 1.6
1.65 - 1.749 1.7
1.75 - 1.849 1.8
1.85 - 1.949 1.9
1.95 - 2.049 2.0
2.05 - 2.149 2.1
2.15 - 2.249 2.2
2.25 - 2.349 2.3
2.35 - 2.449 2.4
2.45 - 2.549 2.5
2.55 - 2.649 2.6
2.65 - 2.749 2.7
2.75 - 2.849 2.8
2.85 - 2.949 2.9
2.95 - 3.049 3.0
3.05 - 3.149 3.1
3.15 - 3.249 3.2
3.25 - 3.349 3.3
3.35 - 3.449 3.4
3.45 - 3.549 3.5
3.55 - 3.649 3.6
3.65 - 3.749 3.7
Table 25
Calculation BFM 2012
Example:
Cylinder No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Injecton pump xxx
No.
FB measured - 8
°C/A
FB nom. from 7
table 1 - °C/A
30-128
Example:
Cylinder No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Vh corr. factor 0.14
from table 1 -
mm/°C/A
vh nom. from 4.26
table 1 - mm
L0 from table 117.5
1 - mm
A/100 of inj. 0.29
pump - mm
L measured - 125.28
mm
E1 = FB act. - 1
FB nom. - °C/A
E2 = E1 x Vh 0.14
corr. factor -
mm
E3 = E2 + Vh 4.40
nom. - mm
E4 = E3 + L0 - 121.90
mm
E5 = E4 + 122.19
A/100 - mm
Ts = L - E5 - 3.09
mm
“Ss” from table 3.1
2 - mm
2012 with Injection timer - Determining shim thickness for commencement of delivery.
Table 1.1
Table 26
BFM 2012 2.0 Q 5.325 - 111.15
BFM 2012 3.0 Q 5.150 - 111.15
BFM 2012 4.0 Q 4.975 - 111.15
BFM 2012 2.0 P 5.231 - 111.15
BFM 2012 3.0 P 5.074 - 111.15
Table 2.1
Table 27
4.625 - 4.6749 4.65
4.675 - 4.7249 4.70
4.725 - 4.7749 4.75
4.775 - 4.8249 4.80
4.825 - 4.8749 4.85
4.875 - 4.9249 4.90
4.925 - 4.9749 4.95
4.975 - 5.0249 5.00
5.025 - 5.0749 5.05
5.075 - 5.1249 5.10
5.125 - 5.1749 5.15
5.175 - 5.2249 5.20
5.225 - 5.2749 5.25
5.275 - 5.3249 5.30
30-129
5.325 - 5.3749 5.35
5.375 - 5.4249 5.40
5.425 - 5.4749 5.45
5.475 - 5.5249 5.50
5.525 - 5.5749 5.55
5.575 - 5.6249 5.60
5.625 - 5.6749 5.65
5.675 - 5.7249 5.70
5.725 - 5.7749 5.75
5.775 - 5.8249 5.80
5.825 - 5.8749 5.85
5.875 - 5.9249 5.90
5.925 - 5.9749 5.95
5.975 - 6.0249 6.00
6.025 - 6.0749 6.05
6.075 - 6.1249 6.10
6.125 - 6.1749 6.15
6.175 - 6.2249 6.20
6.225 - 6.2749 6.25
6.275 - 6.3249 6.30
6.325 - 6.3749 6.35
6.375 - 6.4249 6.40
Determining shim thickness for commencement of delivery injection pump replacement in case of
service. Basic dimension L0 = 117.5 mm
The old injection pump with shim is not required for such purpose.
Example:
The injection pump of cylinder 3 is to be replaced on a BF6M 2012.
Procedure: Read off EP code for cylinder 3 from name plate under column ”EP“, e.g. 295
(Reading sequence: line 1 = cyl. 1, line 2 = cyl. 2, etc.)
Fig. 706
Take corrected injection pump installation dimension (Ek) from table 3 according to EP code, e.g. 120.875 mm.
Table 3
Table 28
Ek (mm) EP-Code
119.25 230
119.275 231
119.3 232
119.325 233
119.35 234
119.375 235
119.4 236
119.425 237
119.45 238
119.475 239
119.5 240
119.525 240
119.55 241
119.575 242
119.6 243
30-130
Ek (mm) EP-Code
119.625 244
119.65 245
119.675 246
119.7 247
119.725 248
119.75 249
119.775 250
119.8 251
119.825 252
119.85 253
119.875 254
119.9 255
119.925 256
119.95 257
119.95 258
119.975 259
120.0 260
120.025 261
120.05 262
120.075 263
120.1 264
120.125 265
120.15 266
120.175 267
120.2 268
120.225 269
120.25 270
120.275 271
120.3 272
120.325 273
120.35 274
120.375 275
120.4 276
120.425 277
120.45 278
120.475 279
120.5 280
120.525 281
120.55 282
120.575 283
120.6 284
120.625 285
120.65 286
120.675 287
120.7 288
120.725 289
120.75 290
120.775 291
120.8 292
120.825 293
120.85 294
120.875 295
120.9 296
120.925 297
120.95 298
120.975 299
121.0 300
121.025 301
121.05 302
121.075 303
121.1 304
121.125 305
121.15 306
30-131
Ek (mm) EP-Code
121.175 307
121.2 308
121.225 309
121.25 310
121.275 311
121.3 312
121.325 313
121.35 314
121.375 315
Read off code for injection pump length (A) from new injection pump, e.g. 42.
Take basic dimension of injection pump (L0) from table 1, e.g. 117.5 mm
Determine theoretical shim thickness (Ts)
Ts = EK - (L0 + A/100)
Ts = 120.875 mm - (117.5 mm + 42/100 mm)
Ts = 2.955 mm
Select shim thickness (Ss) from table 2.
Ts 2.955 mm = Ss 3.0 mm
2012 with Injection timer Determining shim thickness for commencement of delivery injection pump
replacement in case of service. Basic dimension L0 = 111.15 mm
The old injection pump with shim is not required for such purpose.
Example:
The injection pump of cylinder 3 is to be replaced on a BF6M 2012.
Procedure: Read off EP code for cylinder 3 from name plate under column ”EP“, e.g. 665
(Reading sequence: line 1 = cyl. 1, line 2 = cyl. 2, etc.)
Fig. 707
Take corrected injection pump installation dimension (Ek) from table 3.1 according to EP code, e.g. 117.525 mm.
Table 3.1
Table 29
Ek (mm) EP-Code
115.9 600
115.925 601
115.95 602
115.975 603
116 604
116.025 605
116.05 606
116.755 607
116.1 608
116.125 609
116.15 610
116.175 611
116.2 612
116.225 613
116.25 614
116.275 615
116.3 616
30-132
Ek (mm) EP-Code
116.325 617
116.35 618
116.375 619
116.4 620
116.425 621
116.45 622
116.475 623
116.5 624
116.525 625
116.55 626
116.575 627
116.6 628
116.625 629
116.65 630
116.675 631
116.7 632
116.725 633
116.75 634
116.775 635
116.8 636
116.825 637
116.85 638
116.875 639
116.9 640
116.925 641
116.95 642
116.975 643
117 644
117.025 645
117.05 646
117.075 647
117.1 648
117.125 649
117.15 650
117.175 651
117.2 652
117.225 653
117.25 654
117.275 655
117.3 656
117.325 657
117.35 658
117.375 659
117.4 660
117.425 661
117.45 662
117.475 663
117.5 664
117.525 665
117.55 666
117.575 667
117.6 668
117.625 669
117.65 670
117.675 671
117.7 672
117.725 673
117.75 674
117.775 675
117.8 676
117.825 677
117.85 678
117.875 679
30-133
Ek (mm) EP-Code
117.9 680
117.925 681
117.95 682
117.975 683
118 684
118.025 685
118.05 686
118.075 687
118.1 688
118.125 689
118.15 690
118.175 691
118.2 692
118.225 693
118.25 694
118.275 695
118.3 696
118.325 697
118.35 698
118.375 699
Read off code for injection pump length (A) from new injection pump, e.g. 42.
Take basic dimension of injection pump (L0) from table 1.1, e.g. 111.15 mm
Determine theoretical shim thickness (Ts)
Ts = EK - (L0 + A/100)
Ts = 117.525 mm - (111.15 mm + 42/100 mm)
Ts = 5.955 mm
Select shim thickness (Ss) from table 2.
Ts 5.955 mm = Ss 5.95 mm
Determining corrected installation dimension and EP code for injection pump.
When replacing crankcase, camshaft or roller tappets, the corrected installation dimension (EK) must be determined once again and
the relevant EP code on the name plate must be changed.
For tables see Table 1 to Table 3.1
Table 30
Example:
Cylinder No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
L0 from table 117.5
1 - mm
FB measured - 8
°C/A
FB nom. from 7
table 1 - °C/A
Vh corr. factor -
from table 1 -
mm/°C/A
Vh nom. from 4.26
table 1 - mm
L measured - 125.13
mm
- -
- -
- -
Ek = L - Vh 120.87
nom. - mm
30-134
Example:
Cylinder No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Ek symm. 120.875
rounded - mm
EP code from 295
table 3
2012 with injection timer - Determining corrected installation dimension and EP code for injection
pump.
When replacing crankcase, camshaft or roller tappets, the corrected installation dimension (EK) must be determined once again and
the relevant EP code on the name plate must be changed.
For tables see Table 1 to Table 3.1
Table 31
Example:
Cylinder No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
L0 from table 111.15
1 - mm
FB measured - 5
°C/A
FB nom. from 3
table 1 - °C/A
Vh corr. factor -
from table 1 -
mm/°C/A
Vh nom. from 5.15
table 1 - mm
L measured - 122.67
mm
- -
- -
- -
Ek = L - Vh 117.52
nom. - mm
Ek symm. 117.525
rounded - mm
EP code from 665
table 3
30.1.30 - Check injectors

Special tools:
l Dolly for injector 5.9035.127.0
l Dolly for injector 5.9035.126.0
Utmost cleanliness required for working on the injection unit. Use only pure test oil to ISO 4113 or clean diesel fuel for injector testing
purposes.
30-135
Removal of injectors
1. Remove pressure control valve and inspection cover. Pull cable connector
off from cut-off solenoid, governor and temperature sensor. Swivel support-
ing plate sideways.
Fig. 708
2. NOTE:
Use claw grip wrench size 5.9035.104.0. Close connecting
points of injectors and injection pumps with protective caps.
Remove injection lines.
Fig. 709
3. NOTE:
Use extractor 5.9035.143.0 in combination with extractor
5.9035.126.0 if jammed. Use extractor 5.9035.130.0 for
pulling out the sealing ring.
Remove claws and take out injectors.
Fig. 710
30-136
Check injectors
1. The injectors are not equipped with bores for leak-off fuel.
The surplus fuel cannot be discharged and accumulates in the space above the injector needle in the area of the spring of
the injector holder. Actuation of the manual lever of the injector tester is no longer possible in this case. For relieving the pres-
sure in the area of the spring, slacken the tensioning nut before each test and re-tighten to the specified torque after the test.
2. Slacken tensioning nut by approx. 180° and re-tighten. Use dolly
5.9035.127.0 for injector.
Specified tightening torque: 30 - 40 Nm
Fig. 711
3. CAUTION
Beware of injection nozzle jet. The fuel penetrates deeply
into the skin and may cause blood poisoning.
Connect injector to nozzle tester 5.9035.102.0
Fig. 712
4. NOTE:
The pressure will build-up again in the area of the spring
after approx. 3 - 4 strokes. Slacken the tensioning nut once
again, re-tighten to specified tightening torque and repeat
the test.
With pressure gauge switched-on, slowly press lever of nozzle tester
5.9035.102.0 down.
The pressure at which the gauge pointer stops or suddenly drops is the
opening pressure.
Opening pressure: 220 bar Fig. 713
5. Measured values are final once the results of three tests remain constant.
Fig. 714
30-137
Setting of injectors
1. For a correction of the opening pressure:
Remove injector from nozzle tester 5.9035.102.0. Remove tensioning nut
and uninstall all components. Use dolly 5.9035.127.0 for the injector.
Fig. 715
2. Sequence of parts disassembly and re-assembly:
2.1. Tensioning nut
2.2. Nozzle
2.3. Adapter
2.4. Thrust pin
2.5. Compression spring
2.6. Shim
Fig. 716
3. Adjust opening pressure by selecting appropriate shim. A thicker shim will
increase the opening pressure.
Re-assemble injector. Tighten tensioning nut.
Specified tightening torque: 30 – 40 Nm
Check injector on nozzle tester 5.9035.102.0 once again.
Fig. 717
Leak test
1. Dry nozzle and nozzle holder by compressed air. Press hand lever of tester
slowly down until a pressure of approx. 20 bar below the previous opening
pressure reading is attained.
Fig. 718
30-138
2. The nozzle is leak proof if there is no dripping within 10 seconds.
Fig. 719
3. If there is dripping, dismantle the injector and clean to remedy the leak. If
this does not work, replace the nozzle by a new one.
No reworking allowed!
Fig. 720
Buzzing and spray pattern test

1. Switch-off pressure gauge of tester.
The buzzing test permits audible checking for ease of movement of the
nozzle needle in the nozzle body.
New injectors compared to used ones have a different buzzing sound.
This buzzing sound deteriorates by wear in the area of the needle seat.
If there is no buzzing of a nozzle despite cleaning, it must be replaced by
a new one.
A used injector must produce an audible buzzing sound upon rapid actua-
tion of the hand lever and provide for a well atomised spray pattern. The
spray pattern may differ noticeably from that of a new injector.
Fig. 721
Re-installation of injectors
1. NOTE:
This notch on the injectors must face away from the claws.
Place new slightly greased sealing rings onto injectors and install injectors.
Fig. 722
30-139
2. Place claws in place and tighten bolts hand tight.
Fig. 723
3. NOTE:
When installing the injection lines make sure that sealing
cones are exactly aligned one on top of the other. Subse-
quent bending is not allowed. Injection lines must not be
re-used.
Attach new injection lines with sealing rubber elements. Tighten cap screws
finger-tight.
Fig. 724
4. Tighten bolts of claws.
Fig. 725
5. NOTE:
Use claw grip wrench 5.9035.104.0.
Pre-tension cap nuts of injection lines on injection pumps and injection noz-
zles to a tightening torque of approx. 5 Nm. Then tighten cap nuts.
Specified tightening torque: 25 + 3.5 Nm
Fig. 726
30-140
Mount inspection cover
1. Install gasket.
Fig. 727
2. Fit inspection cover and supporting plate. Tighten bolts.
Make sure sealing rubber elements are correctly installed in inspection
cover.
Fit new seal to pressure control valve if necessary. Tighten bolts.
Fig. 728
3. Fit cable connector on cut-off solenoid and governor.
Fig. 729
4. Fit cable connector to temperature sensor.
Fig. 730
30-141
30.1.31 - Repair of control rod
1. Visually inspect control rod and gauge or replace as necessary.
Groove for control lever pin 5.03 – 5.06 mm
Fig. 731
30-142
30.2 - C0 - Engine accessories
30.2.1 - Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (C0.01.02)
Flush the cooling circuit using a specific detergent.
WARNING
Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is still hot. The radiator is under pressure when hot, and if opened,
boiling liquid and steam can escape and cause serious injury to yourself and anyone else in the vicinity. Before remov-
ing the radiator cap, stop the engine and wait for the circuit to cool down.
Procedure for changing the coolant and flushing the circuit
1. Park the tractor on level ground.
The engine must be switched off and the coolant cold.
2. Place a suitable receptacle under the drain plug.
3. Drain the cooling system by opening the plug on the right-hand side of the
engine (only for tractors not equipped with air conditioning).
Fig. 732
4. Move the receptacle under the radiator.
5. Drain the radiator by removing the the drain plug on the bottom left-hand
side.
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any
fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be dis-
posed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
Fig. 733
6. Refit the previously removed plugs and fill the circuit with detergent mixture
via filler (2) located on reservoir (1). If the tractor is equipped with a cab
heater, this should be set to maximum heating so that the detergent mixture
also circulates through the heat exchanger.
Fig. 734
30-143
7. Start the engine run it at idle speed for approximately one and a half hours;
IMPORTANT:
When the engine is running, check that the detergent mixture level does not below the minimum mark on the
expansion tank.
8. Switch off the engine, drain the system and then fill it with water; then start the engine again bring it up to a speed of approx.
1000 rpm. and leave it running for 5 minutes;
9. Drain the system once again;
10. Refill the circuit with coolant, run the engine for a few minutes and then top up the system if necessary.
30.2.2 - Radiator - Tractor without front PTO

Removal
Fig. 735
2. Remove the three screws (3) and the two screws (4) and tilt hydraulic oil
cooler (5) towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 736
3. Loosen clamp (6) and disconnect pipe (7).
Fig. 737
4. Remove screws (8) and tilt fuel cooler (9) towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 738
30-144
5. Loosen clamp (10) and remove screws (11).
Fig. 739
6. Loosen clamps (12) and remove air intake hose (13).
Fig. 740
7. Remove screws (14).
Fig. 741
8. Loosen clamps (15) and disconnect hoses (16) from radiator (17).
Fig. 742
9. Remove screw (18) on both sides and remove radiator assembly (17).
Fig. 743
30-145
Refitting
Refitting is the reverse of removal.
l Fill the engine cooling system with coolant.
l Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the coolant to circulate; check the system for leaks.
l Stop the engine and top up the coolant level.
30.2.3 - Radiator - Tractor with front PTO (C0.01.01)

Removal
1. DANGER
Remove the key from the starter switch and apply the parking brake.
2. Remove screws (1) and remove surround (2).
Fig. 743
Fig. 744
4. Loosen clamp (5).
Fig. 745
30-146
5. Loosen clamps (6) and remove air intake hose (7).
Fig. 746
6. Remove pipes (8) from cooler (9).
Fig. 747
7. Remove screws (10) (1 per side) and remove the cooler.
Fig. 748
8. Remove screws (11) (2 per side) and tilt hydraulic oil cooler (12) towards
the rear.
Fig. 749
9. Loosen clamp (13) and disconnect pipe (14).
Fig. 750
30-147
10. Remove screws (15) and tilt fuel cooler (16) towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 751
Fig. 752
12. Loosen clamps (18) and disconnect hoses (19) from radiator (20).
Fig. 753
13. Remove screw (21) on both sides and remove radiator (20).
Fig. 754
30-148
Refitting
l Fill the engine cooling system with coolant.
Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the coolant to circulate; check the system for leaks.
Stop the engine and top up the coolant level.
30.2.4 - Fuel tank (C0.03.01)

See para. 30.6.4 - Cab access steps - page 30-497 - (G0.03.03)
See para. 30.12.2 - Rear wheels - page 30-653 - (S0.02.01)
Removal
1. DANGER
Do not smoke or allow naked flames in the vicinity during the removal, refitting and filling of the fuel tank.
DANGER
Wipe up any spilt fuel immediately before someone slips on it.
DANGER
2. Position suitable lifting equipment under fuel tank (1) and apply a slight
lifting force.
Fig. 755
3. Remove nut (2) and remove lower tank support pin (3).
Fig. 756
4. Remove screw (4) and remove the pin (5).
Fig. 757
30-149
5. Remove pin (6) supporting tank (1).
Fig. 758
6. Lower tank (1) slowly by about 10 cm.
Fig. 759
7. Disconnect wiring connector (7) of the fuel level sensor.
Loosen clamp (8) and disconnect pipe (9).
m Plug the pipe and union to prevent the ingress of dirt.
Fig. 760
8. Loosen hose clamp (10), disconnect pipe (11) and remove tank (1).
m Plug the pipe and union to prevent the ingress of dirt.
Fig. 761
30-150
Refitting
30.2.5 - Fuel cooler
Removal
1. Remove unions (1).
IMPORTANT
Remove screws (2) and remove fuel cooler (3).
Fig. 762
Refitting
l Flush the fuel system.
30.2.6 - Starter motor

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove nut (1), disconnect lead (2) from starter motor (3) and remove
cover (4). 1 4 3
2
F0120180
Fig. 763
3. Remove extension (5), disconnect cables (6) and remove cover (7).
6
5 7
F0120190
Fig. 764
30-151
4. Remove screw (8) and disconnect cable (9).
F0120200
Fig. 765
5. Remove the three screws (10) and remove the starter motor (3).
10
3
F0120210
Fig. 766
Refitting
Procedure 4
l Screw: 1 to 1.3 Nm (0.74-0.96 lb.ft.)
Procedure 3
l Extension: 16 to 20 Nm (11.76-14.74 lb.ft.)
Procedure 2
l Nut: 16 to 20 Nm (11.76-14.74 lb.ft.)
30.2.7 - Silencer (C0.06.01)

Removal
Fig. 767
30-152
2. Loosen and remove screws (2).
Fig. 768
3. Remove silencer (3).
IMPORTANT
m Renew gasket (4) after every removal.
Fig. 769
Refitting
30.2.8 - Exhaust pipe - Tractor with cab (C0.06.02)
Removal
1. Remove screw (1).
Fig. 770
2. Slacken off collar (2) and remove exhaust pipe (3).
Fig. 771
30-153
Refitting
30.2.9 - Repair of air compressor
Special tools:
l Dolly for air compressor gear 5.9035.146.0
Air compressor
1. Slide dolly 5.9035.146.0 onto gear.
Slacken retaining nut.
Fig. 772
2. Pull off gear using a commercially available two-armed extractor.
Fig. 773
3. NOTE:
Before mounting the gear make sure that cones of gear and
shaft are absolutely clean and free from grease and defects.
Mount gear and tighten retaining nut.
Fig. 774
4. Slide dolly 5.9035.146.0 onto gear and tighten retaining nut to a torque of
200 + 50 Nm.
Fig. 775
30-154
30.2.10 - Removing and installing the thermostat
1. NOTE:
Drain coolant, collect and dispose of in accordance with
Drain coolant, collect and dispose of in accordance with anti-pollution regu-

lations.
Remove outlet connection. Take out thermostat.
Fig. 776
2. NOTE:
Observe mounting position of thermostat. Arrow (bleeder
notch) pointing up.
Fit new sealing ring to thermostat.

Mount thermostat together with new sealing ring.
Fig. 777
3. Fit outlet connection.
Fig. 778
30.2.11 - Control and adjustment thermostat

Check thermostat in removed condition
1. NOTE:
“a” = stroke beginning at approx. 83 ± 2°C (T1) “b” = stroke
ending at approx. 95°C (T2)
Measure dimension “a” on the thermostat.
Fig. 779
30-155
2. Heat up thermostat in the water bath.
For a determination of the exact opening point, the temperature reading
should take place as closely as possible to the thermostat, however, with-
out contacting the latter.
The water must be continuously stirred to arrive at a uniform distribution of
temperature. The rate of rise of temperature should not exceed 1°C/min. at
a maximum otherwise opening will be delayed correspondingly.
Fig. 780
3. Measure dimension “b” on the thermostat.
Stroke length at indicated temperature (T2) 8 mm at a minimum.
Fig. 781
30-156
30.3 - D0 - Transmission
30.3.1 - Changing the transmission oil (D0.00.01)
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.
IMPORTANT:
Dispose of used oil and filters in compliance with applicable regulations. DO NOT dump oil on the ground, in sewers
or containers that are not sealed. Respect the environment.
IMPORTANT:
Change the filters at the same time as the oil.
Procedure for changing the transmission oil

1. Park the tractor on level ground.
2. Open the plug on top of the lift casing (see “Checking the transmission oil level”).
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing serious injury, blindness or even death.
High-pressure fluid leaks may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking for leaks. NEVER
use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate
attention from medical personnel with experience of this particular problem.
3. Remove the drain plug (1) located under the gearbox, placing a suitable
receptacle under the hole.
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause se-
vere burns.
Fig. 782
4. m Only for tractors equipped with hydraulic shuttle
Remove drain plug (2) located under the front end of the gearbox after plac-
ing a suitable receptacle under the hole.
DANGER
Use caution when draining off spent: hot oil can cause se-
vere burns.
Fig. 783
30-157
5. For 100-110 hp tractors only
m
Remove the oil plug with dipstick (1).

WARNING
Never top up with oil of a different type (class or viscosity) to
that already present.
Fig. 784
6. Change the oil filters located on the LH side of the gearbox casing.
7. Fit and tighten the drain plug (1), remove the plug (3) and fill the gearbox
with oil through the hole on top of the lift cover up to the level indicated by
the plug dipstick (4) or the round sight glass.
Fig. 785
8. After filling, screw in the oil filler plug and run the engine for a few minutes.
9. Check the oil level via the plug dipstick (4) or the sight glass and top up if necessary.
The tractor is equipped with a gearbox oil cooler, for cleaning it see “Cleaning engine front compartment gearbox oil cooler”.
30.3.2 - Range selector assembly

Removal
1. Remove screw (1) and disconnect range lever (2).
Fig. 786
2. Remove screws (3) and remove the complete range gear selector assem-
bly (4).
Fig. 787
30-158
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Mating face: Silastic
Fig. 788
30.3.3 - Disassembly of the range selector

Disassembly
1. Remove springs (1) and pins (2).
Fig. 789
m Renew the screw on reassembly.
Fig. 790
3. Remove screws (4) and raise lever support assembly (5) and creeper
range control rod (6) and remove fork (7).
Fig. 791
30-159
4. Remove high speed/low speed range control rod (8).
m Recover interlock pin (9).
Fig. 792
5. Remove screw (10) and remove fork (11).
Fig. 793
6. Remove rod (6) from lever support (5).
Fig. 794
7. Remove O-rings (12).
Fig. 795
30-160
Assembly
To assemble, follow the disassembly steps in reverse order and carry out the following procedures:
Procedure 3
Procedure 2
l Screw: 20 Nm (14.7 lb.ft.)
30.3.4 - Clutch plate (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)

Removal and renewal of the clutch plate
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the negative terminal (–) of the battery and apply the parking brake.
2. Insert a suitable dowel into the centre hole of the clutch assembly. 1
Remove screws (1).
F0120760
Fig. 796
3. Remove clutch assembly (2).
Loosen the bolts gradually in a crosswise sequence.
m
2
Remove clutch plate (3).
m Note that the clutch plate is oriented with the smooth shoes facing
3
the clutch unit and the grooved shoes facing the flywheel.
F0120770
Fig. 797
Checking clutch plate wear

1. Check that the thickness of the clutch plate is within the prescribed toler-
ance limits and there is no sign of burning. S
Clutch plate thickness “S” (for 85HP P/N. 0.014.9016.3):

m standard measurement: 8.5±0.4 mm
Limit: 5.5±0.4 mm
Clutch plate thickness “S” (for 100HP P/N. 0.012.7095.3/10):
m standard measurement: 10.6±0.4 mm
Limit: 7.6±0.4 mm
D0028140
Fig. 798
30-161
Refitting the clutch plate
30.3.5 - Clutch thrust bearing (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Renewal
1. Withdraw sleeve assy (1).
Position the sleeve assembly under a press and, using a suitable tool, sep-
arate thrust bearing (2) from hub (1).
2 1
F0068260
Fig. 799
2. Fit thrust bearing (2) on sleeve (1).
2
m Take care to install bearing (2) the right way round.
1 2
1
F0068271
Fig. 800
3. Grease hub (1) and install it on guide sleeve (3), making sure that it is installed the right way round in relation to release fork
(4).
m Sleeve: Molikote
30.3.6 - Clutch housing - assembly (D0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
See para. 30.2.4 - Fuel tank - page 30-149 - (C0.03.01)
See para. 30.6.1 - Cab (Agrofarm 100, Agr... - page 30-484 - (G0.03.01)
1. Remove the four lower screws (1).
Fig. 801
30-162
2. Position a trolley jack “A” under the clutch housing and a stand “B” under
the transmission.
Force a stand “C” under the towing hitch to prevent the transmission top-
pling over.
Fig. 802
3. Remove split pin (2), remove pin (3) and disconnect 4WD tie-rod (4).
Fig. 803
4. Remove screws (5) and (6) and remove support assy (7).
Fig. 804
5. Loosen nut (8) and remove cover (9).
Fig. 805
6. Disconnect pipe (10) from resonator (11).
m Plug the pipe and port to prevent impurities getting in.
Fig. 806
30-163
7. Loosen union (12).
Fig. 807
8. Remove nut (13).
Fig. 808
9. Remove screws (14) and remove relay assy (15).
Fig. 809
10. Loosen unions (16).
Fig. 810
11. Remove union (17).
Fig. 811
30-164
12. Loosen unions (18) and disconnect brakes pipes (19).
m Plug the pipes and ports to prevent the ingress of dirt.
Fig. 812
13. Remove the remaining screws (20).
Fig. 813
14. Separate clutch housing (21) from transmission (22) by pushing on both
front wheels.
Fig. 814
30-165
Installation
Refitting is the reverse of removal. Use caution in relation to the following procedures.
Procedure 14
Fig. 815
Procedures 5-13-18
l Nut: 78±4 Nm (57.5±3.0 lb.ft.)
Screws: 70±3 Nm (51.6±2.2 lb.ft.)
30.3.7 - Clutch housing - assembly (D0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 816
the transmission.
pling over.
Fig. 817
30-166
3. Remove nut (2), screws (3) and clamp (4).
Remove nuts (5).
Fig. 818
4. Remove screw (6) and tilt resonator (7) towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 819
5. Remove screws (8) and remove cover (9).
Fig. 820
6. Remove split pin (10), remove pin (11) and disconnect tie rod (12) of the
4WD engagement control.
Fig. 821
7. Remove screws (13) and (14) and remove carrier assembly (15).
Fig. 822
30-167
8. Loosen union (16).
Fig. 823
9. Remove nut (17).
Fig. 824
10. For versions with front lift control only:
Disconnect front lift control pipes (18).
Fig. 825
Remove union (19) and overturn pipe (20) towards the rear.
Fig. 826
12. Remove screws (21) and remove relay assy. (22).
Fig. 827
30-168
Fig. 828
Fig. 829
15. Loosen unions (25) and disconnect brake pipes (26).
Fig. 830
16. Remove the remaining screws (27).
Fig. 831
front wheels.
Fig. 832
30-169
Installation
Procedure 16
Fig. 833
Procedures 5-13-20
l Screws: 70±3 Nm (51.6±2.2 lb.ft.)
Nut: 78±4 Nm (57.5±3.0 lb.ft.)
30.3.8 - Front gearbox - Separation from the transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
Separation
Fig. 833
the transmission.
pling over.
Fig. 833
3. Remove split pin (2), remove pin (3) and disconnect 4WD tie-rod (4).
Fig. 833
30-170
4. Remove screws (5) and (6) and remove support assembly (7).
Fig. 834
5. Loosen clamps (8) and move hose (9) downwards.
Fig. 835
Fig. 836
7. For versions without Hi-Lo
Loosen nut (11) and remove cover (12).
Fig. 836
8. For versions with HI-LO
Remove union (13) and disconnect pipe (3).
Fig. 837
30-171
9. Loosen nut (14) and remove cover (15).
Fig. 838
10. Remove screw (16) and remove extension (17).
IMPORTANT
Check the condition of the O-rings and renew them if neces-
sary.
Fig. 839
11. For all versions
Disconnect pipe (18) from resonator (19).
IMPORTANT
Plug the pipe and hole to prevent the ingress of dirt.
Fig. 840
12. Loosen union (20), remove clamp (21) and disconnect pipe (22).
Fig. 841
13. Remove nut (23) and screw (24).
Fig. 842
30-172
Disconnect front lift control pipes (25).
Fig. 843
Remove union (26) and direct pipe (27) towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 844
Fig. 845
IMPORTANT
Renew the copper washers on reassembly
Fig. 846
18. Loosen the unions and disconnect brakes pipes (30) and differential lock
pipe (31).
IMPORTANT
Plug the pipes and ports to prevent the ingress of dirt.
Fig. 847
30-173
19. Remove the remaining screws (32)
Fig. 848
front wheels.
Fig. 849
Reconnection
Reconnect the transmission and engine by reversing the separation procedure:
Procedures 1-13-19
l Nut: 78±4 Nm (57.5±3.0 lb.ft.)
l Screws: 70±3 Nm (51.6±2.2 lb.ft.)
30.3.9 - Shuttle assembly - complete unit (D0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001)
See para. 30.3.1 - Changing the transmiss... - page 30-157 - (D0.00.01)
Removal
1. DANGER
Drain off all the oil from the transmission.
2. Remove all the screws (1).
Fig. 850
30-174
3. Using a slide hammer puller, separate shuttle unit (2) from clutch housing
(3).
Fig. 851
4. Screw in two service stud bolts “B” and remove shuttle unit (2).
Fig. 852
5. Attach shuttle assembly (2) to a hoist and remove it from the tractor.
IMPORTANT
Check the condition of O-ring (4) and renew it if distorted or
damaged.
Fig. 853
6. Remove screws (5) and remove manifold (6).
IMPORTANT
Check the condition of O-rings (7) and renew them if neces-
sary.
Fig. 854
7. Remove connection pipes (8)
IMPORTANT
Check the condition of O-rings (9) and renew them if neces-
sary.
Fig. 855
30-175
Refitting
Refit by following the removal steps in reverse order and carry out the following
procedures:
Procedure 4
l Apply a bead of sealant all around the holes “A”
m Mating face: Loctite 510
m O-ring: grease
Fig. 856
30.3.10 - Disassembly of the shuttle unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. Place shuttle unit (1) on a suitable stand and remove the seven screws (2).
IMPORTANT
Mark flange (3) and the support to facilitate assembly opera-
tions.
Fig. 857
2. Remove flange assembly (3).
Fig. 858
3. Remove the ten screws (4).
Fig. 859
30-176
4. Remove forward drive clutch assembly (5).
Fig. 860
5. Recover springs (7) and pins (8) from reverse drive clutch assembly (6).
Fig. 861
IMPORTANT
Renew the O-rings on reassembly.
Fig. 862
30-177
Assembly
1. Locate springs (7) and pins (8) in clutch assembly (6).
Fig. 863
2. Make sure that the last friction disc locates correctly on the hub.
Fig. 864
3. Locate clutch assembly (5), making sure that springs (10) are positioned
in the holes and that locating dowel (11) is aligned with the corresponding
hole in clutch housing (7).
Fig. 865
4. Tighten screws (4).
m Screws: 20 Nm (29.5 lb.ft.)
m Screws: Loctite 242
IMPORTANT
Tighten the screws in an alternate crosswise sequence.
Fig. 865
5. Fit new O-rings (9).
Fig. 865
30-178
6. Locate flange (3), taking care to align the marks made during disassembly
or align locating dowel (12).
IMPORTANT
Lubricate the lip of the oil seal with hydraulic oil.
Fig. 865
Fig. 866
30.3.11 - Disassembly of the cover unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. Remove seals (1).
Fig. 867
2. Remove circlip (2) and remove oil seal (3).
IMPORTANT
Renew the oil seal on reassembly.
Fig. 868
30-179
3. Remove circlip (4) and, using a suitable puller or drift, remove roller cage
(5).
Fig. 869
Assembly
Procedure 2
l Make sure that oil seal (3) is installed the right way round.
Fig. 870
Procedure 1
l Seal rings: hydraulic oil
30-180
30.3.12 - Disassembly of the forward drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 871 - FORWARD DRIVE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
30-181
Disassembly
1. Remove the two screws (1) and remove disc (2).
IMPORTANT
Mark the hole in which pin (3) is inserted.
Fig. 872
2. Remove the clutch pack assembly, composed of four corrugated springs
(4), four friction discs (5), three steel discs (6) 3 mm thick and one steel
disc (7) 6.5 mm thick.
IMPORTANT
Take care not to alter the assembly sequence of the friction
and steel discs.
Fig. 873
3. Remove hub (8) and recover Belleville spring (9).
Fig. 874
4. Blow compressed air at low pressure through the hole in the side of clutch
housing (10) to expel piston (11).
IMPORTANT
Restrain piston (11) as it could be expelled at high speed
and thus damaged.
Fig. 875
5. Check the condition of O-rings (12) and (13) and renew them if necessary.
Fig. 876
30-182
6. Only if necessary
Remove bearing (14) from hub (8).
Fig. 877
Assembly
1. Only if removed
Using a suitable drift, fit bearing (14) on hub (8).
Fig. 877
2. Fit O-rings (12) and (13) in clutch housing (10).
IMPORTANT
To facilitate installation of O-ring (13), stretch it slightly at
various points all around the circumference so that it is held
in place in its seating.
m O-ring: hydraulic oil.
Fig. 878
3. Fit piston (11) in clutch housing (10) and make sure it is properly seated.
Fig. 879
4. Position Belleville spring (9) in the clutch housing.
IMPORTANT
Take care to install Belleville spring (9) the right way round.
Fig. 880
30-183
5. Fit hub (8) and make sure bearing (14) is firmly seated in Belleville spring
(9).
Fig. 881
6. Fit first steel disc (7), friction disc (5) and corrugated spring (4).
IMPORTANT
Make sure that steel disc (7) is 6.5 mm thick.
m Friction disc: hydraulic fluid
Fig. 882
7. Complete the clutch pack by fitting steel disc (6), friction disc (5) and cor-
rugated spring (4) in sequence.
IMPORTANT
Friction discs: hydraulic oil
Fig. 883
8. Fit disc (2) and secure it in position with screws (1).
IMPORTANT
Orient the disc so pin (3) can be inserted in the hole marked
during disassembly.
Fig. 883
30-184
30.3.13 - Disassembly of the forward drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 884 - Forward drive clutch assembly

Disassembly
1. Remove the two screws (1) and remove disc (2).
IMPORTANT
Mark the hole in which pin (3) is inserted.
Fig. 885
30-185
2. Remove the clutch pack assembly, composed of six corrugated springs (4),
six friction discs (5), five steel discs (6) 3 mm thick and one steel disc (7)
6.5 mm thick.
IMPORTANT
and steel discs.
Fig. 886
3. Remove hub (8) and recover Belleville spring (9).
Fig. 887
IMPORTANT
and thus damaged.
Fig. 888
Fig. 889
Remove bearing (14) from hub (8).
Fig. 890
30-186
Installation
1. Only if removed
Using a suitable drift, fit bearing (14) on hub (8).
Fig. 890
IMPORTANT
m O-ring: hydraulic oil.
Fig. 891
Fig. 892
4. Position Belleville spring (9) in the clutch housing.
IMPORTANT
Take care to install Belleville spring (9) the right way round.
Fig. 893
5. Fit hub (8) and make sure bearing (14) is firmly seated in Belleville spring
(9).
Fig. 894
30-187
IMPORTANT
Make sure that steel disc (7) is 6.5 mm thick.
m Friction disc ( hydraulic fluid)
Fig. 895
m Friction discs: hydraulic oil
Fig. 896
8. Fit disc (2) and secure it in position with screws (1).
IMPORTANT
Orient the disc so pin (3) can be inserted in the hole marked
during disassembly.
Fig. 896
30-188
30.3.14 - Disassembly of the reverse drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 897 - REVERSE DRIVE CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
30-189
Disassembly
1. Remove needle bearing (1).
Fig. 898
2. Remove the clutch pack assembly, composed of four corrugated springs
(2), four friction discs (3), three steel discs (4) 3 mm thick and one steel
disc (5) 6.5 mm thick.
IMPORTANT
and steel discs.
Fig. 899
3. Remove hub (6).
Fig. 900
Using three screws as a driving tool, remove bearing (7) from hub (6).
Fig. 901
5. Blow compressed air at low pressure through hole “A” of support (8) to
expel piston (9).
IMPORTANT
Restrain piston (9) as it could be expelled at high speed and
thus damaged.
Fig. 902
30-190
Fig. 903
7. Remove circlip (12) and remove spacer (13).
Fig. 904
8. Remove circlip (14).
Fig. 905
9. Remove clutch housing (15) from support (8).
Fig. 906
10. Remove bearing (16) from clutch housing (15).
Fig. 907
30-191
11. Remove rings (17) from support (8).
Fig. 908
Assembly
1. Fit rings (17) on support (8).
m Rings: Hydraulic oil
Fig. 908
2. Insert bearing (16) in clutch housing (15).
Fig. 908
3. Install the clutch housing on support (8) and secure it in position with circlip
(14).
Fig. 909
4. Fit spacer (13) and secure it in position with circlip (12).
Fig. 910
30-192
IMPORTANT
m Friction discs: hydraulic oil.
Fig. 911
Fig. 912
7. Using a press and suitable drift, install bearing (7) on hub (6).
Fit hub (6) on clutch housing (15).
Fig. 913
Fig. 914
Fig. 915
30-193
10. Position roller cage (1) on hub (6).
Fig. 916
Disassembly
1. Position shuttle assembly (1) on a suitable stand and remove the seven
screws (2).
IMPORTANT
Mark flange (3) and the support to facilitate assembly opera-
tions.
Fig. 917
2. Remove flange assembly (3).
Fig. 918
IMPORTANT
Renew the O-rings on reassembly.
Fig. 919
30-194
4. Remove the ten screws (5).
Fig. 920
5. Remove the forward drive clutch assembly (6).
IMPORTANT
Mark clutch assemblies (6) and (7) to facilitate reassembly.
Fig. 921
6. Recover springs (8) and pins (9) from reverse drive clutch assembly (7).
Fig. 922
30-195
Assembly
1. Locate springs (8) and pins (9) in clutch assembly (7).
Fig. 922
2. Check that the last friction plate to be installed is correctly engaged on the
hub.
Fig. 923
3. Locate clutch assembly (6), making sure that springs (8) are positioned in
the holes and that locating dowel (10) is aligned with the corresponding
hole in clutch housing (7).
Fig. 924
IMPORTANT
Tighten the screws in an alternate crosswise sequence.
Fig. 924
5. Fit new O-rings (4).
Fig. 924
30-196
6. Locate flange (3), taking care to align the marks made during disassembly,
or align locating dowel (11).
IMPORTANT
Lubricate the lip of the oil seal with hydraulic oil.
Fig. 925
Fig. 926
30-197
Fig. 927 - Reverse drive clutch assembly
30-198
Disassembly
1. Remove needle roller bearing (1).
Fig. 928
2. Remove the clutch pack assembly, composed of six corrugated springs (2),
six friction discs (3), five steel discs (4) 3 mm thick and one steel disc (5)
6.5 mm thick.
IMPORTANT
and plain steel discs.
Fig. 929
3. Remove hub (6).
Fig. 930
Using three screws as a driving tool, remove bearing (7) from hub (6).
Fig. 931
5. Blow compressed air at low pressure through hole “A” of support (8) to
expel piston (9).
IMPORTANT
Restrain piston (9) as it could be expelled at high speed and
thus damaged.
Fig. 932
30-199
Fig. 933
7. Remove circlips (12) and (13).
Fig. 934
Fig. 935
9. Remove clutch housing (15) from support (8).
Fig. 936
10. Remove bearing (16) from clutch housing (15).
Fig. 937
30-200
11. Remove rings (17) from support (8).
Fig. 938
Installation
1. Fit rings (17) on support (8).
m Seal rings: Hydraulic oil
Fig. 938
2. Insert bearing (16) in clutch housing (15).
Fig. 938
3. Fit circlips (12) and (13).
Fig. 938
4. Fit the clutch housing (15) on support (8) and secure it in position with
circlip (14).
Fig. 939
30-201
IMPORTANT
m O-rings: hydraulic oil.
Fig. 940
Fig. 941
7. Using a press and suitable drift, install bearing (7) on hub (6).
Fit hub (6) on clutch housing (15).
Fig. 942
Fig. 943
Fig. 944
30-202
10. Position roller cage (1) on hub (6).
Fig. 945
30.3.17 - Gearbox and Hi-Lo assembly (D0.04.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
See para. 30.3.6 - Clutch housing - assem... - page 30-162 - (D0.02.01)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove screws (1) and remove gear lever (2).
Fig. 946
3. Loosen unions (3) and (4) and remove the pipe (5).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 947
30-203
4. Attach the Hi-Lo unit (6) to a hoist and take up the slack in the lifting rope.
Fig. 948
5. Remove the three screws (7) on the right-hand side, and screws (8) and the
four nuts (9) on the left-hand side.
Fig. 949
6. Remove Hi-Lo unit (6) complete with the gearbox.
Fig. 950
30-204
Refitting
Procedure 6
l For version with mechanical shuttle
m Mating faces: Loctite 518
Fig. 951
Procedure 2
l Mating faces: Silastic 738
Procedure 1
l Fill the transmission with the required quantity of oil.
m Transmission oil: max 50 l (13.2 US. gall.)
30.3.18 - Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. DANGER
2. Remove plug (1).
Fig. 952
3. Loosen unions (2) and (3) and remove pipe (4).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 953
30-205
Fig. 954
Fig. 955
Fig. 956
7. Remove the six screws (10) and remove the complete Lo range clutch
housing (11).
Fig. 957
8. Remove spacer (12) and the first plain steel plate (13).
IMPORTANT
Note that this plate is 5 mm thick.
Fig. 958
30-206
9. Remove the Hi range clutch pack, composed of three friction plates (14)
and 3 plain steel plates (15).
Fig. 959
10. Remove circlip (16) and recover shims (17).
Fig. 960
11. Withdraw planet carrier assembly (18) complete with hub (19).
Fig. 961
12. Remove bolts (20) and nuts (21).
Fig. 962
13. Remove the Hi-Lo unit housing (22) and remove gasket (23).
IMPORTANT
Renew gasket (23) on reassembly.
Fig. 963
30-207
Assembly
To assemble, follow the disassembly steps in reverse order and use caution in relation to the following procedures:
IMPORTANT
If the Hi-Lo unit was removed in order to overhaul the clutches or the piston, refit the unit by following the removal
steps in reverse order. In all other cases, check the end float of the sun gears of the final drive unit. (For details, see
“Adjustment of the planetary reduction gear end float” in this chapter).
Procedure 11
l Before installing the complete planet carrier assembly (18), check that
planet gears are still correctly positioned relative to hub (19), i.e. that the
notches on one tooth of each planet pinion are all converging on the centre
when the hub is in position.
Fig. 964
Procedure 9
l Install a steel plate (15) followed by a friction plate (14) to complete the
clutch pack.
m Friction plates: transmission oil.
Fig. 965
l Install the first plain steel plate (13) (thickness 5.0 mm) and spacer (12).
Fig. 965
Procedure 6
l Remove cover (6) and fit circlip (7).
m Mating face: Loctite 518
Fig. 965
30-208
Procedure 5
l Temporarily install cover (6) and secure in position with screws (5).
l Screw a service bolt (A) (M12x45) fully into the hole on the Lo range clutch
housing in order to gain access to the groove on the bearing.
Fig. 966
Procedure 4
l Mating face: Loctite 518
Procedure 1
m Transmission oil: approx. 50 l (13.2 US. gall.)
Adjustment of the planetary reduction gear end float

1. Fit hub (2) in gearbox (1) and secure in position with circlip (3).
Fig. 967
2. With a feeler gauge “A”, measure the clearance “R” between hub (2) and
gear (4).
Fig. 968
3. Calculate the thickness “S” of the shims to be installed between hub (2) and circlip (3) using the formula:
m S = R – F where:
n S = final shim thickness

n R = measured dimension
n F= fixed clearance (0.4±0.2 mm)
m Example:
n R = 1.30
n S = 1.30 – 0.4 = 0.90 mm
30-209
30.3.19 - Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 969
Disassembly
1. Remove hub (1) from the planet carrier.
Fig. 970
2. Drive out pins (2) and recover balls (3).
Fig. 971
30-210
3. Withdraw planet pinions (4) and shims (5).
Fig. 972
4. Dismantle planet pinions (4) and recover roller cages (6) and spacer (7).
Fig. 973
Assembly
To assemble, follow the disassembly steps in reverse order and carry out the fol-
lowing procedures:
Procedure 1
l Make sure that planet pinions (4) are correctly positioned relative to the hub
(1), i.e. that the notches present on one tooth of each planet pinion are all
converging on the centre when the hub is in position .
Fig. 974
30-211
30.3.20 - Disassembly of the Lo range clutch housing (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)
Fig. 975 - Cross-section view of Lo range clutch

Disassembly
1. DANGER
This disassembly operation requires compulsory use of the special tool T3 (code 5.9030.676.0).
2. Locate and secure clutch housing (1) on tool T3 (code. 5.9030.676.0).

IMPORTANT
If possible, coincide the slot on the shaft (2) with the tab on
tool T3 (code 5.9030.676.0).
Fig. 976
30-212
3. Lift the caulking and remove ringnut (3) using special tool T4 (code
5.9030.603.0).
IMPORTANT
Renew the nut on each reassembly
Fig. 977
4. Remove bearing (4).
Fig. 978
5. Remove shims (5) and spacer (6).
IMPORTANT
Note the dimension “A” of shims (5).
Fig. 979
6. Remove Belleville washers (7).
Fig. 980
7. Remove shims (8) and spacer (9).
IMPORTANT
Note the dimension “B” of shims (8).
IMPORTANT
Do not mix up shims (5) with shims (8) and make a note of
their respective positions relative to spacer (6).
Fig. 981
30-213
8. Blow compressed air at low pressure through the upper hole of shaft (2)
and expel piston (10).
IMPORTANT
and thus damaged.
Fig. 982
9. Remove O-ring seal (11) from piston (10).
Fig. 983
10. Remove spacer (12).
Fig. 984
11. Remove the four friction plates (13), the three plain steel plates (14) and
the spacer (15).
Fig. 985
12. Remove the clutch cylinder (16) from tool T3 (code 5.9030.676.0).
Fig. 986
30-214
13. Remove O-ring (17).
Fig. 987
14. Remove the complete shaft (2) from clutch cylinder (16) and remove spring
(18).
Fig. 988
15. Remove O-ring seal (19) and remove lock ring (20).
Fig. 989
16. Withdraw Hi range piston (21) from clutch cylinder (16).
Fig. 990
17. Remove O-ring seal (22) from piston (21).
Fig. 991
30-215
18. Make sure that check valve (23) functions correctly and that hole (F) is not
blocked by impurities.
Fig. 992
Installation
1. Install O-ring (22) on the Hi range piston (21).
m O-ring: transmission oil
Fig. 992
2. Install piston (21) in clutch cylinder (16) and ensure it is fully seated.
Fig. 993
3. Install lock ring (20) and O-ring (19) on shaft (2).
Fig. 994
4. Fit O-ring (17) on clutch cylinder (16).
Fig. 995
30-216
5. Fit spring (18) on shaft (2) and position it on service tool T3 (code.
5.9030.676.0) making sure that the tab locates in the slot on the shaft.
Fig. 996
6. Locate clutch cylinder (16) on shaft (2) and secure it to service tool T3
(5.9030.676.0), tightening the screws to seat it.
Fig. 997
7. Fit spacer (15).
Fig. 998
8. Assemble the Lo range clutch pack, inserting a friction plate (13) and a
steel plate (14). Complete the clutch pack with a friction plate (13) and
install spacer (12).
Fig. 999
9. Fit O-ring (11) on Lo range piston (10).
Fig. 999
30-217
10. Install complete piston assembly (10) in the clutch housing.
Fig. 1000
11. Fit spacer (9).
Fig. 1001
12. DANGER
If the Belleville washers have been renewed, adjust the spring preload. (For details, see “Spring preload adjust-
ment”).
DANGER
If shim packs (5) and (8) have been mixed up or mis-read, and measurements “A” and “B” have not been
noted down, renew the springs with a new pack and perform adjustment of the spring preload (For details, see
“Spring preload adjustment”) then proceed with assembly.
13. Install a shim pack (8) of the thickness “A” measured during disassembly or
calculated during the spring preload adjustment procedure.
Fig. 1002
14. Fit the Belleville washers (7).
IMPORTANT
Take care to install the Belleville washers the right way
round (7).
Fig. 1003
30-218
15. Fit spacer (6) and shim pack (5) with thickness “B” measured during disas-
sembly or calculated during the spring preload adjustment procedure.
Fig. 1004
16. Fit bearing (4) taking care that the groove for the circlip is facing upwards.
IMPORTANT
Using the cover of the Hi-Lo unit, carefully align the tabs of
the steel disks (14).
IMPORTANT
If a new bearing is fitted, remove the circlip, which will be
installed at a later stage.
Fig. 1005
17. Fit the nut (3) and tighten with the special wrench T5 (code. 5.9030.503.0).
m Nut: 147 Nm
IMPORTANT
Check that the Belleville springs (7) remain correctly aligned.
Fig. 1006
18. Stake nut (3).
Fig. 1007
30-219
Spring preload adjustment
1. DANGER
The preload must be adjusted if the belleville washers are renewed and if shim packs (5) and (8) have been
mixed up or confused, and measurements “A” and “B” have not been noted down.
2. Measure and make a note of the dimension “D” of spacer (1).
m Example: D = 21.50
Fig. 1008
3. Form a shim pack (2) of thickness “S”, which, when added to the dimension
“D” of spacer (1), obtains a thickness equal to the fixed dimension “F” of
25.25 mm.
m Example:
n D = 21.50
n F = 25.25
n S = F - D = 25.25 - 21.50 = 3.75
m Form a shim pack of:

n four spacers at 0.50 = 2.00
n five spacers at 0.20 = 1,00 Fig. 1009
n five spacers at 0.15 = 0.75
4. IMPORTANT
After forming the shim pack (2) check that the total mea-
surement of spacer (1) and the shim pack obtained is ef-
fectively the set value “F”.
Fig. 1010
5. Locate spacer (3) and fit spacer (1) in clutch housing (4).
Fig. 1011
30-220
6. While pressing on piston (10), measure dimensions “C” and “L” and deter-
mine the dimension “M” using the formula: M = C - L
Fig. 1012
7. m Example:
n C =20.32
n L = 3.52
n M = 20.32 - 3.52 = 16.80
Fig. 1013
8. Calculate the thickness “A” of the shim pack (5) to be installed under spacer
(1) using the formula: A = 17.70- M
m Example:
n A = 17.70 - 16.80 = 0.90
Form shim pack (5) of thickness “A” using only those shims used to form
shim pack (2).
Fig. 1014
9. Mount shim pack (5) and spacer (1) and check as described in point 5 that
the new value C is between 17.65 and 17.75 mm.
IMPORTANT
If dimension C is outside the specified range of values, ad-
just shim pack (5) to obtain an acceptable value.
IMPORTANT
If dimension C is within the specified range, first remove
spacer (1) and then proceed with assembly of the clutch Fig. 1015
housing starting from point (12).
The remaining shims are those to be mounted above spacer (1).
30-221
30.3.21 - Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit output shaft (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1016 - Hi-Lo unit output shaft

Disassembly
Fig. 1017
2. Using a suitable drift, drive out bearing (2).
Fig. 1018
30-222
Remove bush (4) from Hi-Lo output shaft (3).
Fig. 1019
Assembly
To assemble, follow the disassembly steps in reverse order.
30.3.22 - Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit output shaft (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 1020 - Hi-Lo unit output shaft

Disassembly
1. Remove circlip (1) and remove the outer race and thrust washer of bearing
(2).
Fig. 1021
30-223
2. Using a suitable tool, remove the inner race of bearing (2).
Fig. 1022
Remove bush (4) from the HI-LO output shaft (3).
Fig. 1023
Assembly
30.3.23 - Shuttle shaft (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
15 14 13 12 9 8 5
10 11 7 6 4 3 D0023941
Fig. 1024 - Shuttle shaft
30-224
Disassembly
1
F0086911
Fig. 1025
2. Using a puller, remove bearing (3).
F0086921
Fig. 1026
3. Using two screwdrivers as levers, prise off thrust washer (4).
F0086931
Fig. 1027
4. Remove gear (5), driver ring (6) and synchronizer ring (7).
5
6
7
F0086941
Fig. 1028
5. Remove circlip (8) and remove synchronizer (9) complete with synchro-
nizer ring (10) and driver ring (11).
9
m Renew the circlip on reassembly. 8
11 10
F0086951
Fig. 1029
30-225
6. Remove circlip (12) and remove gear (13).
m Renew the circlip on reassembly.
12
13
F0086961
Fig. 1030
7. Remove thrust washer (14) and circlip (15).
14
15
F0086971
Fig. 1031
Assembly
To assemble, follow the disassembly steps in reverse order and use caution in relation to the following procedures.
Procedure 3
l Take care to install synchronizer (16) the right way round.
16
D0024711
Fig. 1032
Procedure 1
l Temporarily fit circlip (8) and, using a feeler gauge, measure dimension “A”.
e.g: A = 2.85 mm
From the available spacers, select the one with thickness nearest to but
below the measured dimension “A”.
e.g: A = 2.85 spacer thickness = 2.80 mm
Fig. 1033
30-226
l Fit spacer (2) and secure it in position with circlip (1).
1
F0086991
Fig. 1034
30.3.24 - Disassembly of the gearbox input shaft (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
Fig. 1035 - Gearbox input shaft

Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and remove the complete shaft assembly (2).
Fig. 1036
30-227
2. Remove circlip (3) and recover spacer (4).
Fig. 1037
3. Withdraw shaft (5) complete with roller bearing (6).
Fig. 1038
Fig. 1039
Fig. 1040
6. Using a press and suitable tool, remove bearing (10) and flange (11) from
shaft (2).
Fig. 1041
30-228
Assembly
Procedure 6
l Note which way round flange (11) and bearing (10) are installed relative to
shaft (2).
Fig. 1042
Procedure 3
l Fit bearing (7).
Fig. 1042
l Hold bearing (7) in place with service washers and install bearing (6) on
shaft (5).
Fig. 1043
l Using a suitable drift, insert shaft (5) sufficiently to install spacer (4) and
circlip (3).
Fig. 1044
30.3.25 - Torsional spring plate (D0.05.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
30-229
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 1045
3. Remove torsional spring plate (2).
Fig. 1046
Refitting
30.3.26 - Disassembly of the main shaft- Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85)
D0028200
Fig. 1047 - Main shaft
30-230
Disassembly
Fig. 1048
Fig. 1049
Assembly
30.3.27 - Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
D0028200
Fig. 1049
30-231
Disassembly
Fig. 1049
Fig. 1049
Installation
30.3.28 - Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
Removal
1. Compress circlip (1) and simultaneously withdraw the complete main shaft
assembly (2) from the gearbox support.
Fig. 1050
Installation
Installation is the reverse of removal.
30-232
30.3.29 - Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,

Disassembly
1. Remove circlip (1) or remove gear (2).
Fig. 1052
2. Using a press, remove bearing (3) and recover circlip (4).
Fig. 1053
Fig. 1054
30-233
4. Using the puller, remove the bearing (7).
Fig. 1055
Installation
30.3.30 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
2 4 7 5 8 10 13 14 16 17 18
21
6 9 11 12 15 19 20
D0036410
Fig. 1056 - Secondary shaft

Disassembly
1. Using a puller, remove thrust washer (1) and the 2nd speed driven gear.
Fig. 1057
30-234
2. Remove needle roller bearing (3) and remove circlip (4).
Fig. 1058
3. Remove synchroniser (5) complete with driver rings (6).
Fig. 1059
4. Remove circlip (7) and remove 3rd speed driven gear (8).
Fig. 1060
5. Remove thrust washer (9) and remove circlip (10) and thrust washer (11).
Fig. 1061
6. Remove 4th speed driven gear (12) and remove circlip (13).
Fig. 1062
30-235
7. Remove synchronizer (14) complete with driver rings (15).
Fig. 1063
8. Remove circlip (16) and remove 5th speed driven gear (17).
Fig. 1064
9. Remove circlip (18) and spacer (19).
Fig. 1065
20
D0036430
Fig. 1066
11. Only if necessary:
Withdraw bush (21).
21
D0036420
Fig. 1067
30-236
Assembly
Procedure 7
14
D0024880
Fig. 1068
Procedure 5
l Take care to install thrust washers (9) and (11) the right way round.
9
11
D0024870
Fig. 1069
Procedure 3
5
D0024860
Fig. 1070
30-237
30.3.31 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)

Disassembly
Fig. 1072
Fig. 1073
30-238
Fig. 1074
Fig. 1075
Fig. 1076
Fig. 1077
Fig. 1078
30-239
Fig. 1079
Fig. 1080
10. Remove the outer race of bearing (20) and the thrust washer.
Using a suitable tool, remove the inner race of bearing (20).
Fig. 1081
11. Remove circlip (21) and remove needle roller bearing (22).
Fig. 1082
30-240
Assembly
Procedure 7
Fig. 1083
Procedure 5
Fig. 1084
Procedure 3
Fig. 1085
30-241
30.3.32 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
2 4 7 5 8 10 13 14 16 17 18
21
6 9 11 12 15 19 20
D0036410
Fig. 1085
Disassembly
Fig. 1085
2. Remove roller cage (3) and remove circlip (4).
Fig. 1085
30-242
Fig. 1085
Fig. 1085
Fig. 1085
Fig. 1085
Fig. 1085
30-243
Fig. 1085
Fig. 1085
20
D0036430
Fig. 1085
Withdraw bush (21).
21
D0036420
Fig. 1085
30-244
Assembly
Procedure 7
14
D0024880
Fig. 1085
Procedure 5
9
11
D0024870
Fig. 1085
Procedure 3
5
D0024860
Fig. 1085
30.3.33 - Secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

Removal
1. Withdraw secondary shaft (1), Hi-Lo output shaft (2) and recover roller
cages (3) and spacer (4).
Fig. 1086
30-245
2. Remove circlip (5) and remove gear (6).
Fig. 1087
3. Remove bearing (7) and bush (8).
Fig. 1088
4. Remove disc (9).
Fig. 1089
5. Remove screw (10) and remove 1st speed selector fork (11) and synchro-
nizer assembly (12).
IMPORTANT
Renew screw (10) on reassembly.
Fig. 1090
6. Remove circlip (13) and remove 1st speed driven gear (14) and thrust
washer (15).
IMPORTANT
Note which way round thrust washer (15) is installed.
Fig. 1091
30-246
7. Remove lower plugs (16) and recover springs (17) and balls (18).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1092
Fig. 1093
9. Withdraw selector rod (20) and recover 2nd-3rd speed selector fork (21).
Fig. 1094
10. Withdraw 1st speed selector rod (22).
Fig. 1095
11. Withdraw rod (23) and recover 4th-5th speed selector fork (24).
Fig. 1096
30-247
12. Recover spring (25), ball (26) and detents (27) from the gearbox support.
Fig. 1097
Fig. 1098
14. Remove screws (30) and remove disc (31).
Fig. 1099
15. Remove bearing (32) and thrust washer (33).
Fig. 1100
16. Remove the complete secondary shaft assembly (34).
Fig. 1101
30-248
Refitting
Procedure 7
l Plugs: Loctite 542
Procedure 5
l Screws: 25 Nm (18.4 lb.ft.)
l Screws: Loctite 270
30.3.34 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001)

Disassembly
Fig. 1101
30-249
Fig. 1101
Fig. 1101
Fig. 1101
Fig. 1101
Fig. 1101
30-250
Fig. 1101
Fig. 1101
Fig. 1101
10. Remove bearing outer ring (20) and the thrust washer.
Using a suitable tool, remove bearing inner ring (20).
Fig. 1101
11. Remove circlip (21) and remove needle roller bearing (22).
Fig. 1101
30-251
Assembly
Procedure 7
Fig. 1101
Procedure 5
Fig. 1101
Procedure 3
Fig. 1101
30-252
30.3.35 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

Disassembly
1. Remove the RH ring (1) and the 2nd speed driven gear (2).
Fig. 1103
IMPORTANT
Renew the circlip on reassembly.
Fig. 1104
30-253
Fig. 1105
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1106
Fig. 1107
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1108
Fig. 1109
30-254
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1110
Assembly
Procedure 7
Fig. 1111
Procedure 5
Fig. 1112
Procedure 3
Fig. 1113
30-255
30.3.36 - Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
30-256
Disassembly
1. Remove circlip (1) and remove 2nd speed driven gear (2).
Fig. 1115
2. Remove roller bearing (3) and remove circlip (4).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1116
Fig. 1117
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1118
Fig. 1119
30-257
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1120
Fig. 1121
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1122
30-258
Assembly
Procedure 7
Fig. 1123
Procedure 5
Fig. 1124
Procedure 3
Fig. 1125
30.3.37 - Gearbox and shuttle assy. - complete unit (D0.09.05) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85)
30-259
Removal
1. Remove screw (1) and nut (2) and remove lever (3).
Fig. 1126
2. Remove screws (4) and remove gear control lever (5).
Fig. 1127
3. Remove screws (6) (n°10) and remove gearbox assembly (7).
Fig. 1128
Installation
Procedure 3
l Mating face: Silastic 738
Fig. 1129
30-260
Procedure 2
Fig. 1130
Fill the transmission with the required quantity of oil.

Bleed the air from the clutch control circuit.
Bleed the air from the brake circuit.
30.3.38 - Disassembly of gearbox and shuttle assy. - complete unit (Agrofarm 100, Agro-
farm 85)
Disassembly
1. Remove the four screws (1) and remove cover (2).
m Renew the paper gasket (3) on reassembly.
Fig. 1131
2. Engage 1st gear, and using a bar “A” made of soft material as a restraint,
remove screw (4).
Fig. 1132
3. Remove cover (5) and recover O-ring (6).
m Check the condition of O-ring (6) and renew it if necessary.
Fig. 1133
30-261
4. Remove screw (7) and remove 1st speed selector rod (8) and synchronizer
assy (9).
m Renew the screw (7) on reassembly.
Fig. 1134
5. Remove circlip (10) and remove 1st speed driving gear (11).
Fig. 1135
6. Remove sleeve (12) and 1st speed driven gear (13).
Fig. 1136
7. Remove thrust washer (14).
m Note which way round the thrust washer (14) is installed.
Fig. 1137
8. Remove plug (15) and recover spring (16) and ball (17).
Fig. 1138
30-262
9. Remove screw (18) and remove reverse shuttle control rod (19) and rela-
tive fork (20).
Fig. 1139
10. Remove screws (21) and (22) securing 1st, 2nd and 3rd speed selector fork
(23) and 4th and 5th speed selector fork (24).
m Fit new screws on reassembly.
Fig. 1140
11. Open circlip (25) and simultaneously strike input shaft (26) with a soft mallet
to separate bearing (27) from circlip (25).
Fig. 1141
12. Using a soft mallet, strike in sequence input shaft (26), main shaft (28) and
secondary shaft (29) to dislodge them from gearbox support (30).
Fig. 1142
30-263
Assembly
Procedure 4
l Take care to install synchronizer (9) the right way round with respect to
secondary shaft (29).
Fig. 1143
Procedures 4-10
Bolt: Loctite 270
Procedure 2
l Bolt: 73±1 Nm (53.8±0.74 lb.ft.)
Bolt: Loctite 270
Fig. 1144
30.3.39 - Range gearbox and differential assembly - complete assembly

Removal
After having performed the pre-disassembly operations, the assembly will be already disconnected from the tractor.
Refitting
30.3.40 - Complete gearbox assembly - Version with Hi-Lo (D0.09.04) (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
See para. 30.3.17 - Gearbox and Hi-Lo asse... - page 30-203 - (D0.04.01)
30-264
Removal
1. Remove screws (1) and remove gear lever (2).
Fig. 1145
2. Remove sleeve (3) and remove screws (4).
Fig. 1146
3. Remove the complete gearbox assembly (5).
Fig. 1147
Refitting
Procedure 3
Fig. 1148
Procedure 1
m Transmission oil: max 50 l (13.2 US. gall.)
30-265
30.3.41 - Complete gearbox assembly - Version with Hi-Lo (D0.09.05) (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. Remove screw (1) and nut (2) and remove lever (3).
Fig. 1148
2. Remove screws (4) and remove gear control lever (5).
Fig. 1149
3. Remove the ten screws (6) and remove gearbox assembly (7).
Fig. 1150
30-266
Refitting
Procedure 3
Fig. 1151
Procedure 2
l Mating faces: Loctite 518
Fig. 1152

l Bleed the air from the clutch control circuit.
l Bleed the front brakes circuit.
30.3.42 - Disassembly of complete gearbox unit - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. Remove the four screws (1) and remove cover (2).
m Renew paper gasket (3) on reassembly.
Fig. 1152
2. Engage 1st gear, and using a bar “A” made of soft material as a restraint,
remove screw (4).
Fig. 1152
30-267
3. Remove cover (5) and recover O-ring (6).
Fig. 1152
4. Remove screw (7) and remove 1st speed selector fork (8) and synchronizer
assembly (9).
m Renew screw (7) on reassembly.
Fig. 1152
5. Remove circlip (10) and remove 1st speed driving gear (11).
Fig. 1152
6. Remove sleeve (12) and 1st speed driven gear (13).
Fig. 1152
7. Remove thrust washer (14).
m Note which way round thrust washer (14) is installed.
Fig. 1152
30-268
8. Remove plug (15) and recover spring (16) and ball (17).
Fig. 1152
9. Remove screw (18) and remove reverse shuttle control rod (19) and rela-
tive fork (20).
Fig. 1152
10. Remove screws (21) and (22) securing 1st-2nd-3rd speed selector fork (23)
and 4th- 5th speed selector fork (24).
m Fit new screws on reassembly.
Fig. 1152
11. Open circlip (25) and simultaneously strike input shaft (26) with a soft mallet
to separate bearing (27) from circlip (25).
Fig. 1152
12. Using a soft mallet, strike in sequence input shaft (26), main shaft (28) and
secondary shaft (29) to dislodge them from gearbox support (30).
Fig. 1152
30-269
Assembly
Procedure 4
l Take care to install synchronizer (9) the right way round with respect to
secondary shaft (29).
Fig. 1152
Procedures 4-10
l Screw: Loctite 270
Procedure 2
l Screw: 73±1 Nm (53.8±0.74 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1152
30.3.43 - Front gearbox oil seal (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. Withdraw shafts (1) and (2).
Fig. 1153
2. Open circlip (3) and simultaneously withdraw shaft (4).
Fig. 1154
30-270
3. Using a suitable puller, remove the seal ring (5).
Fig. 1155
Installation
To assemble, follow the disassembly steps in reverse order and carry out the fol-
lowing procedures.
Procedure 2
l Check the condition of O-ring (6) and renew it if damaged.
Fig. 1156
30.3.44 - Gearbox support and gear selector rods

Disassembly
1. Remove plugs (1) and recover springs (2) and balls (3).
3
2
1
2
1 1 F0083011
Fig. 1157
2. Remove plug (4) and withdraw 1st speed selector rod (5).
F0083020
Fig. 1158
30-271
3. Recover interlock pin (6) and withdraw 2nd/3rd speed selector rod (7).
F0083030
Fig. 1159
4. Recover interlock pin (8).
F0083040
Fig. 1160
5. Remove bearing (9), recover spring (10) and ball (11) and withdraw 4th/5th
speed selector rod (12).
Fig. 1161
6. Open circlip (13) and remove bearing (15) from gearbox support (14).
14
13
15
F0083071
Fig. 1162
30-272
Assembly
Procedure 5
l Take care to install 4th/5th speed selector rod (12) the right way round.
12
F0086980
Fig. 1163
Procedure 3
l Take care to install 2nd/3rd speed selector rod (7) the right way round.
F0083090
Fig. 1164
Procedure 2
l Take care to install 1st speed selector rod (5) the right way round.
F0083080
Fig. 1165
30-273
30.3.45 - Adjustment of the differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 1166 - Differential - Bevel gear pair

Preparation of adjustments
1. All the procedures described in this chapter must be carried out following renewal of the transmission casing, differential sup-
port flanges, bevel gear pair, differential housing or the support bearings of the pinion and differential.
2. Install bearing assembly (2) on pinion shaft (1).
m When handling bearing (2), take care not to invert the inner races.
During assembly of bearing (2) on pinion shaft (1), rotate the outer
race to help seat the rollers.
Bearing: Transmission oil
Fig. 1167
3. Install a service bush “A” on the pinion shaft (1) (example: Ø 60 x Ø 45 x Ø
18) and provisionally tighten the new ringnut (3).
Fig. 1168
30-274
4. Remove the outer race of bearing (5) and relative shims (6) from flange (4)
on the crown wheel side.
m Note the thickness “S” of shim pack (6) (e.g. 0.80 mm).
Fig. 1169
5. Remove the outer race of bearing (8) and shims (9) from flange (7) on the
opposite side to the crown wheel.
Fig. 1170
6. Heat bearing inner race (5) to 80 °C and install it on the crown wheel side
of differential (10).
m Check that the bearing seats against the shoulder on the differential.
Install the outer race of bearing (5) in crown wheel side flange (4), with shim
pack (6) approximately 0.5 mm less than the measured dimension “S”.
m Example:
m Measured dimension = 0.80 mm
Thickness of shim pack (6) to be installed: 0.30 mm
Fig. 1171
7. Heat the inner race of bearing (8) to approx. 80 °C and install on differential
(10) on the side opposite to the crown wheel.
m Check that bearing (8) seats against the shoulder on the differential.
Install bearing outer race (8) and a 1.00 mm thick shim pack (9) on flange
(7) on the opposite side to the crown wheel.
Fig. 1172
30-275
Adjustment of the differential bearings preload
1. Locate complete differential assembly (10) in the transmission casing.
Fig. 1173
2. Install the flanges (4) and (7) and secure in position with screws (11).
m While tightening screws (11), rotate the differential unit to help seat
the bearings.
Bearings: Transmission oil
Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1174
3. Position a dial gauge with magnetic stand “A” on the crown wheel side of
differential carrier (4) and set it to zero on the end face of the differential
while simultaneously forcing the differential with lever “B” towards the op-
posite side.
Force the differential towards the crown wheel side and measure end float
“G”.
m If the end float is zero, adjust shim pack (9) on the opposite side to
the crown wheel to 0.70 mm and repeat the procedure to measure
end float “G”.
Fig. 1175
4. Add 0.10 mm to the measured end float value “G” and round up to the near-
est 0.05 mm to determine the shim thickness to be added under the outer
race of bearing (8) on the opposite side to the crown wheel.
Example:
m Measured value: 0.28 mm
Nominal value: 0.28 + 0.10 = 0.38 mm
Actual shim thickness to be added: 0.40 mm
Fig. 1176
5. Remove screws (11) on both sides, leaving just one in position for safety.
Fig. 1177
30-276
6. Using a suitable drift made of soft material, separate differential flanges (4)
and (7) from the transmission casing.
Fig. 1178
7. Remove last screw (11) and remove flanges (4) and (7).
Fig. 1179
8. Attach differential (10) to a hoist and remove it.
Fig. 1179
30-277
Adjustment of the pinion position
1. Make a note of the value “E” stamped on one of the teeth of pinion (1).
m In this example: + 0.15 mm
Fig. 1180
2. Install pinion (1) without shims (12) in the transmission casing.
Fig. 1181
Fig. 1181
m Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
While tightening screws (11), check for the presence of clearance
between the differential and pinion (1). If the differential is seated
against the pinion, adjust the shim packs installed under the outer
races of the bearings so as to reduce the thickness of the pack on
the crown wheel side and increase the thickness of the pack on the
opposite side by the same amount.
Fig. 1181
30-278
5. Use a feeler gauge to measure the distance “D” between the end face of
pinion (1) and the 174 Ø section of differential (10) (in this example 2.85).
Calculate dimension “R” by adding dimension “E” previously read on the
tooth of pinion (1) to the design value of 2.00 mm.
If “E” is positive, as in the example shown in figure, add it to the design
value of 2.00 mm.
m R= 2.00 + “E” therefore R= 2.00 + 0.15 = 2.15
If “E” is negative, subtract it from the design value of 2.00 mm
m R= 2.00 – “E” therefore R= 2.00 – 0.15 = 1.85
Fig. 1182
If the measured value “D” differs from the calculated value “R”, calculate the
difference between “D” and “R”. The resulting value “S” is the shim thick-
ness to be installed under bearing (2) of pinion (1).
Formula: S = D - R
m which in our example gives: S = 2.85 – 2.15 = 0.70 mm
Fig. 1182
Fig. 1182
8. Remove the last screw (11) and remove flanges (4) and (7).
Fig. 1182
30-279
Fig. 1182
10. Using a puller, remove the complete pinion shaft (1) from the transmission
casing.
Remove ringnut (3) and service spacer “A” from pinion shaft (1)”.
Fig. 1183
11. Measure dimension “R” of the shoulder of bearing (2).
Example:
m “R” = 4.96 mm
Install pinion (1) and shim pack (12) of the previously calculated thickness
“S”, reversing the removal procedure.
Fig. 1184
12. Secure pinion (1) in position with suitable circlip (13) selected from the
available sizes.
Select circlip (13) by applying the following formula:
Circlip thickness:
mFixed dimension “K” = 9.5 mm
Shim thickness = “S”
Dimension “R” = 4.96 mm (valid measurements: 4.90-5.00mm)
Formula:
m A = K - S - R which in our example gives:
m A = 9.5 - 0.7 - 4.96 = 3.84 mm Fig. 1185
The circlip to be used is therefore the one whose thickness equals 3.80
mm.
Circlip (13) installed should in any case ensure pinion end

float of less than 0.1 mm.
30-280
Adjustment of pinion and crown wheel backlash
Fig. 1185
m While tightening screws (11), rotate differential assembly (10) to
help seat the bearings.
Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1185
3. Position a dial gauge “A” on a magnetic stand with the contact point perpen-
dicular to the side of a tooth on the external diameter of the crown wheel.
Preload the gauge by approx. 3 mm and check the backlash “Z” between
pinion and crown wheel while turning differential (3) in both directions.
m Normal backlash:
0.12-0.18 mm
m Take four measurements 90° apart and calculate the average.
Fig. 1186
4. If backlash “Z” is less than the minimum value, remove a shim from shim
pack (6) (crown wheel side) and add the same shim to shim pack (9) (side
opposite to crown wheel). If backlash “Z” is greater than the maximum val-
ue add a shim to (shim pack (6) (crown wheel side) and remove an identical
shim from shim pack (9) (opposite side to crown wheel).
m The sum total thickness of shim packs (6) and (9) should not be dif-
ferent from the calculated value.
Recheck backlash “Z” and, if necessary, continue to adjust the shims until
the backlash is within the specified tolerance limits.
Fig. 1187
30-281
30.3.46 - Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100)
2 3
12 13
11
11
9
11
11
4
10
D0048000

Preparation for adjustments
1. All the procedures described in this chapter must be carried out following renewal of the transmission casing, differential sup-
port flanges, bevel gear pair, differential housing or the support bearings of the pinion and differential.
30-282
Fig. 1188
3. Install a service bush “A” on the pinion shaft (1) (example: Ø 65 x Ø 50 x Ø
20) and provisionally tighten the new nut (3).
Fig. 1188
m Note the thickness “S” of shim pack (6) (e.g.: 0.80 mm).
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
6. Heat the inner race of bearing (5) to 80 °C and install it on the crown wheel
side of differential (10).
m Example:
m Measured dimension “S” = 0.80 mm
Fig. 1188
30-283
7. Heat the inner ring of bearing (8) to approx. 80 °C and install on differential
Install the outer race of bearing (8) and a 1.00 mm thick shim pack (9) on
flange (7) on the opposite side to the crown wheel.
Fig. 1188

1. Locate complete differential (10) in the transmission casing.
Fig. 1188
the bearings.
Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1188
posite side.
Force the differential axially towards the crown wheel side and measure
clearance “G”.
m If there is no clearance, reassemble the shim pack (9) on the op-
posite side of the crown wheel at a distance of 0.70 mm and repeat
measurement of clearance “G”.
Fig. 1188
Example:
Nominal value: 0.28 + 0.10 = 0.38 mm
Fig. 1188
30-284
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-285
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
3. Locate complete differential (10) in the transmission casing
Fig. 1188
m Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
While tightening screws (11), check that there is clearance between
the differential and pinion (1). If the differential is seated against the
pinion, adjust the shim packs installed under the outer races of the
bearings so as to reduce the thickness of the pack on the crown
wheel side and increase the thickness of the pack on the opposite
side by the same amount.
Fig. 1188
30-286
pinion (1) and the Ø 174 section of differential (10) (in this example 4.85).
If the value “E” is positive, as in the case reported in the figure, it should
be added to the design value of 4.00 mm:
m R= 4.00 + “E” i.e. R= 4.00 + 0.15 = 4.15
m R= 4.00 - “E” i.e. R= 4.00 - 0.15 = 3.85
Fig. 1188
If value “D” is different from the calculated value “R”, calculated the differ-
ence between value “D” and “R”. The resulting value “S” is the shim thick-
Formula: S = D - R
m which in our example gives: S = 4.85 - 4.15 = 0.70 mm
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-287
Fig. 1188
10. Using a puller, remove pinion (1) complete with the transmission casing.
Remove ringnut (3) and service spacer “A” from pinion (1) .
Fig. 1188
Example:
m “R” = 4.96 mm
Fig. 1188
12. Secure pinion (1) in position with a suitable circlip (13) selected from the
available sizes.
Circlip thickness:
Shim dimension = “S”
Dimension “R” = 4.96 mm (valid measurements: 4,90÷ 5,00mm)
Formula:
m A = 9.5 - 0.7 - 4.96 = 3.84 mm Fig. 1188
mm.

30-288
Fig. 1188
Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1188
m Normal backlash:
0.20-0.28 mm
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-289
30.3.47 - Adjustment of the differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

Preparations for adjustments
1. m All the procedures described in this chapter must be carried out following renewal of the transmission casing, differen-
tial support flanges, bevel gear pair, differential housing or the support bearings of the pinion and differential.
Fig. 1188
3. Install a service bush “A” (Ø 60 x Ø 45 x Ø 18) on pinion shaft (1) and pro-
visionally tighten ringnut (3).
Fig. 1188
30-290
m Note the thickness “S” of shim pack (6) (e.g., 0.80 mm).
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
6. Heat bearing inner race (5) to 80 °C and install it on the crown wheel side
of differential (10).
m Example:
Fig. 1188
7. Heat the inner race of bearing (8) to approx. 80 °C and install on differential
Fig. 1188
30-291
Fig. 1188
the bearings.
Screws: 32 to 40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1188
posite side.
Force the differential towards the crown wheel side and measure end float
“G”.
m If the end float is zero, adjust shim pack (9) on the opposite side to
the crown wheel to 0.70 mm and repeat the procedure to measure
end float “G”.
Fig. 1188
ring of bearing (8) on the opposite side to the crown wheel.
Example:
Nominal value: 0.28 + 0.10 = 0.38 mm
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-292
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-293
Adjustment of pinion position
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
m Screws: 32 to 40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
While tightening screws (11), check for the presence of clearance
between the differential and pinion (1). If the differential is seated
against the pinion, adjust the shim packs installed under the outer
races of the bearings so as to reduce the thickness of the pack on
the crown wheel side and increase the thickness of the pack on the
opposite side by the same amount.
Fig. 1188
30-294
m R= 2.00 + “E” i.e. R= 2.00 + 0.15 = 2.15
m R= 2.00 - “E” i.e. R= 2.00 - 0.15 = 1.85
Fig. 1188
If the measured value “D” differs from the calculated value “R”, calculate the
difference between “D” and “R”. The resulting value “S” is the shim thick-
Formula: S = D - R
m which in our example gives: S = 2.85 – 2.15 = 0.70 mm
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-295
Fig. 1188
Remove nut (3) and service spacer “A” from pinion shaft (1).
Fig. 1188
Example:
m “R” = 4.96 mm
Fig. 1188
12. Secure pinion (1) in position with suitable circlip (13) selected from the
available sizes.
Circlip thickness:
Shim thickness = “S”
Dimension “R” = 4.96 mm (tolerance range: 4.90-5.00mm)
Formula:
m A = 9.5 - 0.7 - 4.96 = 3.84 mm Fig. 1188
The circlip to be used is therefore the one with thickness 3.80 mm.

30-296
Fig. 1188
Screws: 32 to 40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1188
m Normal backlash:
85 hp 0.12 - 0.18 mm
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-297
30.3.48 - Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
2 3
12 13
11
11
9
11
11
4
10
D0048000

Preparation for adjustments
1. m All the procedures described in this chapter must be carried out following renewal of the transmission casing, differen-
tial support flanges, bevel gear pair, differential housing or the support bearings of the pinion and differential.
30-298
m During assembly of bearing (2) on pinion shaft (1), rotate the outer
m Bearing: Transmission oil
Fig. 1188
3. Install a service bush “A” (Ø 65 x Ø 50 x Ø 20) on pinion shaft (1) and pro-
visionally tighten ringnut (3).
Fig. 1188
m Note the thickness “S” of shim pack (6) (e.g.: 0.80 mm).
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
6. Heat the inner race of bearing (5) to 80 °C and install it on the crown wheel
side of differential (10).
m Example:
Fig. 1188
30-299
7. Heat the inner ring of bearing (8) to approx. 80 °C and install on differential
Fig. 1188

Fig. 1188
the bearings.
Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1188
posite side.
Force the differential axially towards the crown wheel side and measure
clearance “G”.
m If there is no clearance, reassemble the shim pack (9) on the op-
posite side of the crown wheel at a distance of 0.70 mm and repeat
measurement of clearance “G”.
Fig. 1188
Example:
Nominal value: 0.28 + 0.10 = 0.38 mm
Fig. 1188
30-300
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-301
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
m Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
While tightening screws (11), check that there is clearance between
the differential and pinion (1). If the differential is seated against the
pinion, adjust the shim packs installed under the outer races of the
bearings so as to reduce the thickness of the pack on the crown
wheel side and increase the thickness of the pack on the opposite
side by the same amount.
Fig. 1188
30-302
m R= 4.00 + “E” i.e. R= 4.00 + 0.15 = 4.15
m R= 4.00 - “E” i.e. R= 4.00 - 0.15 = 3.85
Fig. 1188
If value “D” is different from the calculated value “R”, calculated the differ-
ence between value “D” and “R”. The resulting value “S” is the shim thick-
Formula: S = D - R
m which in our example gives: S = 4.85 - 4.15 = 0.70 mm
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-303
Fig. 1188
Remove ringnut (3) and service spacer “A” from pinion (1) .
Fig. 1188
Example:
m “R” = 4.96 mm
Fig. 1188
12. Secure pinion (1) in position with a suitable circlip (13) selected from the
available sizes.
Circlip thickness:
Shim dimension = “S”
Dimension “R” = 4.96 mm (valid measurements: 4,90÷ 5,00mm)
Formula:
m A = 9.5 - 0.7 - 4.96 = 3.84 mm Fig. 1188
mm.

30-304
Fig. 1188
Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1188
m Normal backlash: 0.20-0.28 mm
Fig. 1188
Fig. 1188
30-305
30.3.49 - Disassembly of the rear pinion (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1189 - Rear pinion

Disassembly
1. Loosen union (1) and remove lubrication pipe (2).
F0084952
Fig. 1190
4
F0109301
Fig. 1191
30-306
3. Using a puller, partially withdraw the pinion shaft (5) in order to gain access
to the ringnut (6). 5 6
F0084972
Fig. 1192
4. Apply a 46 mm “T” wrench to ringnut (6) and secure in position.
T
For versions with groundspeed PTO:
Fit a suitable bush on output shaft (7) of the groundspeed PTO and loosen
ringnut (6) by turning output shaft (7) clockwise.
7
m If possible, relieve the staking on ringnut (6).
F0084981
Fig. 1193
5. For versions without groundspeed PTO:
Remove cover (8), install service tool T1 (code 5.9030.988.0) and loosen
ringnut (6) by turning clockwise.
m If possible, relieve the staking on the ringnut.
8
F0098661
Fig. 1194
6. Proceed with withdrawal of pinion shaft (5) sleeve (9) and selector (10).
Fig. 1195
7. Remove gear (11) and rotary union (12).
Fig. 1196
30-307
8. Remove low or high range selector fork (11).
11
F0085015
Fig. 1197
9. Remove ringnut (6) and gear (13)
13
F0085025
Fig. 1198
10. If the outer race of the pinion bearing remains in the gearbox casing, re-
insert the pinion shaft and fit a service bush “A” (example: Ø 65 x Ø 45 x
A
18) and ringnut (6). 6
F0085031
Fig. 1199
11. Using a puller, remove pinion (5) complete with bearing (14) and shims
(15). 15 5
14
F0085125
Fig. 1200
Using a press and a suitable puller, remove bearing (14) from the pinion
shaft (5).
5
14
F0085065
Fig. 1201
30-308
Assembly
Procedure 12
l Before fitting bearing (14) on pinion shaft (5), lubricate the inner races of
the bearing. 5
During assembly of bearing (14), rotate the outer race to bed in the rollers
and ensure smooth rotation.
14
F0085097
Fig. 1202
Procedure 5
Fig. 1203
Procedure 4
l Stake ringnut (6).
6
F0085081
Fig. 1204
Procedure 4
l Renew the ringnut on reassembly.
l Tighten the ringnut by turning the groundspeed PTO shaft or service tool T1
(code 5.9030.988.0) counterclockwise and using 46 mm “T” wrench. T
T1
l Nut: Loctite 270
l Nominal tightening torque:
m 460±20 Nm (339±14.7 lb.ft.)
l Tightening torque using the groundspeed PTO output shaft or service tool
T1 F0085072
m 472±20.5 Nm (348±15.1 lb.ft.)

Fig. 1205
l If the bevel gear pair, the bearings of the pinion or differential or the transmission casing are renewed, adjust the bevel gear
pair.
30-309
30.3.50 - Disassembly of the rear pinion (Agrofarm 100)

Disassembly
Fig. 1207
Fig. 1208
30-310
3. Versions with 3 range gears
Using a puller, partially withdraw the pinion (5) in order to gain access to
the ringnut (6).
Fig. 1209
4. Apply service wrench T (code 5.9030.984.0) to the ringnut and secure it
in position.
Fit a suitable bush on groundspeed P.T.O. shaft (7) and loosen the ringnut
(6) by turning the output shaft clockwise.
Fig. 1210
5. For versions with groundpseed P.T.O.
Remove cover (8), fit service tool T11 (code. 5.9030.988.0) and loosen
ringnut (6) by turning clockwise.
Fig. 1211
6. Proceed with removal of pinion (5), removing sleeve (9) and selector (10).
Fig. 1212
Fig. 1213
30-311
Fig. 1214
9. Remove ringnut (6) and gear (14).
Fig. 1215
10. Install a service bush “A” on the pinion shaft (example: Ø 65 x Ø 50 x Ø 20)
and the ringnut (6).
Fig. 1216
11. Using a puller, remove pinion shaft (5) complete with bearing (15) and
shims (16).
Fig. 1217
Using a press and a suitable puller, remove bearing (15) from pinion shaft
(5).
Fig. 1218
30-312
Installation
Procedure 11
the bearing.
m Bearing: transmission oil
l During assembly of bearing (15), rotate the outer race to bed in the rollers
Fig. 1219
Procedure 5
Fig. 1220
Procedure 4
l Renew ringnut (6) on reassembly.
l Tighten the ringnut by turning the groundspeed P.T.O. output shaft clock-
wise and using service wrench T (code. 5.9030.984.0).
m Nut: Loctite 270
m Nut: Nominal tightening torque: 460±20Nm (339±14.7 lb.ft.)
m Tightening torque using groundspeed P.T.O. shaft 390±17Nm
287.4±12.5 lb.ft).
Fig. 1221
pair.
30-313
30.3.51 - Disassembly of rear pinion (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)

Disassembly
Fig. 1221
Fig. 1221
30-314
3. Versions with 3 range gears
Using a puller, partially withdraw the pinion (5) in order to gain access to
the ringnut (6).
Fig. 1221
4. Apply service wrench T (code 5.9030.984.0) to the ringnut and secure it in
position.
Fit a suitable bush on groundspeed PTO shaft (7) and loosen the ringnut (6)
by turning the output shaft clockwise
Fig. 1221
5. For versions with groundpseed PTO
Remove cover (8), fit service tool T11 (code 5.9030.988.0) and loosen ring-
nut (6) by turning clockwise.
Fig. 1221
6. Proceed with removal of pinion (5), removing sleeve (9) and selector (10).
Fig. 1221
Fig. 1221
30-315
Fig. 1221
9. Remove ringnut (6) and gear (14).
Fig. 1221
10. Install a service bush “A” on the pinion shaft (example: Ø 65 x Ø 50 x Ø 20)
and the ringnut (6).
Fig. 1221
11. Using a puller, remove pinion shaft (5) complete with bearing (15) and
shims (16).
Fig. 1221
Using a press and a suitable puller, remove bearing (15) from pinion shaft
(5).
Fig. 1221
30-316
Assembly
Procedure 11
the bearing.
m Bearing: transmission oil
l During assembly of bearing (15), rotate the outer race to bed in the rollers
Fig. 1221
Procedure 5
Fig. 1221
Procedure 4
l Renew ringnut (6) on reassembly.
l Tighten the ringnut by turning the groundspeed PTO output shaft clockwise
and using service wrench T (code 5.9030.984.0).
m Nut: Loctite 270
m Nut: Nominal tightening torque: 460±20Nm (339±14.7 lb.ft.)
m Tightening torque using the groundspeed PTO output shaft
390±17Nm 287.4±12.5 lb.ft).
Fig. 1221
pair.
30-317
30.3.52 - Disassembly of the 4WD output shaft
Fig. 1222 - 4WD output shaft

Disassembly
1
F0096980
Fig. 1223
2. Remove pin (2) and remove range selector fork (3).
2
F0085381
Fig. 1224
30-318
4
5
F0085391
Fig. 1225
4. Remove retaining half rings (6).
F0085401
Fig. 1226
5. Using a soft metal punch, partially drive out shaft (7) and remove gear (8).
7 8
F0085411
Fig. 1227
6. Continue to withdraw the shaft and remove gear (9) complete with bush
9
(10) and selector sleeve (11) complete with hub (12). 10 12 11
F0085421
Fig. 1228
7. For all versions:
13
Remove gear (13).
Remove the shaft.
Fig. 1229
30-319
8. Remove circlip (14) and, using a press, remove thrust washer (15) and
bearing (16).
14
15
16
Fig. 1230
Assembly
30.3.53 - PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Removal
1. Loosen union (1) and disconnect pipe (2).
Fig. 1231
2. Disconnect pipe (3), remove screws (4) and remove pipe (5).
Fig. 1232
Fig. 1233
30-320
4. Loosen upper and lower unions (8)and remove PTO control pipes (9).
Fig. 1234
5. Using a slide hammer pullet, remove the PTO drive shaft (10).
Fig. 1235
6. Remove screw (11) and remove manifold (12).
m Check the condition of the O-rings (13) and renew them if neces-
sary.
Fig. 1236
7. Remove extension (14) from the transmission.
sary.
Fig. 1237
8. Dislodge circlip (16) from its seat and insert driver sleeve (17) in clutch as-
sembly (18).
Fig. 1238
30-321
9. Fully loosen union (19) and disconnect lubrication pipe (20) from clutch
assembly (18).
Fig. 1239
10. Remove complete clutch assembly (18).
Fig. 1240
11. Remove sleeve (17) complete with circlip (16) from clutch assembly (18)
and, if present, remove also spacer (20).
Fig. 1241
30-322
Refitting
Procedure 11
l Install driver sleeve (17) in clutch assembly (18) complete with circlip (16)
and spacer (20).
Spacer (20) must always be installed when carrying out the overhaul or
renewal of any of the assemblies or components associated with operation
of the rear PTO.
Fig. 1241
Procedure 5
l Move driver sleeve (17) towards the front of the tractor so that it seats
against O-ring (22).
Fig. 1242
l Using a feeler gauge, measure the residual clearance “G” between spacer
(20) and circlip (16).
If measured clearance “G” is less than 1.00 mm, remove spacer (20).
Fig. 1243
Procedure 3
Fig. 1244
30-323
Procedure 2
l Renew gasket (21) after every removal.
Fig. 1245
30.3.54 - PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. Loosen union (1), remove clamp (2) and disconnect pipe (3).
Fig. 1246
2. Disconnect pipe (4), remove screws (5) and remove pipe (6).
Fig. 1247
3. Remove the screws (7) and remove the cover (8).
Fig. 1248
30-324
4. Loosen upper and lower unions (9) and remove PTO control pipes (10).
Fig. 1249
5. Using a slide hammer puller, remove the PTO drive shaft (11).
Fig. 1250
6. Remove screw (12) and remove manifold (13).
m Check the condition of O-rings (14) and renew them if necessary.
Fig. 1251
7. Remove extension (15) from the transmission.
sary.
Fig. 1252
8. Dislodge circlip (17) from its seat and insert driver sleeve (18) in clutch as-
sembly (19).
Fig. 1253
30-325
9. Fully loosen union (20) and disconnect lubrication pipe (21) from clutch
assembly (19).
Fig. 1254
10. Remove complete clutch assembly (19).
Fig. 1255
11. Remove sleeve (17) complete with circlip (18) from clutch assembly (21)
and, if present, remove also spacer (19).
Fig. 1256
30-326
Refitting
Procedure 11
l Install driver sleeve (18) in clutch assembly (19) complete with circlip (17)
and spacer (21).
The spacer (21) must always be installed when carrying out the overhaul or
renewal of any of the assemblies or components associated with operation
of the rear PTO engagement controls.
Fig. 1256
Procedure 5
l Move driver sleeve (18) towards the front of the tractor so that it seats
against O-ring (23).
Fig. 1257
l Using a feeler gauge, measure the residual clearance “G” between spacer
(21) and circlip (17).
If the measured clearance “G” is less than 1.00 mm, remove spacer (21).
Fig. 1258
Procedure 3
Fig. 1259
30-327
Procedure 2
l Renew gasket (22) after every removal.
Fig. 1260
30.3.55 - PTO clutch disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 1261 - PTO clutch

Disassembly
1. Using a suitable wrench T7 remove accumulator (1).
Fig. 1262
30-328
2. Remove pressure relief valve (2).
Fig. 1263
Fig. 1264
4. Remove steel disc (5) and then remove all friction discs (6) and steel discs
(7).
Fig. 1265
5. Remove hub (8) and shim (9).
Fig. 1266
6. Using a press and a suitable tool, lightly compress spring (10) and remove
circlip (11).
Fig. 1267
30-329
7. Remove disc (12) and spring (10).
Fig. 1268
8. Turn the assembly over and blow compressed air at low pressure into the
hole on clutch housing (13) to expel piston (14).
Fig. 1269
9. Remove O-ring (15) from piston (14) and remove O-ring (17) from hub (16).
Fig. 1270
10. Remove screws (18) and remove cover (19), friction disc (20) and steel
disc (21).
Fig. 1271
m Restrain the piston (22) as it could be expelled at high speed and
thus damaged.
Fig. 1272
30-330
12. Remove O-ring (23) from piston (22) and O-ring (24) from clutch housing
(13).
Fig. 1273
13. Remove circlip (25) and thrust washer (26).
Fig. 1274
14. Remove clutch assembly (13) from clutch housing (16).
Fig. 1275
15. Remove retaining rings (27) from clutch housing (16).
Fig. 1276
30-331
Assembly
Procedure 15
l Seal rings: Oil
Procedures 9-12
l O-rings: Oil
Procedures 4-10
l Friction plates: Oil
Procedure 3
l Position the clutch assembly vertically and, using a feeler gauge, check that
the clearance “G” between circlip (3) and spacer (4) is within the tolerance
limits. If the clearance exceeds tolerance limits, add another spacer (4).
clearance “G”: 0.6÷2.0 mm
Fig. 1277
Procedures 1-2
l Accumulator and pressure relief valve: Loctite 542
30.3.56 - Disassembly of the PTO clutch (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
30-332
Disassembly
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
(7).
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
30-333
circlip (11).
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
10. Remove the screws (18) and remove the cover (19), the friction disc (20)
and the steel disc (21).
Fig. 1278
30-334
m Restrain piston (22) as it could be expelled at high speed and thus
damaged.
Fig. 1278
(13).
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
Fig. 1278
30-335
Assembly
Procedure 15
l Rings: Oil
Procedures 9-12
l O-rings: Oil
Procedures 4-10
l Friction discs: Oil
Procedure 3
clearance “G”: 0.6-2.0 mm
Fig. 1279
Procedures 1-2
30.3.57 - Disassembly of the PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
30-336
Disassembly
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
(7).
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
30-337
circlip (11).
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
10. Remove screws (18) and remove cover (19), friction disc (20) and steel
disc (21).
Fig. 1279
30-338
damaged.
Fig. 1279
(13).
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
Fig. 1279
30-339
Assembly
Procedure 15
l Rings: Oil
Procedures 9-12
l O-rings: Oil
Procedures 4-10
l Friction discs: Oil
Procedure 3
clearance “G”: 0.6-2.0 mm
Fig. 1279
Procedures 1-2
30.3.58 - Pump drive PTO - Outer gear (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 1280 - Pump drive PTO
30-340
Disassembly
Fig. 1281
2. Remove front and rear pump drive sleeves (3).
Fig. 1282
3. Remove screws (4) and front and rear flanges (5).
6 5
m Renew paper gaskets (6) on reassembly. 4
5
F0085590
Fig. 1283
4. Withdraw sleeve (7), bearings (8), spacer (9) and gear (10) from the trans-
mission casing. 7 8
7 9
m Insert a tie “A” in sleeve (7) to prevent spacer (9) from falling inside
the transmission. 8
A
F0085600
Fig. 1284
Assembly
30-341
Procedure 1
D0024400
Fig. 1285
30.3.59 - Pump drive PTO - Outer gear (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1286
Disassembly
Fig. 1287
30-342
2. Remove rear pump drive sleeve (3).
Fig. 1288
3. Remove nuts (4) and remove rear flange (5).
m Renew paper gasket (6) on reassembly.
Fig. 1289
4. Withdraw sleeve (7), bearings (8), spacer (9) and gear (10) from the trans-
mission casing.
m Insert a tie “A” in sleeve (7) to prevent spacer (9) from falling inside
the transmission.
Fig. 1290
30-343
Assembly
Procedure 3
l Moisten the paper gasket with Loctite 510
Procedure 1
Fig. 1291
30.3.60 - Pump drive PTO - Inner gear (Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 1292 - Pump drive PTO

Disassembly
F0085610
Fig. 1293
30-344
2. Using a soft metal punch, drive out driving gear assembly (2) and spacer
(3). 2
3
F0085620
Fig. 1294
3. Remove bearing (4) from the transmission casing.
4
F0085630
Fig. 1295
4. Using a puller, remove bearing (5) from gear (2).
Fig. 1296
Remove circlip (6) and withdraw spacer (7) and roller bearing (8).
Remove O-ring (9).
Fig. 1297
30-345
Assembly
Procedure 4
l For 85 HP versions only:
Install bearing (5) with plastic shield on gear (2).
Fig. 1298
30.3.61 - PTO. pumps drive - Inner gear (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1299
Disassembly
F0085610
Fig. 1299
30-346
(3). 2
3
F0085620
Fig. 1299
4
F0085630
Fig. 1299
Fig. 1299
Remove circlip (6) and withdraw spacer (7) and needle roller bearing (8).
Remove O-ring (9).
Fig. 1299
30-347
Assembly
30.3.62 - PTO pumps drive - Inner gear (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 1299
Disassembly
F0085610
Fig. 1299
(3). 2
3
F0085620
Fig. 1299
30-348
4
F0085630
Fig. 1299
Fig. 1299
Remove circlip (6) and withdraw spacer (7) and needle roller bearing (8).
Remove O-ring (9).
Fig. 1299
30-349
Assembly
Procedure 4
l Install bearing (5) with plastic shield on gear (2).
Fig. 1299
30.3.63 - PTO output shaft. - 4-speed version

Removal
1. Loosen the two nuts (1) and remove lubrication rotary union (2).
Fig. 1300
2. For versions with fixed output shaft
Remove nuts (3) and remove cover (4).
Fig. 1301
3. For versions with removable PTO output shaft
Remove nuts (5) and remove output shaft (6).
Fig. 1302
30-350
4. Remove nuts (7) and flange (8).
Fig. 1303
5. Remove screws (9) and nuts (10) and remove cover (11).
Fig. 1304
Remove screw (12) and remove lever (13) and shaft (14).
Fig. 1305
7. Move circlip (15) and sleeve (16) towards the front of the tractor.
Fig. 1306
8. Remove circlip (17) and move crown wheel (18) towards the front of the
tractor.
Fig. 1307
30-351
9. Using a soft metal punch and mallet, drive out PTO input shaft (19).
Fig. 1308
Refitting
Procedure 6
Screw: 25 Nm (18.4 lb.ft.)
Procedures 2-5
Fig. 1309
Procedure 1
l Nuts: Loctite 270
30.3.64 - PTO output shaft - 2-speed version
Removal
1. Loosen the two nuts (1) and remove lubrication rotary union (2).
2
1
F0096990
Fig. 1310
30-352
2. For versions with fixed output shaft:
Remove nuts (3) and remove cover (4).
Fig. 1311
3. For versions with removable output shaft - EXPORT USA version :
Remove nuts (5) and remove output shaft (6).
5
F0097001
Fig. 1312
4. Remove nuts (7) and flange (8).
7 7
F0097010
Fig. 1313
5. Remove screws (9) and nuts (10) and remove cover (11).
10
10
9
11
F0097020
Fig. 1314
6. For all versions
Move circlip (12) towards the front of the tractor.
12
F0097030
Fig. 1315
30-353
7. Using a slide hammer puller, remove PTO input shaft assembly (13).
13
F0097040
Fig. 1316
8. Remove gear (14) and circlip (12).
14
13
12
F0097050
Fig. 1317
Refitting
Procedures 2-5
Fig. 1318
Procedure 1
l Nuts: Loctite 270
30-354
30.3.65 - Disassembly of the PTO output shaft - 4-speed version
Fig. 1319 - PTO output shaft. - 4-speed version

Disassembly
1. Remove gear (1).
Fig. 1320
2. Remove roller bearings (2) and (3).
Fig. 1321
30-355
3. Remove thrust bearing (4) and roller bearing (5).
Fig. 1322
4. Remove circlip (6) and, using a suitable puller, remove bearing (7).
Fig. 1323
5. Remove circlip (8) and separate gear (9) from shaft (10).
Fig. 1324
Fig. 1325
30-356
Assembly
Procedure 6
l Take care to install bearing (11) the right way round.
Fig. 1326
Procedure 4
l Take care to install bearing (7) the right way round relative to gear (9).
Fig. 1327

Disassembly
Fig. 1328
2. Using the puller, remove bearing (3).
Fig. 1329
30-357
Assembly
Procedure 1
l Take care to install bearing (3) the right way round with respect to the shaft.
Fig. 1329
Fig. 1330 - PTO output shaft.

Disassembly
1. Drive out spring pin (1).
Fig. 1331
30-358
2. Remove PTO speed selector shaft (2).
Fig. 1332
3. Relieve the staking and remove ringnut (3) using a suitable wrench.
m Renew the ringnut on reassembly.
Fig. 1333
4. Using a suitable tool, partially withdraw PTO output shaft (4).
Fig. 1334
5. Remove gear (5) complete with bush (6).
Fig. 1335
6. Remove PTO speed selector fork (7).
Fig. 1336
30-359
7. Remove selector sleeve (8) and guide sleeve (9).
Fig. 1337
8. Remove gear (10) and remove shaft assembly (4).
Fig. 1338
bearing (13).
Fig. 1339
10. Recover bearing (14).
Fig. 1340
30-360
Assembly
Procedure 9
l Take care to install bearing (13) the right way round relative to shaft (4).
Fig. 1341
Procedure 3
l Nut: 88±1 Nm (64.9±0.74 lb.ft.)
Stake ringnut (3).
Fig. 1342
Procedure 2
l Check the condition of O-ring (15) and renew it if necessary.
O-ring: Grease
Fig. 1343
30-361
Fig. 1344 - PTO final shaft.

Disassembly
1. Remove grub screw (1).
Fig. 1345
2. Remove PTO speed selector rod (2).
Fig. 1346
30-362
3. Relieve the staking and remove ringnut (3) using a suitable wrench.
m Renew the ringnut on reassembly.
Fig. 1347
4. Using a suitable tool, partially withdraw PTO output shaft (4).
Fig. 1348
5. Remove gear (5) complete with bush (6).
Fig. 1349
6. Remove PTO speed selector fork (7).
Fig. 1350
7. Remove selector sleeve (8) and guide sleeve (9).
Fig. 1351
30-363
8. Remove gear (10) complete with needle roller bearings (11) and remove
shaft assy (4).
Fig. 1352
bearing (14).
Fig. 1353
10. Recover bearing (15).
Fig. 1354
30-364
Assembly
Procedure 9
l Take care to install bearing (14) the right way round relative to shaft (4).
Fig. 1355
Procedure 3
l Nut: 88±1 Nm (64.9±0.74 lb.ft.)
Stake ringnut (3).
Fig. 1356
Procedure 2
O-ring: Grease
Fig. 1357
30-365
30.3.69 - Disassembly of the Groundspeed PTO output shaft
Fig. 1358 - Groundpseed PTO output shaft

Disassembly
1. Remove nuts (1) and remove cover (2).
m Mark the top of cover (2) to avoid error on reassembly. 1
F0084690
Fig. 1359
2. Check that the Groundspeed PTO lever (3) is in the “ON” position to pre-
vent the engagement sleeve from falling.
Fig. 1360
30-366
3. Withdraw the Groundspeed PTO output shaft (4).
Fig. 1361
Fig. 1362
5. Using a press remove bearing (7) from shaft (4).
Remove spacer (8) and circlip (9).
Fig. 1363
6. Remove oil seal (10) from cover (2).
2 10
D0024381
Fig. 1364
30-367
Assembly
Procedure 7
l Take care to install oil seal (10) the right way round relative to cover (2). 2 10
D0024381
Fig. 1364

Oil seal lip: Oil
Fig. 1365
Fill the transmission with the required quantity of oil

30.3.70 - Disassembly of the Groundspeed PTO engagement device
Disassembly
1. Remove screw (1), withdraw drive shaft (2) and recover lever (3), shoe (4)
and sleeve (5).
Fig. 1366
Assembly
Procedure 1
Fig. 1367
30-368
30.3.71 - Disassembly of the parking brake
Disassembly
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal (-).

m Mark the relative positions of lever (2) and cam (3).
Fig. 1368
3. Withdraw lever (2) and remove cam (3).
Fig. 1369
4. Using a slide hammer puller, remove pin (5).
Fig. 1370
5. Remove reaction plate (6) and friction plate (7).
Fig. 1371
30-369
6. Remove intermediate friction plates (8) and friction plate (9).
Fig. 1372
7. Remove circlip (10) and remove steel discs (11).
11
10
F0085770
Fig. 1373
Assembly
Procedures 5-6
l Friction plates: Transmission oil
30.3.72 - Disassembly of the 4WD engagement device
Fig. 1374 - 4WD engagement device
30-370
Disassembly
1. Remove oil seal (1) and circlip (2).
m Renew the gasket every time the pump is disturbed.
Fig. 1375
2. Remove screw (3) and remove retaining plate (4).
Fig. 1376
3. Remove screw (5), and withdraw control rod (6) and remove lever (7).
m Check the condition of O-ring (8) and renew it if necessary. 7
Renew screw (5) on reassembly. 5
6
8
F0085210
Fig. 1377
4. Using a suitable drift, drive out hub assembly (9).
Only if necessary: 10
Remove circlip (10). 9
F0085220
Fig. 1378
5. Withdraw sleeve (11).
11
F0085230
Fig. 1379
30-371
6. Remove circlip (12) and, using a press, remove bearing (13).
12 13
F0085240
Fig. 1380
Assembly
Procedure 3
Procedure 1
l Outer edge of oil seal: Loctite 542
30.3.73 - Four-wheel drive engagement device - Easyshift (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1381 - 4WD engagement device
30-372
Disassembly
1. Remove oil seal (1) and circlip (2).
IMPORTANT
Renew the gasket every time the pump is removed.
Fig. 1382
2. Remove screws (3) and remove lower plate (4).
Fig. 1383
3. Using a slide hammer puller, remove hub assembly (5 ).
Fig. 1384
4. Remove circlip (6) and remove bearing (7) from hub (5).
Fig. 1385
5. Loosen and remove screw (8).
Fig. 1386
30-373
6. Withdraw engagement device (9), spring (10) and disc (11).
Fig. 1387
7. Remove bush (12) from engagement device (9).
Fig. 1388
8. Recover manifold (13).
Fig. 1389
30-374
Assembly
Procedure 8
l
IMPORTANT
Check the condition of the O-rings (16) and renew them if
necessary.
Fig. 1390
Procedure 7
l
IMPORTANT
Check the condition of the O-rings (15) and renew them if
necessary.
Fig. 1391
Procedure 6
l
IMPORTANT
Check the condition of O-rings (14) and renew them if nec-
essary.
Fig. 1392
Procedure 5
l Screw: 20 Nm
Procedure 2
30-375
30.4 - E0 - Rear axle
30.4.1 - RH rear axle (E0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove screws (1) and disconnect bracket (2).
Fig. 1393
3. Remove nut (3) and the relative screw.
Fig. 1394
4. Using suitable lifting equipment, raise cab (4) so as to be able to remove
support (5).
Fig. 1395
5. Remove screws (6) and remove support (5).
Fig. 1396
30-376
6. Disconnect brake pipe (8) from axle (7).
Fig. 1397
7. Attach axle (7) to a hoist and take up the slack in the lifting rope.
Fig. 1398
8. Remove screws (9) and remove axle (7).
Fig. 1399
9. Remove axle shaft (10).
Fig. 1400
10. Blow compressed air at low pressure into hole “A” of the brake to discon-
nect brake cylinder assembly (11).
Remove brake cylinder assembly (11).
Fig. 1401
30-377
Refitting
Procedures 8-10
Fig. 1402
Procedure 9
l Screws and nuts: 70±3.5 Nm (51.6±2.6 lb.ft.)
Procedure 6
l Bleed the air from the braking system.
l Fill the transmission with the required quantity of oil
30.4.2 - RH rear axle (E0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Versions with air braking system:

Completely release pressure from the pneumatic circuit.
Remove union (1) and disconnect pipe (2).
Fig. 1403
3. For trailer air braking export versions:
Remove unions (3) and disconnect pipes (4) from valve (5).
m Label pipes (4) to avoid confusion on refitting.
Fig. 1404
30-378
4. Versions with air braking system
Loosen nut (6), remove screws (7) and remove tank (8) complete with sup-
port.
Fig. 1405
Remove nuts (9) and disconnect bracket (10) from the axle.
Fig. 1406
6. Remove nut (11) and remove plate (12)
Fig. 1407
7. Using suitable lifting equipment “A”, raise the cab slightly on the right hand
side and keep in place.
Fig. 1408
8. Remove screws (13) and remove cab support (14).
Fig. 1409
30-379
9. Disconnect brakes pipes (15) and (16).
Fig. 1410
10. Remove all ten screws (17) and the two nuts (18)
Fig. 1411
Fig. 1412
12. Remove screw (20) and using a service screw “B” (M10x120 with full-length
thread) or a threaded rod, separate axle (19) from the transmission.
Tighten removed screw (20) and repeat the procedure with the remaining
screws until axle (19) is completely detached from the transmission.
Fig. 1413
13. Remove axle assembly (19).
Fig. 1414
30-380
Refitting
Procedure 13
Fig. 1415
Procedure 10
Procedure 9
30.4.3 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 85)

Removal
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the negative terminal (-) of the battery and apply the parking brake.
Fig. 1416
Fig. 1417
30-381
support (5).
Fig. 1418
5. Remove screws (6) and disconnect bracket (7) from support (5).
Fig. 1419
Fig. 1420
7. Remove nuts (9) and (10) and remove support (11).
Disconnect brakes pipes (12).
Fig. 1421
8. Attach axle (13) to a hoist and take the strain with the rope.
Fig. 1422
30-382
9. Remove all the nuts (14) and remove axle (13).
m Recover bracket (15).
Fig. 1423
10. Remove halfshaft (16).
Fig. 1424
Fig. 1425
30-383
Installation
Procedures 9-11
Fig. 1426
Procedure 9
Procedure 7
l Bleed the air from the braking system
30.4.4 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 1426
Fig. 1426
30-384
support (5).
Fig. 1426
5. Remove screws (6) and disconnect bracket (7) from support (5).
Fig. 1426
Fig. 1426
7. Attach the axle (9) to a hoist and take up the slack in the lifting rope.
Fig. 1427
8. Remove all the nuts (10) and remove axle (9).
m Recover bracket (11).
Fig. 1428
30-385
9. Remove halfshaft (12).
Fig. 1429
Fig. 1430
Refitting
Procedures 8-10
Fig. 1431
Procedure 8
30.4.5 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 100)

Removal
1. DANGER
30-386
Completely release pressure from the pneumatic circuit.
Remove unions (1), (2), (3) and (4) and disconnect pipes (5) and (6).
Plug the pipes and ports to prevent dirt getting in.
Fig. 1432
3. Unplug connector (7) from pressure sensor (8).
Fig. 1433
4. Remove retaining clip (9), loosen nut (10) and disconnect cable (11).
Fig. 1434
5. Remove union (12) and disconnect breather pipe (13) from pressure con-
trol valve (14).
Fig. 1435
6. Loosen nut (15), remove screws (16) and remove tank (17) complete with
valves.
Fig. 1436
30-387
7. Remove the three nuts (18), screw (19) and disconnect bracket (20) from
the axle.
Fig. 1437
8. Remove nut (21) and remove plate (22).
Fig. 1438
9. Using suitable lifting equipment “A”, raise slightly the cab on the left hand
side and keep in place.
Fig. 1439
Fig. 1440
11. Remove all ten screws (25) and the two nuts (26)
Fig. 1441
30-388
Fig. 1442
13. Remove screw (28) and using a service screw “B” (M10x120 with full-length
Fig. 1443
14. Remove axle assembly (27).
Fig. 1444
30-389
Installation
Procedure 14
Fig. 1445
Procedure 11
Procedure 2
l Bleed the air from the braking system
30.4.6 - LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)

Removal
1. DANGER

Fully discharge pressure from the pneumatic circuit.
Remove unions (1), (2), (3) and (4) and disconnect pipes (5) and (6).
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1445
Plug the hoses and ports to prevent dirt getting in.
IMPORTANT
30-390
3. Unplug wiring connector (7) from pressure sensor (8).
Fig. 1445
4. Remove retaining clip (9), loosen nut (10) and disconnect cable (11).
Fig. 1445
5. Remove union (12) and disconnect breather pipe (13) from pressure con-
trol valve (14).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1445
6. Loosen nut (15), remove screws (16) and remove tank (17) complete with
valves.
Fig. 1445
7. Remove nut (18) and plate (19).
Fig. 1446
30-391
8. Using suitable lifting equipment “A”, raise slightly the cab on the left-hand
side and hold it in this position.
Fig. 1446
Fig. 1447
10. Remove the ten screws (22) and the two nuts (23).
Fig. 1448
11. Attach the axle (24) to a hoist and take up the slack in the lifting rope.
Fig. 1449
12. Remove screw (25) and using service tool “B” (M10x120 with full-length
Fig. 1450
30-392
13. Remove the complete axle assembly (24).
Fig. 1451
Refitting
Procedure 13
Fig. 1451
Procedure 10
Procedure 2
30.4.7 - Disassembly of LH/RH rear axle (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
30-393
7 8 6 11 10 12
2
3
4 9
Fig. 1452 - Rear axle

Disassembly
1. Remove anti-rotation plate (1).
Fig. 1453
2. Remove screw (2) and remove spacer (3) and shims (4).
3
2
Fig. 1454
30-394
3. Remove the complete planet carrier assembly (5).
5
Fig. 1455
4. Using a puller, apply force on axle shaft (6) to dislodge bearing inner race
(7) from axle shaft (6).
Recover inner bearing race (7).
7
7
6
Fig. 1456
5. Attach axle housing (8) to a hoist and remove it.
Fig. 1457
6. Withdraw bearing outer race (7) and oil seal (9) from axle housing (8).
7 9
Fig. 1458
7. Withdraw bearing outer race (10) and disc (11) from axle housing (8).
10
11
11 10
Fig. 1459
30-395
8. Remove bearing inner race (10) from axle shaft (6).
10
Fig. 1460
Remove the back-up ring of oil seal (12) from the axle housing. 12
m Renew the oil seal on reassembly.
Fig. 1461
10. Remove dust seal (12) from axle shaft (6).
6
Note which way round the oil seal is installed. 12
Fig. 1462
30-396
Assembly
Procedure 8
l Fill the area indicated in the figure with grease.
Fig. 1463
Procedure 5
° 15
Machining required for assembly of the axle housing ring gear.
°
l
Simultaneously drill axle housing (8) and ring gear (13). 14

Fit cylindrical dowels (14) fully down and close the holes with plugs (15). 8
13
Fig. 1464
Procedures 4-6
l Lubricate bearing (7) and the lip of oil seal (9).
Take care to install oil seal (9) the right way round.
Fig. 1465
Procedure 2
l Temporarily install spacer (3) and screw (2) without shims and tighten.
Screw: 29.4 Nm (21.7 lb.ft.)
After tightening to the specified torque, rotate the axle housing while hold-
ing the axle shaft still to allow the bearings to seat correctly, then tighten
screw (2) again.
Repeat the procedure until screw (2) no longer turns.
Fig. 1466
l Remove screw (2) and spacer (3) and, using a depth gauge “F” measure
dimensions “A” and “B”.
Fig. 1467
30-397
l Calculate thickness “S” of shim pack (4) to be installed under spacer (3)
with the formula: S = A - B (round off the value obtained by ± 0.02 mm)
Calculation example 1:
dimension “A”: 97.44 mm
dimension “B”: 95.95 mm
S = 97.44 - 95.95 = 1.49 mm
thus the final thickness “S” of shims (4) will be 1.50 mm.
dimension “A”: 97.37 mm
dimension “B”: 95.95 mm Fig. 1468
S = 97.37 - 95.95 = 1.42 mm thus the final thickness “S” of shims (4) will
be 1.40 mm.
l Fit shim pack (4), spacer (3) and secure in positions by tightening screw (2).
Screw: 177±9 Nm (130.5±6.6 lb.ft.) 3
Screw: Loctite 270 2
Fig. 1469
30.4.8 - Disassembly of LH/RH rear axle (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 1470 - Rear axle
30-398
Disassembly
1. Position the axle vertically and remove the three screws (1).
Fig. 1471
2. Using a puller, remove braking flange assembly (2).
Fig. 1472
3. Using a puller, remove ring gear (3).
Fig. 1473
4. Remove anti-rotation plate (4).
Fig. 1474
5. Remove screw (5) and remove spacer (6) and shims (7).
Fig. 1475
30-399
6. Remove the complete planet carrier assembly (8).
Fig. 1476
7. Using a puller, apply force on axle shaft (9) to remove bearing inner race
10
(10) from axle shaft (9).
Recover inner bearing race (10).
10 9
F0084060
Fig. 1477
8. Attach axle housing (11) to a hoist and remove it.
Fig. 1478
9. Withdraw bearing outer race (10) and oil seal (12) from axle housing (11).
Fig. 1479
10. Withdraw bearing outer race (13) and disc (14) from axle housing (11).
Fig. 1480
30-400
11. Remove bearing inner race (13) from axle shaft (9).
Fig. 1481
Remove the back-up ring of oil seal (15). 15
F0071141
Fig. 1482
13. Remove dust seal (15) from axle shaft (9).
Note which way round the oil seal is installed.
Fig. 1483
30-401
Assembly
Procedure 11
l Fill the area indicated in the figure with grease.
Fig. 1484
Procedures 7-9
l Procedure 7: Lubricate bearing (10) and the lip of oil seal (12).
l Procedure 9: Take care to install oil seal (12) the right way round.
Fig. 1485
Procedure 5
l Temporarily install spacer (6) and screw (5) without shims and tighten.
Screw: 29.4 Nm (21.7 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1486
l After tightening to the specified torque, rotate the axle housing while holding the axle shaft still to allow the bearings to seat
correctly, then tighten screw (5) again.
l Repeat the procedure until screw (5) no longer turns.
l Remove screw (5) and spacer (6) and, using a depth gauge “F” and cali-
brated shims “G” of approximately 25mm, measure dimensions “A” and “B”.
Fig. 1487
30-402
l Calculate thickness “S” of shim pack (7) to be installed under spacer (6)
with the formula: S = A - B (round off the value obtained by ± 0.02 mm):
dimension “A”: 97.44 mm dimension “B”: 95.95 mm S = 97.44 - 95.95 =
1.49 mm thus the final thickness “S” of shims (7) will be 1.50 mm.
dimension “A”: 97.37 mm Dimension “B”: 95.95 mm S = 97.37 - 95.95 =
1.42 mm thus the final thickness “S” of shims (7) will be 1.40 mm.
Fig. 1488
l Fit shim pack (7), spacer (6) and secure in position by tightening screw (5).
Screw: 177±9 Nm (130.5±6.6 lb.ft.)
Screw: Loctite 270
Fig. 1489
Procedure 3
l Mating faces: Loctite 510
Fig. 1490
30.4.9 - Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1491 - Planet carrier assembly
30-403
Disassembly
1. Remove circlip (1) and remove pins (2).
Fig. 1492
2. Remove planet gears (3) with shims (4) and remove needle roller bearings
(5) and spacer (6).
Fig. 1493
Assembly
Procedure 2
l Lubricate needle roller bearings (4).
l Roller bearings: oil
30.4.10 - Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 1494 - Planet carrier
30-404
Disassembly
1. Remove circlip (1) and remove pins (2).
Fig. 1495
2. Remove planet gears (3) with shims (4) and remove roller bearings (5) and
spacer (6).
Fig. 1496
Assembly
Procedure 2
l Lubricate roller bearings (4).
l Roller bearings: oil
30.4.11 - Rear differential

Removal
1. Remove union (1) and plug (2).
Fig. 1497
2. Drive out spring pin (3)
Fig. 1498
30-405
3. Withdraw piston (4) from the transmission casing and partially withdraw
the rod (5).
Fig. 1499
4. Remove spring (6) and spacer (7).
Fig. 1500
5. Finally remove rod (5), selector fork (8), spring (9) and spacer (10).
Fig. 1501
6. Using a slide hammer pullet, remove the PTO drive shaft (11).
Fig. 1502
7. Remove the nut (12), spacers (13) and nut (14) on both sides.
Fig. 1503
30-406
8. Remove brake disc (15) and axle shaft (16).
Fig. 1504
9. Remove screws (17) on both sides, leaving one in place for safety.
Fig. 1505
10. Using a suitable drift made of soft material, separate the differential support
flanges (18) from the transmission casing.
Fig. 1506
11. Remove the last screw (17) and remove the flanges (18) and (19).
m Label the flanges to avoid confusion on reassembly.
Fig. 1507
Fig. 1508
30-407
Refitting
Procedure 9
l Screws: 32-40 Nm (23.6-29.5 lb.ft.)
30.4.12 - Disassembly of the rear differential (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
2
15 3
14
10
11
13 12
9 5
6 4
7 D0024520
Fig. 1509 - Rear differential

Disassembly
m If the bevel gear pair or both bearings are to be renewed, remove
also bearing (2).
1 2
F0084870
Fig. 1510
2. Remove differential lock flange (3).
3
F0084880
Fig. 1511
30-408
3. Remove screws (4) and remove differential crown wheel (5).
Fig. 1512
4. Remove side gear (6) and its thrust washer (7).
7
F0084900
Fig. 1513
5. Drive out spring pin (8) and remove pin (9).
Fig. 1514
6. Remove planet pinions (10) and (11) with their respective thrust washers
(12) and (13).
Fig. 1515
14
15
F0084930
Fig. 1516
30-409
Assembly
Procedures 4-6-7
l Gears and thrust washers: Transmission oil
Procedures 1-3
l Screws: Engine oil
Screws: 112±5.5 Nm (82.5±4.0 lb.ft.)
Procedure 1
l If the transmission casing, differential housing or bevel gear pair are renewed, do not install the bearings (1) and (2) at this
stage, but proceed as described in the chapter “BEVEL GEAR PAIR”.
30.4.13 - Disassembly of the rear differential (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
2
21 3
20
10 16
13 18
15
8
9 5
6 4
7
1
Fig. 1517 - Rear differential

Disassembly
m If the bevel gear pair or both bearings are to be renewed, remove
also bearing (2).
1
2
Fig. 1518
30-410
2. Remove differential lock flange (3).
3
Fig. 1519
3. Remove screws (4) and remove differential crown wheel (5).
5
Fig. 1520
7
6
Fig. 1521
5. Remove the spring pins (8)
Fig. 1522
6. Withdraw pins (9) and (10) and remove the planet pinions (11) and (12) and
relative thrust washers (13) and (14). 12
11 14
13
9 10
Fig. 1523
30-411
7. Withdraw pin (15) and remove the planet pinions (16) and (17) and relative
17
thrust washers (18) and (19). 16 19
18
15
15
Fig. 1524
Fig. 1525
Installation
Procedure 4-6-7-8
l Gears and thrust washers: Transmission oil
Procedure 3
l Screws: Engine oil
Screws: 112±5,5 Nm (82.5±4.0 lb.ft.)
Procedure 1
l If the transmission casing, differential or bevel gear pair are renewed, do not fit bearings (1) and (2) in this phase and proceed
as described in the chapter “BEVEL GEAR PAIR”.
30.4.14 - Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear brakes (E0.03.01)
CAUTION
Always respect environmental protection regulations. Any fluid (oil, diesel, coolant) or filters and batteries must be
disposed of in accordance with the applicable regulations.
WARNING
Accumulators contain gas or oil under pressure. For all repairs, first consult the instructions given in the manufac-
turer’s manual.
Note:
Always park the tractor on a level surface when changing the oil or checking the oil level.
In the case of poor braking action, either contact an authorised service centre or check for air in the hydraulic circuit as follows:
30-412
separate the two brake pedals by detaching the connecting bolt.
Fig. 1526
set the “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve control (1) to OFF position.
Fig. 1527
operate the right-hand brake pedal several times in quick succession;

then, keeping the pedal fully depressed, slightly unscrew and immediately re-close
the air bleed screw for the rear right-hand brake. Repeat this operation as many
times as necessary until clean hydraulic fluid, free of any air bubbles, can be seen
flowing out of the bleed screw.
WARNING
Fuel or oil under pressure may penetrate the skin or eyes, causing
serious injury, blindness or even death. High-pressure fluid leaks
may not be visible. Use a piece of cardboard or wood when looking
for leaks. NEVER use your hands. Wear safety goggles to protect
your eyes. If any fluid penetrates your skin, seek immediate at-
tention from medical personnel with experience of this particular Fig. 1528
problem.
Repeat this procedure on the bleed screw for the front right-hand brake.
Fig. 1529
Proceed likewise for the front left-hand brake and rear left-hand brake, loosening the relative bleed screws.
30-413
30.4.15 - Rear axle brake discs
Renewal
1. DANGER
2. Remove friction disc (1) and renew.

m Brake disc: Transmission oil. 1
F0084821
Fig. 1530
3. Refit the previously removed axle and repeat the procedure for the brake disc on the other side.
4. On completion of the renewal procedure fill the transmission and bleed the air from the braking circuit.
30.4.16 - Disassembly of the rear axle brake piston (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. DANGER
2. Blow compressed air at low pressure through hole “A” to force out piston
(1)”.
1
A
F0107950
Fig. 1531
3. Remove O-rings (2) and (3).
2
F0107960
Fig. 1532
Assembly
30-414
Procedure 3
2
l To facilitate installation of O-rings (2) and (3), stretch them slightly at vari-
3
ous points around the circumference so that they are held in place in their
grooves.
O-rings: Brake fluid
F0107960
Fig. 1532
Procedure 2
l Fit piston (1), taking care to align anti-rotation pins (4) correctly. 1
F0107970
Fig. 1533
30.4.17 - Rear axle brake piston disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. DANGER
2. Position the axle vertically and blow compressed air at low pressure through
hole “A” to force out piston (1). 1
A
F0085650
Fig. 1534
3. Remove O-rings (2) and (3).
Fig. 1535
30-415
Assembly
Procedure 3
l To facilitate installation of O-rings (2) and (3), stretch them slightly at vari-
ous points around the circumference so that they are held in place in their
grooves.
O-rings: Brake fluid
Fig. 1535
Procedure 2
1 4
l Fit piston (1), taking care to align anti-rotation pins (4) correctly.
F0085671
Fig. 1536
30-416
30.5 - F0 - Front axle
30.5.1 - Front pivot bracket (F0.01.01)
Removal
1. Position a stand “A” under the engine block.
Fig. 1537
2. VERSION WITHOUT P.T.O. PTO
Remove screws (1) and overturn wiring towards the rear.
Fig. 1538
3. Remove screws (2) and remove gasket (3).
Fig. 1539
4. Versions with front PTO
Using a pin punch, drive out pin (4) and withdraw PTO drive shaft (5) to-
wards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 1540
30-417
Disconnect pipes (6), remove screw (7) and overturn valves assy (8) to-
wards the front of the tractor.
m Label the hoses to avoid confusion on refitting.
Before disconnecting pipes (6), close valves (8) (turning counter-
clockwise) and operate lift control lever to discharge all residual
Fig. 1541
6. For all versions
Loosen and remove lower nuts (9) (2 per side).
Fig. 1542
7. Position a jack “B” under the front support (10) and drive two wedges “C”
between axle (11) and front support (10) to prevent the support from tip-
ping.
Fig. 1543
8. Loosen screw (12) to slacken off fuel pump drive belt (13).
Fig. 1544
9. Loosen and remove screws (14) and nuts (15).
Fig. 1545
30-418
10. Remove front support assembly (10).
m Recover the shims installed between the front support and engine
sump, making a note of their positions.
Keep the right and left shims separate.
Fig. 1546
Refitting
Procedure 10
l If the engine or engine sump are to be renewed, or if the shims have got
mixed up or lost, recalculate the shim thicknesses as follows:
l Before installing the front support, measure the distance “X” between the
underside of the engine block and the face of the sump.
Fig. 1547
l Form a shim pack (16) to obtain alignment within the tolerance of ±0.1 mm
(0.004 in.).
Fig. 1548
Procedure 9
l Nuts and screws: 300±1.5 Nm (221.1±1.1 lb.ft.)
Procedure 8
l Adjust the tension of the fuel pump drive belt.
Procedure 6
l Nuts: 300±1.5 Nm (221.1±1.1 lb.ft.)
30.5.2 - 4WD front axle (F0.03.01)

See para. 30.12.1 - Front wheels - page 30-653 - (S0.01.01)
30-419
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Lift the front of the tractor so that the front tyres are clear of the ground and
position a stand “A” under the engine block.
Fig. 1549
3. Remove unions (1) and disconnect steering pipes (2).
m Plug the pipes and ports to prevent the ingress of dirt
m Renew the copper washers on reassembly
Fig. 1550
4. Position a jack “A” under the front axle.
Fig. 1551
5. Remove the four nuts (3).
Fig. 1552
30-420
6. Remove front axle assembly (4).
Fig. 1553
Installation
Procedure 6
l If the front support, axle body, or axle pivot brackets are renewed, adjust axle end float before proceeding with the final fixing
of the axle.
Procedure 5
l Nuts: 270±13 Nm (199±9.6 lb.ft.)
30.5.3 - Adjusting the front axle end float

1. Install thrust washer (1) and pivot bracket (2) on the rear of the axle.
Fig. 1554
2. Loosen nuts (3) and remove shim packs (4) on both sides. Re-tighten nuts
(3).
Fig. 1555
3. Fit dust seal (5).
m Take care to install the dust seal the right way round.
m Dust seal: grease
Fig. 1556
30-421
4. Fit thrust washer (6) and support (7).
Fig. 1557
5. Fit front axle assembly (8) on front support (9).
Fig. 1558
6. Tighten nuts (10) and (11).
m Nuts: 270±13 Nm (199±9.6 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1559
7. Loosen nuts (3) and use two levers to force axle (8) and support (12) apart.
Fig. 1560
8. Using a feeler gauge, measure clearance “A” between axle (8) and support
(12).
Fig. 1561
30-422
9. Calculate the thickness “S” of shim packs (4) to obtain a final end float
value “G” between 0.1 and 0.4 mm.
Example calculation:
m measured play “A”: 3.20 mm
calculated value “S”: 3.00 mm
residual end float “G”: 0.20 mm
Fig. 1562
10. Form two shim packs (4) of the same thickness “S” and install them be-
tween axle (8) and support (12) then tighten nuts (3).
m Nuts: 120±6 Nm (88.4±4.4 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1563
30.5.4 - Steering cylinders

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove unions (1) and disconnect steering control pipes (2).

Fig. 1564
3. Remove screw (3) on both sides and remove guard (4).
m Recover spacers (5).
Fig. 1565
30-423
4. Loosen nut (6) and remove set screw (7).
Fig. 1566
5. Withdraw pin (8).
m If the cylinder is to be removed with the axle installed on the tractor,
remove grease nipple (9) and extract pin (8) downwards.
Fig. 1567
6. Recover oil seals (10) complete with bushes (11).
Fig. 1568
7. Remove screw (12) and withdraw pin (13).
Fig. 1569
8. Recover seals (14) complete with bushes (15) and remove steering cylin-
der (16).
Fig. 1570
30-424
Refitting
l After installing the steering cylinder, start the engine and repeatedly turn the steering to full lock in both directions to expel any
air from the steering circuit.
30.5.5 - Steering cylinders disassembly

Disassembly
1. Loosen front ringnut (1) by about 5 turns.
Fig. 1571
2. With a soft mallet, lightly tap front ringnut (1) to drive in end cap (2) by about
3 mm (0.118 in.).
Fig. 1572
3. Remove ringnut (1) and remove circlip (3) fixing head (2).
Fig. 1573
4. Withdraw piston assembly (4).
Fig. 1574
30-425
5. Unscrew and remove self-locking nut (5) and remove piston (6).
Withdraw end cap (2) from rod (7).
Fig. 1575
6. Remove outer O-ring (8), rod wiper (9) and rod guide ring (10) from end
cap (2).
Fig. 1576
7. Remove outer seal (11) and inner O-ring (12) from piston (6).
Fig. 1577
30-426
Installation
1. Fit rod guide (10) and rod wiper (9) in end cap (2).
m Carefully check correct orientation of ring (10).
Fit O-ring (8).
Fig. 1577
2. Fit a suitable installation guide on the piston (6) and fit piston sealing O-ring
(12) by hand.
Fig. 1578
3. Fit the outer piston seal (11) on the installation guide.
Using a suitable installer, drive the seal into its seat (11).
Fig. 1578
4. Using a gauge and suitable support, calibrate the seal passing the gauge
over the entire length of piston (6).
Fig. 1579
5. Fit end cap (2) and piston (6) on rod (7); Secure piston (6) with self-locking
nut (5).
m Cylinder end cap: Gearbox oil.
m Nut: 86÷90 Nm (63.4-66.3 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1579
30-427
6. Lubricate the seals of the piston and end cap; install the assembly in the
cylinder taking care not to damage the seals.
m Seals: Gearbox oil.
m Insert end cap (2) approx. 2 mm (0.08 in.) beyond the seat of circlip
(3).
Fig. 1580
7. Fit circlip (3) and tighten ringnut (1).
m Nut: 40 Nm (29.5 lb.ft.)
m To tighten the ringnut pressurise the lower side of the cylinder with
compressed air at 5-8 bar.
Fig. 1580
30.5.6 - Steering knuckle housing and axle shaft

3 14 18
15 16
17
19 25 27
23
26
28
24
22
21
20 13
D0028080
11 12
Fig. 1581 - Steering knuckle housing and axle shaft
30-428
Removal
1. Remove split pin (1) and loosen nut (2) without removing it.
1 2 2
F0080221
Fig. 1582
2. Using a soft mallet, disconnect rod (4) from steering knuckle housing (3).
4
F0080232
Fig. 1583
3. Remove screw (5) and withdraw pin (6).
5
F0079962
Fig. 1584
4. Recover oil seals (7) complete with bushes (8).
8
F0079972
Fig. 1585
5. Remove union (9) and disconnect brake pipe (10).
10
F0080241
Fig. 1586
30-429
11
F0080251
Fig. 1587
7. Tighten screws (11) into the three threaded holes and withdraw pin (12).
Recover shim (13).
12
11
13
F0080261
Fig. 1588
14
14
F0080271
Fig. 1589
9. Tighten the three screws (14) into the threaded holes and partially withdraw
pin (15).
Recover shims (16). 15
m Note the quantity of shims (16) installed under pin (15).
14
16
F0080281
Fig. 1590
10. Attach the steering knuckle housing (3) to a hoist, remove pin (15) and lift
steering knuckle housing (3) clear of the tractor.
15 3
3
F0080291
Fig. 1591
30-430
11. Remove seal (17), thrust washer (18), and remove the inner race of bear-
ing (19). 17
18
19
F0080301
Fig. 1592
12. Remove seal (20) and thrust washer (21) and remove the inner race of
bearing (22).
21
22
20
F0080311
Fig. 1593
13. Remove axle shaft (23).
23
F0080321
Fig. 1594
14. Only if necessary: Remove the outer races of bearings (19) and (22).
19
22
D0023442
Fig. 1595
15. Only if necessary: Remove oil seal (25), circlip (26) and needle roller bear-
ing (27) from axle housing (24).
25 24
27
26
D0023901
Fig. 1596
30-431
16. Remove oil seal (28) from steering knuckle housing (3).
m Take care to install oil seal (28) the right way round.
28 3
D0023331
Fig. 1597
Refitting
Procedure 17 24
l Using a suitable drift, install roller cage (27) in axle housing (24) and secure
with circlip (26). 27
26
F0073202
Fig. 1598
l Using a suitable drift A, install oil seal (25) in the axle housing.
25
F0073215
Fig. 1599
Fig. 1600 - Drift drawing

Procedure 16
l Adjust the bearings preload only if bearings (19) and (22) or steering knuckle housing (3) or axle housing (24) are renewed.
Procedure 1
30-432
l Nut: 98±5 Nm (72.2±3.7 lb.ft.)
If the slot does not line up with the hole in the pin, tighten the nut further until they are aligned.
Bleed the front brakes circuit.
30.5.7 - Adjustment of steering knuckle housing and axle shaft
9 12
5 10
11
6
3 1
14 D0028090
7 15 8 13
Fig. 1601 - Steering knuckle housing and axle shaft

Adjusting the bearings preload
1. Fit axle shaft (2) in axle housing (1).
1
F0080322
Fig. 1602
2. Using a suitable tool, fit the outer races of bearings (3) and (4) in axle hous-
ing (1).
m Make sure that the thinner outer race is installed in the upper hole
and the thicker outer race in the the lower hole.
Install, the inner race of bearing (3), shim (5) and seals (6) in axle housing
upper side, and install the inner race of bearing (4), shim (7) and oil seal (8)
on the axle housing lower side.
Fig. 1603
30-433
3. Locate the steering knuckle housing (9) and secure it in position with the
upper pin (10) without the shim and tighten the screws (12).
12
9 10
F0080340
Fig. 1604
4. Fit the lower pin (13) and an 0.5 mm shim (14) and secure it in position with
screws (15).
14 15
13
F0080350
Fig. 1605
5. Loosen screws (12), raise upper pin (10) and insert a shim pack (11) ap-
prox. 1.5 mm thick; retighten screws (12).
Fig. 1606
6. Position a dial gauge “A” with a magnetic stand on the axle housing ori-
ented so that the contact point is perpendicular to the lower pin (13) and
preload the gauge by about 2 mm.
13
A
F0080370
Fig. 1607
7. Apply leverage between axle housing (1) and steering knuckle housing (9)
and measure play “G” of the bearings. 9 10
Calculate the thickness of the shim pack to be inserted between the upper
1
pin (10) and the steering knuckle housing (9) in order to preload the bear-
ings between 0.10 and 0.15 mm.
Example 1: Measured play: 0.07
Final shim pack thickness: 1.5 - 0.10 - 0.07=1.33 mm which rounds
m
down to: 1.30 with a bearing preload of 0.13 mm

Example 2: Measured play: 0.18 mm F0080380
Fig. 1608
m Final shim pack thickness: 1.50 - 0.10 - 0.18=1.22 mm which rounds
down to: 1.20 mm with a bearing preload of 0.12 mm
30-434
8. Loosen screws (12), adjust shim pack (11) to the calculated thickness and
fully tighten screws (12).
Fig. 1609
30.5.8 - Differential unit

Removal
1. Remove plugs (1) and (2) and drain off all the oil from the axle.
m Axle oil: max. 10.5 l (2.77 US.gall.)
Fig. 1610
2. Remove union (3) and disconnect differential lock pipe (4).
Fig. 1611
3. Remove all the nuts (5).
m Note the positions of the thicker washers.
Fig. 1612
30-435
4. Using two screws as pullers, separate differential assembly (6) from the
axle housing.
Fig. 1613
5. Attach differential unit (7) to a hoist and lift it clear of the tractor.
Fig. 1614
Refitting
Procedure 5
Fig. 1615
Bleed the front brakes circuit.

30.5.9 - Differential disassembly
Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and remove cover (2) and O-ring (3).
Fig. 1616
30-436
2. Remove differential lock control piston (4).
m Check the condition of the O-rings (5) and renew them if necessary.
Fig. 1617
3. Detach spring (6).
Fig. 1618
4. Remove split pin (7) and remove pin (8) and washer (9).
Fig. 1619
5. Remove control rod assembly (10).
Fig. 1620
6. Drive out spring pin (11) and remove lever (12) and fork (13) complete with
shoes (14).
Fig. 1621
30-437
7. Remove circlip (15), shims (16) and complete differential lock assembly
(17).
m Note the quantity of shims (16).
Fig. 1622
8. Only if necessary: Remove disc (18) and remove the seventeen balls (19)
and shims (20).
m Note the quantity of shims (20).
Fig. 1623
9. Separate quill (21) from sleeve (22).
Fig. 1624
30-438
Assembly
Procedure 2
l O-ring: oil
30.5.10 - Differential unit adjustment

Adjustment
1. Insert quill (2) into sleeve (1).
Position the seventeen balls (3) and disc (4).
m Do not install any shims at this point.
Fig. 1625
2. Install differential lock (6) on differential unit (5) and install a suitable shim
pack (7) to eliminate any play between the sleeve and circlip (8).
Fig. 1626
3. Remove the differential lock and fit some of the shims (7) between disc (4)
and sleeve (2), then reinstall on the differential unit.
Fig. 1627
4. Secure the differential lock (6) with the remaining shims (7) and the circlip
(8).
Fig. 1628
30-439
5. With sleeve (1) moved towards the differential, check that the flat part “A” of
sleeve (1) is positioned on balls (3) as shown in the figure. 1
A
3
If not, repeat the procedure described in points 4, 5 and 6
until the condition described above is obtained.
D0023460
Fig. 1629
6. Fit fork (9) complete with shoes (10) and lever (11).
Fig. 1630
7. Secure lever (11) in position with spring pin (12).
Fig. 1631
8. Fit the differential lock piston (13).
m O-rings: Oil
13
F0080471
Fig. 1632
9. Fit cover (14) and relative O-ring (15) and tighten screws (16).
16
15
14
F0080560
Fig. 1633
30-440
10. Fit complete control rod assembly (17).
Fit pin (18) and washer (19) and secure them in position with split pin (20). 18 19
17
20
F0080570
Fig. 1634
11. Adjust the length “B” of differential lock control rod (13) so that, when sleeve
(1) is in the position shown, shoes (10) are not forced against it.
Fig. 1635
12. Fit spring (21).
21
F0080481
Fig. 1636
30-441
30.5.11 - Disassembly of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1637 - Bevel gear pair
30-442
Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and detach flange (2) and shims (3).
Fig. 1638
Fig. 1639
3. Remove the two opposing screws (7) and, using a very slender drift, dis-
lodge the inner race of bearing (8).
Fig. 1640
4. Using a puller, completely remove the inner race of bearing (8).
Fig. 1641
5. Remove screw (9) and using a very slender drift remove (10).
Fig. 1642
30-443
6. Remove differential assembly (11).
Fig. 1643
7. Remove the remaining screws (9) and remove crown wheel (12).
Fig. 1644
8. Relieve the staking and remove ringnut (13).
m To loosen the ringnut turn it clockwise.
Renew ringnut (13) on reassembly.
Fig. 1645
9. Using a soft mallet, drive pinion (14) out from differential carrier (15) and
recover spacer (16).
Fig. 1646
10. Recover shims (17) and spacer (18) from pinion (14).
Fig. 1647
30-444
11. Remove bearing outer race (19), shims (20) and spacer (21) from differen-
tial carrier (15).
Fig. 1648
12. Using a suitable tool, remove oil seal (22) and bearing (23) from differential
carrier (15).
Fig. 1649
13. Remove the inner race of bearing (19) from pinion (14).
m Dislodge the bearing using a very slender driving tool and then use
a puller to remove it completely.
Fig. 1650
30-445
Assembly
Adjust.
Stake ringnut (13) at the two points corresponding to the locations in pinion (14).
Fig. 1651
Using a suitable tool, install oil seal (22) in differential carrier (15).
l Oil seal: grease
Fig. 1652
30.5.12 - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
30-446

Disassembly
Fig. 1654
Fig. 1655
30-447
3. Remove the two opposing screws (7) and, using a very slender drift, dis-
lodge the inner ring of bearing (8).
Fig. 1656
4. Using a puller, completely remove the inner ring of bearing (8).
Fig. 1657
5. Remove screw (9) and using a very slender drift remove the inner race of
bearing (10).
Fig. 1658
6. Remove differential assembly (11).
Fig. 1659
7. Remove the remaining screws (9) and remove crown wheel (12).
Fig. 1660
30-448
8. Relieve the staking and remove ringnut (13).
m To loosen the ringnut turn it clockwise.
Renew ringnut (13) on reassembly.
Fig. 1661
9. Using a soft mallet, drive pinion (14) out from differential carrier (15) and
recover spacer (16).
Fig. 1662
10. Recover shims (17) and spacer (18) from pinion (14).
Fig. 1663
11. Remove the outer ring of bearing (19) and shims (20) from differential car-
rier (15).
Fig. 1664
12. Using a suitable tool, remove oil seal (21) and bearing assembly (22) from
differential carrier (15).
Fig. 1665
30-449
13. Remove the inner race of bearing (19) from pinion (14).
m Dislodge the bearing using a very slender driving tool and then use
a puller to remove it completely.
Fig. 1666
Assembly
Adjust.
Stake ringnut (13) at the two points corresponding to the locations in pinion (14).
Fig. 1667
Using a suitable tool, install oil seal (21) in differential carrier (15).
l Oil seal: grease
Fig. 1668
30-450
30.5.13 - Adjustment of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Adjusting the position and preload of the bevel pinion
30-451
Adjustment procedure
1. Note dimension “E” stamped on the crest of a tooth of pinion (1).
m In the example described: E = -0.15 mm
Fig. 1670
2. Install bearing inner race (2) on pinion shaft (1).
Fig. 1671
3. Install bearing outer race (2) and spacer (4) in differential carrier (3).
3
2
F0095460
Fig. 1672
4. Install pinion (1) and flanges (5) and (6) complete with the races of outer
A C
bearings ((7) and (8) in differential carrier (3) and use a depth gauge “A” to 5
measure distance “X”. 8
m Rotate pinion (1) in both directions to seat bearing (2). 7 6

Place onto the outer bearing race (8) on the crown wheel side a
cylindrical pin “C” 2.5 mm (code 2.1651.109.0) in diameter to make
3
up the difference between the outside diameters of the bearings (7)
(Ø90) and (8) (Ø85).
F0080741
Fig. 1673
30-452
5. Calculate distance “D” from the differential’s axis of rotation to pinion head
(1) with the following formula:
D=X-R 2,5 mm
where: R = 45.00 = radius of bearing (7) on the opposite side to the crown
wheel R
Example: X
D
m Dimension “X” = 107.75 mm
Radius “R” = 45.00
D = 107.75 - 45.00 = 62.75 mm

2
D0027940
Fig. 1674
6. Remove pinion (1), outer bearing race (2) and flanges (5) and (6) and form
a shim pack (9) of thickness “S” calculated using the following formula:
S = D - Theoretical value + E 1
where: S = final shim pack thickness (8)

D = measurement calculated at point 5
2
Theoretical value = 61.00
E = dimension stamped on the crest of a tooth of pinion (1)
Example 1 (negative “E” value)
F0080750
m D = 62.75 mm Fig. 1675

E = - 0.15 mm
S = 62.75 - 61.00 - 0.15 = 1.60 mm
Example 2 (positive “E” value)
m D = 62.75 mm
E = + 0.15 mm
S = 62.75 - 61.00 + 0.15 = 1.90 mm
7. Install shim pack (9) and bearing outer race (2) in differential carrier (3).
3
2 F0080683
Fig. 1676
30-453
8. Install pinion assembly (1) in the differential carrier and install spacer (10)
11
and a shim pack (11) approx. 1.50 mm thick.
m Bearing: oil 1
10
F0080761
Fig. 1677
9. Install bearing assembly (12) in differential carrier (3) and seat it using a
suitable drift.
12
m To facilitate assembly, position the differential carrier vertically and
rest the end face of the pinion on a spacer.
F0080771
Fig. 1678
10. Fit spacer (13) on pinion shaft (1) and secure it by tightening ringnut (14).
1
m Nut: 206-226 Nm (151.8-166.6 lb.ft.)
To tighten the ringnut, turn it counterclockwise. 13
When tightening the ringnut, take care not to preload bearings (2)
and (12). If the bearings are preloaded, increase the thickness of
the shim pack (11).
14
F0080781
Fig. 1679
11. Position a dial gauge “F” on a magnetic stand as shown and place the con-
tact point perpendicular to the end face of pinion (1). Preload the gauge by
about 2 mm then apply leverage to the pinion and read play “G” of bearings
(2) and (12).
Fig. 1680
12. Calculate thickness “P” of shim pack (11) to be installed under spacer (10)
using the following formula, rounding the value down to the nearest 0.05
mm. 12
10
“P” = Installed shim thickness - measured play “G”
Example 1: (measured play = 0.17 mm)
11 14
P = 1.50 - 0.17 = 1.33 mm which rounds down to 1.30 mm
m

m P = 1.50 - 0.23 = 1.27 mm which rounds down to 1.25 mm
D0023491
Fig. 1681
30-454
13. Remove ringnut (14) and withdraw the complete pinion, spacer (10) and
the inner race of bearing (12).
m Loosen the ringnut by turning it clockwise.
14
F0080801
Fig. 1682
14. Alter shim pack (11) to the thickness “P” calculated in point 12 and refit the
pinion as described in points 8 - 9 and 10.
m While tightening the ringnut, rotate the pinion to ensure bearings (2)
and (12) run smoothly.
Rotate the pinion in both directions, lightly tapping it in an axial direction
to help seat bearings (2) and (12) and check as described in point 12 that
there is no pinion end float.
If end float is detected, repeat the procedure from point 13.
Fig. 1683
30-455
Adjustment of the differential preload
Fig. 1684 - Adjustment of the differential preload
30-456
1. Fit crown wheel (2) to differential (1) and tighten screws (3).
m Screws: 75±4 Nm (55.3±3 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1685
2. Fit differential assembly (1) in differential carrier (4) and, using a suitable
tool, install the inner race of bearing (5).
m Take care to install bearing (5) and differential (1) the right way
round relative to differential carrier (4). 4
5
F0080830
Fig. 1686
3. Using a suitable tool, install the inner race of bearing (6).
F0080840
Fig. 1687
4. Install the outer race of bearing (5) on the flange of the side opposite the
crown wheel (7).
Fit the outer race of bearing (6) in the crown-wheel side flange (8).
Fig. 1688
5. Install an 0.5 mm thick shim pack (9) and flange (7) in differential carrier (4)
7 9 7
and secure in position by tightening screws (10).
10
4
F0080860
Fig. 1689
30-457
6. Install a 1.5 mm thick shim pack (11) and flange (8) in differential carrier (4)
11
and secure in position by tightening screws (12). 8 12
4
F0080870
Fig. 1690
7. Position a dial gauge on a magnetic stand “F” as shown, with the contact
point perpendicular to the hub of differential (1). Preload the dial gauge by
approx. 2 mm and set it to zero. F
Use a lever to apply force under differential (1) and measure play “G”.
Example:
m measured play “G” = 0.37 mm
1
F0088280
Fig. 1691
8. Calculate the total thickness of shims “T” to be installed under the flanges
9 11
by subtracting measured play “G” from the thickness of shims (9) and (11)
installed under flanges (7) and (8), rounding down the value obtained to the
nearest 0.05 mm.
Example:
Thickness of installed shims (9) and (11): 2.00 mm
m
Measured play “G” = 0.37 mm

Total shim thickness “T”: 2.00 -0.37 = 1.63 mm which rounds down
7 8
to 1.60 mm F0080890
Remove flanges (7) and (8) and shims (9) and (11). Fig. 1692
9. Change the thickness of shim pack (11) to 1.00 mm, and reinstall it with
11
flange (8). 8 12
m Bearing: oil
Tighten screws (12).
F0080871
Fig. 1693
10. Calculate thickness “H” of shim pack (9) by subtracting the thickness of
7 9 7
shims (11) installed under flange (8) from value “T” calculated in point 10.
Example:
m H = T - 1.00 = 1.60 -1.00 = 0.60 mm
10
Form a shim pack (9) of thickness “H”, install it with flange (7) and secure it
by tightening down screws (10).
m While tightening the screws, rotate the differential to ensure that
bearings (5) and (6) turn smoothly.
F0080861
m Bearing: oil Fig. 1694
30-458
11. Rotate the pinion and crown wheel in both directions to help seat the bear-
ings (5) and (6) and check, as described in point 7, that the differential has
no end float.
Using a feeler gauge “A”, check that dimension “D” between the end face
of pinion (13) and differential housing (1) is correct within a tolerance of
±0.10 mm.
Fig. 1695
12. Distance “D” = theoretical distance+ value “E” where:
Theoretical distance = 1.00 mm
Value E = value stamped on pinion tooth.
Example 1 (positive value “E”)
m
E = + 0.10 mm
D = 1.00 + 0.10 = 1.10 mm
Acceptable values: 1.00 to 1.20 mm
Example 2 (negative value “E”)
m Theoretical distance = 1.00 mm Fig. 1696
E = - 0.05 mm
D = 1.00 - 0.05 = 0.95 mm
Acceptable values: 0.85-1.05 mm

1. Position a dial gauge “F” on a magnetic stand with the contact point perpen-
dicular to a tooth flank on the external diameter of the crown wheel. Preload
the gauge by approx. 2 mm and measure backlash “Z” between the pinion
and crown wheel by turning the differential back and forth in both directions.
Normal backlash “Z”:
m 85 hp version: 0.14-0.19 mm
Take four measurements 90° apart and calculate the average.
Fig. 1697
2. If backlash “Z” is less than 0.15 mm, remove shims from shim pack (11)
(crown wheel side) and add the same number of shims to shim pack (9) 9
(opposite side to crown wheel). If backlash “Z” is greater than 0.20 mm add
shims to shim pack (11) (crown wheel side) and remove the same number 11
of shims from shim pack (9) (opposite side to the crown wheel).
m The sum total thickness of shim packs (11) and (9) should be the
same as the value obtained when checking the preload of the dif-
ferential bearings.
Recheck backlash “Z” and, if necessary, continue to adjust the shims until D0023500
the backlash is within the specified tolerance limits. Fig. 1698
30-459
3. Finally tighten down screws (10) and (12) securing flanges (7) and (8).
7
m Screws: 45±2 Nm (33.2±1.5 lb.ft.) 12
Screws: Loctite 242
10
8
F0080910
Fig. 1699
30.5.14 - Adjustment of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Pinion positioning and preload adjustment
30-460
1. Note dimension “E” stamped on the crest of a tooth of pinion (1).
m In this example: E = -0.05 mm
Fig. 1701
2. Install bearing inner race (2) on pinion shaft (1).
Fig. 1702
3. Install bearing outer race (2) in differential carrier (3).
F0080730
Fig. 1703
4. Install pinion (1) and flanges (4) and (5) complete with outer bearing races
(6) and (7) in differential carrier (3) and, using a depth gauge “A”, measure
distance “X”.
m Rotate the pinion in both directions to seat the bearing.
Place onto the outer bearing race (7) on the crown wheel side a
cylindrical pin “C” 2.5 mm (code. 2.1651.109.0) in diameter, to make
up the difference between the outside diameters of the bearings (7)
(Ø90) and (6) (Ø85).
Fig. 1704
30-461
5. Calculate distance “D” from the differential’s axis of rotation to pinion head
(1) with the following formula:
D=X-R
where: R = 45.00 = radius of bearing (7) on the opposite side to the crown
wheel
Example:
m Dimension “X” = 107.75 mm

Radius “R” = 45.00
D = 107.75 - 45.00 = 62.75 mm
Fig. 1705
6. Remove pinion (1), outer bearing race (2) and flanges (4) and (5) and form
a shim pack (8) of thickness “S” calculated using the following formula:
S = D - Theoretical value + E 1
where: S = final shim pack thickness (8)

D = measurement calculated at point 5
2
E = dimension stamped on the crest of a tooth of pinion (1)
Example 1 (negative “E” value)
F0080750
m D = 62.75 mm Fig. 1706

E = - 0.05 mm
S = 62.75 - 61.00 - 0.05 = 1.70 mm
Example 2 (positive “E” value)
m D = 62.75 mm
E = + 0.15 mm
S = 62.75 - 61.00 + 0.15 = 1.90 mm
7. Install shim pack (8) and bearing outer race (2) in differential carrier (3).
3
2 F0080681
Fig. 1707
30-462
8. Install pinion assembly (1) in the differential carrier and install spacer (9)
10
and a shim pack (10) approx. 1.50 mm thick.
m Bearing: oil 1
9
F0080760
Fig. 1708
9. Install bearing assembly (11) in differential carrier (3) and seat it using a
suitable driving tool.
m To facilitate installation of the bearing, put the differential carrier in a
vertical position and rest the pinion end face on a spacer.
Fig. 1709
10. Fit spacer (12) on pinion shaft (1) and secure it by tightening nut (13).
1
m Nut: 206-226 Nm (151.8-166.6 lb.ft.)
To tighten the nut, turn it counterclockwise. 12
When tightening the nut, take care not to preload bearings (2) and
(11). If the bearings are preloaded, increase the thickness of the
shim pack(10).
13
F0080780
Fig. 1710
11. Position a dial gauge “F” on a magnetic stand as shown and place the con-
tact point perpendicular to the end face of pinion (1). Preload the gauge by
about 2 mm then apply leverage to the pinion and read play “G” of bearings
(2) and (11).
Fig. 1711
12. Calculate the thickness “P” of shim pack (10) to be installed under spacer
(9) using the following formula, rounding the value down to the nearest
0.05 mm.
“P” = Installed shim thickness - measured play “G”
P = 1.50 - 0.17 = 1.33 mm which rounds down to 1.30 mm
m

m P = 1.50 - 0.23 = 1.27 mm which rounds down to 1.25 mm
Fig. 1712
30-463
13. Remove nut (13) and withdraw the pinion assembly, spacer (9) and the in-
ner race of bearing (11).
m Loosen the nut by turning it clockwise.
Fig. 1713
14. Alter shim pack (10) to thickness “P” calculated in point 12 and refit the
pinion as described in points 8 - 9 and 10.
m While tightening the nut, rotate the pinion to help seat bearings (2)
and (11).
Fig. 1714
15. Rotate the pinion both directions tapping it lightly to help seat bearings (2) and (11) and check as described in point 12 that
there is no pinion end float.
If end float is detected, repeat the procedures described in points 13, 14 and 15.
Adjustment of the differential preload
30-464
12
11
8 6
14 2
13 5
9
15
4 7
10
D0049191
Fig. 1715 - Adjustment of the differential preload

1. Fit crown wheel (2) to differential (1) and tighten screws (3).
m Screws: 75±4 Nm (55.3±3 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1716
2. Fit differential assembly (1) in differential carrier (4) and, using a suitable
tool, install the inner race of bearing (5).
m Take care to install bearing (5) and differential (1) the right way
round relative to differential carrier (4). 4
5
F0080830
Fig. 1717
30-465
3. Using a suitable tool, install the inner race of bearing (6).
F0080840
Fig. 1718
4. Install the outer race of bearing (5) on the flange of the side opposite the
crown wheel (7).
Fit the outer race of bearing (6) in the crown-wheel side flange (8).
Fig. 1719
5. Install an 0.5 mm thick shim pack (9) and flange (7) in differential carrier (4)
7 9 7
and secure in position by tightening screws (10).
10
4
F0080860
Fig. 1720
6. Install a 1.5 mm thick shim pack (11) and flange (8) in differential carrier (4)
11
and secure in position by tightening screws (12). 8 12
4
F0080870
Fig. 1721
7. Position a dial gauge on a magnetic stand “F” as shown, with the contact
point perpendicular to the hub of differential (1). Preload the dial gauge by
approx. 2 mm and set it to zero. F
Use a lever to apply force under differential (1) and measure play “G”.
Example:
m measured play “G” = 0.37 mm
1
F0088280
Fig. 1722
30-466
8. Calculate the total thickness of shims “T” to be installed under the flanges
9 11
by subtracting measured play “G” from the thickness of shims (9) and (11)
installed under flanges (7) and (8), rounding down the value obtained to the
nearest 0.05 mm.
Example:
Thickness of installed shims (9) and (11): 2.00 mm
m
Measured play “G” = 0.37 mm

Total shim thickness “T”: 2.00 -0.37 = 1.63 mm, which rounds down
7 8
to 1.60 mm F0080890
Remove flanges (7) and (8) and shims (9) and (11). Fig. 1723
9. Change the thickness of shim pack (11) to 1.00 mm, and reinstall it with
11
flange (8). 8 12
m Bearing: oil
Tighten screws (12).
F0080871
Fig. 1724
10. Calculate thickness “H” of shim pack (9) by subtracting the thickness of
7 9 7
shims (11) installed under flange (8) from the value “T”, calculated in point
9.
Example:
10
m H = T - 1.00 = 1.60 -1.00 = 0.60 mm
Form a shim pack (9) of thickness “H”, install it with flange (7) and secure it
by tightening down screws (10).
m While tightening the screws, rotate the differential to ensure that
bearings (5) and (6) turn smoothly.
F0080861
Fig. 1725
m Bearing: oil
11. Rotate the pinion and crown wheel in both directions to help seat bearings
(5) and (6) and check, as described in point 8, that the differential has no
end float.
Using a feeler gauge “A”, check that dimension “D” between the end face
of pinion (13) and differential housing (1) is correct within a tolerance of
±0.10 mm.
Fig. 1726
30-467
12. Distance “D” = theoretical distance+ value “E” where:
Value E = value stamped on pinion tooth.
Example 1 (positive value “E”)
m
E = + 0.10 mm
D = 1.00 + 0.10 = 1.10 mm
Acceptable values: 1.00 to 1.20 mm
Example 2 (negative value “E”)
m Theoretical distance = 1.00 mm Fig. 1727
E = - 0.05 mm
D = 1.00 - 0.05 = 0.95 mm
Acceptable values: 0.85-1.05 mm

1. Position a dial gauge “F” on a magnetic stand with the contact point per-
pendicular to a tooth flank on the external diameter of the crown wheel.
Preload the gauge by approx. 2 mm and measure backlash “Z” between
the pinion and crown wheel by turning the differential back and forth in both
directions.
Normal backlash “Z”:
m 100 hp version: 0.15 - 0.20 mm
Take four measurements 90° apart and calculate the average.
Fig. 1728
2. If backlash “Z” is less than 0.15 mm, remove shims from shim pack (11)
(crown wheel side) and add the same number of shims to shim pack (9) 9
(opposite side to crown wheel). If backlash “Z” is greater than 0.20 mm add
shims to shim pack (11) (crown wheel side) and remove the same number 11
of shims from shim pack (9) (opposite side to the crown wheel).
m The sum total thickness of shim packs (11) and (9) should be the
same as the value obtained when checking the preload of the dif-
ferential bearings.
Recheck backlash “Z” and, if necessary, continue to adjust the shims until D0049200
the backlash is within the specified tolerance limits. Fig. 1729

3. Finally tighten down screws (10) and (12) securing flanges (7) and (8).
7
m Screws: 45±2 Nm (33.2±1.5 lb.ft.) 12
Screws: Loctite 242
10
8
F0080910
Fig. 1730
30-468
30.5.15 - Disassembly of the differential (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 1731 - Differential

Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and detach flange (2).
Fig. 1732
2. Remove thrust washer (3) and side gear (4).
Fig. 1733
3. Withdraw spring pin (5).
On more recent versions spring pin (5) is installed parallel to

the differential’s axis of rotation.
Fig. 1734
30-469
4. Withdraw pin (6) and side gear (7) with relative thrust washer (8).
Fig. 1735
5. Remove planet gear (9) and relative thrust washer (10).
Remove side gear (11) and relative thrust washer (12).
Fig. 1736
Assembly
Procedures 2 - 4 - 5
l Shims: oil
30.5.16 - Disassembly of the differential (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 1737 - Differential
30-470
Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and remove flange (2).
Fig. 1738
2. Remove shim (3) and side gear (4).
Fig. 1739
3. Drive out spring pins (5) and (6).
Fig. 1740
4. Withdraw pin (7) and remove planet pinion (8) and the relative shim (9).
Fig. 1741
5. Withdraw pin (10) and remove planet pinion (11) and the relative shim (12).
Fig. 1742
30-471
6. Partially withdraw pin (13) and remove planet pinion (14) and the relative
shim (15).
Fig. 1743
7. Remove pin (13) and remove locating ring (16).
Fig. 1744
8. Remove planet pinion (17) and relative thrust washer (18).
Remove side gear (19) and relative shim (20)
Fig. 1745
30-472
Installation
Procedure n° 2-4-5-6-7-8
l Shims: oil
30.5.17 - 4WD shaft (F0.04.01)

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove screws (1) (3 on the left-hand side and 2 on the right-hand side).
Fig. 1746
3. Remove screws (2) and (3) and remove guard (4).
Fig. 1747
4. Remove clamps (5).
Fig. 1748
5. Disconnect brake pipes (6) and differential lock pipes (7).
m Plug the pipes to prevent the ingress of dirt
Fig. 1749
30-473
6. Disconnect steering control pipes (8).
m Plug the pipes to prevent the ingress of dirt
Fig. 1750
7. Remove front spring pin (9) and slide sleeve (10) along front axle drive
shaft (11).
Fig. 1751
8. Remove rear pin (12) and slide sleeve (13) along the front axle drive shaft
(11).
Remove 4WD shaft (11).
Fig. 1752
30-474
Refitting
Procedure 5
30.5.18 - Planetary reduction gear (F0.06.01)

See para. 30.12.1 - Front wheels - page 30-653 - (S0.01.01)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove plugs (1) and (2) and drain off all the oil from steering knuckle
housing (3).
m Oil: ~2.5 l (0.66 US.gall.)
Fig. 1753
3. Remove screw (4), loosen breather valve (5) and remove cover (6).
Fig. 1754
4. Unscrew and remove cover (7).
Remove circlip (8).
Fig. 1755
30-475
5. Using a slide hammer, remove cover (9).
Remove circlip (10).
Fig. 1756
6. Remove all the nuts (11) and, using two bolts as pullers, dislodge planetary
reduction gear assembly (12).
Fig. 1757
7. Attach planetary reduction gear assembly (12) to a hoist and lift it clear off
the tractor.
Fig. 1758
30-476
Refitting
Procedure 7
O-ring: grease.
Procedure 2
l Fill the steering knuckle housing with oil.
Steering knuckle housing: ~2.5 l (0.66 US.gall.)
30.5.19 - Disassembly of the planetary reduction gear
Fig. 1759 - Planetary reduction gear

Disassembly
Fig. 1760
30-477
2. Remove disc (2).
Fig. 1761
3. Extract pins (3).
Fig. 1762
4. Move planet pinions (5) towards the centre of planet carrier (4).
Fig. 1763
5. Position the assembly under a press and, using a suitable tool, separate
ring gear (6) from planet carrier (4).
m Before starting this operation, make sure planet pinions (5) have not
moved outwards.
Fig. 1764
6. Recover ring (7) and ball cage (8).
Fig. 1765
30-478
7. Remove ring gear (6) and recover ball cage (9).
Fig. 1766
8. Remove planet pinions (5) and shims (10) from planet carrier (4).
Remove needle roller bearings (11) from planet pinions (5).
Fig. 1767
9. Using a puller, remove oil seal (12).
m Renew oil seal (12) on reassembly.
Fig. 1768
10. Only if necessary: Using a puller, remove ring (13).
Fig. 1769
11. Only if necessary: extract bearing (14), circlip (15) and O-ring (16) from
planet carrier (4).
Fig. 1770
30-479
Assembly
1. Remove all traces of paint from face “A” of planet carrier (4) and face “B” of
ring gear (6) to facilitate subsequent installation of oil seal (12).
Fig. 1771
2. Only if removed: Heat ring (13) to around 80 °C (176 °F) and install it on
planet carrier (4).
m Make sure that is seated correctly.
Fig. 1772
3. Fit ball cage (9).
Fig. 1773
4. Install planet pinions (5) complete with needle roller bearings (11) and
shims (10) in planet carrier (4) and secure them with pins (3).
Fig. 1774
5. Fit ring gear (6).
Fig. 1775
30-480
6. Fit ball cage (8) and ring (7).
Fig. 1776
7. Locate disc (2) and tighten screws (1).
m Screws: 63±3 Nm (46.4±2.2 lb.ft.)
Fig. 1777
8. Place the final drive reduction unit under a press and, using the specific tool
T4 (code 5.9030.980.0), install new oil seal (12).
Fig. 1778
30-481
30.5.20 - Front brake discs
Removal
1. Remove screws (1) and remove reaction flange (2).
Fig. 1779
2. Remove friction disc (3) and steel disc (4).
3
4
F0085690
Fig. 1780
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Friction disc: Transmission oil
Procedure 1
l Screws: 59-65 Nm (43.5-48.0 lb.ft.)
30.5.21 - Front axle brake piston

Disassembly
1. DANGER
2. Using a slide hammer puller, remove piston (1).

1
m To facilitate removal of the piston, loosen the bleed screw by a few
turns.
F0085700
Fig. 1781
30-482
3. Recover seals (2) and (3).
3
F0085710
Fig. 1782
Assembly
Procedure 2
l Install piston (1), making sure that the side with the slots is oriented outwards.
Seals: Brake fluid
30-483
30.6 - G0 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform
30.6.1 - Cab (G0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Removal
1. DANGER

Disconnect the air conditioning pipes (1) and (2).
Fig. 1783
Fig. 1784
4. For all versions
Fig. 1785
30-484
5. Disconnect connectors (12), loosen screw (13) and move brake and clutch
Fig. 1786
6. Unplug connector (15).
Fig. 1787
7. Disconnect the clutch control cylinder pipe (16).
Fig. 1788
8. Remove screws (17) (3 on the left-hand side and 2 on the right-hand side).
Fig. 1789
9. Remove screws (18) and (19) and remove guard (20).
Fig. 1790
30-485
m Plug the pipes to prevent the ingress of dirt.
Label the pipes to avoid confusion on refitting.
Fig. 1791
11. Remove screw (22) and bracket (23).
Disconnect power steering pressure pipe (24).
Fig. 1792
12. Remove split pin (25) and remove pin (26).
m Always renew the split pin.
Lower gaiter (27) and disengage parking brake cable (28).
Fig. 1793
13. Remove split pin (29) and disconnect 4WD tie-rod (30).
Fig. 1794
14. Remove circlip (31) and disconnect groundspeed PTO tie-rod (32).
Fig. 1795
30-486
15. Remove yoke (33) and retaining spring (34) then disconnect cable (35)
from the PTO selector lever
Fig. 1796
16. Loosen nuts (36) and disconnect auxiliary services directional control ca-
bles (37)
Fig. 1797
17. Disconnect wiring connectors on the left (38) and on the right (39).
Fig. 1798
18. Remove pins (40) and disconnect lift tie-rods (41).
Fig. 1799
19. Remove screw (42) and disconnect ground cable (43).
Fig. 1800
30-487
20. Disconnect pipe (44).
mPlug the pipes to prevent the ingress of dirt.
Remove screw (45) and disconnect reverse shuttle control lever (46).
Fig. 1801
21. Remove screw (47) and disconnect gear control lever (48).
Fig. 1802
22. Disconnect brake pipes (50) from “SEPARATE BRAKE” valve (49).
Fig. 1803
23. Remove screws (51) and remove cab access steps (52).
Fig. 1804
tractor.
Fig. 1805
30-488
Fig. 1806
26. Attach cab (56) to a suitable hoist and take the strain on the rope.
Fig. 1807
27. Remove front nuts (57) (n°2) and rear nuts (58) (n°2).
Fig. 1808
28. Remove cab (56).
Fig. 1809
30-489
Installation
Procedure 27
l Nuts: 170 Nm (125.3 lb.ft.)
Procedure 22
l Bleed the air from the brake circuit.
Procedure 12
l Adjust the parking brake cable, if necessary.
Procedure 7
l Bleed the air from the clutch control circuit.
Procedure 2
l Air conditioning pipe fittings: Delivery (5/8”-18UNF): 13.6÷20.3 Nm (10-15 lb.ft.) - Return
(7/8”-14UNF): 35.3÷42.0 Nm (26-31 lb.ft.)
30.6.2 - Cab (G0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER

Fig. 1809
Loosen hose clamps (7) and disconnect heater pipes (8).
Fig. 1809
30-490
4. For all versions
Disconnect wiring connectors (9), loosen screw (10) and move brake and
clutch fluid reservoir (11) towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 1810
5. Unplug connector (12).
Fig. 1811
6. Disconnect shuttle wiring connector (13) remove strap (14).
Fig. 1812
7. Remove screw (15) (three on left and two on right).
Fig. 1813
8. Remove screws (16) and (17) and remove cover (18).
Fig. 1814
30-491
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1815
10. Remove screw (20) and bracket (21).
Disconnect the supply pipe (22) to the steering valve.
Fig. 1816
11. Remove split pin (23) and withdraw pivot pin (24).
IMPORTANT
Always renew the split pin.
Fig. 1817
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1818
Fig. 1819
30-492
14. Remove yoke (31) and retaining spring (32) then disconnect cable (33)
from the PTO speed selector lever.
Fig. 1820
15. Loosen nuts (34) and disconnect remote valve control cables (35).
Fig. 1821
16. Disconnect the left-hand (36) and right-hand (37) wiring connectors.
Fig. 1822
17. Remove split pins (38) and disconnect the lift control tie-rods (39).
Fig. 1823
18. Remove screw (40) and disconnect the earth cable (41).
Fig. 1824
30-493
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1825
20. Remove screw (43) and disconnect the range gear lever (44).
Fig. 1826
21. Remove screw (45) and disconnect main gear lever (46).
Fig. 1827
22. 47 -Disconnect the brake pipes (48) from the “SEPARATE BRAKE” valve.
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1828
tractor.
Fig. 1829
30-494
Fig. 1830
25. Attach cab (52) to a suitable hoist and take the strain on the rope.
Fig. 1831
26. Remove the two front nuts (53) and the two rear nuts (54).
Fig. 1832
27. Remove cab (55).
Fig. 1833
30-495
Refitting
Procedure 26
l Nuts: 170 Nm (125.3 lb.ft.)
Procedure 22
l Bleed the air from the brake circuit.
Procedure 11
Procedure 2
l Air conditioning pipe fittings:
m Delivery (5/8”-18UNF): 13.6-20.3 Nm (10-15 lb.ft.)
m Return (7/8”-14UNF): 35.3-42.0 Nm (26-31 lb.ft.)
30.6.3 - Front hood and side panels

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Press button (1) to raise front hood (2).
Fig. 1834
3. Remove side panels (3).
Fig. 1835
4. Unplug wiring connector (4).
Fig. 1836
30-496
5. While supporting front hood (2), remove screw (5) and nuts (6) then remove
front hood (2).
Fig. 1837
Refitting
30.6.4 - Cab access steps (G0.03.03)
Removal
1. Remove screws (1) and remove LH access steps (2).
Fig. 1838
Refitting
30.6.5 - Fenders (G0.04.01)
Removal
1. Remove the four screws (1) and remove fender assembly (2).
m Make note of the orientation or the anti-rotation brake (3).
Fig. 1839
Installation
30.6.6 - Front instrument panel (G0.06.04) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Removal
1. DANGER
30-497
2. Remove cover (1).
Fig. 1840
3. Remove nut (2) and remove steering wheel (3).
Fig. 1841
4. Remove knob (4), remove screws (5) and remove guard (6).
Fig. 1842
5. Remove screws (7) and remove guard (8) and disconnect connector (9).
Fig. 1843
6. Fully retract screws (10) and remove support (11) complete with lights se-
lector switch (12).
Fig. 1844
30-498
7. Remove panels (13) on both sides.
Fig. 1845
8. Detach instrument (14) from the instrument panel.
m To avoid damaging the instrument panel prise the retaining clips of
the instrument with a screwdriver inserted through the lateral open-
ings of the instrument panel.
Fig. 1846
9. Disconnect wiring connectors (15) and remove instrument (14).
Fig. 1847
10. Remove lower screws (16).
Fig. 1848
11. Remove upper screws (17) and move the instrument panel towards the
rear of the tractor.
Fig. 1849
30-499
12. Disconnect connectors (18) and (19).
Fig. 1850
Installation
30.6.7 - Front instrument panel (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 1851
Fig. 1852
4. Remove knob (4), remove screws (5) and remove cover (6).
Fig. 1853
30-500
Fig. 1854
6. Remove screws (9) and disconnect wiring connector (10) of the shuttle
lever.
Fig. 1855
7. Remove screws (11) and remove support (12) complete with steering col-
umn switch unit (13).
Fig. 1856
8. Remove panels (14) on both sides.
Fig. 1857
9. Detach instrument (15) from the instrument panel.
m To avoid damaging the instrument panel, prise the retaining clips of
the instrument with a screwdriver inserted through the lateral open-
ings of the instrument panel.
Fig. 1858
30-501
10. Disconnect wiring connectors (16) and remove instrument (15).
Fig. 1859
11. Remove the lower screws (17).
Fig. 1860
12. Remove upper screws (18) and move the instrument panel towards the
Fig. 1861
13. Disconnect wiring connectors (19) and (20).
Fig. 1862
30-502
Refitting
30.6.8 - Right-hand console (G0.06.01)
Removal
1. DANGER
Disconnect the negative lead from the battery and apply the parking brake.
2. Remove screws (1) and raise gaiter (2).
Fig. 1863
3. Disconnect wiring connector (3), remove screw (4) and remove main gear
lever assembly (5).
Fig. 1864
4. Remove screws (6) and remove storage compartment (7).
Fig. 1865
Fig. 1866
30-503
6. Remove all knobs (9).
Fig. 1867
7. Remove screws (10) and slight raise right-hand console (11).
Fig. 1868
8. Disconnect wiring connectors (12) and remove console (11).
Fig. 1869
30-504
Refitting
30.6.9 - Left-hand console (G0.06.02)
Removal
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the negative terminal of the battery.
2. Remove screw (1) and remove the knob (2).
Fig. 1870
3. Remove pin (3) and remove PTO knob (4). of the ECO knob and, if present,
of the groundspeed PTO.
Fig. 1871
4. Remove screws (5) and remove console (6).
Fig. 1872
Refitting
30-505
30.6.10 - Heating and air conditioning assembly - Version with standard roof
Removal
1. Remove screw (1) and remove the guides (2) of the sunblind.
Fig. 1873
Fig. 1874
3. Remove front screws (5) and central screw (6).
Fig. 1875
4. Remove knobs (7).
Fig. 1876
5. Remove screws (8) and (9) and remove instrument panel (10).
Fig. 1877
30-506
6. Disconnect the wiring connectors (11) of the power feed to the assembly.
Fig. 1878
7. Disconnect condensate drain pipes (12) and heater pipe (13) on both sides.
Fig. 1879
8. Disconnect air conditioning pipes (14).
IMPORTANT
Plug the open ends of the pipes immediately to prevent
moisture getting into the circuit.
Fig. 1880
9. Remove nuts (15).
Fig. 1881
Fig. 1882
30-507
11. Remove the complete heating and air conditioning assembly (17).
Fig. 1883
Refitting
Procedure 8
l Inspect the O-ring seals and renew if damaged.
l Flush and recharge the air conditioning system.
30-508
30.6.11 - Air conditioning system controls - High-visibility roof system (G0.09.01)
Fig. 1884 - Operating diagram

KEY
1. Compressor with electromagnetic clutch
2. Condenser
3. Receiver-drier tank
4. 4-level pressure switch for compressor clutch engagement/disengagement and condenser cooling fans control.
5. Expansion valve
6. Evaporator
7. Evaporator electronic minimum temperature sensor
8. Cab air blowers
9. Air cowling
10. Condenser cooling fans.
l To: low pressure gas
l B high pressure gas
l C: high pressure liquid
TECHNICAL DATA
30-509
l Minimum safety pressure: 2.45 bar Maximum safety pressure: 28 bars
Refrigerant type: R134a
Refrigerant quantity: 1100 g
Total quantity of moisture-free oil added at 1st charging: 200 g
Oil type: SUN-OIL COMPANY SP20
Operation
The compressor (1) is driven from the crankshaft via a drivebelt and pulley with an electromagnetic clutch (1a), which is controlled by
a switch on the control panel. The system is protected by a safety pressure switch, which performs the following functions:
l Inhibits engagement of the electromagnetic clutch (1a) when the system pressure falls below 2.45 bar as a result of incom-
plete charging or refrigerant leakage.
Disengages the clutch (1a) and thereby stops the compressor when the pressure exceeds the permitted maximum of 28 bar
(406 psi) (generally as a result of overheating).
A further contact controls operation of the cooling fans (10) of the condenser (2) in order to maintain normal operating pressure within
the range of 15 to 20 bar. The refrigerant (in vapour form) is drawn in by the compressor where it is compressed. This compression
causes the temperature of the vapour to rise; the refrigerant flows to the condenser (2) where its heat is transferred to the air flow
generated by cooling fans (10). The refrigerant gas is thus cooled to the point at which it condenses to high-pressure liquid. On lea-
ving the condenser, the liquefied refrigerant flows to the receiver-drier (3) which performs three functions: to filter out any impurities,
absorb any moisture in the circuit, and finally, act as a storage reservoir. The liquid refrigerant is then transferred to the evaporator
(6) through the expansion valve (5), which meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator to ensure optimum evaporation. In the
evaporator, the refrigerant expands to the critical evaporation point with an ambient temperature of around -- 8°C (17.6°F). The tem-
perature of the air flow over the evaporator (6) generated by the fans (8) is significantly higher than -- 8°C (17.6°F), and therefore it
gives up its heat to the refrigerant, causing it to boil and evaporate. On leaving evaporator (6), the refrigerant returns to compressor
(1) to repeat the cycle. The removal of heat from the ambient air flowing over the evaporator causes the moisture in the air to conden-
se, and the air is thus dehumidified; the moisture condenses on the fins of the evaporator, where, if it is not maintained at temperature
above 0°C (32°F), it will freeze and impair the efficiency of the evaporator. The task of maintaining the evaporator at a temperature
above 0°C (32°F) (and within the optimum temperature for efficient heat exchange), is performed by an electronic temperature sensor
(7); this sensor disengages the clutch (1a) of the compressor (1) when the temperature falls to the lower limit and engages the clutch
(1a) when the evaporator temperature reaches the upper limit. The condensate that forms on the evaporator fins (6) contains dust,
pollen and other airborne particulates; continuous condensation thus has the effect of purifying the air, and the droplets of conden-
sate are conveyed out of the vehicle via two ducts. A fixed quantity of moisture-free oil is added to the circuit in order to lubricate all
the mechanical components of the system; a certain percentage of this oil continuously circulates in the form of an oil mist, thereby
lubricating the compressor (pistons and bearings) and the expansion valve.
Discharging, flushing and recharging
1. DANGER
Before discharging, flushing and recharging the air conditioning system, check the system for leaks using a
leak detector.
2. In order to carry out the system servicing operations you will require a dedicated A/C servicing station capable of performing
the following tasks:
m Aspiration of the refrigerant fluid.
m Creation of a high vacuum to purge the system of contaminants.
m Filtration of the recovered refrigerant.
m Separation of the antifreeze and lubricating oil from the liquid refrigerant and determination of its quantity by weight.
m Recharging system with the exactly the same amounts of refrigerant and oil as those recovered.
m Measuring the system high side pressure and low side pressure.
Discharging the system

1. DANGER
Remove the key from the starter switch.
2. Connect the service machine to high pressure service valve (1) and follow the specific instructions for the service machine to
discharge the system.
3. Disconnect the system component to be renewed or overhauled immediately after the service machine stops; plug the open
ends of the system pipes as quickly as possible.
30-510
Flushing and recharging the system
1. Before each recharging, the system must be purged of all air, moisture and contaminants (oxides, deposits). This entails
creating a high vacuum within the system to evaporate any moisture present. The vapour, when extracted, draws with it any
contaminants present in the system.
m For the flushing and recharging operations, the service station must be connected to the high (1) and low (2) pressure
service valves.
DANGER
Maximum vacuum must be maintained for at least 10 minutes.
2. After flushing, the moisture-free oil recovered during the discharging operation must be returned into the system, followed by
the refrigerant.
m Quantity of refrigerant (R134a): 1100 g Oil quantity: the quantity recovered.
DANGER
If the system must be discharged and flushed in order to renew a system component, the quantity of oil in the
replaced component must be measured and the same amount of new oil must added as that recovered with
the refrigerant.
DANGER
For details of the oil and refrigerant recharging procedure, refer to the instructions supplied with the service
machine.
30-511
30.6.12 - Air conditioning system - Standard roof version
Fig. 1885 - Operating diagram

KEY
1. Compressor with electromagnetic clutch
2. Condenser
3. Receiver-drier
4. 3-level pressure switch for compressor clutch engagement/disengagement and condenser cooling fans control.
5. Expansion valve
6. Evaporator
7. Evaporator electronic minimum temperature sensor
8. Cab air blowers
9. Air cowling
10. Condenser cooling fan.
l To: low pressure gas
l B: high pressure gas
l C: high pressure liquid
TECHNICAL DATA
30-512
l Minimum safety pressure: 2.45 bar Maximum safety pressure: 28 bars
Refrigerant type: R134a
Refrigerant quantity: 1100 g
Total quantity of moisture-free oil added at 1st charging: 200 g
Oil type: SUN-OIL COMPANY SP20
Operation
The compressor (1) is driven from the crankshaft via a drivebelt and pulley with an electromagnetic clutch (1a), which is controlled by
a switch on the control panel. The system is protected by a safety pressure switch, which performs the following functions:
l Inhibits engagement of the electromagnetic clutch (1a) when the system pressure falls below 2.45 bar as a result of incom-
plete charging or refrigerant leakage.
Disengages the clutch (1a) and thereby stops the compressor when the pressure exceeds the permitted maximum of 28 bar
(406 psi) (generally as a result of overheating).
A further contact controls the operation of fan (10) of condenser (2) in order to maintain normal operating pressure within the range
of 11 to 15 bar. The refrigerant (in vapour form) is drawn in by the compressor where it is compressed. This compression causes the
temperature of the vapour to rise; the refrigerant flows to the condenser (2) where its heat is radiated to the air flow generated by
the cooling fans (10). The refrigerant vapour is thus cooled to the point where it condenses to high-pressure liquid. On leaving the
condenser, the liquefied refrigerant flows to the receiver-drier (3) which performs three functions: to filter out any impurities, absorb
any moisture in the circuit, and finally, act as a storage reservoir. The liquid refrigerant is then transferred to the evaporator (6) through
the expansion valve (5), which meters the flow of refrigerant into the evaporator to ensure optimum evaporation. In the evaporator,
the refrigerant expands to the critical evaporation point with an ambient temperature of around -- 8°C (17.6°F). The temperature of
the air flow over the evaporator (6) generated by the fans (8) is significantly higher than -- 8°C (17.6°F), and therefore it gives up its
heat to the refrigerant, causing it to boil and evaporate. On leaving evaporator (6), the refrigerant returns to compressor (1) to repeat
the cycle. The removal of heat from the ambient air flowing over the evaporator causes the moisture in the air to condense, and the
air is thus dehumidified; the moisture condenses on the fins of the evaporator, where, if it is not maintained at temperature above 0°C
(32°F), it will freeze and impair the efficiency of the evaporator. The task of maintaining the evaporator at a temperature above 0°C
(32°F) (and within the optimum temperature for efficient heat exchange), is performed by an electronic temperature sensor (7); this
sensor disengages the clutch (1a) of the compressor (1) when the temperature falls to the lower limit and engages the clutch (1a)
when the evaporator temperature reaches the upper limit. The condensate that forms on the evaporator fins (6) contains dust, pollen
and other airborne particulates; continuous condensation thus has the effect of purifying the air, and the droplets of condensate are
conveyed out of the vehicle via two ducts. A fixed quantity of moisture-free oil is added to the circuit in order to lubricate all the mecha-
nical components of the system; a certain percentage of this oil continuously circulates in the form of an oil mist, thereby lubricating
the compressor (pistons and bearings) and the expansion valve.
Discharging, flushing and recharging
1. DANGER
Before discharging, flushing and recharging the air conditioning system, check the system for leaks using a
leak detector.
2. In order to carry out the system servicing operations you will require a dedicated A/C servicing station capable of performing
the following tasks:
m Aspiration of the refrigerant fluid.
m Creation of a high vacuum to purge the system of contaminants.
m Filtration of the recovered refrigerant.
m Separation of the antifreeze and lubricating oil from the liquid refrigerant and determination of its quantity by weight.
m Recharging system with the exactly the same amounts of refrigerant and oil as those recovered.
m Measuring the system high side pressure and low side pressure.
Discharging the system

1. DANGER
2. Connect the service machine to high pressure service valve (1) and follow the specific instructions for the service machine to
discharge the system.
3. Disconnect the system component to be renewed or overhauled immediately after the service machine stops; plug the open
ends of the system pipes as quickly as possible.
30-513
Flushing and recharging the system
1. Before each recharging, the system must be purged of all air, moisture and contaminants (oxides, deposits). This entails
creating a high vacuum within the system to evaporate any moisture present. The vapour, when extracted, draws with it any
contaminants present in the system.
m For the flushing and recharging operations, the service station must be connected to the high (1) and low (2) pressure
service valves.
DANGER
Maximum vacuum must be maintained for at least 10 minutes.
2. After flushing, the moisture-free oil recovered during the discharging operation must be returned into the system, followed by
the refrigerant.
m Quantity of refrigerant (R134a): 1100 g Oil quantity: the quantity recovered.
DANGER
If the system must be discharged and flushed in order to renew a system component, the quantity of oil in the
replaced component must be measured and the same amount of new oil must added as that recovered with
the refrigerant.
DANGER
For details of the oil and refrigerant recharging procedure, refer to the instructions supplied with the service
machine.
30.6.13 - Air conditioning compressor

1. DANGER
2. Disconnect electromagnetic clutch control connector (1).

Disconnect suction (3) and delivery (4) pipes from compressor (2).
m Plug the open ends of the pipes immediately to prevent moisture
getting into the circuit.
Fig. 1886
3. Loosen nut (5), remove pivot screw (6) and remove compressor (2).
Fig. 1887
30-514
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Remove the plugs and reconnect the pipes straight away, tightening fully to ensure moisture does not get into the system.
Inspect the O-rings and renew them if damaged.
l Adjust the tension of the compressor/fan drivebelt.
l Flush and recharge the system.
30.6.14 - Condenser - Version with high-visibility roof

Removal
1. Remove knobs (1) and remove cover (2).
Fig. 1888
2. Remove screw (3) and reposition pipe (14) towards the rear of the tractor.
IMPORTANT
m Recover spacer (5).
m Immediately plug the ends of the pipe to prevent moisture from get-
ting into the system.
Fig. 1889
3. Disconnect pipe (6) from receiver-drier (7).
Remove screw (8) and remove pipe (6).
IMPORTANT
m Immediately plug the opening in the receiver-drier to prevent mois-
ture from entering.
Fig. 1890
4. Turn over the condenser and remove screws (10).
Fig. 1891
30-515
5. Remove condenser (11).
Fig. 1892
Refitting
procedures:
Procedures 2-3
l Check the condition of the sealing rings and renew them if damaged.
l Flush and recharge the air conditioning system.
Fig. 1893
30.6.15 - Receiver drier - Version with high visibility roof

Removal
1. Disconnect the pipes (1) and (2).
IMPORTANT
Plug the open ends of the pipes immediately to prevent
moisture getting into the circuit.
Fig. 1894
Fig. 1895
30-516
3. Remove receiver-drier (4).
Fig. 1896
Refitting
procedures:
Procedure 1
lInspect the seals and renew them if damaged.
Flush and recharge the air conditioning system.
Fig. 1897
30.6.16 - Air-conditioning evaporator - Version with high-visibility roof

Removal
1. Remove evaporator (1).
IMPORTANT
m Recover foam gasket (2).
Fig. 1898
Refitting
30.6.17 - Heater matrix - Version with high-visibility roof
Removal
1. Remove all the screws (1), remove spring clips (2) and remove the half
casing (3).
IMPORTANT
Cut gasket (4) in proximity to the joint between the half cas-
ings.
Fig. 1899
30-517
2. Remove heater matrix (5).
Fig. 1900
Refitting
30.6.18 - Expansion valve - Version with high visibility roof
Removal
casing (3).
IMPORTANT
Cut gasket (4) in proximity to the joint between the half cas-
ings.
Fig. 1901
2. Remove insulating tape (5).
IMPORTANT
Renew the insulating tape on reassembly
Fig. 1902
3. Remove spring clip (6) securing sensor (7).
Fig. 1903
30-518
4. Remove screws (8) and remove pipes (9) and expansion valve (10).
Fig. 1904
Refitting
Procedure 4
l Check the condition of the O-rings and renew them if damaged.
30.6.19 - Antifreeze sensor - Version with high visibility roof

Removal
casing (3).
IMPORTANT
m Cut gasket (4) in proximity to the joint between the half casings.
Fig. 1905
2. Remove insulating tape (5).
IMPORTANT
m Renew the insulating tape on reassembly
Fig. 1906
3. Remove spring clip (6) securing sensor (7).
Fig. 1907
30-519
4. Remove nut (8) remove antifreeze sensor (7).
Fig. 1908
Refitting
30.6.20 - Condenser cooling fans - Version with high-visibility roof
Removal
Fig. 1909
2. Disconnect the wiring connector of the fan (3) to be removed, remove
screws (4) and remove fan (3).
Fig. 1910
Refitting
30.6.21 - Condenser fan control pressure switch - Version with high visibility roof
Removal
Fig. 1911
30-520
2. Disconnect wiring connector (3) and remove pressure switch (4).
Fig. 1912
Refitting
30.6.22 - Clutch master cylinder (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Disconnect connectors (1), loosen screw (2) and remove brake and clutch
fluid reservoir (3) from the support.
Fig. 1913
3. Remove screws (4) and tilt hood support (5) towards the front of the tractor.
Fig. 1914
Fig. 1915
30-521
5. Remove four nuts (7) and move fuse box (8) clear.
Fig. 1916
6. Remove screws (8) and nut (9) and separate guard (10).
Fig. 1917
7. Remove split pin (11) and remove pivot pin (12).
Fig. 1918
8. Disconnect connection pipe (13) to the compensation tank and clutch con-
trol pipe (14).
Fig. 1919
9. Remove screws (15) and remove the clutch master cylinder (16).
Fig. 1920
30-522
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Fill the clutch fluid reservoir and bleed the air from the clutch circuit.
30.6.23 - Clutch piston (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)

Removal
1. Loosen adjuster nut (1) and free pipe (2) from clamp (3).
Disconnect pipe (2) from piston (4).
Fig. 1921
2. Remove screws (5) and remove piston assembly (4).
Fig. 1922
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Make sure that plunger (6) of the clutch piston is properly inserted in the
lever (7) then refit plug (8).
Fig. 1923
Bleed the air from the clutch control circuit.

30.6.24 - Clutch control circuit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Bleeding the system
1. DANGER
During air bleeding operations, ensure that the fluid in the reservoir is always above the minimum level.
30-523
2. Remove the dust cap and attach a length of transparent tubing “A” to the
bleed valve; insert the other end of the tubing in a container to collect the
fluid.
Repeatedly depress the clutch pedal until you feel resistance, then hold the
pedal pressed down.
Slowly open bleed valve (1) and allow fluid and air to escape.
Fig. 1924
3. While holding the pedal fully depressed, tighten the bleed screw; release the pedal.
Repeat the previous operations until the fluid flowing from the bleed valve is entirely free of air bubbles.
After bleeding, fit the dust cap to the bleed valve.
30.6.25 - Brake master cylinders

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove cap (1) and draw off the fluid contained in brake fluid reservoir (2).
Remove screw (3) and move brake fluid compensation tank (2) towards the
Fig. 1925
Fig. 1926
Fig. 1927
30-524
5. Withdraw split pins (7) and remove pivot pins (8).
Fig. 1928
6. Disconnect suction pipes (10), balance pipe (11) and brake pipes (12) and
(13) from brake master cylinders (9).
m Label pipes (12) and (13) to avoid confusion on reconnection.
Fig. 1929
7. Remove screws (14) (2 per master cylinder) and remove the brake master
cylinders.
Fig. 1930
30-525
Installation
l Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the maximum level.
Bleed the air from the braking circuit.
Check the position and alignment of the brake pedals.
30.6.26 - Adjustment of the control levers (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Adjustment
1.
This procedure must be carried out with the lift unit installed on the transmission and with all the oil delivery
and return pipes connected.
2. DANGER
Before starting the tractor, make sure that the yellow lift control lever is in the ‘maximum depth’ position.
DANGER
When starting the engine, make sure that the hand throttle lever is in the minimum (idle) position.
3. Attach either an implement or a 200 kg weight to the 3-point linkage.

4. Move yellow lever (1) to the ‘maximum height’ position.
Fig. 1931
5. Check that lever (2) is seated against lift (3).
If not, or if lever (2) is restricting the travel of yellow lever (1), adjust the
length of tie-rod (4) by way of yoke (5).
Fig. 1932
6. After making the adjustment, move yellow lever (1) to the ‘control’ position
and green lever (6) to position “12”.
Fig. 1933
30-526
7. Start the engine and run at idle speed and slowly move green lever (6) to
position “0”.
m Take care because the lift arms will rise.
Fig. 1934
8. When the lift stops, check that hole “A” on right hand arm (7) is aligned with
the hole in lift cover (3).
Fig. 1935
9. If not, remove plug (8) and adjust the height by way of push rod (9).
m Screw in push rod (9) to raise the arms.
Screw out push rod (9) to lower the arms.
Tighten locknut (10) and refit plug (8).
m Renew the washer on reassembly.
Fig. 1936
10. After making the adjustment, move yellow lever (1) to the maximum height
position and the green lever to position “12”.
Fig. 1936
11. Check that hole “A” on right hand lift arm (7) is aligned with the hole on lift
(3).
If not, loosen screw (11) to bring the holes into alignment.
m Mark a horizontal line on the cylinder rod about 10-12 mm from the
seal.
Fig. 1937
30-527
12. Then slacken off screw (11) another full turn and secure it in position with
locknut (13).
m Check that the line marked on the cylinder rod is near the seal.
Adjust the length of tie-rod (12) by way of the yoke so that the yellow lever
can move through its entire stroke to maximum lift position without imping-
ing on screw (11).
Fig. 1938
13. Move yellow lever (1) to the “control” position and green lever (6) to posi-
tion “12”.
m The lift should be lowered to maximum depth position.
Slowly move green lever (6) towards position “O” until the lift starts to move.
Fig. 1938
14. The lift should start to move when green lever (6) is in position “4”.
m If it starts to move earlier, (in position “5” or “6”), shorten tie-rod (4).
If it starts to move later, (in position “3” or “2”) lengthen tie-rod (4).
Fig. 1939
30-528
30.6.27 - Adjustment of the control levers (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Adjustment
1.
This procedure should be carried out with the lift unit installed on the transmission and service tool T2 installed
in place of the auxiliary services remote control valve. Furthermore, the level tube installed inside the lift cover
should be replaced with another tube approximately 100 mm long.
2. DANGER
3. DANGER
Fig. 1940
5. Connect service tool T2 to the tractor hydraulic system as shown.
Fig. 1941
6. Connection to service tool T2.
Fig. 1942
30-529
Move yellow lever (3) to the ‘maximum height’ position.
Fig. 1943
8. Check that lever (4) is up against stop (5).
length of tie rod (6).
Fig. 1944
Fig. 1945
10. Start the engine and run at idle speed and slowly move yellow lever (3) to
the maximum lift position.
Fig. 1945
11. When the lift stops, check that the end of piston (8) is flush with cylinder (9).
Fig. 1946
30-530
12. If piston (8) protrudes from the cylinder or stops inside it, adjust the stroke
by way of tie rod (10).
m Shorten the tie-rod to make the piston protrude from the cylinder.
Lengthen the tie rod to cause the piston to retract inside the cylinder.
Fig. 1947
13. Move yellow lever (3) to the ‘control’ position and green lever (7) to position
“0”.
m Take care as the lift arms should still rise a little.
Fig. 1948
14. Check that piston (8) protrudes approximately 5 mm from cylinder (9).
Fig. 1949
15. If piston (8) does not stop in the correct position, adjust the stroke by way
of screw (11).
m Screw in if the piston protrudes too much (7 mm).
Screw out if the piston does not protrude enough (3 mm).
After each adjustment, check by moving green lever (7) to position
“12” and then back to position “0”.
Fig. 1950
16. Move green lever (7) to position “12”.
Slowly move green lever (7) towards position “0” until the lift starts to move.
Fig. 1951
30-531
Fig. 1952
18. If the lift starts to move earlier (near positions “5” or “6”) shorten tie-rod (12).
If it starts to move later (near positions “3” or “2”) lengthen tie-rod (12).
Fig. 1953
19. On completion of the adjustments, replace the temporary level tube with the original one, remove special tool T2 and complete
the installation of the lift and the removed components.
30.6.28 - Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 85)

Adjustment
1.
2. DANGER
DANGER

Fig. 1954
30-532
length of tie-rod (4) by way of yoke (5).
Fig. 1955
Fig. 1956
7. Start the engine, run at idle speed and slowly move green lever (6) to posi-
tion “0”.
m Take care because the lift arms will rise.
Fig. 1957
Fig. 1958
m Screw in push rod (9) to raise the arms.
m Renew the washer on reassembly.
Fig. 1959
30-533
10. After making the adjustment, move the yellow lever (1) to the maximum
height position and the green lever to position “12”.
Fig. 1959
(3).
m Mark a horizontal line on the cylinder rod about 10-12 mm from the
seal.
Fig. 1960
locknut (13).
m Check that the line marked on the cylinder rod is near the seal.
Adjust the length of tie-rod (12) by way of the yoke so that the yellow lever
can move through its entire stroke to maximum lift position without imping-
ing on screw (11).
Fig. 1961
tion “12”.
Fig. 1961
m If it starts to move earlier, (in position “5” or “6”), shorten tie-rod (4).
If it starts to move later, (in position “3” or “2”) lengthen tie-rod (4).
Fig. 1962
30-534
30.6.29 - Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 100)
Adjustment
1.
2. DANGER
3. DANGER
Fig. 1963
5. Connect the appropriate service tool T2 to the tractor hydraulic system as
shown.
Fig. 1964
6. Connection of service tool T2.
Fig. 1965
30-535
Fig. 1966
Fig. 1967
Fig. 1968
the maximum height position.
Fig. 1968
Fig. 1969
30-536
by way of tie-rod (10).
m Shorten the tie-rod to make the piston protrude from the cylinder.
Lengthen the tie-rod to cause the piston to retract inside the cylinder.
Fig. 1970
“0”.
m Take care as the lift arms should still rise a little.
Fig. 1971
Fig. 1972
of screw (11).
m Screw in if the piston protrudes too much (7 mm).
After each adjustment, check by moving green lever (7) to position
“12” and then back to position “0”.
Fig. 1973
Fig. 1974
30-537
Fig. 1975
Fig. 1976
19. On completion of the adjustments, replace the temporary level tube with the original one, remove service tool T2 and complete
the installation of the lift and the removed components.
30.6.30 - Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Adjustment
1. IMPORTANT
2. DANGER
3. DANGER

Fig. 1976
30-538
If not, or if lever (2) is restricting the travel of he yellow lever, adjust the
length of tie-rod (4) by way of adjuster (5).
Fig. 1977
Fig. 1977
8. Start the engine and run at idle speed and slowly move green lever (6) to
position “0”.
IMPORTANT
Take care because the lift arms will rise.
Fig. 1977
Fig. 1977
30-539
IMPORTANT
Screw in push rod (9) to raise the arms.
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1977
IMPORTANT
Renew the washer on reassembly.
11. After performing the adjustment, move the yellow lever (1) to the maximum
height position and the green lever to position “12”.
Fig. 1977
(3).
IMPORTANT
Mark a horizontal line on the cylinder rod about 10-12 mm
from the seal.
Fig. 1977
locknut (13).
IMPORTANT
Check that the line marked on the cylinder rod is near the
seal.
Adjust the length of tie-rod (12) by turning the adjuster so that the green
lever can move through its entire stroke to maximum height position without
impinging on screw (11).
Fig. 1978
30-540
tion “12”.
IMPORTANT
The lift should be lowered to maximum depth position.
Fig. 1978
IMPORTANT
If it starts to move earlier, (in position “5” or “6”), shorten
tie-rod (12).
IMPORTANT
If it starts to move later, (in position “3” or “2”) lengthen tie-
rod (12).
Fig. 1979
30.6.31 - Adjustment of rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Adjustment
1. IMPORTANT
2. DANGER
Before starting the tractor, make sure that the yellow lift control lever is in the maximum depth’ position.
3. DANGER
Fig. 1979
30-541
5. Connect service tool T2 to the tractor hydraulic system as shown.
Fig. 1979
6. Connection of service tool T2.
Fig. 1979
Fig. 1979
Fig. 1980
Fig. 1980
30-542
the maximum height position.
Fig. 1980
Fig. 1980
by way of tie-rod (10).
IMPORTANT
Shorten the tie-rod to make the piston protrude from the cyl-
inder.
IMPORTANT
Lengthen the tie-rod to cause the piston to retract inside the
cylinder. Fig. 1980
“0”.
IMPORTANT
Take care as the lift arms should still rise a little.
Fig. 1980
Fig. 1980
30-543
of screw (11).
IMPORTANT
Screw in if the piston protrudes too much (7 mm).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1980
IMPORTANT
After each adjustment, check by moving green lever (7) to
position “12” and then back to position “0”.

IMPORTANT
The lift should be lowered to the maximum depth position.
Fig. 1980
Fig. 1980
19. On completion of the adjustments, replace the temporary level tube with
the original one, remove service tool T2 and complete the installation of the
lift and the removed components.
Fig. 1981
30-544
30.6.32 - Remote valve control cables
Removal
1. DANGER
IMPORTANT
Label the cables to avoid confusion on reconnection.
Fig. 1982
3. Remove screws (3) and remove storage compartment (4).
Fig. 1983
4. Disconnect the relevant control cable (6) from lever (5).
Remove lock ring (7) and remove cable (6).
Fig. 1984
Refitting
30-545
30.7 - H0 - Hydraulic system
30.7.1 - Pump for hydraulic lift and auxiliary services (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Removal
1. DANGER

mAlways renew the split pin.
Fig. 1985
Fig. 1986
4. Remove split pin (7), remove pin (8) and disconnect tie-rod (9) of the 4WD
engagement control.
Fig. 1987
5. Remove screws (10) and (11) and remove support assy (12).
Fig. 1988
30-546
6. Loosen nuts (13) but do not remove them.
Fig. 1989
7. Disconnect pressure pipe (14) from master cylinder (15).
Plug pipe to prevent dirt from entering the system.
m
Remove screws (16) and turn pipe (17) counterclockwise to free pump (14).
Remove the two screws (18) and remove pump (14).
Fig. 1990
Refitting
Procedure 7
Procedure 2
30.7.2 - Pump for hydraulic lift and auxiliary services (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER

IMPORTANT
Fig. 1990
30-547
3. For versions with mechanical 4WD engagement only
Remove split pin (5) and disconnect 4WD tie-rod (6).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 1990
4. Remove split pin (7), remove pin (8) and disconnect tie-rod (9) of the 4WD
engagement control.
Fig. 1990
5. For all versions
Remove screws (10) and (11) and remove support assembly (12).
Fig. 1991
6. Loosen union (13) and disconnect the delivery pipe (14).
Fig. 1992
7. Loosen hose clamps (15) and move hose (16) downwards.
Remove screws (17) and remove suction pipe (18).
Fig. 1993
30-548
8. Remove the two screws (19) and remove pump (20).
Fig. 1994
Refitting
Procedure 8
Procedure 2
30.7.3 - Power steering (H0.02.01)

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove screw (1) and move brake fluid compensation tank (2) towards the
Fig. 1995
Fig. 1996
30-549
Fig. 1997
Fig. 1998
6. Loosen and remove all unions (8).
Fig. 1999
7. Remove screws (9) and remove bulkhead (10).
Fig. 2000
8. Remove screws (11) and remove power steering valve (12).
Fig. 2001
30-550
Refitting
Procedure 8
l Power steering valve bore: Molybdenum grease.
30.7.4 - Pressure relief valve setting

Checking maximum operating pressure
1. Disconnect the rod side pressure connection from one of the steering cylin-
ders (1) and replace with union “B” connected in turn to a 400 bar full scale
pressure gauge.
Fig. 2002
2. Start the engine and turn the steering to full lock to expel any air from the steering circuit.
3. Force the steering to full lock on the side to which the pressure gauge is connected and read off the maximum continuous
pressure on gauge “A”.
m Maximum permissible pressure: 150 bar (2175.6 psi)
4. If the pressure reading differs from the specified value, adjust the pressure relief valve of the power steering unit.
Pressure relief valve setting
1. IMPORTANT
Remove the power steering to calibrate the relief valve.
2. Remove plug (3) and relative seal (4).

Using a hex key proceed to adjust relief pressure by positioning setscrew
(5).
m To INCREASE the pressure, turn the screw CLOCKWISE
To REDUCE the pressure, turn the screw COUNTERCLOCKWISE.
Refit plug (3), checking that seal (4) is correctly seated.
m Plug: 50÷60 Nm (36.9-44.2 lb.ft.)
Fig. 2003
30-551
30.7.5 - Power steering disassembly
26 15
24 18 13
25
25b
27 25a
28 19
29 21
20
22
16
17a
17b
12
10
17
23a
23b
23 23a
8 5a
7 6
11
9
2
5 1
Fig. 2004 - Power steering
30-552
Disassembly
1. Unscrew and remove screws (1) and (3) and washers (2) securing cover (4)
(6 screws plus one special screw). 3
1 2
F0009470
Fig. 2005
2. Remove cover (4) by sliding it off sideways.
4
F0009480
Fig. 2006
3. Lift rotary spool unit (5) complete with O-rings (6) and spacer (7).
5
6 7
F0009490
Fig. 2007
4. Remove drive shaft (8).
F0009500
Fig. 2008
5. Remove distributor plate (9).
F0009510
Fig. 2009
30-553
6. Remove relief valve stop bush (10).
10
F0009520
Fig. 2010
7. Remove O-ring (11).
11
F0009530
Fig. 2011
8. Remove ball (12) of the check valve and pins (13) and balls (15) of the
suction valves.
15
12 13
F0009541
Fig. 2012
9. Checking through the central hole of the spool, position spool-bush as-
sembly cross pin (16) horizontally. Push assembly (17) and the bearing
assembly out of power steering housing (18).
17
18
F0009550
Fig. 2013
10. Remove outer ring (19), inner ring (20) and roller bearing (21) from the
spool; remove also ring (22).
m It may occur that inner ring (20) (thin) remains in the steering valve
22 20
housing; ensure that it is actually removed.
21
19
F0009560
Fig. 2014
30-554
11. Remove cross pin (16), bush (17b) and spool (17a).
m Use special cover screw (3).
17b
3 16
17a
F0009570
Fig. 2015
12. Slowly withdraw spool (17a) from bush (17b).
17b
17a
F0009580
Fig. 2016
13. Press neutral position springs (23) and remove them from spool (17a).
23
17a
F0009590
Fig. 2017
14. Remove dust seal (24) and composite seal (25) (O-ring + seal).
25
24
F0129940
Fig. 2018
15. Remove plug (26) and its seal.
26
F0129930
Fig. 2019
30-555
16. Remove pressure relief adjuster screw (27).
27
F0129950
Fig. 2020
17. Turn over the steering valve housing and remove spring (28) and relief
valve (29).
IMPORTANT 29
The seat of the relief valve is a force fit in the housing and
28
cannot be removed.
F0009681
Fig. 2021
Installation
1. IMPORTANT
Prior to reassembly, lubricate all components with gearbox
23b
oil. 23a
Insert the two flat washers (23a) in the seat and centre them relative to
the diameter of spool (17a). Insert the four curved washers (23b) in pairs
23b 23a 17a
between the two flat washers (23a) and push them fully home.
F0009690
Fig. 2022
2. Align spring assembly (23).
23
F0009700
Fig. 2023
3. Insert spool (17a) in bush (17b).
IMPORTANT 17b
Check that the position between the bush and the spool is 17a
as described in stage 1.
F0009580
Fig. 2023
30-556
4. Simultaneously push springs (23) and spool (17a) until the springs are
seated in the slots in bush (17b). 23
17a
17b
F0009710
Fig. 2024
5. Align springs (23) and make sure they are positioned centrally in relation to
the diameter of bush (17b). 23
17b
F0009720
Fig. 2025
6. Install ring (22) on its seat on bush (17b).
IMPORTANT
22
Ring (22) must be free to rotate without interfering with
springs (23).
17b
F0009730
Fig. 2026
7. Insert cross pin (16).
16
F0009740
Fig. 2027
8. Install the thrust bearing components in the order indicated in point 9.
20
22 21 F0009751
Fig. 2028
30-557
9. Thrust bearing assembly.
20
m 17a - Spool
17b - Bush 21
21- Needle roller bearing 22
20 - Inner ring
22 - Outer ring
17
DANGER
17
The outer ring must be installed with chamfer “X” facing the
shoulder of the spool.
Fig. 2029
10. Position steering valve housing (18) so the hole is horizontal. Insert into the
bush/spool assembly bore the guide of special tool T9 (P/N. 5.9030.480.0).
Fig. 2030
11. Lubricate oil seal (25a) and O-ring (25b) and fit them on the push rod of tool
T9 (P/N. 5.9030.480.0).
Fig. 2031
12. Fit tool T9 (P/N. 5.9030.480.0). and insert it in the guide previously inserted
in the steering valve bore.
Fig. 2031
13. Push seal (25) into its seat in steering valve housing (18) while rotating it
to ease it into position.
18
F0009790
Fig. 2032
30-558
14. Withdraw tool T9 (P/N 5.9030.480.0). from valve housing (18) and removal
also the guide, leaving the tool push rod in the housing.
Fig. 2033
15. Insert bush/spool assembly (17) in steering valve bore (18). Rotate the
valve slightly while inserting it to ease it into position.
17
IMPORTANT
Keep the cross pin horizontal while inserting the assembly.
18
F0009810
Fig. 2034
16. Push in assembly (17) until fully seated so that it forces out the tool push
rod left in the housing in step 14. 18
17
F0009820
Fig. 2035
17. Rotate steering valve housing (18) until the centre hole is vertical. Insert
ball (12) of the relief valve in the hole indicated by the arrow. 12
18
F0009830
Fig. 2036
18. Screw valve retaining bush (10) into the bore of the relief valve.
IMPORTANT
10
The top of the retaining bush should be set below the face of
steering valve housing (18).
18
F0009521
Fig. 2037
30-559
19. Insert the two balls (15) in the holes indicated by the arrows.
15
F0010310
Fig. 2038
20. Insert elements (13) in the same holes.
13
F0009841
Fig. 2039
21. Lubricate O-ring (11) and fit it in its seat.
11
m O-ring: Gearbox oil
F0009850
Fig. 2040
22. Locate distributor plate (9) so that its holes are aligned with the holes in
9
steering valve housing (18).
18
F0009860
Fig. 2041
23. Insert drive shaft (8) in the hole so that it engages the cross pin; check
that the engagement with the cross pin is parallel to the steering column
mounting face.
8
F0009870
Fig. 2042
30-560
24. Position the drive shaft so that it is vertical and hold it in this position using
a suitable tool.
F0009880
Fig. 2043
25. Lubricate the two O-rings (6) and fit them in the two grooves in rotary spool
unit (5). Fit rotary spool unit (5) to drive shaft (8). 6
m O-rings: Gearbox oil 8
F0009890
Fig. 2044
26. DANGER
Install rotor (5a) on drive shaft (8) so that the valley between
two lobes is aligned with the groove in the end of the drive
shaft. Then turn outer ring (5b) to align the fixing holes. 8
5a
F0009900
Fig. 2045
27. Install spacer (7).
7
F0009910
Fig. 2046
28. Fit cover (4).
4
F0009920
Fig. 2047
30-561
29. Insert special screw (3) complete with washer (2) in the hole indicated in
the photo.
3
F0009930
Fig. 2048
30. Insert the six screws (1) complete with washers (2). Tighten screws (1) and
(3) in a crosswise sequence to a torque of 30±6 Nm (22.1±4.4 lb.ft.). 3
1 2
F0009471
Fig. 2049
31. Fit valve (29).
29
F0129960
Fig. 2050
32. Fit spring (28).
28
F0129970
Fig. 2051
33. Fit pressure adjustment screw (27).
27
F0129950
Fig. 2051
30-562
34. Fit plug (26) complete with seal.
m Plug: 50±10 Nm (36.8±7.4 lb.ft.)
26
F0129930
Fig. 2051
35. Locate dust seal (24) in steering valve housing (18).
24
18
F0009970
Fig. 2052
36. Install dust seal (24) in the steering valve housing using a suitable drift and
a soft faced mallet.
F0009980
Fig. 2053
37. Close off the oil ports with plastic plugs to prevent impurities getting in.
IMPORTANT
Fit the plugs by hand pressure alone; do not hammer.
F0009990
Fig. 2054
38. On completion of the assembly operation, test the operating pressure of the relief valve and calibrate as necessary.
30-563
30.7.6 - Power steering pump (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 2055
Fig. 2056
4. Remove screws (5) and remove linkage (6).
Fig. 2057
5. Loosen clamps (7) and move sleeve (8) towards the rear.
Fig. 2058
30-564
6. Loosen fully union (9), remove screws (10) and remove pipe (11).
Remove screws (12) and remove pump (13).
Fig. 2059
Refitting
Procedure 6
30.7.7 - Power steering pump (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 2059
Fig. 2059
4. Remove screws (5) and remove linkage (6).
Fig. 2059
30-565
5. Loosen clamps (7) and move sleeve (8) towards the rear.
Fig. 2060
6. Remove screws (9) and remove pipe (10).
Fig. 2061
7. Fully loosen union (11).
Fig. 2062
8. Remove screws (12) and remove pump (13).
Fig. 2063
30-566
Refitting
Procedure 8
30.7.8 - Gearbox oil coolers - Version with front PTO

Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 2064
Fig. 2065
4. Remove pipes (5) from cooler (6).
Fig. 2066
5. Remove screws (7) (1 per side) and remove the cooler.
Fig. 2067
30-567
6. Remove unions (8), remove screws (9) (2 per side) and remove hydraulic
oil cooler (10).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2068
Refitting
30.7.9 - Gearbox oil coolers - Version without front PTO
Removal
Fig. 2069
2. Remove unions (3), remove the three screws (4) and the two screws (5)
and remove hydraulic oil cooler (6).
Fig. 2070
Refitting
30.7.10 - Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
30-568
IMPORTANT
Label the cables to avoid confusion on reconnection.
Fig. 2071
3. Disconnect pipes (3) and (4).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2072
4. Loosen clamps (5) and disconnect oil recovery pipes (6).
Fig. 2073
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2074
6. Remove nuts (8) and remove remote control valve assembly (9).
Fig. 2075
30-569
Refitting
30.7.11 - Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 100)
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 2076
Disconnect pipes (3) from support (4).
m Expel any air from the compressed air circuit.
Fig. 2077
m Plug the pipes and ports to prevent the ingress of dirt
Fig. 2078
5. Remove screw (6) and remove clamps (7).
Fig. 2079
30-570
6. Remove unions (8) and remove pipes (9).
Fig. 2080
7. For all versions
Remove screws (10) and remove bracket (11).
Fig. 2081
8. Disconnect delivery pipe (12) from the remote control valve.
Fig. 2082
Fig. 2083
10. Remove screws (14) to free pipe (15).
Fig. 2084
30-571
11. Loosen union (16), remove nut (17) and remove clamp (18).
Fig. 2085
12. Connect remote control valve (19) to a hoist and take up the slack in the
lifting sling.
Fig. 2086
13. Remove remote control valve assembly (19).
Fig. 2087
30-572
Refitting
Procedure 10
30.7.12 - Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 2088
Disconnect pipes (3) from support (4).
IMPORTANT
Expel any air from the compressed air circuit.
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2088

IMPORTANT
Plug the pipes and ports to prevent the ingress of dirt
Fig. 2088
5. Remove screw (6) and remove clamps (7).
Fig. 2088
30-573
6. Remove unions (8) and remove pipes (9).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2088
7. For all versions
Remove screws (10) and remove bracket (11).
Fig. 2088
8. Disconnect oil supply pipe (12) to the control valve.
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2088
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2088
10. Remove screws (14) to free pipe (15).
Fig. 2088
30-574
11. Loosen union (16), remove nut (17) and remove clamp (18).
Fig. 2088
12. Connect remote control valve (19) to a hoist and take up the slack in the
lifting sling.
Fig. 2088
13. Remove remote control valve assembly (19).
Fig. 2088
30-575
Refitting
Procedure 10
30.7.13 - Bleeding the braking circuit (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Brake bleeding procedure
1. DANGER
m Remove the dust cap and attach a length of transparent tubing “A” to the bleed valve; insert the other end of the tubing
in a container to collect the fluid.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal corresponding to the side of the circuit to be bled until you feel significant resistance, at which
point keep pressing the pedal.
3. Slowly open the bleed screw and allow the fluid and air to flow throughout the entire pedal travel.
5. Repeat the previous operations until the fluid flowing from the bleed valve is entirely free of air bubbles.
6. Bleed all the brakes.
m After bleeding, replace the dust caps on the bleed screws.
Bleeding the rear brake circuit

1. Turn knob (1) of “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve (2) to the ON position (hori-
zontal) to enable braking on the rear brakes only.
Disconnect brake pedals (3) by disengaging latch (4).
Fig. 2089
2. Versions without trailer braking or with trailer hydraulic braking sys-
tem:
Bleed the LH rear brake.
Fig. 2090
3. Bleed the RH rear brake.
Fig. 2091
30-576
4. For versions with trailer air braking:
Bleed the pilot circuit of the trailer braking valve.
Fig. 2092
Bleeding the front brake circuit

1. Turn knob (1) of “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve (2) to the OFF position (verti-
cal) to enable braking on all the brakes.
Fig. 2093
2. Bleed the front brakes circuit.
Fig. 2094
30.7.14 - Bleeding the braking circuit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Brake bleeding procedure
1. DANGER
m Remove the dust cap and attach a length of transparent tubing “A” to the bleed valve; insert the other end of the tubing
in a container to collect the fluid.
2. Fully depress the brake pedal corresponding to the side of the circuit to be bled until you feel significant resistance, at which
point keep pressing the pedal.
3. Slowly open the bleed screw and allow the fluid and air to flow throughout the entire pedal travel.
5. Repeat the previous operations until the fluid flowing from the bleed valve is entirely free of air bubbles.
6. Bleed all the brakes.
m After bleeding, replace the dust caps on the bleed screws.
30-577
Bleeding the rear brake circuit
1. Turn knob (1) of “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve (2) to the ON position (hori-
zontal) to enable braking on the rear brakes only.
Disconnect brake pedals (3) by disengaging latch (4).
Fig. 2095
2. Bleed the LH rear brake.
Fig. 2096
3. Bleed the RH rear brake.
Fig. 2097
4. Versions with trailer hydraulic braking:
Fig. 2098
5. For versions with trailer air braking:
Fig. 2099
30-578
Bleeding the front brake circuit
1. Turn knob (1) of “SEPARATE BRAKES” valve (2) to the OFF position (verti-
cal) to enable braking on all the brakes.
Fig. 2100
2. Bleed the front brakes circuit.
Fig. 2101
30.7.15 - Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Loosen unions (1) on both sides and disconnect pipes (2) and all connec-
tors (3).
Fig. 2102
3. Remove unions (4) and (5).
Fig. 2103
30-579
4. Disconnect pipe (6) and remove control lines (7).
Fig. 2104
m Recover the spacers.
Fig. 2105
6. Remove solenoid valve assy (9).
Fig. 2106
30-580
Installation
Procedure 6
O-ring: transmission oil.
Start the engine to allow the oil to circulate, then check for leaks.
30.7.16 - Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Disconnect all wiring connectors (1) from the solenoid valve assembly.
IMPORTANT
Label the connectors to avoid confusion on refitting.
Fig. 2107
3. Loosen unions (2) and disconnect pipes (3).
Fig. 2108
4. Remove union (4) and disconnect pipes (5), (6) and (7).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2109
30-581
5. Remove rear PTO control pipes (7).
Fig. 2110
IMPORTANT
Recover the spacers.
Fig. 2111
7. Remove solenoid valve assembly (9).
IMPORTANT
Recover the spacers installed between the solenoid valve
assembly and the transmission.
Fig. 2112
30-582
Refitting
Procedure 7
l O-ring: transmission oil.
Start the engine and run for a few minutes to allow the coolant to circulate; check
the system for leaks.
Fig. 2113

Removal
1. Loosen unions (1) and (2).
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2114
2. Remove screws (3) and remove solenoid valve group (4).
Fig. 2115
Refitting
procedures:
Procedure 2
l Check the condition of O-rings (5) and renew them if necessary.
Fig. 2116
30-583
Removal
1. Disconnect wiring connectors (1).
IMPORTANT
Label the connectors to avoid confusion on refitting.
Fig. 2117
2. Loosen unions (2) and (3).
Fig. 2118
3. Remove screws (4) and remove solenoid valve assembly (5).
Fig. 2119
Refitting
procedures:
Procedure 3
l Check the condition of the O-rings (6) and renew them if necessary
Fig. 2120
30-584
30.8 - L0 - Electrical system
30.8.1 - Battery - Version without front PTO
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 2121
3. Disconnect battery leads (3).
IMPORTANT
First disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal
(-) and then from the positive terminal (+).
Fig. 2122
4. Remove screws (4), bracket (5) and battery (6).
Fig. 2123
Refitting
30-585
30.8.2 - Alternator
Removal
1. Loosen screws (1) and (2) of the fuel pump bracket in order to slacken off
drivebelt (3).
Fig. 2124
2. Disconnect wires (5) from alternator (4).
Fig. 2125
3. Remove screw (6) and move bracket (7) downwards
Fig. 2126
4. Remove upper and lower screws (8) and remove alternator (4).
Fig. 2127
30-586
Refitting
Procedure 1
l Adjust drivebelt tension.
30.8.3 - Clutch pedal potentiometer

Removal
1. Remove the four nuts (1) and tilt the fusebox (2) to the right.
Fig. 2128
2. Remove nuts (3) and (4) remove cover (5).
IMPORTANT
Recover clutch pedal travel stop pins (6) and clutch pedal
return spring (7).
Fig. 2129
3. Remove tie-rod (8) and disconnect wiring connector (9).
Fig. 2130
4. Remove nuts (10) and remove the potentiometer assembly.
Fig. 2131
30-587
5. Remove screws (11) and remove potentiometer (12).
Fig. 2132
Refitting
procedures:
Procedure 5
lCheck the condition of retaining spring (13) and renew it if damaged.
Calibrate the clutch pedal
Fig. 2133
30.8.4 - Shuttle output speed sensor (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. Remove front cab fixing nut (1) on the right-hand side and recover plate (2).
Fig. 2134
2. Using suitable lifting equipment, apply upward force on the cab.
Fig. 2135
30-588
3. Remove screws (3) securing support (4) of the separate brakes valve.
Fig. 2136
4. Remove screws (5) and nut (6).
IMPORTANT
Remove the stud under nut (6).
Fig. 2137
5. Remove cab support (7).
Fig. 2138
6. Remove screw (8) and remove sensor (9).
Fig. 2139
30-589
Refitting
30.8.5 - Steering column switch (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Removal
1. DANGER
Fig. 2140
Fig. 2141
4. Remove knob (4), remove screws (5) and remove guard (6).
Fig. 2142
5. Remove screws (7) and remove guard (8) and disconnect connector (9).
Fig. 2143
30-590
6. Remove screws (10) and remove steering column switch (11).
Fig. 2144
Refitting
30.8.6 - Steering column switch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal and apply the parking brake.
2. Remove screws (1), knob (2) and remove cover (3).
Fig. 2145
3. Remove screws (4) and remove the cover (5).
Fig. 2146
4. Remove screws (6), disconnect wiring connector (7) and remove steering
column switch unit (8).
Fig. 2147
30-591
Refitting
30.8.7 - Shuttle ECU and forward/reverse selector
Removal
1. DANGER
Disconnect the lead from the battery negative terminal and apply the parking brake.
2. Remove screws (1), knob (2) and remove cover (3).
Fig. 2147
Fig. 2147
4. Remove screws (6), disconnect wiring connector (7) and remove the shut-
tle ECU (8).
Fig. 2148
Refitting
l Carry out the procedure for putting the tractor into service.
30-592
30.9 - M0 - Front PTO
30.9.1 - Front PTO (M0.00.01)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Position a stand “A” in the middle of pivot (1).
Fig. 2149
3. Disconnect wiring connectors (2) from air cleaner clogging sensor (3).
Fig. 2150
4. Loosen clamps (4), (5) and (6) and remove air intake hose (7).
Fig. 2151
5. Remove pipes (8) and (9) from cooler (10).
Fig. 2152
30-593
6. Remove screws (11) (one per side) and remove cooler (10).
Fig. 2153
7. Remove screws (12) and remove filter (13) from support (14).
Fig. 2154
8. Remove screws (15) and remove support assembly (14).
Fig. 2155
9. Remove unions (16) and remove clamps (17) (one per side).
Remove union (18) and move pipe (19) to the side.
Fig. 2156
10. Loosen and remove clamps (20).
Fig. 2157
30-594
11. Remove screw (21), support (22) and batteries (23).
Fig. 2158
12. Using a pin punch, drive out pin (24) and withdraw PTO drive shaft (25)
towards the rear of the tractor.
Fig. 2159
13. Remove screws (26) and remove guard (27).
Fig. 2160
14. Remove screws (28) and remove hitch assembly (29).
Fig. 2161
Fig. 2162
30-595
16. Remove screws (32) on both sides and tilt the cooler towards the rear of
the tractor.
Fig. 2163
17. Attach PTO assembly (33) to a hoist and take up the slack in the lifting
ropes.
Fig. 2164
18. Remove the four fixing screws (34) of assembly (33).
Fig. 2165
19. Slowly lift PTO assembly (33) whilst rotating towards the front.
m Take care not to damage the radiator.
m PTO assembly: 70 kg
Fig. 2166
30-596
Refitting
30.9.2 - PTO assembly.
Fig. 2167 - PTO assembly.

Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and remove cover assy (2).
Fig. 2168
2. Remove screws (3) and remove solenoid valve assy (4).
Fig. 2169
30-597
3. Using a screw as a puller, remove pipes (5).
m Check the condition of O-rings (6) and renew them if necessary.
Fig. 2170
4. Remove nuts (7) and remove cover assy (8).
Fig. 2171
Remove oil seal (9).
m Note which way round oil seal (9) is fitted.
Fig. 2172
6. Remove input shaft (11) retaining screw (10).
m Renew the copper washers on reassembly
Raise oil seal (12).
Fig. 2173
7. Remove input shaft assy (11).
Fig. 2174
30-598
8. Use a pry bar to dislodge shaft (13) complete with outer bearing (14).
Fig. 2175
9. Remove output shaft (15) complete with bearing.
m Use a copper hammer, if necessary.
Fig. 2176
10. Remove gear (17) and bearings (18) and (19).
Fig. 2177
11. Remove pin (20) to free clutch assy (21).
Fig. 2178
12. Remove clutch assy (21) from PTO casing (22).
Fig. 2179
30-599
13. Remove plug (23) and remove mesh filter (24).
Fig. 2180
14. Withdraw pump assy (25).
Fig. 2181
15. Remove circlip (26) and, using a suitable puller, remove bearing (27).
Fig. 2182
16. Remove oil seal (12).
Fig. 2183
17. Position shaft (15) under a press and withdraw the inner race of roller bear-
ing (16).
Fig. 2184
30-600
18. Using a puller, remove bearing (14) from shaft (13).
Check the condition of O-ring (28) and renew it if necessary.
Fig. 2185
Using an internal puller and slide hammer T1 (P/N. 5.9030.618.4/10), dis-
assemble bush (29) from shaft (13).
Fig. 2186
Assembly
1. Only if removed
Lubricate bush (29) and refit it using a suitable driving tool.
m The bush must be inserted approximately 1 mm (0.04 in.) below the
surface of the shaft (13).
Fig. 2187
2. Heat bearing (14) to approximately 80°C (176°F) and install on shaft (13).
m Ensure the bearing is seated fully home.
Fit O-ring (28).
Fig. 2188
3. Heat the inner race of bearing (16) to approximately 80°C (176°F) and fit
it on shaft (15).
m The thrust washer of the inner race must be facing towards the
splined part of the shaft.
Fig. 2189
30-601
4. Lubricate shaft (11) and the lip of oil seal (12).
Oil seal and shaft: temperature sensor
Fit ring (12) on shaft (11) and drive it fully home.
m Note the direction of assembly.
Fig. 2190
5. Heat bearing (27) and install on shaft (11), driving it fully home.
Fit circlip (26).
Fig. 2191
6. Fit pump assy (25).
Fig. 2191
7. Fit clutch assy (21) in PTO casing (22).
Fig. 2191
8. Tighten pin (20) taking care to centre the relevant hole in clutch assy (21).
Fig. 2192
30-602
9. Insert complete input shaft (11), turning it to and fro in both directions in
order to mesh the teeth in the pump and clutch assy.
Fig. 2192
10. Tighten screw (10) ensuring it enters the keyway on shaft (11).
Fig. 2193
11. Fit roller bearing (19) in PTO casing (22).
m The thrust washer of the inner race must be facing the output of the
PTO shaft
Fit ball bearing (18) in PTO casing (22).
Fit gear (17) in PTO casing (22).
Fig. 2194
12. Fit shaft (15), aligning it with gear (17) and bearing (19).
m To fit roller bearing (19), tap lightly with a copper-headed hammer
and rotate shaft (15)
Fig. 2195
13. Fit bearing outer race (16).
m During assembly, tap lightly with a hammer around the entire cir-
cumference.
Fig. 2196
30-603
14. Fit the shaft complete with outer bearing (14).
m To insert, use a copper-headed hammer to tap lightly on the shaft
and around the outer circumference of the bearing.
Fig. 2197
15. Using a suitable drift, install oil seal (9) in cover (8).
m Note the direction of assembly.
Fig. 2198
16. Apply sealant to the mating surfaces and fit cover (8).
m Sealant: Silastic 738
Tighten nuts (7).
m Tighten the screws in an alternate cross-wise sequence.
Fig. 2199
17. Using a suitable drift T2, seat oil seal (12).
Fig. 2200
18. Fit mesh filter (24) on pump suction pipe.
Smear sealant on the threads of plug (23) and tighten.
m Plug: Silastic 738
Fig. 2201
30-604
19. Insert extensions (5) complete with O-rings (6).
Fig. 2201
20. Apply sealant to the mating surfaces of solenoid valve assy (4).
m Surfaces: Loctite 510
Fit solenoid valve (4) and secure it with screws (3).
Fig. 2202
21. Apply sealant to the upper mating surface of PTO housing (22).
m Mating face: Silastic 738
m Check that the sealant forms a continuous film around the holes of
the cover fixing screws.
Fit cover (2) centring the oil delivery and return unions.
Fig. 2203
22. Fit cover (2) and tighten screws (1).
Fig. 2204
23. Fill the PTO with oil.
30-605
30.9.3 - Pump assembly
Fig. 2205 - Pump assembly

Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and remove suction pipe (2).
m Check the condition of the O-rings (3) and (4) and renew them if
necessary.
Fig. 2206
2. Remove screws (5) and remove pump cover (6) from pump body (7).
m Label pump body (7) and cover (6) to avoid confusion on reassem-
bly.
Fig. 2207
30-606
3. Remove gears (8) and (9) from pump body (7).
Fig. 2208
Assembly
Procedure 3
l Lubricate pump body (7) and gears (8) and (9).
Gears lubrication: oil
30.9.4 - Clutch-brake assembly
Fig. 2209 - Clutch-brake assembly
30-607
Disassembly
1. Remove circlip (1) and remove steel plates (2) and (3).
Fig. 2210
2. Remove friction plates (4) and steel plates (5).
Fig. 2211
3. Remove hub (6) and spacer (7).
Fig. 2212
4. Using a puller (or a press) and U frame “A”, compress spring (8) and re-
move circlip (9).
Fig. 2213
5. Release spring (8) and remove in sequence spring guide ring (10) and
spring (8).
Fig. 2214
30-608
6. Blow compressed air at low pressure through the upper hole in the direc-
tional control valve body to expel piston (11).
damaged.
Fig. 2215
7. Remove piston (11) and O-ring (12).
Fig. 2216
8. Turn the unit over, remove screws (13) and remove cover (14).
Fig. 2217
9. Remove brake disc (16) and steel plate (17) from clutch assembly (15).
Fig. 2218
10. Blow compressed air at low pressure into clutch assembly (15) to disen-
gage brake piston (18).
m Restrain the piston as it could be expelled at high speed and thus
damaged.
Fig. 2219
30-609
11. Withdraw piston (18).
Fig. 2220
12. Check the condition of the O-rings (19) and (20) and renew them if neces-
sary.
Fig. 2221
Fig. 2222
14. Remove clutch assembly (15) and remove retaining rings (24) from clutch
housing (23).
Fig. 2223
15. Using a suitable wrench T3, remove damper assembly (25).
Fig. 2224
30-610
16. Compress the spring assembly of damper (25) and remove circlip (26).
Fig. 2225
17. Release the assembly and remove disc (28), spring (29) and piston (30)
complete with O-ring (31) from cylinder (27).
Fig. 2226
18. Remove plug (32) and remove spring (33) and push rod (34) from clutch
housing (15).
Fig. 2227
19. Remove O-ring (35) from clutch piston (11).
Fig. 2228
30-611
Assembly
Procedure 17
l Lubricate piston (29) with oil.
Procedure 16
l Damper assembly (24): Loctite 242
Procedure 14
l Lubricate retaining rings (23) with oil.
Procedure 9
l Lubricate O-rings (19) and (20) and piston (18) with oil.
Procedure 8
l Lubricate brake disc (16) with oil
Procedure 7
l Lubricate O-ring (12) and piston (11) with oil.
Procedure 3
l Grease spacer (7) and install it on hub (6).
Fig. 2229
Procedure 2
l Fit steel plates (5) and friction plates (4) in housing (15) starting with a steel
plate (5).
Lubricate friction plates (4) with oil.
Fig. 2230
30.9.5 - Solenoid valve assembly

Disassembly
1. Remove retaining nut (1) and remove solenoid valve (2).
m Recover the O-rings.
Fig. 2231
30-612
2. Loosen solenoid valve stem (3) and remove it.
Fig. 2232
Assembly
Procedure 2
l Valve stem: 15 to 20 Nm (11.06-14.74 lb.ft.)
Valve stem: oil
Procedure 1
l Nut: 5 to 8 Nm (3.69-5.90 lb.ft.)
30-613
30.10 - N0 - Front lift
30.10.1 - Front lift
Removal of lift cylinders
1. DANGER
Remove any implement or ballast from the front lift and raise the link arms completely.
DANGER
2. Position a stand “A” in the middle of pivot (1).
Fig. 2232
3. Remove screw (2) and pin (3).
m If both cylinders are to be removed, repeat the above steps also on
the cylinder on the other side.
Fig. 2233
4. Start the engine and run at idle speed and retract cylinder (4).
mPull the lever very slowly and retract the cylinder without reaching
the end of its stroke.
m Switch off the engine, remove the key from the ignition and close the
lift control valves.

Recover spacers (5).
Fig. 2234
Fig. 2235
30-614
6. Remove unions (8) and (9).
Fig. 2236
7. Remove circlip (10) and extract pin (11).
m Support cylinder (4).
Fig. 2237
8. Recover seals (12) and remove the cylinder.
Fig. 2238
30-615
Installation
30.10.2 - Disassembly of front lift cylinders
Fig. 2239 - Lift cylinders

Disassembly
Fig. 2240
2. Using a suitable tool, partially retract end cap (2) and remove circlip (3).
Fig. 2241
3. Withdraw rod (5) complete with end cap (2) and circlips (1) and (3) and
piston (6) from cylinder (4).
Fig. 2242
30-616
4. Remove nut (7) and remove piston assembly (6).
Fig. 2243
5. Withdraw end cap (2) and circlips (1) and (3) from rod (5).
Fig. 2244
6. Remove guide rings (8), oil seal (9a) and O-ring (9b) from piston (6).
Fig. 2245
7. Remove rod wiper (10), seal (11) and O-ring (12) from end cap (2).
m Note which way round seal (11) is installed.
Fig. 2246
30-617
Assembly
Procedure 6
l Fit a suitable installation guide on piston (6) and fit piston O-ring (9b) by
hand.
Fit oil seal (9a) on the installation guide.
Fig. 2247
l Using a suitable installer, drive oil seal (9a) into its seat.
Fig. 2248
l Using a gauge and suitable support, calibrate the seal (9a) passing the
gauge over the entire length of piston (6).
Fig. 2249
Procedure 4
l Nut: 200±10 Nm (147.4±7.4 lb.ft.)
30-618
30.11 - R0 - Rear lift
30.11.1 - Lift - Complete assembly (R0.02.03) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
See para. 30.7.10 - Rear remote control va... - page 30-568 - (H0.07.01)
Removal
1. Remove screws (1) and remove pins (2) on both sides.
Fig. 2250
2. Remove split pin (3) and remove pivot pins (4) on both sides.
m Fit new split pins every time you disassemble the unit.
Fig. 2251
3. Disconnect pipe (5) at both ends.
Fig. 2252
4. Remove screws (6) and remove pipe (7).
Fig. 2253
30-619
5. Remove circlips (8) and disconnect lift control linkages (9).
Fig. 2254
6. Remove oil filler cap (10) to enable oil contained in the lift cover to drain.
Fig. 2255
7. Remove the four screws (11) and the two rear nuts (12).
Fig. 2256
8. Remove the three screws (13) and the two front nuts (14).
Fig. 2257
9. Remove nuts (15).
Fig. 2258
30-620
10. Attach lift (20) to a suitable hoist and remove it.
Fig. 2259
11. Remove partition plate (21).
Fig. 2260
Refitting
Procedures 10-11
Fig. 2261
Procedures 7-8-9
l Nuts: 78±4 Nm (57.5±3 lb.ft.)
l Screws: 70±3.5 Nm (51.6±2.6 lb.ft.)
30.11.2 - Lift - Complete assembly (R0.02.03) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
See para. 30.7.10 - Rear remote control va... - page 30-568 - (H0.07.01)
Removal
1. Remove screw (1) and remove pins (2) on both sides.
Fig. 2262
30-621
2. For versions with auxiliary lifting cylinders
Remove split pin (3) and remove pivot pins (4).
IMPORTANT
Fit new split pins every time you disassemble the unit.
Fig. 2263
3. Disconnect pipe (5) at both ends.
IMPORTANT
Fig. 2264
4. For all versions
Disconnect tie rods (6) and (7) from the lift levers.
Fig. 2265
5. Remove unions (8) and remove pipe (9).
IMPORTANT
Remove nuts (10) and remove top link mounting (11).
Fig. 2266
6. Remove screws (12) and disconnect support (13).
Fig. 2267
30-622
7. Remove screw (14) and the two nuts (15) on the right-hand side.
Fig. 2268
8. Remove the two screws (16) and nut (17).
Fig. 2269
9. Remove screw (18) and nut (19).
Fig. 2270
10. Remove nuts (20) on the left-hand side.
Fig. 2271
11. Attach lift assembly (21) to a hoist and remove it from the tractor.
Fig. 2272
30-623
Refitting
Procedure 11
Fig. 2273
Procedures 7-8-9-10
l Nuts: 78±4 Nm (57.5±3.0 lb.ft.)
l Screws: 70±3.5 Nm (51.6±2.6 lb.ft.)
Procedure 6
l Nuts: 111±5.5 Nm (81.8±4.0 lb.ft.)
30.11.3 - Disassembly of the lift - complete assembly (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. Remove the lift and place on a workbench.
2. Remove circlips (1) on both sides.
Fig. 2274
3. Remove lift arms (2) on both sides.
Fig. 2275
4. Remove screws (3) and remove lift control valve (4).
Fig. 2276
30-624
5. Remove screws (5) and remove control valve support (6).
Fig. 2277
6. Turn the lift unit over, remove pin (7) and detach springs (8) and (9).
m Take care when detaching spring (8) as it is highly tensioned.
Withdraw rod (10).
Fig. 2278
m Label cam (13) and shaft (14) to facilitate subsequent reassembly.
Fig. 2279
8. Remove oil seal (15) on one of the two sides.
Only if necessary, remove also the oil seal on the other side.
Fig. 2280
9. Withdraw shaft (14) and remove cam (13).
Fig. 2281
30-625
10. Remove screws (16) and nuts (17) and remove all levers (18).
m Label the levers to avoid confusion on reassembly.
Fig. 2282
11. Remove all keys (19).
Fig. 2283
12. Remove lever (20) complete with spring (9).
Fig. 2284
13. Remove lever (21).
Fig. 2285
14. Remove lever (22).
Fig. 2286
30-626
15. Only if necessary: Remove O-rings (23).
Fig. 2287
Assembly
Procedure 15
l Oil seal: Transmission oil
Procedure 12
l Check that lever (20) is positioned behind the protrusion in the lift assembly.
Fig. 2288
Procedure 11
l If levers (20), (21) and (22) are fitted correctly, all machine keys (19) will be
oriented in the same direction.
Fig. 2288
Procedure 8
l Oil seal: Transmission oil
Install the oil seal so that it is fully seated in its housing.
Fig. 2289
Procedure 5
Procedure 4
30-627
30.11.4 - Disassembly of the lift- complete assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 ->
5001)
Disassembly
1. Remove all screws (1) and remove bracket (2) and cover (3).
Fig. 2290
2. Remove circlips (4) on both sides.
Fig. 2291
3. Remove lift arms (5) and spacers (6) on both sides.
Fig. 2292
4. Remove circlips (7) and (8) and remove tie-rods (9) and (10).
Fig. 2293
30-628
Fig. 2294
6. Loosen nut (13) and remove grub screw (14) securing cam (15).
Fig. 2295
7. Remove oil seal (16) on one side and withdraw shaft (17).
Fig. 2296
8. Remove lever (18) complete with connecting rod (19) and cam (20).
Fig. 2297
Drive out spring pin (21) and separate connecting rod (19) from lever (18).
Fig. 2298
30-629
10. Remove circlips (22) and (23) and remove tie-rods (24) and (25).
m Label the tie-rods to avoid confusion on reassembly.
Fig. 2299
11. Remove brake cylinder assembly (26).
Fig. 2300
12. Remove the two screws (27).
Fig. 2301
13. Remove lift control valve assembly (28).
Fig. 2302
Renew bushes (29).
Fig. 2303
30-630
Assembly
Procedure 13
l Check the condition of the O-rings (30) and renew them if necessary.
Each time the lift control valve is removed from the tractor adjust the control
levers.
Fig. 2304
Procedure 9
l Grease the seating of connecting rod ball joint (19).
Procedures 7-14
l Grease bushes (17) and shaft (29).
Procedure 6
l Grub screw: Loctite 242
Screw grub screw (14) fully into its hole in the shaft and, while holding the
grub screw in position, tighten nut (13).
Fig. 2305
Procedure 5
l Grub screw: Loctite 242
Screw grub screw (12) fully into its hole in the shaft, then back it off by half
a turn. Hold the grub screw in position and secure with nut (11).
Fig. 2305
Procedure 1
Fig. 2306
30-631
30.11.5 - Lift cylinder (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. Remove screws (1) and withdraw cylinder assembly (2).
Fig. 2307
2. Using a low pressure compressed air jet (max. 2.5 bar), blow piston (3) out
of cylinder (4).
Fig. 2308
3. Remove seal (5) from piston (3).
m Note which way round seal (5) is installed.
Fig. 2309
Assembly
Procedure 3
l Fit seal (5), making sure that is positioned the right way round relative to
piston (3).
Fig. 2309
30-632
Procedure 1
l Check the condition of O-rings (6) and (7) and renew them if necessary.
Fig. 2310
30.11.6 - Bushes (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)

Renewal
1. Position the lift cover under a press and, using a suitable tool, remove
bushes (1).
Fig. 2311
2. Install new bushes (1) making sure that they are inserted flush with the
bores in the lift housing.
Fig. 2312
3.
Install bushes (1) with the split oriented towards the top of
the lift housing.
Fig. 2313
30.11.7 - Auxiliary lift cylinders

Removal
1. Fully lower the rear lift, disconnect the lead from the negative terminal of the battery and apply the parking brake.
30-633
2. Remove split pin (1).
IMPORTANT
Fit new split pins on reassembly.
Fig. 2314
3. Remove pin (2) and recover spacer (3).
Fig. 2315
Fig. 2316
5. Remove split pin (5) and spacer (6).
IMPORTANT
Always renew the split pin on reassembly
Fig. 2317
6. Remove cylinder (7).
Fig. 2318
30-634
Refitting
30.11.8 - Hydraulic lift control valve
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Disconnect the two pipes (1) and pipe (2).

Fig. 2319
3. Remove screws (3) and remove control valve (4) and bracket (5).
Fig. 2320
Refitting
Procedure 3
30.11.9 - Disassembly of the lift control valve (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. Remove split pin (1), pivot pin (2) and lever (3).
3
2
2
1
F0107770
Fig. 2321
30-635
2. Loosen screws (4) and remove support (5).
5
6
4
F0107780
Fig. 2322
3. Loosen screws (7) without removing them and turn control valve (8) over so
that the aluminium body is facing downwards. 9
Remove screws (7) and separate control valve bodies (8) and (9).
8
F0107790
Fig. 2323
4. Remove spring (10) and spacer (11).
10
11
F0107800
Fig. 2324
5. Remove piston (12).
12
13
F0107810
Fig. 2325
6. Remove spring (14) and rod (15).
14
15
F0107820
Fig. 2326
30-636
7. Remove piston (16) and spring (17) from control valve body (8).
16
17
F0107830
Fig. 2327
8. Remove spring (18) and valve (19) from control valve body (8).
18
8
19
F0107840
Fig. 2328
9. Drive out spring pin (20) and withdraw spool (21).
21
20
F0107850
Fig. 2329
10. Remove plug (22) and remove valve (23).
Fig. 2330
11. Remove plug (24) and withdraw spring (25) and valve (26).
Fig. 2331
30-637
27
27
F0107860
Fig. 2332
13. Withdraw piston (28).
28
F0107870
Fig. 2333
14. Remove union (29) and remove valve (30), pin (31) and spring (32) from
control valve body (9). 9
32
m Renew the copper washers on reassembly. 31
29 30
F0107880
Fig. 2334
15. Remove valve (33).
Fig. 2335
30-638
Assembly
Procedure 14
l Check that valve (30) is installed the right way round.
Check that valve (30) slides freely in its seat.
Pipe union: Loctite 542
Fig. 2336
Procedure 13
l Check that piston (28) is installed the right way round.
Fig. 2337
Procedure 11
l Hold ball “A” contained in valve (26) seated against rod (15), and check that
rod (15) protrusion relative to the face of body (11) is within the specified
limits (X = 15.8±0.05 mm).
Plug: Loctite 542
Fig. 2338
Procedure 10
l Check that valve (23) slides freely.
Plug: Loctite 542
Fig. 2339
30-639
Procedure 9
l Check that spool (21) slides freely.
Fig. 2340
Procedure 7
l Check that piston (16) slides freely.
Fig. 2341
Procedure 6
l Check that rod (15) is installed the right way round.
Fig. 2342
Procedure 3
l While tightening screws (7), check that spool (21) slides freely without stick-
ing. 21
F0107890
Fig. 2343
30-640
30.11.10 - Disassembly of the lift control valve (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Disassembly
1. Remove spring (1).
Fig. 2344
2. Remove split pin (2) and remove pivot pin (3) and roller (4).
m Renew the split pin every time it is disturbed.
Fig. 2345
3. Remove circlip (5), remove pin (6) and remove control levers assembly (7).
Fig. 2346
4. Remove the three screws (8) and remove lever support (9).
Fig. 2347
5. Loosen screw (10) without removing it and turn remote control valve as-
sembly (11) over so that the aluminium body is facing downwards.
Remove screw (10) and separate remote control valve bodies (11) and
(12).
Fig. 2348
30-641
6. Remove spring (13).
Fig. 2349
7. Remove spring (14) and rod (15).
Fig. 2350
8. Remove piston (16) and spring (17) from remote control valve body (11).
Fig. 2351
9. Remove spring (18) and spacer (19) from remote control valve body (11).
Fig. 2352
10. Drive out spring pin (20) and withdraw spool (21).
Fig. 2353
30-642
11. Remove plug (22) and remove valve (23).
Fig. 2354
12. Remove plug (24) and withdraw spring (25) and valve (26).
Fig. 2355
13. Remove O-rings (27) and withdraw piston (28).
Fig. 2356
14. Remove union (29) and remove valve (30), pin (31) and spring (32) from
remote control valve body (12).
Fig. 2357
15. Remove valve (33).
Fig. 2358
30-643
Assembly
Procedure 14
l Check that valve (30) is installed the right way round.
Check that valve (30) slides freely in its seat.
Pipe union: Loctite 542
Fig. 2359
Procedure 13
l Check that piston (28) is installed the right way round.
Fig. 2360
Procedure 12
l Hold ball “A” contained in valve (26) seated against rod (15), and check that
rod (15) protrusion relative to the face of body (11) is within the specified
limits (X = 15.8±0.05 mm).
Plug: Loctite 542
Fig. 2361
Procedure 11
l Check that valve (23) slides freely.
Plug: Loctite 542
Fig. 2362
30-644
Procedure 10
l Check that spool (21) slides freely.
Fig. 2363
Procedure 8
l Check that piston (16) slides freely.
Fig. 2364
Procedure 7
l Check that rod (15) is installed the right way round.
Fig. 2365
Procedure 5
l While tightening screw (10), check that spool (21) slides freely without
sticking.
Fig. 2366
Procedure 2
l Take care to position roller (34) on the top of spool (21).
Fig. 2367
30-645
30.11.11 - Mechanical draft sensor (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
m Renew split pin (1) on reassembly.
Fig. 2368
2. Remove screw (3), loosen screw (4) and remove draft sensor assembly (5).
Fig. 2369
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Nuts: 72±7 Nm (53.1±5.2 lb.ft.)
30.11.12 - Mechanical draft sensor disassembly (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 2370 - Mechanical draft sensor
30-646
Disassembly
1. Remove screw (1) and the relative nut and remove plug (2).
Fig. 2371
2. Remove nut (3) and locknut (4).
Fig. 2372
3. Remove spacer (5) and spring (6).
Fig. 2373
4. Remove washer (7), spacer (8) and spring (9).
Fig. 2374
5. Remove washer (10), spacer (11) and tie-rod (12) from sensor body (13).
Fig. 2375
30-647
Assembly
Procedure 3
l Liberally grease springs (6) and (9) and insert them in sensor body (13).
Procedure 2
l Screw in nut (3) to take up the play in springs (6) and (9) but without preloading them, then immobilise it with locknut.
30.11.13 - Mechanical draft sensor (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Removal
m Renew split pin (1) on reassembly.
Fig. 2376
2. Remove nuts (3) and remove draft sensor assembly (4).
Fig. 2377
Refitting
Procedure 2
l Nuts: 72±7 Nm (53.1±5.2 lb.ft.)
30-648
30.11.14 - Mechanical draft sensor disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Fig. 2378 - Mechanical draft sensor

Disassembly
1. Remove screw (1) and the relative nut and remove plug (2).
Fig. 2379
2. Remove fork (3) and remove spring assembly (4) from sensor body (5).
Fig. 2380
3. Remove nut (6), and remove spacer (7) and disc (8).
Fig. 2381
30-649
4. Remove spring (9), spacer (10) and washer (11).
Fig. 2382
5. Remove spring (12) and spacer (13) from tie-rod (14).
Fig. 2383
Assembly
Procedure 3
l Screw in nut (6) to take up the play in springs (9) and (12) but without preloading them.
Procedure 2
l Liberally grease spring assembly (4) and insert it in sensor body (5).
30.11.15 - 3-point linkage

Removal
1. DANGER
2. Remove screw (1) and pin (2).
Fig. 2384
30-650
3. Remove split pin (3) and remove pin (4) and washer (5).
Fig. 2385
4. Remove split pin (6), nut (7) and washer (8).
Remove 3-point linkage assembly (9).
Fig. 2386
5. Recover spacer (10).
Fig. 2387
30-651
Refitting
Procedure 5
l Note which way round spacer (10) is installed.
Fig. 2388
Procedure 4
l Tighten nut (7) to the prescribed torque and, if necessary, tighten further to align the slots in nut (7) with the hole in the pin.
Nut: 150 Nm (110.5 lb.ft.)
30-652
30.12 - S0 - Wheels
30.12.1 - Front wheels (S0.01.01)
REMOVAL
1. DANGER
2. Raise the tractor and position two stands “A” under the front axle.
m Drive safety wedges “B” between the axle and the front support.
Fig. 2389
3. Remove all the screws (1) except one for safety.
Remove the last screw and remove wheel (2).
Fig. 2390
4. Repeat the above operations for the other wheel.
Installation
Procedure 3
l Screws: 350 Nm (258 lb.ft.)
30.12.2 - Rear wheels (S0.02.01)

Removal
1. Position a jack “A” under the rear gearbox casing.
m Position a jack “A” under the rear gearbox casing.
Raise the tractor sufficiently to eliminate the flexure of the tyre wall.
Fig. 2391
30-653
2. Remove all the nuts (1) and remove wheel (2).
Fig. 2392
3. Position a stand “B” under the rear axle housing and lower the jack until the
axle housing is resting on the stand.
Check that the stand is in exactly the correct position and then remove the
trolley jack.
Fig. 2393
4. Repeat the above operations to remove the other wheel.
Installation
Procedure 2
l Nuts: 500 Nm (368.5 lb.ft)
30-654
30.13 - V0 - Ballast - towing hitches
30.13.1 - Towing hitch slide (V0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Removal
1. DANGER
2. Withdraw pins (1) and remove towing hitch (2).
Fig. 2394
3. Remove screws (3) and (4) and remove guard (5) and brackets (6)
Fig. 2395
Installation
Procedure 3
l Screws: 186±18 Nm
30.13.2 - Towing hitch slide (V0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)
Removal
1. Remove all the screws (1) except two.
Fig. 2395
30-655
2. Sling towing hitch (2) to hoist and take up the slack in lifting ropes.
Remove the last two screws (1) and remove the towing hitch assembly.
Fig. 2395
Installation
Procedure 1
l Screws: 186.4±18 Nm (137.4±13.3 lb.ft.)
30-656
40 - Wiring diagrams
40-1
Wiring diagrams
40.1 - Introduction
40.1.1 - Structure of the unit
For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:
l introduction
m Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for troubleshooting and repairs, and the
instruments required for troubleshooting.

l Indices
m Contains the indices arranged by connector name, by component code and by component description.
l Components
m Contains the layouts of the connectors used in the electrical system, descriptions of the components installed on the
tractor,the technical data necessary for functional testing and the pinouts of the electronic control units.
l Systems
m Contains the electrical diagrams of the tractor’s systems.
l Wiring looms
m Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positioning of connectors on the tractor.
How to consult the unit
Fig. 2396
How to consult the table
The quickest way to determine the cause of a malfunction of a component (e.g. the starter motor) is to check all the components in
the system in which the component is incorporated. In this example, the problem is a malfunction of the starter motor, which fails to
start the engine.
l Find the starter motor in heading “Index by part description” and identify the system in which the component is incorporated.
The system is indicated in the “System” column and in this case is “2” (figure A).
40-2
Wiring diagrams
l Consult heading “Starting” (figure B), where all system components are shown in the electrical diagram; these components
are accompanied by numbers that correspond to the key on the same page.
l Check all the components in the system, starting for example with switch “1”.
l In heading “Index by part description” (figure A) find the item “Start switch” and check in the column “Technical Descr’n” to see
if there is a technical description of the component (in this case it appears at no. 42 in the heading “component technical data”)
(figure C). Take note also of the name of the connector to which the component is connected (in this case “X4”).
Only if the position of the component is not known
Only if the position of the component is not known:
l In heading “Connector index” (figure D) find the name of the connector to which the component is connected (in this case
“X4”) and note down the wiring loom in which it is incorporated (in this case “0.012.5957.4”) and the type of connector (in this
case “19”).
l Find the wiring loom in chapter “Plans, wiring diagrams, connector positions” using the index at the beginning of the chapter.
l Find the name of the connector in the photos attached to the electrical diagrams and establish its position on the tractor using
the drawing (figure E)
l Using the data contained in the paragraph “Component technical data” (figure C) in position no. 42, check the operation of
the switch.
DANGER
In the electrical diagrams (figure F) are indicated the names of the connectors and the descriptions that are used in
all the tables of chapter 2.
DANGER
If the pinout of the connector is not known, look in paragraph “Connector layouts” (figure G) for the number found in
the column “Type” of paragraph “Connector index”.
introduction
This section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to troubleshooting the tractor’s electrical and electronic systems.
The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information regarding the tractor’s systems and components. Due
to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in line with our policy of continuous product im-
provement) and the corresponding amendment of our printed documentation, we are obliged to state that the data contained in this
document are subject to modification and as such are not binding.
Definition of components and symbols
To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, listed below are definitions for some of the key terms used in this unit.
Table 32
TERM DESCRIPTION
Connector Element used to connect two components (e.g. wiring-switch, wiring-wiring)
Transmission oil Electrical component that converts the temperature of a medium (air, water, oil, etc.) into a voltage
or resistance
Main clutch Electrical component that converts the pressure of a medium (air, water, etc.) into a voltage or
resistance
Accelerator pedal Electrical component that converts the angular or linear position of an object into a voltage
Pressure switch Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the operating pressure in the
circuit in which it is installed
Thermostat Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the temperature of the medium
in which it is immersed.
Lights switch Mechanical component that opens or closes one or more electrical contacts.
HML control Valve operated by applying electrical current to a coil (or solenoid)
Chapter “Components” shows the wiring diagrams for certain switches and buttons. The following symbols are used for ease of
interpretation:
Table 33
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Contact between pins CLOSED (stable switch position)
40-3
Wiring diagrams
SYMBOL DESCRIPTION
Contact between pins CLOSED (unstable switch position)
Indicator LED
Indicator lamp
Diode
General rules
The inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair operations are essential to ensure that the tractor continues to operate
correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions and breakdowns. The scope of this paragraph is to describe repair procedures and
to help improve the quality of repairs.
Modification of the tractor’s electrical/electronic circuits
The manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for the connection of any non-approved electrical
applicances or components. In particular, if it is discovered that the electrical system or a component has been modified without au-
thorisation, the Manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicle and the vehicle warranty will be invalidated.
Main wiring faults
Bad contact between connectors
l The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the male into the female connector, deforma-
tion of one or both connectiors, and corrosion or oxidisation of the pin contact surfaces.
Defective pin soldering or crimping
l The pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or soldered area, but the wires are subjected
to excessive tension, leading to breakage of the insulation or the wire itself and a poor connection.
Disconnecting wiring
l If components are disconnected by pulling on the wires, or if components are removed with the wires still connected, or if the
wiring is subject to a heavy impact this could damage the connections at the pins, breaking strands of wire.
Penetration of water inside connectors
l The connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however, it is possible that when the tractor is
cleaned using high-pressure water or steam, water could penetrate or condense in the connectors. As the connectors
are designed to prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get in will not be able to drain out, and thus may cause short-
circuits across the pins. For this reason it is good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet of compressed air after
washing the tractor.
Oil or dirt on connectors
l If the connectors or pin contact surfaces show signs of oil or grease contamination, this will prevent the passage of current
(oil and grease are electrical insulators) creating a poor contact. Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low
pressure jet of compressed air and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degrease the contacts.
Important
Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them. Use dry oil-free compressed air.
Removal, refitting and drying of connectors and wiring

When disconnecting wiring, pull on the connectors rather than on the wires themselves. For connectors that are held in position
with screws or levers, fully loosen the screws, then pull on the connector. For connectors that are clipped together, fully depress the
40-4
Wiring diagrams
clip then pull the connector apart. After disconnecting connectors, seal them in waterproof material to prevent contamination of the
contacts with dirt or moisture.
Connecting the connectors. Check the condition of the connectors:
l Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil.
l Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded or oxidised.
l Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split.
l If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the casing, clean it thoroughly.
l If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one.
When connecting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying force. For connectors with clips, insert the two
halves until they clip together.
Cleaning and drying wiring
l When wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, if necessary, with water or steam. If the
wiring must be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on the connectors; if water penetrates the connector,
clean it thoroughly.
l Check that the connector is not short circuited due to the presence of water by testing for continuity across the pins.
l After checking that the connector is good condition, degrease the contacts using a deoxidising product.
Renewal of damaged electrical components.
l When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts supplied by the manufacturer.
l When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 or ISO 8820 standards and in particular:
m fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2
m bayonet fuse (F2, F3, etc.) DIN 72581/3C
m fuse F51 (100A) and F52 (200A) ISO 8820.
l The fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards will invalidate the warranty with immediate effect and
release the manufacturer from any liability.
l When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standards marked on the original relay.
Diagnostic instruments
For the correct diagnosis of any faults in the tractor’s electrical system, the following instruments are required:
l Digital multimeter with the following minimum characteristics:
m AC VOLT 0-600
m DC VOLT 0-600
m OHM 0-32M
m AC AMP 0-10
m DC AMP 0-10
l All Round Tester or computer with “PCTESTER” software installed

Wire colour codes
Table 34
COLOUR CODES
A Light blue
B White
C Orange
G Yellow
H Grey
L Dark blue
M Brown
N black
R Red
S Pink
V green
Z Purple
40-5
Wiring diagrams
40.1.2 - Wiring and components index (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
List of wiring harnesses
Table 35
Description Code Wiring diagram Connector posi-
tions
Front Wiring loom 0.014.8107.4/20 40-119 40-120
Engine wiring (version with front battery) 0.014.8629.4/20 40-122 40-123
Engine wiring (version with lateral battery) 0.015.1597.4/10 40-128 40-130
Battery wiring 0.014.8806.4/20 40-135 40-135
Preheating wiring 0.014.9195.4/20 40-141 40-142
Power supply wiring 0.015.1983.4/10 40-146 40-147
Instrument panel wiring 0.014.8628.4/20 40-149 40-153
Cab power supply wiring (version with standard cab) 0.014.9375.4/20 40-182 40-183
Cab power supply wiring (version with high-visibility cab) 0.014.9376.4/10 40-202 40-203
RH drivetrain wiring 0.014.8630.4/20 40-166 40-167
LH drivetrain wiring 0.014.9193.4/20 40-171 40-172
Trailer hydraulic braking wiring 0.014.1645.4/10 40-273 40-274
Roof wiring (version with standard cab) 0.009.7850.4/50 40-185 40-187
Roof wiring (version with high-visibility cab) 0.011.3606.4/50 40-207 40-208
Heating wiring (version with standard cab) 0.010.2147.2 40-192 40-192
Heating wiring (version with high-visibility cab) 0.010.2554.2 40-213 40-214
Air conditioning wiring (version with standard cab) 0.010.2153.2 40-194 40-195
Air conditioning wiring (version with high-visibility cab) 0.010.2560.0 40-217 40-219
Air conditioning condenser fan wiring (version with standard cab) 0.009.7853.3/20 40-197 40-199
Air conditioning condenser fan wiring (version with high-visibility 0.011.3610.3/20 40-223 40-223
cab)
Work lights wiring (version with standard cab) 0.009.7851.4/50 40-227 40-228
Work lights wiring (version with high-visibility cab) 0.011.3595.3/10 40-242 40-244
Front lights wiring (version with cab) 0.010.8189.3/40 40-259 40-260
Wiring for lower front lights (version with cab) 0441.1923.4 40-261 40-262
Supplementary work lights wiring (version with standard cab) 0.015.1435.4/10 40-231 40-233
Supplementary work lights wiring (version with high-visibility cab) 0.015.1437.4/10 40-247 40-249
Front lights wiring (version with platform) 0.015.3094.4 40-265 40-265
Work lights wiring (version with platform) 0.014.9281.4 40-267 40-267
Loudspeaker, radio, rear wiper, flashing light and clock wiring 0.011.3596.3/40 40-254 40-254
(version with high-visibility cab)
Rotating beacon wiring 0.012.9909.4 40-269 40-269
Windscreen wiper wiring (version with standard cab) 0.010.4516.3 40-233 40-234
Loudspeaker wiring (version with standard cab) 0.011.0729.4/10 40-238 40-239
Windscreen wiper wiring (version with high-visibility cab) 0.011.3597.3 40-250 40-251
Index by part description
Table 36
Component description Component code Connector System Notes
Cigar lighter 2.7099.770.0 X53 40-72
40-76
Alternator 0118.2173 B+ D+ W 40-64
RH loudspeaker 0.011.5631.3 X84-X92 40-72
40-76
LH loudspeaker 0.011.5631.3 X86-X91 40-72
40-76
Radio X72-X87-X88- 40-72
X90 40-76
Horn 2.8419.007.0 X28 40-67
40-69
Battery +30 +30A
+30B
Hazard lights control unit 2.8639.007.0/10 X61 40-67
40-69
P.T.O. ECU 2.8519.057.0/10 ECU P.T.O. 40-110
40-6
Wiring diagrams
Blower speed selector switch 0.009.4743.1 X102 40-95
40-100
Blower speed selector switch 0.010.2528.1 X95 40-97
40-103
Air conditioning compressor 0443.7338 X9 40-100
40-103
Air conditioning compressor 0443.7338 X9 40-100
40-103
Pneumatic seat compressor 0.014.3061.4/20 X37 40-72
40-76
Instrument panel 2.8339.248.0/40 3K-5K 40-64
40-67
40-69
40-72
40-76
40-79
40-113
40-106
40-110
40-116
Lights selector switch 0.015.0359.4 X112 40-67
40-69
Engine stop device 0419.9904 X7 40-64
Overboost device X6 40-64
Preheating device 0425.8670 X113 40-64
Differential lock control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 X22 40-106
4WD control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 X20 40-106
H/L gear control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 X24 40-106
Front P.T.O. solenoid valve 2.3729.400.0/10 X3 40-110
Rear P.T.O. control solenoid valve 2.3729.250.0/50 X21 40-110
Electric fan 0.010.2121.1 X100 40-95
40-100
RH electric fan 0.011.2047.4 X99 40-97
40-103
LH electric fan 0.011.2047.4 X98 40-97
40-103
Front RH sidelight and direction indicator 2.8019.970.0 X127 40-69 With platform
Front LH sidelight and direction indicator 2.8019.960.0 X126 40-69 With platform
RH front work light (on cab roof) 2.8029.730.0 X76 40-82 With standard
cab
2.8039.299.0 X76 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
LH front work light (on cab roof) 2.8029.730.0 X77 40-82 With standard
cab
2.8039.299.0 X77 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
RH rear work light (on cab roof) 2.8029.730.0 X79 40-82 With standard
cab
2.8039.299.0 X79 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
LH rear work light (on cab roof) 2.8029.730.0 X78 40-82 With standard
cab
2.8039.299.0 X78 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
Front RH sidelight and direction indicator 0441.1921.4 X74 40-67 With cab
Front LH sidelight and direction indicator 0441.1920.4 X75 40-67 With cab
RH rear light 2.8059.090.0 X45 40-67
40-69
40-113
40-7
Wiring diagrams
LH rear light 2.8059.080.0 X40 40-67
40-69
40-113
Work light 2.8029.730.0 X123-X125 40-82
40-86
RH front work light 2.8039.003.0 X25 40-82
40-86
LH front work light 2.8039.003.0 X31 40-82
40-86
RH supplementary work light 2.8029.730.0 X132 40-82 With standard
40-86 cab
2.8039.299.0 X132 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
LH supplementary work light 2.8029.730.0 X133 40-82 With standard
cab
2.8039.299.0 X133 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
Trailer pressure indicator 0.011.9433.0 X57 40-113
Starter switch 0441.1512.4 X54 40-64
40-67
40-69
40-72
40-76
40-79
40-82
40-86
40-100
40-92
40-95
40-97
40-100
40-103
40-113
40-106
40-110
40-116
Differential lock control switch 2.7659.152.0/10 X50 40-106
4WD control switch 2.7659.151.0/20 X51 40-106
Rotating beacon switch 2.7659.126.0 X67 40-72 With standard
cab
2.7659.159.0 X67 40-76 With high-visi-
bility cab
Front work lights switch 2.7659.078.0 X71 40-82 With standard
cab
2.7659.154.0 X71 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
Rear work lights switch 2.7659.079.0 X64 40-82 With standard
cab
2.7659.155.0 X64 40-86 With high-visi-
bility cab
Windscreen washer pump switch 2.7659.091.0 X66 40-100 With standard
cab
2.7659.223.0 X66 40-92 With high-visi-
bility cab
Front P.T.O. control switch 2.7659.277.0 X48 40-110
Rear P.T.O. control switch 2.7659.278.0 X49 40-110
Windscreen wiper switch 2.7659.092.0 X70 40-100 With standard
cab
2.7659.224.0 X70 40-92 With high-visi-
bility cab
40-8
Wiring diagrams
Rear screen wiper switch 2.7659.146.0 X65 40-100 With standard
cab
2.7659.192.0 X65 40-92 With high-visi-
bility cab
Starter enable switch 2.7659.275.0 X18 40-64
RH rear P.T.O. switch (on fender) 2.7659.177.0/20 X46 40-110
Corner lights switch 2.7659.156.0 X110 40-82
40-86
Low work lights switch 2.7659.157.0 X111 40-82
40-86
Handbrake switch 2.7659.097.0 X44 40-113
Hazard warning lights switch 2.7659.158.0 X55 40-67
40-69
4WD engagement control switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X11 40-106
1000 P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.097.0 X43 40-110
540 P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.097.0 X42 40-110
ECO P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X14 40-110 85 HP
2.7659.202.0 X14 40-110 100 hp
Groundpseed P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X15 40-110
A/C activation switch 0.900.0058.9 X94 40-103
Platform rotating beacon switch 2.7659.159.0 X52 40-72
40-76
Lights switch 2.7659.271.0 X109 40-67
40-69
40-72
40-76
40-82
40-86
40-113
40-106
40-110
Brake pedal pressed switch 2.7659.097.0 X56 40-113
Clutch pedal pressed switch 2.7659.097.0 X73 40-64
40-106
LH rear P.T.O. switch (on fender) 2.7659.177.0/20 X39 40-110
Rotating beacon 2.6039.017.0 X80 -124 40-72
40-76
Gear lever 0.014.8800.3 X47 40-106
RH high beam headlight 2.8039.005.0 X26 40-67
40-69
LH high beam headlight 2.8039.005.0 X30 40-67
40-69
RH low beam headlight 2.8039.004.0 X27 40-67
40-69
RH low beam headlight (GB) 2.8039.008.0 X27 40-67
40-69
LH low beam headlight 2.8039.004.0 X29 40-67
40-69
LH low beam headlight (GB) 2.8039.008.0 X29 40-67
40-69
Number plate light 2.8059.526.0 X41 40-67
40-69
Windscreen wiper motor 2.9019.200.0/10 X81 40-90
40-92
Rear screen wiper motor 2.9019.100.0/20 X108 40-90
40-92
Starter motor 0118.0928 +30C +50 40-64
Clock X69-X89 40-72
40-76
Interior roof light 2.8339.032.0 X63 40-72
40-76
40-9
Wiring diagrams
Windscreen washer pump 0.014.9163.2 X34 40-90
40-92
Rear screen washer pump 0.014.9163.2 X35 40-90
40-92
Diagnostic socket X62 40-72
40-76
Trailer socket X38 40-67
40-69
40-113
Services circuit alarm pressure switch 2.7099.750.0/10 X23 40-79
Air conditioning pressure switch 0.900.0304.1 X104-X107 40-100 Version with
standard cab
Air conditioning pressure switch 0.010.2262.0 X104 40-103 Version with
high visibility
cab
Trailer braking low pressure switch 2.7099.960.0 X16 40-113
Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter clogging 2.7099.660.0/10 X12 40-106
Transmission oil filter clogging pressure 2.7099.660.0/10 X13 40-106
switch
Engine oil pressure switch X8 40-79
Resistor 0.010.2122.0 X101 40-95
40-100
RH resistor 0.010.2555.0 X96 40-97
40-103
LH resistor 0.010.2555.0 X93 40-97
40-103
Air cleaner clogged sensor X2 40-79
Fuel level sensor 2.7059.997.0/10 X10 40-79
Brake fluid level sensor 0.257.6654.3/10 X1 40-113
Engine temperature sensor 0421.3839 X5 40-64
40-79
Wheel speed sensor 0.010.5612.0/10 X19 40-106
Operator present sensor 0.010.3473.2 X36 40-106
Windscreen wiper intermittent timer 2.8639.008.0 X68 40-90
40-92
Air conditioning temperature thermostat 0.009.4744.1 X103 40-100
40-103
Air conditioning cooler fan 0.010.0618.4 X105 40-100
40-103
Supplementary air conditioning cooler fan 0.010.2545.2 X106 40-103
40-10
Wiring diagrams
40.1.3 - Index of wiring looms and components (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
List of wiring looms shown
Table 37
Description p/n Wiring diagram Connector posi-
tioning
Power wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.014.9375.4/20 40-182 40-183
Cab power wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab 0.014.9376.4/10 40-202 40-205
Power supply wiring 0.015.1983.4/10 40-146 40-148
Speaker wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.011.0729.4/10 40-238 40-240
Wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing bea- 0.011.3596.3/40 40-254 40-256
con and clock - Tractor with high visibility cab
Battery wiring loom 0.014.8806.4/20 40-135 40-138
RH drivetrain wiring loom 0.014.8630.4/30 40-168 40-169
LH drivetrain wiring loom 0.014.9193.4/30 40-173 40-173
A/C system wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab 0.010.2560.0 40-217 40-221
A/C system wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.010.2153.2 40-194 40-196
Instrument panel wiring loom 0.014.8628.4/40 40-157 40-161
Headlamp wiring loom - Tractor with cab 0.010.8189.3/40 40-259 40-260
Headlamp wiring loom - Tractor with platform 0.015.3094.4 40-265 40-265
Lower front lights wiring loom - Tractor with cab 0441.1923.4 40-261 40-263
Work lights wiring loom - Tractor with platform 0.014.9281.4 40-267 40-267
Front-rear work lights wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab 0.015.2979.4 40-243 40-246
Front-rear work lights wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.009.7851.4/50 40-227 40-230
Auxiliary work lights wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab 0.015.1437.4/10 40-247 40-249
Auxiliary work lights wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.015.1435.4/10 40-231 40-233
Hydraulic trailer braking wiring loom 0.014.1645.4/10 40-273 40-275
Cab shuttle wiring loom 0.015.1418.4/30 40-179 40-180
Drivetrain shuttle wiring loom 0.015.1998.4/10 40-176 40-176
Rotating beacon wiring 0.012.9909.4 40-269 40-271
Roof line wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab 0.011.3606.4/50 40-207 40-211
Roof line wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.009.7850.4/50 40-185 40-189
Cowl lights wiring 0.014.8107.4/20 40-119 40-121
Engine wiring loom - Version with front battery 0.014.8629.4/20 40-122 40-126
Engine wiring loom - Version with lateral battery 0.015.1597.4/20 40-128 -
Work lights and rotating beacon wiring loom 0.014.9195.4/20 40-141 40-144
Heating wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab 0.010.2554.2 40-213 40-215
Heating wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.010.2147.2 40-192 40-193
Windscreen wiper wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab 0.011.3597.3 40-250 40-253
Windscreen wiper wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab 0.010.4516.3 40-233 40-236
A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom - Tractor with high 0.011.3610.3/20 40-223 40-225
visibility cab
A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom - Tractor with stan- 0.009.7853.3/20 40-197 40-201
dard cab
Index by component description
Table 38
Description of component Part number Connector System Notes
Cigarette lighter 2.7099.770.0 X53 40-74
40-78
Alternator 0118.2173 B+ 40-65 Version with
40-111 front battery
Alternator 0118.2173 B+ 40-65 Version with
40-111 lateral battery
Alternator 0118.2173 D+ 40-65 Version with
Alternator 0118.2173 D+ 40-65 Version with
Alternator 0118.2173 W 40-65 Version with
front battery
40-11
Wiring diagrams
Alternator 0118.2173 W 40-65 Version with
lateral battery
RH loudspeaker 0.011.5631.3 X84 40-78 Version with
high visibility
cab
RH loudspeaker 0.011.5631.3 X92 40-74 Version with
standard cab
Lh loudspeaker 0.011.5631.3 X86 40-78 Version with
high visibility
cab
Lh loudspeaker 0.011.5631.3 X91 40-74 Version with
standard cab
Radio - X72 40-74 Version with
standard cab
X88
standard cab
Horn 2.8419.007.0 X28 40-68
40-71
Hazard lights flasher unit 2.8639.011.0 X61 40-68
40-71
PTO ECU 2.8519.057.0/10 PTO ECU 40-111
Blower speed selector switch 0.009.4743.1 X102 40-96 Version with
standard cab
(heating only)
standard cab
(with A/C)
high visibil-
ity cab (heating
only)
high visibility
cab (with A/C)
Air conditioning compressor 0443.7338 X9 40-101 Version with
Air conditioning compressor 0443.7338 X9 40-101 Version with
Pneumatic seat compressor 0.014.3061.4/20 X37 40-74
40-78
Configuration connector - X58 40-107
X59
X60
Instrument panel 2.8339.248.0/70 3K 40-65
40-68
40-71
40-74
40-78
40-81
40-114
40-107
40-111
40-117
40-12
Wiring diagrams
Instrument panel 2.8339.248.0/70 5K 40-65
40-68
40-71
40-74
40-78
40-81
40-114
40-107
40-111
40-117
Lights selector switch 0.015.0359.4 X112 40-68
40-71
Engine cut-out device 0419.9904 X7 40-65
Overboost device - X6 40-65 Version with
front battery
Version with
lateral battery
Preheating device 0425.8670 X113 40-65
Differential lock control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 X22 40-107
4WD control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 X20 40-107
H/L range selector solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 X24 40-107
Front PTO solenoid valve 2.3729.400.0/10 X3 40-111
Rear PTO control solenoid valve 2.3729.250.0/50 X21 40-111
Proportional solenoid valve 2.3729.698.0 X120 40-107
Forward drive selection solenoid valve 2.3719.750.0/40 X118 40-107 “85GS” version
Forward drive selection solenoid valve 2.3729.709.0 X118 40-107 “100GS” ver-
sion
Reverse drive selection solenoid valve 2.3719.750.0/40 X119 40-107 “85GS” version
Reverse drive selection solenoid valve 2.3729.709.0 X119 40-107 “100GS” ver-
sion
Electric fan 0.010.2121.1 X100 40-96 Version with
standard cab
(heating only)
Electric fan 0.010.2121.1 X100 40-101 Version with
standard cab
(with A/C)
RH fan 0.011.2047.4 X99 40-98 Version with
high visibil-
ity cab (heating
only)
RH fan 0.011.2047.4 X99 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab (with A/C)
LH fan 0.011.2047.4 X98 40-98 Version with
high visibil-
ity cab (heating
only)
LH fan 0.011.2047.4 X98 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab (with A/C)
RH headlight 2.8019.970.0 X127 40-71 Version with
platform
LH headlight 2.8019.960.0 X126 40-71 Version with
platform
RH front work light (on roof) 2.8029.730.0 X76 40-84 Version with
standard cab
RH front work light (on roof) 2.8039.299.0 X76 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
40-13
Wiring diagrams
LH front work light (on roof) 2.8029.730.0 X77 40-84 Version with
standard cab
LH front work light (on roof) 2.8039.299.0 X77 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
RH rear work light (on roof) 2.8029.730.0 X79 40-84 Version with
standard cab
RH rear work light (on roof) 2.8039.299.0 X79 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
LH rear work light (on roof) 2.8029.730.0 X78 40-84 Version with
standard cab
LH rear work light (on roof) 2.8039.299.0 X78 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
Front RH sidelight and turn indicator 0441.1921.4 X74 40-68 Version with
cab
Front LH sidelight and turn indicator 0441.1920.4 X75 40-68 Version with
cab
RH rear light 2.8059.090.0 X45 40-68
40-71
40-114
LH rear light 2.8059.080.0 X40 40-68
40-71
40-114
Work light 2.8029.730.0 X123 40-84 Version with
40-88 platform
Work light 2.8029.730.0 X125 40-84 Version with
40-88 platform
RH front work light 2.8039.003.0 X25 40-84
40-88
LH front work light 2.8039.003.0 X31 40-84
40-88
RH auxiliary work light 2.8029.730.0 X132 40-84 Version with
standard cab
RH auxiliary work light 2.8039.299.0 X132 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
LH auxiliary work light 2.8029.730.0 X133 40-84 Version with
standard cab
LH auxiliary work light 2.8039.299.0 X133 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
Trailer pressure indicator 0.011.9433.0 X57 40-114
40-14
Wiring diagrams
Starter switch 0441.1512.4 X54 40-65
40-68
40-71
40-74
40-78
40-81
40-84
40-88
40-91
40-94
40-96
40-98
40-101
40-104
40-117
40-107
40-111
40-117
Differential lock control switch 2.7659.152.0/10 X50 40-107
Dual traction control switch 2.7659.151.0/20 X51 40-107
Rotating beacon switch 2.7659.126.0 X67 40-74 Version with
standard cab
Rotating beacon switch 2.7659.159.0 X67 40-78 Version with
high visibility
cab
Front work lights switch 2.7659.078.0 X71 40-84 Version with
standard cab
Front work lights switch 2.7659.154.0 X71 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
Rear work lights switch 2.7659.079.0 X64 40-84 Version with
standard cab
Rear work lights switch 2.7659.155.0 X64 40-88 Version with
high visibility
cab
Windscreen washer pump switch 2.7659.091.0 X66 40-91 Version with
standard cab
Windscreen washer pump switch 2.7659.223.0 X66 40-94 Version with
high visibility
cab
Front PTO control switch 2.7659.277.0 X48 40-111
Rear PTO control switch 2.7659.278.0 X49 40-111
Windscreen wiper switch 2.7659.092.0 X70 40-91 Version with
standard cab
Windscreen wiper switch 2.7659.224.0 X70 40-94 Version with
high visibility
cab
Rear screen wiper switch 2.7659.146.0 X65 40-91 Version with
standard cab
Rear screen wiper switch 2.7659.192.0 X65 40-94 Version with
high visibility
cab
Starter enable switch 2.7659.275.0/10 X18 40-65
RH rear PTO control switch (on mudguard) 2.7659.177.0/20 X46 40-111
Corner work lights switch 2.7659.156.0 X110 40-84
40-88
Low work lights switch 2.7659.157.0 X111 40-84
40-88
Handbrake switch 2.7659.097.0 X44 40-114
40-15
Wiring diagrams
Hazard warning lights switch 2.7659.158.0 X55 40-68
40-71
4WD engagement control switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X11 40-107
PTO 1000 selector switch 2.7659.097.0 X43 40-111
540 PTO selector switch 2.7659.097.0 X42 40-111
PTO ECO selector switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X14 40-111 “85-85GS” ver-
sion
PTO ECO selector switch 2.7659.202.0 X14 40-111 “100-100GS”
version
Ground speed PTO selector switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X15 40-111
A/C activation switch 0.900.0058.9 X94 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab (with A/C)
Rotating beacon switch, platform 2.7659.159.0 X52 40-74
40-78
Lights switch 2.7659.271.0 X109 40-68
40-71
40-74
40-78
40-84
40-88
40-114
40-107
40-111
Brake pedal depressed switch 2.7659.097.0 X56 40-114
Clutch pedal depressed switch 2.7659.097.0 X73 40-65
40-107
LH rear PTO control switch (on mudguard) 2.7659.177.0/20 X39 40-111
Rotating beacon 2.6039.017.0 X124 40-74 Version with
40-78 platform
Rotating beacon 2.6039.017.0 X80 40-74
40-78
H/L lever 0.014.8800.3 X47 40-107 “85-100” ver-
sion
H/L lever 0.014.8997.4 X47 40-107 “85GS-100GS”
version with H-
M-L
H/L lever 0.015.0864.4 X47 40-107 “85GS-100GS”
version
Shuttle lever 0.015.0363.4/20 X130 40-74
40-78
40-107
40-117
Rh high beam headlight 2.8039.005.0 X26 40-68
40-71
Lh high beam headlight 2.8039.005.0 X30 40-68
40-71
Rh low beam headlight 2.8039.004.0 X27 40-68 RH traffic
40-71
Rh low beam headlight 2.8039.008.0 X27 40-68 LH traffic
40-71
Lh low beam headlight 2.8039.004.0 X29 40-68 RH traffic
40-71
Lh low beam headlight 2.8039.008.0 X29 40-68 LH traffic
40-71
Number plate light 2.8059.526.0 X41 40-68
40-71
Windscreen wiper motor 2.9019.200.0/10 X81 40-91 Version with
standard cab
40-16
Wiring diagrams
Windscreen wiper motor 2.9019.200.0/10 X81 40-94 Version with
high visibility
cab
Rear screen wiper motor 2.9019.100.0/20 X108 40-91 Version with
standard cab
Rear screen wiper motor 2.9019.100.0/20 X85 40-94 Version with
high visibility
cab
Starter motor 0118.2233 +50 40-65
Starter motor 0118.2233 +30C 40-65
Not used - X129 40-107
Clock - X69 40-74 Version with
standard cab
Clock - X89 40-78 Version with
high visibility
cab
Cab courtesy light 2.8339.032.0 X63 40-74 Version with
standard cab
Cab courtesy light 2.8339.032.0 X63 40-78 Version with
high visibility
cab
Windscreen washer pump 0.014.9163.2 X34 40-91
40-94
Rear windscreen washer pump 0.014.9163.2 X35 40-91
40-94
Auxiliary CANBUS socket - X128 40-117
25A power socket - X4 40-74
40-78
Diagnostics socket - X62 40-74
40-78
Trailer socket 2.6030.011.0 X38 40-68
40-71
40-114
Services circuit alarm pressure switch 2.7099.750.0/10 X23 40-81
high visibility
cab
standard cab
standard cab
Trailer braking low pressure switch 2.7099.960.0 X16 40-114
Transmission oil filter clogging pressure switch 2.7099.660.0/10 X13 40-107
Clutch oil pressure switch 2.7099.690.0/10 X117 40-107
Engine oil pressure switch - X8 40-81
Resistor 0.009.9526.2 X101 40-96 Version with
standard cab
(heating only)
Resistor 0.009.9526.2 X101 40-101 Version with
standard cab
(with A/C)
RH resistor 0.010.2555.0 X96 40-98 Version with
high visibil-
ity cab (heating
only)
RH resistor 0.010.2555.0 X96 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab (with A/C)
40-17
Wiring diagrams
LH resistor 0.010.2555.0 X93 40-98 Version with
high visibil-
ity cab (heating
only)
LH resistor 0.010.2555.0 X93 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab (with A/C)
Air cleaner clogged sensor - X2 40-81
PALL filter clogging sensor 2.7099.700.0 X122 40-107
Fuel level sensor 2.7059.997.0/10 X10 40-81
Brake fluid level sensor 0.257.6654.3/10 X1 40-114 Version with
front battery
Brake fluid level sensor 0.257.6654.3/10 X1 40-114 Version with
lateral battery
Clutch pedal position sensor 2.7099.740.0/10 X131 40-107
Engine temperature sensor 0421.3839 X5 40-65 Version with
40-81 front battery
Oil temperature sensor 2.7099.800.0 X116 40-107
Engine speed sensor 2.7099.996.0 X114 40-107
Wheels speed sensor 2.7099.996.0 X19 40-107
Shuttle sensor 2.7099.999.0 X115 40-107
Operator present sensor 0.010.3473.2 X36 40-107
Windscreen wiper intermittent timer 2.8639.008.0 X68 40-91 Version with
standard cab
Windscreen wiper intermittent timer 2.8639.008.0 X68 40-94 Version with
high visibility
cab
Air conditioning temperature thermostat 0.009.4744.1 X103 40-101 Version with
standard cab
(with A/C)
Air conditioning temperature thermostat 0.009.4744.1 X97 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab (with A/C)
Air conditioner heat exchanger fan 0.010.0618.4 X105 40-101 Version with
standard cab
Air conditioner heat exchanger fan 0.010.2545.2 X105 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab
Auxiliary conditioner heat exchanger fan 0.010.2545.2 X106 40-104 Version with
high visibility
cab
40-18
Wiring diagrams
40.1.4 - Basic electronics for mechanics (1/2)
What is electronics?
The name of this branch of electrical science is derived from the word “ELECTRON”, the name given to a small electrically charged
particle.
The movement of electrons produces electrical current, which we know more about for its effects - heat, light, magnetism, elec-
trolysis, etc. - than for its actual nature.
While electrical engineering is concerned with these external effects of electrical current, electronics deals with way materials react
to the gain or loss of electrons.
Electrons in fact move from (-) to (+), but according to a convention that was established before the emergence of modern atomic
theory, electric current flows in the opposite direction from (+) to (-).
Using electronics it is possible to program complex logical processes, which could not be achieved in other ways.
The various applications of electronics on our tractors can be divided into two groups:
l Invisible electronics, which operate without requiring any intervention of the driver, (voltage regulation, rectification of the cur-
rent produced by the alternator, timing, etc.);
l Visible electronics, ranging from the visible and audible information to made available to the driver via the vehicle’s instru-
ments and signalling systems, to the control systems that serve to optimise work processes (Performance Monitor, SBA
System, I-Monitor, etc.).
Logical development of the electronics
As mentioned previously, electronics is generally viewed as a branch of electrical science, even though in certain aspects they are
quite independent.
Whereas electrical engineering generally deals with large amounts of current, electronics is more concerned with very low levels of
current.
Electronic applications are based on the movement of electrons and thus exploit the different degrees to which different materials
conduct electrical current:
l Conductors,
l Insulators,
l Semiconductors
We therefore need to know what happens “electrically” inside the material.
All matter is composed of tiny particles called atoms.
The atom can be likened to a planetary system which has at its core a nucleus, comprised of protons and neutrons, around which
rotate the electrons in different orbits, or shells.
Fig. 2397
Under certain conditions, electrons can move from one atom to another.
40-19
Wiring diagrams
If the number of electrons in an atom is the same as the number of protons, the atom is neutral (it has no charge).
If the number of electrons exceeds the number of protons, the atom is negatively charged, while if it loses electrons it will become
positively charged.
Atomic structure of matter
The atom is the smallest particle of a simple element that can combine with other
atoms to form molecules.
Fig. 2398
The composition of the nucleus and the number of electrons present in an atom
determine which element it belongs to.
Fig. 2399
The structure of an atom can be compared to that of the solar system:

1. Electron (Planet)
2. Nucleus (Sun)
Fig. 2400
Electrical charges of the same sign (1) repel each other while charges of opposite
signs (2) attract.
Fig. 2401
40-20
Wiring diagrams
40.1.5 - Basic electronics for mechanics (2/2)
Conductors, Insulators and Semiconductors
The behaviour exhibited by different materials in response to electricity derives from their atomic structure:
1. In conductors (generally metals), electrons are able to move freely from one atom to another;
2. In insulators (generally metalloids) electron movement is restricted to varying degrees, depending on the type of material.
Their atoms are not able to acquire electrons.
3. Semiconductors (germanium, silicon, selenium, etc.), are materials which in their pure state may act as insulators, but with
the addition of precisely calibrated amounts certain impurities, they can become conductors. Their electrical properties thus
lie somewhere in the range between insulators and conductors. If these materials in their pure state are subjected to a techni-
cal process known as “doping” (the addition of impurities with a certain number of atoms with free electrical charges), they
become positively or negatively charged, depending on the specific process.
Electrical voltage
We have talked about “external causes” that can provoke the movement of electrons in atoms.
One of these external causes is “voltage” or “potential difference”, which exerts a “force” on electrical charges, causing them to start
moving.
This force is known as electromotive force; the force supplied by electrical sources (battery, dynamo, alternator).
The concept of voltage or potential difference is illustrated by the example shown
here.
l The levels in A and B are equal if the valve is open.
Fig. 2402
The concept of voltage or potential difference is illustrated by the example shown

here.
l For water to flow from A to B, there must a difference in level “h” when the
valve closed.
l The difference between the height of water in A and that in B creates a dif-
ference in pressure.
Fig. 2403
When the valve is opened, water flows from A to B until the point where the two
pressures are equalised.
The same happens with electrical current:
l to obtain current flow, there has to be potential difference at one of the
conductor (caused by the presence of electrical charge).
Fig. 2404
40-21
Wiring diagrams
Resistance
The water model can also be used to explain the concept of electrical resistance. If water encounters obstacles when flowing through
a pipe the the flow rate will slow or the direction of flow will change .
The same applies to electrical current; obstacles of an electrical nature reduce the flow of electrons. Every material offers some de-
gree resistance to the flow of electrons; the level of this resistance will depend on its atomic structure and its dimensions. Obstacles
in a water course will slow down or change the direction of the water flow.
Electrical resistance can be compared to a restriction in the conductor or scaling
on the inside of a water pipe.
Fig. 2405
The electrical resistance of a material can be defined as the opposition it presents to the flow of electrons and varies according to the
nature of the material and its dimensions.
Electrical continuity
Staying with the water analogy, let’s examine how to obtain a continuous flow of water in a circuit. 424For the flow to be continuous,
the water must be returned to basin 1.
In this hydraulic circuit, the function of the pump (2) is to return the water to basin
or tank (1).
Fig. 2406
Similarly, for current to flow continuously in an electrical circuit, the electrons must return from the positively charged terminal to the
negatively charged terminal, in order to maintain a potential difference between the two terminals. This is the job of the electrical
power source.
Electrical power supply
An electrical power source can be defined as a system capable of separating and initiating the motion of a number of electrons.
A battery, for example, has two metal terminals, one positive and one negative.
Inside the battery, a chemical process causes free electrons to flow to the negative terminal to create a negative charge and a corre-
sponding positive charge to build at the positive terminal.
This process will continue inside the battery until the actions which caused it are balanced by the forces of attraction between the
electrons and the positive charges.
If the electrons could flow to the positive terminal, the initial neutral status could be restored, but as there is internal connection betwe-
en the two terminals, this can only be achieved if there is an external connection between B and A.
We can therefore state that a difference in potential, or voltage, has been created between the two terminals A and B.
If we now connect an external load between B and A, the electrons concentrated at terminal A (+) will starting moving towards terminal
B, thereby pushing along the free electrons present in the connecting conductor.
An electrical current is thus created, (which by convention is deemed as flowing from A to B), and this current will continue to flow as
long as there remains a difference in potential between the two terminals.
40-22
Wiring diagrams
Schematic representation of a electrical power source
A = Positive terminal
B = Negative terminal
G = Generator
Fig. 2407
Electromotive force (e.m.f.)

Taking a simple electrical circuit , let’s see what happens to the voltage at the terminals of the power source when the circuit is closed
(in this example, the power source is a battery, but the same result would be obtained with a different source of power, such as an
alternator).
Simple circuit with switch “I “open: no current flow.
The same situation occurs if we replace the battery with an alternator in rotation.
A voltage (e.g. 12V) is present at the terminals of the power source, which can be
measured with a voltmeter. This no-load voltage is known as the electromotive
force.
R = resistance of a load.
Fig. 2408
Simple circuit with switch “I” closed. The battery powers the resistance R. A volt-
age drop occurs between the terminals of the power source, caused by the circula-
tion of current in the source itself, which has its own internal resistance.
Vd = r × A
r = internal resistance of the power source in series with the other elements of the
circuit
A = current flowing through the circuit
Fig. 2409
The following relationship is therefore true for every power source:

Available voltage = Electromotive force - Internal resistance x Current
V=E-(r×I)
Direct Current (DC) and Alternating Current (AC)
Electrical current can be either direct or variable: with direct current, the electrons always flow only one direction; with variable cur-
rent, the direction and intensity of electron flow varies over time in accordance with the laws of trigonometry.
If this change in direction is regular over time, the current is described as “alternating”. Alternating current changes cyclically from
positive values to zero and from zero to negative values and so on.
On a tractor, the battery supplies direct current voltage, and therefore direct current flows through the connected circuits.
The alternator produces alternating current, which, as we shall see, must be converted into direct current by a bridge rectifier before
it can be used.
The graph below illustrates the behaviour of a sinusoidal alternating current. The voltage increases from zero volts up to the maxi-
mum positive value and then decreases to zero volts . The polarity is then inverted and the the voltage rises to the maximum negative
40-23
Wiring diagrams
value before returning once again to zero. This complete sequence is referred to as one “cycle”.
If a cycle is performed once every second, then the frequency of the alternating current is said to be 1 Hertz. In domestic electrical
supplies, the frequency of the supply is 50 Hz.
Frequency is thus the number of complete cycles performed in one second.
A period is defined as the time required for an alternating sine wave to complete one cycle, i.e. from zero to a positive peak to zero
to a negative peak and back to zero.
This time period is expressed in seconds and is denoted by the letter T.
The alternating current wave form illustrated in the graph is called sinusoidal.
T = 1 period
A = Amplitude
B = Positive voltage
C = Negative voltage
Fig. 2410
The number of cycles per second is the FREQUENCY and is expressed in Hertz and denoted with the letter “f”.
f=1÷T
T=1÷f
An AC current with a frequency of 50 Hertz therefore has a period of 1 ÷ 50 = 0.02 seconds.
Electrical values: Current and Voltage
CURRENT Symbol A
Value: Amount of electrical charge that passes through a conductor in a given unit of time.
Units: amperes.
Instrument: ammeter.
Connection to circuit: In series.
Basic electrical circuit incorporating a voltmeter and an ammeter.
Resistance is present in the conductors (R), in the loads (Ri1) and in the power
source (Ri2).
The inclusion of an ammeter (unlike a voltmeter) requires a modification to the
circuit, in that the circuit must be opened at some point by cutting a conductor and
the instrument must be then connected between the open ends of the conductor.
Fig. 2411
The inclusion of an ammeter (unlike a voltmeter) requires a modification to the

circuit, in that the circuit must be opened at some point by cutting a conductor and
the instrument must be then connected between the open ends of the conductor.
Fig. 2412
40-24
Wiring diagrams
VOLTAGE Symbol V
Voltage: Difference in potential; (emf); force that causes electrons to flow
Units: Volts
Measuring instrument: Voltmeter.
Connection to circuit: in parallel.
Resistance
In an electrical circuit, voltage and current are both dependent on RESISTANCE, i.e. the opposition to the flow of electrons in a
material.
We have already mentioned how the motion of electrons occurs as a result of forces produced by the collision of these minute par-
ticles.
This phenomenon generates heat and is this reason why materials heat up when current passes through them.
The greater the current (the greater the number of electrons in motion) the more heat is produced.
As the temperature increases, the movement of the electrons also increases, and the electrons find it more difficult to move under
the influence of the voltage.
In some materials, this resistance is minimal; these materials are good conductors of current (conductors: copper, aluminium, silver,
etc.). In others, the resistance is so high that it is difficult for electrons to move (insulators: mica, porcelain, glass, paper, etc.)
In addition to the nature of the material, resistance is also affected by its dimensions:
l LENGTH: the greater the length of the conductor the greater the number of collisions between atoms and free electrons.
l CROSS-SECTIONAL AREA; the greater the cross-sectional area, the greater the number of free electrons. Resistance is
inversely proportional to cross-sectional area.
l TEMPERATURE, the motion of atoms and consequently the probability of collision with free atoms increases proportionally
with the temperature, thus increasing also the resistance.
The electrical circuits on the tractor are generally comprised of wire conductors with a cross-sectional area that is negligible in com-
parison with their length.
Fig. 2413 - Load connection cables

1. Single colour.
2. Spiral striping with max. pitch 50 mm
3. Horizontal striping.
4. With narrow-spaced coloured rings.
5. With wide spaced rings.
6. With rings in groups of 2 of same or different colours, depending on use.
7. With coloured rings in groups of 3
RESISTANCE Symbol R ( Omega )
Resistance: Opposition to the flow of electrons.
40-25
Wiring diagrams
Units: Ohm (Omega ).
Measuring instrument: Ohmmeter (tester), or voltmeter and ammeter when in presence of voltage.
The resistance of different materials - Resistivity
It has been determined experimentally that the resistance of a wire conductor is given by:
R = p × ( l ÷ S ) = ohms
in which:
p = (Greek letter pronounced “rho”) is a proportional coefficient that varies according to the nature of the material and is known as
“resistivity” or “specific resistance”.
l = length, expressed in metres
S = sectional area, expressed in mm²
This formula can also be written:
p=(R×S)÷l
so we can state that the unit of measurement of resistivity (p) represents a resistance of 1 ohm of a conductor of the material in que-
stion, with a length 1 metre, and sectional area of 1 mm², at a temperature of 0°C.
While for conductors resistivity is measured in ohms per mm²/m, for insulators it is almost always expressed in mega ohms/mm,
which is the resistance in millions of ohms of a cube with a side length of 1 m.
Variation of resistance with temperature (temperature coefficient)
For most metals, resistivity increases with the temperature (positive temperature coefficient); this is why when talking about resistivity
there must always be a reference to temperature.
There are exceptions to this rule, such as, for example, chromium and carbon, in which resistivity decreases with the temperature
(negative temperature coefficient) and some alloys in which resistivity does not vary, which have temperature coefficient of 0.
This increase or decrease in the resistance per degree of temperature and per ohm of resistance is termed the “temperature coeffi-
cient” , and is denoted with the Greek letter a (alpha).
If the initial resistance is R0, at a temperature t0 (ambient temperature), and the temperature difference is t = t1 - t0, the variation in
resistance will be:
R×t×a
and the final resistance is:
Rt = R0 + R0 × t × a
Rt = R0 (1 + a × t0)
This formula is of great practical importance as it allows us to calculate the final temperature of a coil or resistor using the resistance
variation method.
The temperature coefficient is used (positive or negative) to characterise thermistors (PTC = Positive Temperature Coefficient and
NTC = Negative Temperature Coefficient)
The interdependence of electrical values
In an electrical circuit, the relationship between current, voltage and resistance is given by the formula:
V=IxR
Volts = ohms x amps
If any of these values is unknown, it can be calculated, providing the other two values are known, simply by applying one of the
following formulae:
R=V÷I
I=V÷R
V=IxR
Power
The power developed or dissipated is given by the formula:
Power = Voltage x Current
Watt (W) = Volts x Amps
In mechanical engineering, power is still commonly expressed in terms of horsepower: hp
The relationship between horsepower and Watts is given in the following equation:
40-26
Wiring diagrams
1 hp = 736 W = 0.736 kW
1 kW = 1.36 hp
Dissipated power, in electrical terms, is power transformed into heat and is given by:
Power = Voltage x Current = Resistance x Current x Current
given that:
W=V×I
V=R×I
then:
W = R × I × I = R × I²
Multiples and submultiples of electrical values
Table 39
Multiples and submultiples of units of measurement
Prefix Multiply by Divide by
Name Symbol
mega- M 1,000,000 -
kilo- k 1000 -
hecto- h 100 -
deca- da 10 -
deci- D - 10
centi- S - 100
milli- M - 1.000
micro- µ - 1,000,000
nano- N - 1,000,000,000
pico- P - 1,000,000,000,000
40.1.6 - Electrical and electronic components (1/2)

Electrical and electronic components
Electronic components are used in circuits to modulate (vary, modify), control and regulate electrical values or to protect other devi-
ces.
In particular, electronic semiconductor components exploit the various reactions of electrons to heat, magnetism, and light in order
to generate small electrical signals. These electrical signals, when suitably modified, can be used by signalling devices or to control
other components.
Components can be classified on the basis of the functions they perform; components used to control or amplify power signals are
deemed ACTIVE; components which neither control nor amplify power are deemed PASSIVE.
Resistors*
Components of various design comprised of a conductor with a known resistivity that when included in a circuit causes a voltage
drop.
They are therefore used to change voltage and current; they come in different shapes and sizes, depending on their type, ohmic
resistance value, tolerance and heat dispersion characteristics.
Table 40
TYPES OF RESISTORS
FIXED VARIABLE THERMALLY SENSITIVE RE- LIGHT SENSITIVE RESIS-
SISTORS TORS
wirewound wirewound Thermistors: LDR
film film NTC -
- Linear or non-linear variation PTC -
All resistors are defined by their dimensions and characteristics: ohmic value, and maximum operating temperature.
* N.B. To avoid confusion, in this manual the term RESISTANCE is used for the value expressed in ohms which represents the op-
position to the flow of electrical current.
The term RESISTOR is used for the component used to introduce “resistance” into an electrical circuit.
Resistors are of two types: fixed or variable.
(the term “resistance” is also often used for the component).
40-27
Wiring diagrams
Fixed resistors
How to determine the ohmic value of a resistor
In wirewound resistors, the value is printed with decimal point (or comma) and the
omega symbol.
If the value of the resistor is 10.5 ohms, the marking will be: 10.5 ohms
sometimes the letter R is used in place of the decimal separator (point or comma):
10 R5
On resistors with values measured in thousand of ohms, the printed value will
include the letter “k”, which stands for thousand (1000): 10.5 kohms (10,500 ohms)
Fig. 2414
Potentiometers (Variable resistors)

This a resistor with a sliding contact that varies the resistance as it is moved along
the resistor.
The symbols used in schematics for a variable resistor or potentiometer are shown
in the figure on the right:
Fig. 2415
Use of a variable resistor as a voltage divider

Divides the voltage into two or three parts in a specific ratio.
V1 = Applied voltage,
P = Potentiometer,
U = Load,
V2 = Required voltage (obtained by moving the sliding contact) < V1
Fig. 2416
Use of a variable resistor as an electrical resistance of absolute value

All the current flows through the sliding contact.
This means that the sliding contact must be held securely in place, otherwise the
voltage V2 will change.
Fig. 2417
40-28
Wiring diagrams
Preventing arcing between the resistor and sliding contact.
The figure shows a way to prevent the arcing between the resistor and the sliding
contact that may occur in the case of poor contact.
This connection allows some of the current to flow through the full length of the
resistor. The voltage drop between the sliding contact and the resistor is less than
V1, thus reducing the possibility of arcing.
The resistor of the rheostat can be sized so that the resistance can be varied in
both a linear and a non-linear way.
Fig. 2418
Voltage divider
Voltage dividers with fixed resistors or potentiometers are used whenever circuits require electrical power below the standard volta-
ges available on the tractor (12 Volts with engine off and 14.5 Volts with engine running).
Voltage dividers are found in the voltage regulator of the alternator and in the electronic control units.
Thermistors (Thermally Sensitive Resistors)
These are semiconductor resistors in which the resistance decreases as the temperature rises, ranging from just a few ohms at 0 °C
to tens of thousands of ohms at 100 °C; they are used to detect changes in temperature.
They may be either self-heating, if the heat is produced by the current flowing through them, or externally heated, if sensitive to the
temperature of the environment or the component on which they are mounted.
There are two types: PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) and NTC (Negative Temperature Coefficient)
With PTC thermistors, resistance increases with the temperature, while with the NTC type, resistance decreases as the temperature
rises.
NTC types are available with resistance values ranging from just a few ohms to several hundred kohms.
Operating characteristics of NTC thermistors
Fig. 2419
Operating characteristics of PTC thermistors
Note the linearity of the variation.
Fig. 2420
Thermistors are used in cab heating and climate control systems.
40-29
Wiring diagrams
Capacitor
This component consists of a pair of conductors, generally in the form of flat plates, separated by an insulator (dielectric). Its function
to store electrical charge from a power supply.
This charge can then be given as and when required.
Symbol
Fig. 2421
Capacitor in a circuit with a generator.
Fig. 2422
The amount of electrical charge that a capacitor can store is referred to as its “capacitance” (C), and is measured in farads (F). In
practice, however, the farad is too large for general use so the following units are used instead:
mF = millifarad = 1/1,000 F
µF = microfarad = 1/1,000,000 F
nF = nanofarad = 1/1,000,000,000 F
On closing the switch, the electrons start moving but their flow is impeded by the dielectric. Electrons will therefore accumulate in the
plate connected to the negative terminal (-) of the generator, causing negative charge to build up. In the meantime the positive plate
loses electrons, thereby becoming positively charged. A potential difference is thus created across the plates of the capacitor, and
this increases until it equals the potential difference of the generator.
The capacitance of the capacitor is therefore proportional to the applied voltage and to the surface area of the plates and is inversely
proportional to the distance “d” between the plates. It also depends on the type of dielectric used.
The process described above is known as charging the capacitor, and is complete when the capacitor is fully charged. If a resistor
or a load of another type is connected to the capacitor, the latter discharges as electrons flow in opposite direction and the potential
difference between the plates decreases to zero.
Diodes
A diode can be defined simply as a junction between two semiconductors, one made of P-type material and the other made of N-type
material.
40-30
Wiring diagrams
A diode is a junction between two semiconductors, one made of P type material
and the other made of N type material.
Fig. 2423
The contact between the two semiconductors in different situations of electrical charge forms a barrier to electrical current flow at
the junction.
This barrier prevents the current from flowing through the diode.
Fig. 2424
Rectification, isolation, (switch), discharge and protection.
Fig. 2425
The diode symbol and the designations of its terminals.
Fig. 2426
The situation at the junction between the two semiconductors changes when a voltage is applied across the anode and cathode; the
diode is polarised, as shown in the figure.
When a voltage is applied to the diode, it polarises in the two ways indicated.
40-31
Wiring diagrams
(A) = Direct polarisation (forward biasing)
( - ) = Cathode
( + ) = Anode
Fig. 2427
(B) = Reverse polarisation (reverse biasing)

( - ) = Cathode
( + ) = Anode
Fig. 2428
With forward biasing (positive connected to the anode and negative to the cathode) the resistance to current flow is significantly
reduced and the diode allows current to flow, providing that the applied voltage exceeds the threshold value, i.e. the voltage required
to initiate the process by which the barrier is reduced.
If the polarity of the diode is reversed, there is no electron flow except for the very weak current that crosses the junction. If the rever-
se voltage applied to the diode exceeds a certain value (thousand of Volts) the reverse current flowing through the diode will increase
rapidly to the point where the junction is damaged.
The function of the diode is therefore to allow current flow in one direction only, from the anode (+) to the cathode ( - ).
It this way it acts as an electrical one-way valve.
Forward biased diode allows current flow.
The lamp illuminates,
Fig. 2429
40-32
Wiring diagrams
Reverse biased diode blocks current flow.
The lamp does not illuminate.
Fig. 2430
The main function of the diode is to act as an electrical one-way valve.
Fig. 2431
Zener diode
We have already mentioned how diodes do not tolerate reverse voltage, as when this reaches a certain level, the reverse current flow
will increase significantly to the point where the diode itself is damaged.
The Zener diode is specifically designed to allow a certain amount of reverse current flow without damage to the junction.
It is also possible to make this reverse current flow occurs at a certain reverse voltage, known as “zener voltage”.
A zener diode can therefore be defined as semiconductor with a special PN junction with controlled reverse bias properties.
If forward biased, the Zener diode behaves just like a normal diode, while if reverse biased, it prevents current flow until the voltage
reaches the critical level, which is defined as the “Zener point”.
At this point the current increases rapidly.
40-33
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2432
The behaviour of the Zener diode can thus be compared to that of a pressure relief valve in a hydraulic circuit.
a) current and water flow
b) no current or water flow,
c) the water flows when it overcomes the opposing force of the valve spring. Likewise, the current flows when the voltage reaches
the zener point.
LED (light emitting diode)
A LED is a special diode with two terminals; it allows current flow in one direction only and emits light when low-voltage current pas-
ses through it.
The polarity of the terminals is very important, and the cathode is marked to facilitate identification.
The light emitted is monochromatic; the colours red, yellow, green and orange are available.
Operating characteristics of a LED and its symbol.
Fig. 2433
40-34
Wiring diagrams
LED
1. Light beam emitted
2. Diode
3. Transparent plastic cap
4. PIN terminals
Fig. 2434
LEDs are often used for signal lamps as their power consumption is very low, they require only low levels of reverse current and they
are impact resistant.
A typical application is as an indicator lamp, which, unlike a conventional bulb, can be flashed on and off repeatedly without failing.
They are also used to display segmented symbols and alphanumeric digits.
40.1.7 - Electrical and electronic components (2/2)
Transistors
A transistor is semiconductor which has three junctions.
It can be distinguished from a diode by its three leads, whereas a diode only has two.
Fig. 2435 - Schematic diagram and symbol of the transistor.

As you can see from the schematic, there two possible configurations: PNP (with a N semiconductor in the centre) or NPN (with a P
semiconductor in the centre). The central part is known as the “base”.
The lateral parts are doped with impurities and are termed the “collector” and the “emitter”. On the symbol, note that the emitter is
marked with an arrow, which indicates the direction of current flow between the base and the emitter.
Inside the transistor, there are two opposing barriers to current flow: if voltage is applied at one end of the semiconductor (E-C), one if
the barriers is eliminated while the other is strengthened and consequently no current flows; the same result is obtained if the polarity
of the applied voltage is reversed.
40-35
Wiring diagrams
When voltage is applied across terminals (E) and (C), no current flows through
the transistor.
Fig. 2436
If a weak voltage is applied simultaneously to the base terminal, the transistor becomes a conductor and current flows between the
emitter and collector.
When voltage is also applied to the base terminal, the transistor allows current
flow.
Fig. 2437
When the voltage applied to the base terminal is modified, the current flow between the emitter and collector will also vary proportio-
nally. From this behaviour are derived the two main characteristics of the transistor:
1. Current does not flow through the transistor if the circuit between the emitter and collector is interrupted, i.e. no voltage ap-
plied.
2. The current flowing through the transistor is directly proportional to current that flows through the emitter-base circuit, within
the operating limits of the transistor. This means that the base current (the current that flows between the emitter and base) is
proportional to the collector current (the current flow between the emitter and the collector) and therefore the latter increases.
Given these two characteristics, a transistor can function as a switch (by removing the voltage at the base) or as an amplifier.
With a transistor, a weak current flowing from the emitter E to the base B (PNP transistor) or from the base to the emitter (NPN
transistor), can be used to control a strong current flow from the emitter to the collector (PNP) or from the collector to emitter (NPN).
This is the most useful characteristic of the transistor, which can be summarised in the equation:
a = ( Ic ) ÷ ( Ib )
This parameter, however, varies according to the collector current and voltage, as well as the temperature of the transistor.
The difference between NPN-type and PNP-type transistors lies solely in the direction of the current flow. The operating limits of
transistors are:
l the maximum collector current,
l maximum voltage from collector to emitter.
40-36
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2438 - Operation schematic

Schematic showing operation of a PNP transistor and an NPN transistor when voltage is applied at the base.
The current Ic can flow from E to C only if it flows from E to B (1) or from B to E (2). Ic is amplified relative to Ib.
Fig. 2439
Typical connection of a transistor. The resistor R limits the current and protects the transistor.
40-37
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2440
Typical connection of a transistor. The resistor R limits the current and protects the transistor.
Fig. 2441
The transistor as a current amplifier
Use of a transistor as a switch or relay
Thanks to their amplifying properties, transistors can be used in place of relays (electromagnetic switches) as they can perform the
same function, but with the advantage that they use static components rather than moving parts.
The figure shows two electrical circuits, one controlled by a relay and the other by a transistor.
In the relay circuit, when the switch is closed in the relay control circuit, the contacts close the main circuit (drawn with the thick black
line); i.e. a relatively small current (0.2 A) can be used to control a much larger working current (8A).
The transistor circuit works in exactly the same way. When the switch in the control circuit is closed, the current flows from the positive
pole of the battery through the emitter; the base terminal of the transistor is polarised and the transistor allows current flow (EC) thus
allowing current to flow in the main circuit.
40-38
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2442
Circuit diagrams show use of an electromagnetic relay (B) and use of a transistor as a relay (A). U = Load in main circuit.
40-39
Wiring diagrams
40.2 - Components
40.2.1 - Components (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
This chapter contains:
l Components table: technical and functional description of the components
l Pinouts of the electronic control units
Component technical data
Table 41
Description Code Characteristics Connector
Front P.T.O. control solenoid valve 2.3729.400.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.3140.0 X3
Fuel level sensor 2.7059.997.0/10 Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: X10
with tank full: 5 ± 0.8 Ohm
with tank full: 125 ± 8 Ohm
with tank empty: 330 ± 15 Ohm
4WD engagement control switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X11
Between pin 1 and pin 2: normally closed contact (NC).

Between pin 2 and pin 3: normally open contact (NO)
Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter 2.7099.660.0/10 Normally open contact. X12
clogging Calibration pressure: 0,5÷0,4 bar absolute
Transmission oil filter clogging pres- 2.7099.660.0/10 Normally open contact. X13
sure switch Calibration pressure: 0,5÷0,4 bar absolute
ECO P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X14
Between pin 1 and pin 2: normally closed contact (NC)

ECO P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.202.0 Between pin 2 and pin 3: normally closed contact (NC) X14
Between pin 1 and pin 4: normally open contact (NO).
With switch free of levers
Groundspeed P.T.O. engagement 2.7659.096.0/10 X15
switch

Trailer braking low pressure switch 2.7099.960.0 Normally closed contact (NC). Switching pressure: 11 X16
bar
Services circuit alarm pressure 2.7099.750.0/10 Normally closed contact (NC). Switching pressure: 11 X23
switch bar ± 1
LH rear P.T.O. control switch (on 2.7659.177.0/20 Resistance between Pin1 and Pin 2 with button pressed: X39
fender) 3.9 Ohm
P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.097.0 X42

40-40
Wiring diagrams
P.T.O. engagement switch 2.7659.097.0 X43

Handbrake switch 2.7659.097.0 X44

RH rear P.T.O. control switch (on 2.7659.177.0/20 Resistance between Pin1 and Pin 2 with button pressed: X46
fender) 3.9 Ohm
Platform rotating beacon switch 2.7659.159.0 X52
Starter switch 0441.1512.4 X54
40-41
Wiring diagrams
Hazard warning lights switch 2.7659.158.0 X55
Brake pedal pressed switch 2.7659.097.0 X56

Rear work lights switch 2.7659.079.0 X64
Rear work lights switch 2.7659.155.0 X64
40-42
Wiring diagrams
Rear screen wiper switch 2.7659.146.0 X65
Windscreen washer pump switch 2.7659.091.0 X66
40-43
Wiring diagrams
Rotating beacon switch 2.7659.126.0 X67
40-44
Wiring diagrams
Windscreen wiper switch 2.7659.092.0 X70
Front work lights switch 2.7659.078.0 X71
40-45
Wiring diagrams
Front work lights switch 2.7659.154.0 X71
Clutch pedal pressed switch 2.7659.097.0 X73

Corner lights switch 2.7659.156.0 X110
Wheel speed sensor 0.010.5612.0/10 Pin 1 = 12 Vdc power; Pin 2 = output signal; Pin 3 = X19
earth
Between pin 2 and pin 3: 0.02V with sensor far from
metals, 12.0V with sensor near to metals (if kept near to
metal, after 5 seconds it must return to 0V)
4WD control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X20
Rear P.T.O. control solenoid valve 2.3729.250.0/50 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X21
Differential lock control solenoid 2.3729.697.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X22
valve
H/L gear control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X24
40-46
Wiring diagrams
Front P.T.O. control switch 2.7659.277.0 X48
Differential lock control switch 2.7659.152.0/10 X50
4WD control switch 2.7659.151.0/20 X51
Lights switch 2.7659.271.0 X109
40-47
Wiring diagrams
Low work lights switch 2.7659.157.0 X111
Rear P.T.O. control switch 2.7659.278.0 X49
Starter enable switch 2.7659.275.0 Normally closed switch (NC) resistance with contact X18
closed 3.9 Ohm
40-48
Wiring diagrams
PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS
INSTRUMENT PANEL (CODE. 2.8339.248.0/40)
Table 42
CONNECTOR 3K
Pin Voltage Symbol Description
1 Not used
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Fuel reserve signal input
5 Air filter clogged signal input
6 Engine oil pressure signal input
7 Brake reservoir oil level input
8 0V Battery negative
9 ECO P.T.O. engaged signal input
10 1000 P.T.O. engaged signal input
11 540 P.T.O. engaged signal input
12 Trailer brake signal input
13 Front P.T.O. engaged signal input
14 +12V +15 Battery positive
16 Not used
17 4WD engaged signal input active
18 Transmission oil filter clogged signal input
19 Transmission oil pressure signal input
20 D+ Alternator charge signal input
22 Parking brake signal input
23 Not used
24 Groundspeed P.T.O. engaged signal input
25 Not used
26 Not used
Table 43
CONNECTOR 5K
1 ISO 9141 serial interface
2 CANH CAN H
3 CANL CAN L
4 CANRES CAN RES
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 +12V +50 Engine start signal input
8 Low beam headlights signal input
9 High beam headlights signal input
10 Direction indicators signal input
11 Trailer 1 direction indicators signal input
12 Trailer 2 direction indicators signal input
14 Differential lock engaged signal input
15 Pre-heating stage activation input
16 Front P.T.O. engaged signal input
17 Not used
18 Not used
19 Power (+), preheating relay
20 Cooling liquid temperature signal input
21 Fuel level signal input
22 Wheel speed signal input
23 Not used
24 Engine speed signal input
25 Not used
26 Not used
40-49
Wiring diagrams
SMART LEVER (CODE 0.015.0363.4/20)
Table 44
CONNECTOR X130
3 Not used
4 Operator presence signal input
5 Transmission oil temperature sensor input
7 Shuttle rev sensor analogue input
8 0V -31 Battery negative
9 0V -31 Battery negative
10 CAN-H CAN-H
11 CAN-L CAN-L
12 Trailer brake signal input
13 Wheel speed sensor signal input
14 +5V Sensor power
16 Not used
18 Clutch pedal pressed signal input
19 Clutch release button signal input
20 Forward gear selection solenoid valve power
21 Proportional solenoid valve positive power
22 Reverse gear selection solenoid valve positive power
23 Proportional solenoid valve negative power
24 Clutch pedal position sensor analogue input
25 Reverse gear selection solenoid valve negative power
26 Clutch oil pressure switch signal input
40.2.2 - Components (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

This chapter contains:
l Components table: technical and functional description of the components
l Pinouts of the electronic control units
Component technical data
Table 45
Front PTO solenoid valve 2.3729.400.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.3140.0 X3
Fuel level sensor 2.7059.997.0/10 Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: X10
with tank full: 5 ± 0.8 Ohm
with tank half full:125 ± 8 Ohm
with tank empty: 330 ± 15 Ohm
4WD engagement switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X11

Engine speed sensor 2.7099.996.0 This cannot be checked using a simple tester; use the X114
ART.
Transmission oil filter clogging pres- 2.7099.660.0/10 Normally open contact. X13
sure switch Calibration pressure: 0.4 to 0.5 bar absolute pressure
ECO PTO engagement switch 2.7659.096.0/10 X14

40-50
Wiring diagrams
ECO PTO engagement switch 2.7659.202.0 Between pin 2 and pin 3: normally closed contact (NC) X14
Between pin 1 and pin 4: normally open contact (NO).
With switch free of levers
Groundspeed PTO engagement 2.7659.096.0/10 X15
switch

Trailer braking low pressure switch 2.7099.960.0 Normally closed contact (NC). Switching pressure: 11 X16
bar
Services circuit alarm pressure 2.7099.750.0/10 Normally closed contact (NC). Switching pressure: 11 X23
switch bar ± 1
LH rear PTO switch (on fender) 2.7659.177.0/20 Resistance between Pin1 and Pin2 with button pressed: X39
3.9 Ohm
540 PTO engagement switch 2.7659.097.0 X42
Between pin 1 and pin 2: normally closed switch (NC)

Between pin 3 and pin 4: normally open switch (NO)
1000 PTO engagement switch 2.7659.097.0 X43

Handbrake switch 2.7659.097.0 X44

RH rear PTO switch (on fender) 2.7659.177.0/20 Resistance between Pin1 and Pin2 with button pressed: X46
3.9 Ohm
40-51
Wiring diagrams
Platform rotating beacon switch 2.7659.159.0 X52
Starter switch 0441.1512.4 X54
Hazard warning lights switch 2.7659.158.0 X55
Brake pedal switch 2.7659.097.0 X56

40-52
Wiring diagrams
Rear worklights switch 2.7659.079.0 X64
Rear worklights switch 2.7659.155.0 X64
40-53
Wiring diagrams
40-54
Wiring diagrams
40-55
Wiring diagrams
Front worklights switch 2.7659.078.0 X71
Front worklights switch 2.7659.154.0 X71
Clutch pedal pressed switch 2.7659.097.0 X73

40-56
Wiring diagrams
Corner lights switch 2.7659.156.0 X110
Wheel speed sensor 2.7099.996.0 This cannot be checked using a simple tester; use the X19
ART.
4WD control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X20
Rear PTO control solenoid valve 2.3729.250.0/50 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X21
Differential lock control solenoid 2.3729.697.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X22
valve
H/L gear control solenoid valve 2.3729.697.0/10 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X24
Front PTO control switch 2.7659.277.0 X48
Differential lock control switch 2.7659.152.0/10 X50
40-57
Wiring diagrams
4WD control switch 2.7659.151.0/20 X51
Lights switch 2.7659.271.0 X109
Low worklights switch 2.7659.157.0 X111
Rear PTO control switch 2.7659.278.0 X49
Start enable switch 2.7659.275.0 Normally closed switch (NC) resistance with contact X18
closed 3.9 Ohm
40-58
Wiring diagrams
Oil temperature sensor 2.7099.800.0 Resistance between pins 1 and 2 X116
at 0±1 °C: 7351 Ohm
at 20±1 °C: 2812 Ohm
at 40±1 °C: 1199 Ohm
at 60±1 °C: 560.2 Ohm
at 80±1 °C: 283.2 Ohm
Clutch fluid pressure switch 2.7099.690.0/10 Normally closed contact (NC) X117
Switching pressure: 4 bar
Solenoid operated proportional valve 2.3729.698.0 See solenoid 0.010.2831.1 X120
Clogged oil filter sensor 2.7099.700.0 Normally open contact (NO) X122
Differential switching pressure: 2.4 bar
Reset pressure: 1.8 bar
Clutch pedal position sensor 2.7099.740.0/10 Pin1 = power (Nominal 5.0V) X131
Pin2 = earth
Pin4 = analog signal
PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

INSTRUMENT PANEL (code 2.8339.248.0/70)
Table 46
CONNECTOR 3K
Pin Volts Abbreviation Description
1 Input, Hi-Lo light signal
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Input, fuel reserve signal
5 Input, air cleaner clogged signal
6 Input, engine oil pressure signal
7 Input, brake fluid level signal
9 Input, ECO PTO engaged signal
10 Input, 1000 PTO engaged signal
11 Input, 540 PTO engaged signal
12 Input, trailer brake
13 Input, rear PTO engaged signal
16 Not used
17 Input, 4WD activated signal
18 Input, transmission oil filter clogged signal
19 Input, transmission oil pressure signal
20 D+ Input, battery charging signal
22 Input, parking brake signal
23 Not used
24 Input, groundspeed PTO engaged signal
25 Not used
26 Not used
Table 47
CONNECTOR 5K
Pin Volts Abbreviation Description
2 CAN H CAN H
3 CAN L CAN L
4 CAN RES CAN RES
5 Not used
6 Not used
7 +12V +50 Input, engine start signal
8 Input, low beam headlights signal
9 Input, high beam headlights signal
10 Input, direction indicators
40-59
Wiring diagrams
CONNECTOR 5K
11 Input, 1st trailer direction indicators
12 Input, 2nd trailer direction indicators
14 Input, differential lock engaged signal
15 Input, pre-heating stage activation
16 Input, front PTO engaged signal
17 Not used
18 Input signal, operator presence
19 Power (+), preheating relay
20 Input, coolant temperature sensor signal
21 Input, fuel level signal
22 Input, wheel speed signal
23 Not used
24 Input, engine speed signal
25 Not used
26 Not used
40-60
Wiring diagrams
40.3 - Systems
40.3.1 - Earthing points
Version with front battery
Fig. 2443 - Earthing points - version with front battery
40-61
Wiring diagrams
Version with lateral battery
Fig. 2444 - Earthing points -version with lateral battery
40-62
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 48
Connec- Connector positions Connec- Connector positions
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
GND1 GND5
– –
GND6
–
Fig. 2445 Fig. 2446

GND4 GND3
– –
Fig. 2447 Fig. 2448

GND8 GND1
– –
GND2
–
Fig. 2449 Fig. 2450

GND7 GND9
– –
Fig. 2451 - HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB Fig. 2452 - STANDARD CAB
40-63
Wiring diagrams
40.3.2 - Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
5K 3K
X54 RL1 RL2 X73
PREHEATING RELE
1 0
2
PREHEATING
GENERATOR
+12/30
+12/30
TEMP.
0.014.8628.4
+12V
GND
GND
+ 50
W
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 7 19 20 13 15 24 8 14 15 21 20 1 2 3 4
GND4 GND3
FRL1 F1 F9
40A
15A
5A
G11 G1 G6
3 4 5 6 8 9 11 1 14 1 4
0.015.1983.4
60A
RL42B
RL42A
2
RL42 1
125A
D+
B+
0.014.8630.4
W
GND2
+30A +30B 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 t 0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4 D0039900
+50 +30C X5 X6 X7
+30 GND1
X18
X113
BATTERY
Fig. 2453 - Starting and preheating

Legend
l +50 Starter motor
l +30C Starter motor
l 3K Instrument panel
l B+ Alternator
l D+ Alternator
l RL1 Engine start control relay
l RL2 Key-on power relay
l RL42 Pre-heat relay
l RL42A Pre-heat relay
l RL42B Pre-heat relay
l Alternator W
l X5 Engine temperature sensor
l X6 OverBoost device
l X7 Engine cut-out device
l X18 Start enable switch
l X54 Starter switch
l X73 Clutch pedal depressed switch
l X113 Pre-heat device
List of wiring looms and connectors
l 0.014.8628.4/40 - Instrument panel wiring loom
m See para. 40.4.19 - Instrument panel wirin... - page 40-149
m See para. 40.4.20 - Positions of instrumen... - page 40-153
l 0.014.8630.4/30 - RH drivetrain wiring loom

m See para. 40.4.23 - RH drivetrain wiring -... - page 40-166
m See para. 40.4.24 - RH drivetrain wiring c... - page 40-167
40-64
Wiring diagrams
l 0.014.8629.4/20 - Engine wiring loom - version with front battery
m See para. 40.4.4 - Engine wiring - versio... - page 40-122
m See para. 40.4.5 - Engine wiring connecto... - page 40-123
l 0.015.1597.4/20 - Engine wiring loom - version with lateral battery

m See para. 40.4.7 - Engine wiring (version... - page 40-128
l 0.014.8806.4/20 - Battery wiring loom

m See para. 40.4.10 - Battery wiring - 0.014... - page 40-135
m See para. 40.4.11 - Battery wiring connect... - page 40-135
l 0.015.1983.4/10 - Power supply wiring loom

m See para. 40.4.16 - Power supply wiring - ... - page 40-146
m See para. 40.4.17 - Power supply wiring co... - page 40-147
40.3.3 - Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
5K 3K
X54 RL1 RL2 X73
1 0 PREHEATING RELE
2
PREHEATING
GENERATOR
+12/30
+12/30
TEMP.
0.014.8628.4
+12V
GND
GND
+ 50
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 7 19 20 13 15 24 W 8 14 15 21 20 1 2 3 4
GND4 GND3
FRL1 F1 F9
40A
15A
5A
G11 G1 G6
3 4 5 6 8 9 11 1 14 1 4
0.015.1983.4
60A
RL42B
RL42A
2
RL42 1
125A
D+
B+
0.014.8630.4
GND2
+30A +30B 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 t 0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4 D0039900
+50 +30C X5 X6 X7
+30 GND1
X18
X113
BATTERY

Legend
l +50 Starter motor
l +30C Starter motor
l B+ Alternator
l D+ Alternator
l RL1 Engine start control relay
l RL42 Pre-heat relay
l RL42A Pre-heat relay
l RL42B Pre-heat relay
l Alternator W
l X6 OverBoost device
40-65
Wiring diagrams
5K 3K
X54 RL1 RL2 X73
PREHEATING RELE
1 0
2
PREHEATING
GENERATOR
+12/30
+12/30
TEMP.
0.014.8628.4
+12V
GND
GND
+ 50
W
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 7 19 20 13 15 24 8 14 15 21 20 1 2 3 4
GND4 GND3
FRL1 F1 F9
40A
15A
5A
G11 G1 G6
3 4 5 6 8 9 11 1 14 1 4
0.015.1983.4
60A
RL42B
RL42A
2
RL42 1
125A
D+
B+
0.014.8630.4
W
GND2
+30A +30B 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 t 0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4 D0039900
+50 +30C X5 X6 X7
+30 GND1
X18
X113
BATTERY

l X7 Engine cut-out device
l X113 Pre-heat device
m [LNK]

m See para. 40.4.26 - Location of RH drivetr... - page 40-169

m See para. 40.4.6 - Engine wiring loom con... - page 40-126


m See para. 40.4.12 - Battery wiring loom co... - page 40-138

m See para. 40.4.18 - Power wiring loom conn... - page 40-148
40-66
Wiring diagrams
40.3.4 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2454 - Steering column switch lights

Legend
l X26 RH high beam headlight
l X27 RH low beam headlight
l X28 Horn
l X29 LH low beam headlight
l X30 LH high beam headlight
l X38 Trailer socket
l X40 LH taillight
l X41 Number plate light
l X45 RH taillight
l X55 Hazard warning lights switch
l X61 Hazard lights flasher unit
l X74 Front RH sidelight and turn indicator
l X75 Front LH sidelight and turn indicator
l X109 Lights switch
l X112 - Light selector
l 0.010.8189.3/40 - Headlamp wiring loom - Tractor with cab

m See para. 40.4.87 - Front lights wiring - ... - page 40-259
m See para. 40.4.88 - Front lights wiring co... - page 40-260
l 0441.1923.4 - Lower front lights wiring loom - Tractor with cab

m See para. 40.4.89 - Wiring for lower front... - page 40-261
m See para. 40.4.90 - Lower front lights wir... - page 40-262
40-67
Wiring diagrams
l 0.014.8107.4/20 - Cowl lights wiring loom
m See para. 40.4.1 - Hood lights wiring - 0... - page 40-119
m See para. 40.4.2 - Locations of cowl ligh... - page 40-120


40.3.5 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)

Legend
l X28 Horn
l X40 LH taillight
l X45 RH taillight
l X74 Front RH sidelight and turn indicator
l X75 Front LH sidelight and turn indicator
40-68
Wiring diagrams
m See para. 40.4.22 - Location of instrument... - page 40-161


m See para. 40.4.91 - Location of lower fron... - page 40-263



40.3.6 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85)
5K 3K
DIRECTION INDICATOR 1 TRAILER
X61 X38
X54 X112 X55
DIRECTION INDICATOR
RL2 X40 X45

POSITION BEAM
1 0
2
FULL BEAM
RIGHT
LEFT
+12/30
+12/30
+12V
GND
GND
58
54
31
58
54
31
49a
C3
C2
F
31
49
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 86 85 30 31 31b 56d 56b 56a 56 L R 49a 13 8 9 10 11 12 8 14 15 21 1 6 5 3 2 4 1 3 4 5 7 1 3 2 17 18 10 8 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
GND4
0.014.8628.4
GND3
F2 F3 F1 F13 F16 F15 F9 F10 F 14
GND8
7.5A
7.5A
20A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
5A
G10
G11 G7 G8
1 2 5 3 4 1 0 8 9 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2
0.015.1983.4
X41
X109
60A
GND2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
0.014.8806.4 0.014.8107.4 0.015.3094.4
F.D.
F.S.
-31
58
-31
58
D0039920
+30 GND1
X30 X26 X27 X29 X28 X126 X127
BATTERY

Legend
l X28 Horn
40-69
Wiring diagrams
5K 3K

X61 X38
X54 X112 X55
DIRECTION INDICATOR
RL2 X40 X45
POSITION BEAM
1 0
2
FULL BEAM
RIGHT
LEFT
+12/30
+12/30
+12V
GND
GND
58
54
31
58
54
31
49a
C3
C2
F
31
49
C
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 86 85 30 31 31b 56d 56b 56a 56 L R 49a 13 8 9 10 11 12 8 14 15 21 1 6 5 3 2 4 1 3 4 5 7 1 3 2 17 18 10 8 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
GND4
0.014.8628.4
GND3
F2 F3 F1 F13 F16 F15 F9 F10 F 14
GND8
7.5A
7.5A
20A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
5A
G10
G11 G7 G8
1 2 5 3 4 1 0 8 9 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2
0.015.1983.4
X41
X109
60A
GND2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
0.014.8806.4 0.014.8107.4 0.015.3094.4
F.D.
F.S.
-31
58
-31
58
D0039920
+30 GND1
X30 X26 X27 X29 X28 X126 X127
BATTERY

l X40 LH taillight
l X45 RH taillight
l X126 LH headlight
l X127 RH headlight
l 0.015.3094.4 - Headlamp wiring loom - Tractor with platform



40-70
Wiring diagrams
40.3.7 - Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
5K 3K

X61 X38
X54 X112 X55
DIRECTION INDICATOR
RL2 X40 X45
POSITION BEAM
1 0
2
FULL BEAM
RIGHT
LEFT
+12/30
+12/30
+12V
GND
GND
58
54
31
58
54
31
49a
C3
C2
F
31
49
C
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 86 85 30 31 31b 56d 56b 56a 56 L R 49a 13 8 9 10 11 12 8 14 15 21 1 6 5 3 2 4 1 3 4 5 7 1 3 2 17 18 10 8 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
GND4
0.014.8628.4
GND3
F2 F3 F1 F13 F16 F15 F9 F10 F 14
GND8
7.5A
7.5A
20A
15A
15A
15A
15A
15A
5A
G10
G11 G7 G8
1 2 5 3 4 1 0 8 9 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 2
0.015.1983.4
X41
X109
60A
GND2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3
0.014.8806.4 0.014.8107.4 0.015.3094.4
F.D.
F.S.
-31
58
-31
58
D0039920
+30 GND1
X30 X26 X27 X29 X28 X126 X127
BATTERY

Legend
l X28 Horn
l X40 LH taillight
l X45 RH taillight
l X126 LH headlight
l X127 RH headlight
40-71
Wiring diagrams
l 0.015.3094.4 - Headlamp wiring loom - Tractor with platform




40.3.8 - Diagnostic accessories - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2456 - Diagnostics accessories

Key
1. Starter switch
2. Cigar lighter
3. Key-on power relay
4. Instrument panel
5. Diagnostic socket
6. Lights switch
7. Pneumatic seat air compressor
8. Platform rotating beacon switch
9. Flashing beacon
10. Roof line power relay
40-72
Wiring diagrams

11. RH loudspeaker
12. LH loudspeaker
13. Radio
14. Flashing beacon
15. Clock
16. Radio
17. Interior roof light
18. Warning beacon switch
Wiring and connectors list
l 0.014.8628.4/20 - Instrument panel wiring
l 0.014.9281.4 - Worklights wiring - Tractor with platform

m See para. 40.4.94 - Worklights wiring - Tr... - page 40-267
m See para. 40.4.95 - Worklights wiring conn... - page 40-267
l 0.014.8806.4/20 - Battery wiring

l 0.015.1983.4/10 - Power supply wiring

l 0.009.7850.4/50 - Roof line wiring - Tractor with standard cab

m See para. 40.4.37 - Roof wiring - Tractor ... - page 40-185
m See para. 40.4.38 - Location of roof line ... - page 40-187
l 0.011.0729.4/10 - Loudspeaker wiring - Tractor with standard cab

m See para. 40.4.72 - Loudspeaker wiring - T... - page 40-238
m See para. 40.4.73 - Location of speaker wi... - page 40-239
40-73
Wiring diagrams
l 0.012.9909.4 - Rotating beacon wiring
m See para. 40.4.96 - Rotating beacon wiring... - page 40-269
m See para. 40.4.97 - Location of rotating b... - page 40-269
l 0.009.7851.4/50 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab

m See para. 40.4.64 - Front-rear worklights ... - page 40-227
m See para. 40.4.65 - Supplementary workligh... - page 40-228
l 0.014.9375.4/20 - Power supply wiring - Tractor with standard cab

40.3.9 - Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
X109
X54 RL2 5K 3K X62 X52
1 0
X4 X53 X37
2
+12/30
+12/30
GND
GND
ISO
75 83 15 50 30 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 87a 87 86 85 30 1 13 8 15 21 1 2 10 13 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 7 2 3 1 8
G15
0.014.8628.4
GND4
0.014.9375.4 F9 F1 F4 F7 F8 F100 F15 F6

7.5A
7.5A
30A
15A
15A
10A
GND3
7.5A
5A
G10
2
G11 G13 G9
1 4 1 2 3 6
VERSIONE PIATTAFORMA
G38
0.015.1418.4
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2 3 1 2 1 2 8 9 15 17
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.9281.4
ISO 9141
+15
+30
+30
-31
-31
GND9
+30 GND1
X124
87
X130
2 BATTERY
X67 4
3
85
86
RL30
1 30
F1 F2 F6
0.009.7850.4
1
X63 2
1
X72 2
G19
4 8
2
X92
-
1 +
1 G26 4
X69 2
3
1
2
1
2 X80 X90 3
2
4
1
2
X91
-
1 +
D0039930 0.009.7851.4 0.012.9909.4
0.011.0729.4

Legend
l RL30 Roof line power relay
l X4 25A power socket
l X37 Pneumatic seat compressor
l X52 Rotating beacon switch, platform
l X53 Cigarette lighter
l X62 Diagnostics socket
l X63 Cab courtesy light
l X67 Rotating beacon switch
l X69 Clock
l X72 Radio
l X80 Rotating beacon
l X90 Radio
40-74
Wiring diagrams
X109
X54 RL2 5K 3K X62 X52
1 0
X4 X53 X37
2
+12/30
+12/30
GND
GND
ISO
75 83 15 50 30 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 87a 87 86 85 30 1 13 8 15 21 1 2 10 13 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 7 2 3 1 8
G15
0.014.8628.4
GND4
0.014.9375.4 F9 F1 F4 F7 F8 F100 F15 F6
7.5A
7.5A
30A
15A
15A
10A
GND3
7.5A
5A
G10
2
G11 G13 G9
1 4 1 2 3 6
G38
0.015.1418.4
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2 3 1 2 1 2 8 9 15 17
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.9281.4
ISO 9141
+15
+30
+30
-31
-31
GND9
+30 GND1
X124
87
X130
2 BATTERY
X67 4
3
85
86
RL30
1 30
F1 F2 F6
0.009.7850.4
1
X63 2
1
X72 2
G19
4 8
2
X92
-
1 +
1 G26 4
X69 2
3
1
2
1
2 X80 X90 3
2
4
1
2
X91
-
1 +
D0039930 0.009.7851.4 0.012.9909.4
0.011.0729.4

l X91 LH loudspeaker
l X92 RH loudspeaker
l X130 Shuttle lever
l 0.014.9375.4/20 - Cab power wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab



l 0.014.9281.4 - Work lights wiring loom

l 0.015.1418.4/30 - Shuttle wiring loom (cab)

m See para. 40.4.33 - Cab shuttle wiring - 0... - page 40-179
m See para. 40.4.34 - Positions of cab shutt... - page 40-180
l 0.011.0729.4/10 - Loudspeakers wiring loom

m See para. 40.4.72 - Loudspeaker wiring - T... - page 40-238
m See para. 40.4.74 - Location of speaker wi... - page 40-240
40-75
Wiring diagrams
l 0.012.9909.4 - Rotating beacon wiring loom
l 0.009.7851.4/50 - Work lights wiring loom

l 0.009.7850.4/50 - Cab roof wiring loom

40.3.10 - Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agro-
farm 85)

Legend
1. Starter switch
2. Cigarette lighter
4. Instrument panel
5. Diagnostics socket
6. Lights switch
7. Pneumatic seat compressor
8. Rotating beacon switch, platform
9. Rotating beacon
11. Rotating beacon
12. Radio
13. Lh loudspeaker
14. RH loudspeaker
40-76
Wiring diagrams

15. Clock
16. Cab courtesy light
17. Rotating beacon switch
l 0.014.9281.4 - Work lights wiring loom - Tractor with platform




l 0.011.3606.4/50 - Roof line wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
l 0.011.3596.3/40 - Wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing beacon and clock - Tractor with high visibility cab
m See para. 40.4.84 - Loudspeaker, radio, re... - page 40-254
m See para. 40.4.85 - Location of connectors... - page 40-254
40-77
Wiring diagrams
l 0.014.9376.4/10 - Cab power wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
m See para. 40.4.49 - Cab power supply wirin... - page 40-202
m See para. 40.4.50 - Location of cab power ... - page 40-203
40.3.11 - Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
X109
X54 5K 3K X62 X52
X4 X53 RL2 X37
1 0
2
+12/30
+12/30
GND
GND
ISO
75 83 15 50 30 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 87a 87 86 85 30 1 13 8 15 21 1 2 10 13 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 1 7 2 3 1 8
G15
0.014.8628.4
GND4
0.014.9376.4 F9 F1 F4 F7 F8 F100 F15 F6
7.5A
GND3
7.5A
30A
15A
15A
10A
7.5A
5A
G10
2
G11 G13 G9
1 4 1 2 3 6
G38
0.015.1418.4
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2 3 1 2 1 2 8 9 15 17
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.9281.4
ISO 9141
+15
+30
+30
-31
-31
GND7
+30 GND1
X124
7
4 X130
6 87 BATTERY
X67 5
1
85
86
RL30
3 F1 F2 F6 30
2
8
0.011.3606.4
1
X63 2
G23
1 3 4
0.011.3596.3
G26
1 1
2 2 X80
GND7
1 2 4 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4
- - 0.012.9909.4
+
X84 X86 D0039940

X89 X87 X88

Legend
l X52 Rotating beacon switch, platform
l X53 Cigarette lighter
l X62 Diagnostics socket
l X63 Cab courtesy light
l X67 Rotating beacon switch
l X84 RH loudspeaker
l X86 LH loudspeaker
l X87 Radio
l X88 Radio
l X89 Clock
40-78
Wiring diagrams

l 0.015.1418.4/30 - Cab shuttle wiring loom






l 0.011.3596.3/40 - Wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing beacon and clock
40.3.12 - Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
40-79
Wiring diagrams
5K 3K
X54
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

RL2
FUEL RESERVE
1 0
2
FUEL LEVEL
AIR FILTER
SERVICE
+12/30
+12/30
+12V
GND
GND
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 13 20 21 4 5 6 19 14 15 21 8
0.014.8628.4
GND4 GND8
F9 F1
15A
5A
G11 G1 G2 G3 G6
12 7 3 9 3 3 4 2
0.015.1983.4
60A
0.014.8630.4
GND2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 3 2
0.014.8806.4 t
0.014.8629.4 0.014.9193.4 P
P P 0.015.1597.4
D0039950
X2 X8 X5 X23
+30 GND1
X10
BATTERY

Legend
l X2 Air filter clogged sensor
l X8 Engine oil pressure switch
l X10 Fuel level sensor
l X23 Utilities circuit alarm pressure switch

l 0.014.9193.4/30 - LH drivetrain wiring loom

m See para. 40.4.27 - LH drivetrain wiring -... - page 40-171
m See para. 40.4.28 - LH drivetrain wiring c... - page 40-172


40-80
Wiring diagrams

40.3.13 - Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
5K 3K
X54
ENGINE TEMPERATURE
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE

RL2
FUEL RESERVE
1 0
2
FUEL LEVEL
AIR FILTER
SERVICE
+12/30
+12/30
+12V
GND
GND
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 13 20 21 4 5 6 19 14 15 21 8
0.014.8628.4
GND4 GND8
F9 F1
15A
5A
G11 G1 G2 G3 G6
12 7 3 9 3 3 4 2
0.015.1983.4
60A
0.014.8630.4
GND2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 4 3 2
0.014.8806.4 t
0.014.8629.4 0.014.9193.4 P
P P 0.015.1597.4
D0039950
X2 X8 X5 X23
+30 GND1
X10
BATTERY

Legend
l X2 Air filter clogged sensor
l X8 Engine oil pressure switch
l X23 Utilities circuit alarm pressure switch

40-81
Wiring diagrams
m See para. 40.4.30 - Location of LH drivetr... - page 40-173




40.3.14 - Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
X111 X110 X109

X54 RL2 RL3
X25 X31 2
1 0
2 1 2 1 75 83 15 50 30 2 3 7 8 2 3 7 8 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.014.8628.4
0.014.8107.4
G7
6
7
11
12 F9 F11 F12 F15
GND3
7.5A
15A
15A
15A
GND4
0.014.9375.4
G10
2
G11 2 3 5
G13 8 7 4 1
G8
VERSIONE
PIATTAFORMA
0.015.1983.4
0.010.8189.3
0.014.9281.4
G38
60A
60A
G31 G29
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
G16 GND2
0441.1923.4
0441.1923.4
2 X125 X123
0.014.8806.4
G19
6
G33 G 32
+30 GND1
5
2 1 2 1 2
1 BATTERY
0.009.7851.4
87
85
RL30
0.015.1435.4
0.015.1435.4
86
F7 F8 30
0.009.7850.4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
D0039960
1 2 1 2
GND9
X76 X77 X79 X78
2 4 3 1 2 4 3 1 X133 X132
X64 X71
Fig. 2461 - Work lights

Legend
l RL3 Work lights power relay
l X25 RH front work light
l X31 LH front work light
l X64 Rear work lights switch
l X71 Front work lights switch
l X76 RH front work light (on roof)
l X77 LH front work light (on roof)
40-82
Wiring diagrams
X111 X110 X109

X54 RL2 RL3
X25 X31 2
1 0
2 1 2 1 75 83 15 50 30 2 3 7 8 2 3 7 8 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.014.8628.4
0.014.8107.4
G7
6
7
11
12 F9 F11 F12 F15
GND3
7.5A
15A
15A
15A
GND4
0.014.9375.4
G10
2
G11 2 3 5
G13 8 7 4 1
G8
VERSIONE
PIATTAFORMA
0.015.1983.4
0.010.8189.3
0.014.9281.4
G38
60A
60A
G31 G29
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
G16 GND2
0441.1923.4
0441.1923.4
2 X125 X123
0.014.8806.4
G19
6
G33 G 32
+30 GND1
5
2 1 2 1 2
1 BATTERY
0.009.7851.4
87
85
RL30
0.015.1435.4
0.015.1435.4
86
F7 F8 30
0.009.7850.4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
D0039960
1 2 1 2
GND9
X76 X77 X79 X78
2 4 3 1 2 4 3 1 X133 X132
X64 X71

l X78 LH rear work light (on roof)
l X79 RH rear work light (on roof)
l X110 Corner work lights switch
l X111 Low work lights switch
l X123 Work light
l X125 Work light
l X132 RH auxiliary work light
l X133 LH auxiliary work light


l 0.015.1435.4/10 - Auxiliary work lights wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab


40-83
Wiring diagrams
l 0.009.7850.4/50 - Roof line wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab

l 0.009.7851.4/50 - Front-rear work lights wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab
l 0.014.9375.4/20 - Power wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab


40.3.15 - Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
X111 X110 X109

X54 RL2 RL3
X25 X31 2
1 0
2 1 2 1 75 83 15 50 30 2 3 7 8 2 3 7 8 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.014.8628.4
0.014.8107.4
G7
6
7
11
12 F9 F11 F12 F15
GND3
7.5A
15A
15A
15A
GND4
0.014.9375.4
G10
2
G11 2 3 5
G13 8 7 4 1
G8
VERSIONE
PIATTAFORMA
0.015.1983.4
0.010.8189.3
0.014.9281.4
G38
60A
60A
G31 G29
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
G16 GND2
0441.1923.4
0441.1923.4
2 X125 X123
0.014.8806.4
G19
6
G33 G 32
+30 GND1
5
2 1 2 1 2
1 BATTERY
0.009.7851.4
87
85
RL30
0.015.1435.4
0.015.1435.4
86
F7 F8 30
0.009.7850.4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
D0039960
1 2 1 2
GND9
X76 X77 X79 X78
2 4 3 1 2 4 3 1 X133 X132
X64 X71

Legend
40-84
Wiring diagrams
X111 X110 X109

X54 RL2 RL3
X25 X31 2
1 0
2 1 2 1 75 83 15 50 30 2 3 7 8 2 3 7 8 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.014.8628.4
0.014.8107.4
G7
6
7
11
12 F9 F11 F12 F15
GND3
7.5A
15A
15A
15A
GND4
0.014.9375.4
G10
2
G11 2 3 5
G13 8 7 4 1
G8
VERSIONE
PIATTAFORMA
0.015.1983.4
0.010.8189.3
0.014.9281.4
G38
60A
60A
G31 G29
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
G16 GND2
0441.1923.4
0441.1923.4
2 X125 X123
0.014.8806.4
G19
6
G33 G 32
+30 GND1
5
2 1 2 1 2
1 BATTERY
0.009.7851.4
87
85
RL30
0.015.1435.4
0.015.1435.4
86
F7 F8 30
0.009.7850.4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
D0039960
1 2 1 2
GND9
X76 X77 X79 X78
2 4 3 1 2 4 3 1 X133 X132
X64 X71

l X123 Work light
l X125 Work light


l 0.015.1435.4/10 - Auxiliary work lights wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab

40-85
Wiring diagrams


m See para. 40.4.66 - Location of front-rear... - page 40-230


40.3.16 - Worklights - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2462 - Worklights

Key
1. Starter switch
2. Low worklights switch
3. Corner lights switch
5. Worklights power relay
6. Lights switch
7. RH supplementary worklight
40-86
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2462 - Worklights

8. LH supplementary worklight
9. Worklight
10. Worklight
12. Front worklights switch
13. Rear worklights switch
14. LH rear worklight (on cab roof)
15. RH rear worklight (on cab roof)
16. LH front worklight (on cab roof)
17. RH front worklight (on cab roof)
18. RH front worklight
19. LH front worklight
l 0.010.8189.3/40 - Front lights wiring - Tractor with cab

l 0441.1923.4 - Lower front lights wiring - Tractor with cab

l 0.015.1437.4/10 - Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

l 0.014.9281.4 - Worklights wiring - Tractor with platform

40-87
Wiring diagrams

l 0.011.3606.4/50 - Roof line wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

l 0.011.3595.3/10 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

m See para. 40.4.77 - Location of work light... - page 40-244
l 0.014.9376.4/10 - Cab power supply wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

l 0.014.8107.4/20 - Hood lights wiring

40.3.17 - Work lights - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)
X111 X110 X109
X54 RL2 RL3
X25 X31 2
1 0
2 1 2 1 75 83 15 50 30 2 3 7 8 2 3 7 8 87a 87 85 86 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10
0.014.8628.4
0.014.8107.4
G7
6
7
11
12 F9 F11 F12 F15
GND3
7.5A
15A
15A
15A
GND4
0.014.9376.4
G10
2
G11 2 3 5
G13 8 7 4 1
G8
VERSIONE
PIATTAFORMA
0.015.1983.4
0.010.8189.3
0.014.9281.4
G38
60A
60A
GND7
G31 G29
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
G16 GND2
0441.1923.4
0441.1923.4
2 X125 X123
0.015.2979.4
G19 0.014.8806.4
4
3
2
G33 G 32
+30 GND1
1
1 2 1 2
G39 G42 G40 G41 BATTERY
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
87
85
RL30
0.015.1437.4
0.015.1437.4
GND7 86
F7 F8 30
0.011.3606.4
0.015.1437.4
1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 7 4 6 5 1 3 2 8 7 4 6 5 1 3 2 8 X133 X132
D0039970
X76 X77 X79 X78

X64 X71
Fig. 2463
Legend
40-88
Wiring diagrams
l X123 Work light
l X125 Work light
l 0.014.9376.4/10 - Cab power wiring loom


l 0.010.8189.3/40 - Headlights wiring loom

l 0441.1923.4 - Lower front lights wiring loom

l 0.015.1437.4/10 - Auxiliary work lights wiring loom





l 0.015.1437.4/10 - Auxiliary work lights wiring loom


40-89
Wiring diagrams
40.3.18 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
X54 RL2
2
1 0
X34 X35
M M
0.014.9375.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 1 2 1
GND3
F9
15A
GND4
G10
2
X68 X70 3
4
G11
31 T I 53M 53S 15 2 7 5 8 6 3
G17
2
1
G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2
0.009.7851.4
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
+30 GND1
BATTERY
G19
2 3
X108 M
1 7
87
85
86 RL30
F5 F6 30
G20
53 3 2
23 4
X81 2 6
31
31b 4 1
53a 1 3
1
GND9
3 7 8 6 4 1 2
0.010.4516.3 0.009.7850.4
D0039980
X66
X65
Fig. 2464 - Windscreen wipers

Legend
l X108 Rear screen wiper motor
l X34 Windscreen washer pump
l X35 Rear screen washer pump
l X65 Rear screen wiper switch
l X66 Windscreen washer pump switch
l X68 Windscreen wiper intermittent timer
l X70 Windscreen wiper switch
l X81 Windscreen wiper motor



40-90
Wiring diagrams
l 0.010.4516.3 - Windscreen wiper wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab
m See para. 40.4.69 - Windscreen wiper wirin... - page 40-233
m See para. 40.4.70 - Windscreen wiper conne... - page 40-234

40.3.19 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)
X54 RL2
2
1 0
X34 X35
M M
0.014.9375.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 1 2 1
GND3
F9
15A
GND4
G10
2
X68 X70 3
4
G11
31 T I 53M 53S 15 2 7 5 8 6 3
G17
2
1
G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2
0.009.7851.4
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
+30 GND1
BATTERY
G19
2 3
X108 M
1 7
87
85
86 RL30
F5 F6 30
G20
53 3 2
23 4
X81 2 6
31
31b 4 1
53a 1 3
1
GND9
3 7 8 6 4 1 2
0.010.4516.3 0.009.7850.4
D0039980
X66
X65

Legend
40-91
Wiring diagrams


l 0.010.4516.3 - Windscreen wiper wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab

m See para. 40.4.71 - Location of windscreen... - page 40-236

40.3.20 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85)
X54 RL2
2
1 0
X34 X35
M M
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 1 2 1
GND3
F9
15A
GND4
X70 G10
2
2
X68 0
1 3
4
G11
31 T I 53M 53S 15 5 2 1 3 6
0.011.3596.3
G17
2
1 G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
G23
1 2
X85 M
4
+30 GND1
BATTERY
GND7
87
85
86 RL30
F5 F6 30
G20
53 3 3
23 4
2 2
X81
31
31b 4 4
53a 1 1
1
GND7
5 2 1 3 6 3 2
0.011.3597.3 0.011.3606.4
D0039990
1
X66
0
2
X65

Legend
40-92
Wiring diagrams
X54 RL2
2
1 0
X34 X35
M M
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 1 2 1
GND3
F9
15A
GND4
X70 G10
2
2
X68 0
1 3
4
G11
31 T I 53M 53S 15 5 2 1 3 6
0.011.3596.3
G17
2
1 G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
G23
1 2
X85 M
4
+30 GND1
BATTERY
GND7
87
85
86 RL30
F5 F6 30
G20
53 3 3
23 4
2 2
X81
31
31b 4 4
53a 1 1
1
GND7
5 2 1 3 6 3 2
0.011.3597.3 0.011.3606.4
D0039990
1
X66
0
2
X65



l 0.011.3597.3 - Windscreen wiper wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
40-93
Wiring diagrams
40.3.21 - Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
X54 RL2
2
1 0
X34 X35
M M
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 2 1 2 1
GND3
F9
15A
GND4
X70 G10
2
2
X68 0
1 3
4
G11
31 T I 53M 53S 15 5 2 1 3 6
0.011.3596.3
G17
2
1 G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
G23
1 2
X85 M
4
+30 GND1
BATTERY
GND7
87
85
86 RL30
F5 F6 30
G20
53 3 3
23 4
2 2
X81
31
31b 4 4
53a 1 1
1
GND7
5 2 1 3 6 3 2
0.011.3597.3 0.011.3606.4
D0039990
1
X66
0
2
X65

Legend


40-94
Wiring diagrams
l 0.011.3597.3 - Windscreen wiper wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
m See para. 40.4.83 - Location of windscreen... - page 40-253
40.3.22 - Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9375.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
GND4
F9
15A
G10
2
G11
G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2
0.010.2147.2
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4

G21
2 D0040000
1
+30 GND1
F4
BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2
I II III IV C
87
M 85
86
RL30
30
X101 X100
GND9
X102
0.009.7850.4
Fig. 2466 - Heating

Legend
l X100 Fan
l X101 Resistor
l X102 Fan speed selector switch

40-95
Wiring diagrams

l 0.010.2147.2 - Heating loom - Tractor with standard cab

m See para. 40.4.40 - Heating wiring - Tract... - page 40-192
m See para. 40.4.41 - Heating system wiring ... - page 40-192

40.3.23 - Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9375.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
GND4
F9
15A
G10
2
G11
G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
2
0.010.2147.2
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4

G21
2 D0040000
1
+30 GND1
F4
BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2
I II III IV C
87
M 85
86
RL30
30
X101 X100
GND9
X102
0.009.7850.4
Fig. 2466 - Heating

Legend
l X100 Fan
l X101 Resistor
40-96
Wiring diagrams


l 0.010.2147.2 - Heating loom - Tractor with standard cab

m See para. 40.4.40 - Heating wiring - Tract... - page 40-192
m See para. 40.4.42 - Location of heating wi... - page 40-193

40.3.24 - Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
GND4
F9
15A
G10
2
G11
RL50
G38
0.010.2554.2
30 85 86 87 87b
60A
60A
1
X98 M
2
1
X99 M
2 G16 GND2
2
87b
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
87 G25
RL51 86
85
2
1
+30 GND1
30 F130
40A
BATTERY
I
1
II
2 87
X95 III
IV
3 85
86 RL30
4
C
5 30
GND7
4
3
0.011.3606.4
X96 2
1
4
3
X93 2
1
D0040010
Fig. 2467 - Heating

Legend
l RL50 3rd fan speed relay
l RL51 Max. fan speed relay
l X93 LH resistor
l X96 RH resistor
l X98 LH fan
l X99 RH fan
40-97
Wiring diagrams


l 0.010.2554.2 - Heating wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab

40.3.25 - Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
GND4
F9
15A
G10
2
G11
RL50
G38
0.010.2554.2
30 85 86 87 87b
60A
60A
1
X98 M
2
1
X99 M
2 G16 GND2
2
87b
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
87 G25
RL51 86
85
2
1
+30 GND1
30 F130
40A
BATTERY
I
1
II
2 87
X95 III
IV
3 85
86 RL30
4
C
5 30
GND7
4
3
0.011.3606.4
X96 2
1
4
3
X93 2
1
D0040010
Fig. 2467 - Heating

Legend
40-98
Wiring diagrams
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
GND4
F9
15A
G10
2
G11
RL50
G38
0.010.2554.2
30 85 86 87 87b
60A
60A
1
X98 M
2
1
X99 M
2 G16 GND2
2
87b
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8628.4
87 G25
RL51 86
85
2
1
+30 GND1
30 F130
40A
BATTERY
I
1
II
2 87
X95 III
IV
3 85
86 RL30
4
C
5 30
GND7
4
3
0.011.3606.4
X96 2
1
4
3
X93 2
1
D0040010
Fig. 2467 - Heating

l X93 LH resistor
l X96 RH resistor
l X98 LH fan
l X99 RH fan


l 0.010.2554.2 - Heating wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab

m See para. 40.4.57 - Location of heating wi... - page 40-215
40-99
Wiring diagrams
40.3.26 - A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9375.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
0.014.8628.4
F9
GND4
15A
G10
1
2
G11 G1
13
G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
1 2 3 1
G21 0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8629.4

2 0.015.1597.4
1
X9
G22 +30 GND1
0.010.2153.2
1
2 BATTERY
3
4
30 86 85 87 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2
I II III IV C GND9 F3 F4
t
M
X103 X101 X100 G18

RL53 X102 4
3
0.009.7853.3
87 2
85
RL30 86
1
30
2 1 30 86 85 87 87a 1 2 3 1
D0040020 0.009.7850.4
M
X105
RL55 X104 X107
Fig. 2468 - Air conditioning system

Legend
l RL53 Compressor relay
l RL55 Air conditioner heat exchanger fan control relay
l X9 Air conditioning compressor
l X100 Fan
l X101 Resistor
l X103 Air conditioning temperature thermostat
l X104 Air conditioning pressure switch
l X105 Air conditioner heat exchanger fan



40-100
Wiring diagrams
l 0.009.7853.3/20 - A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab
m See para. 40.4.46 - Air conditioning conde... - page 40-197
m See para. 40.4.47 - Air conditioner exchan... - page 40-199

l 0.010.2153.2 - A/C system wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab

m See para. 40.4.43 - Air conditioning wirin... - page 40-194
m See para. 40.4.44 - Air conditioner wiring... - page 40-195

40.3.27 - A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9375.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
0.014.8628.4
F9
GND4
15A
G10
1
2
G11 G1
13
G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
1 2 3 1
G21 0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8629.4

2 0.015.1597.4
1
X9
G22 +30 GND1
0.010.2153.2
1
2 BATTERY
3
4
30 86 85 87 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2
t
M
X103 X101 X100 G18

RL53 X102 4
3
0.009.7853.3
87 2
85
RL30 86
1
30
2 1 30 86 85 87 87a 1 2 3 1
D0040020 0.009.7850.4
M
X105
RL55 X104 X107

Legend
l RL53 Compressor relay
l X100 Fan
l X101 Resistor
40-101
Wiring diagrams
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9375.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
0.014.8628.4
F9
GND4
15A
G10
1
2
G11 G1
13
G38
60A
60A
G16 GND2
1 2 3 1
G21 0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8629.4

2 0.015.1597.4
1
X9
G22 +30 GND1
0.010.2153.2
1
2 BATTERY
3
4
30 86 85 87 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 1 2
t
M
X103 X101 X100 G18

RL53 X102 4
3
0.009.7853.3
87 2
85
RL30 86
1
30
2 1 30 86 85 87 87a 1 2 3 1
D0040020 0.009.7850.4
M
X105
RL55 X104 X107





l 0.009.7853.3/20 - A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab
m See para. 40.4.46 - Air conditioning conde... - page 40-197
m See para. 40.4.48 - Location of A/C system... - page 40-201

40-102
Wiring diagrams
l 0.010.2153.2 - A/C system wiring loom - Tractor with standard cab

40.3.28 - A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
0.014.8628.4
F9
GND4
15A
G10
1
RL50 RL52 2
X94 X97 G11 G1

t 13
0.010.2560.0 G38
30 85 86 87 87b 87b 87 86 85 30 2 1 2 1
1
X98
60A
60A
M
2
1
X99 M
2
G16 GND2
1 2 3 1
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8629.4
87b
87 G25
RL51 86 2 0.015.1597.4
85 1
30 X9
G21 +30 GND1
1
I
1 2 BATTERY
II
2 3
X95 III
IV
3
4
C
5
4
G24
X96 3
2
3
6
1
8
7
5
4
F3 F4 F130 4
X93 3
0.011.3610.3
2
2
40A
1
1
87
85
RL30 86
D0040030 30
GND7
2 1 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 87 87a 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
0.011.3606.4
M M
X105 X106
RL55 RL54
X104

Legend
l RL52 Compressor and A/C 1st speed start relay
l RL54 Auxiliary air conditioner heat exchanger fan control relay
l X93 LH resistor
l X94 A/C on switch
l X96 RH resistor
l X98 LH fan
l X99 RH fan
l X106 Auxiliary A/C system heat exchanger fan
40-103
Wiring diagrams




l 0.011.3610.3/20 - A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
m See para. 40.4.61 - Air conditioning coole... - page 40-223
m See para. 40.4.62 - Air conditioning excha... - page 40-223
l 0.010.2560.0 - A/C system wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
m See para. 40.4.59 - Air conditioner wiring... - page 40-219
40-104
Wiring diagrams
40.3.29 - A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm
85 -> 5001)
X54 RL2
1 0
2
0.014.9376.4
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30
0.014.8628.4
F9
GND4
15A
G10
1
RL50 RL52 2
X94 X97 G11 G1

t 13
0.010.2560.0 G38
30 85 86 87 87b 87b 87 86 85 30 2 1 2 1
1
X98
60A
60A
M
2
1
X99 M
2
G16 GND2
1 2 3 1
0.015.1983.4 0.014.8806.4 0.014.8629.4
87b
87 G25
RL51 86 2 0.015.1597.4
85 1
30 X9
G21 +30 GND1
1
I
1 2 BATTERY
II
2 3
X95 III
IV
3
4
C
5
4
G24
X96 3
2
3
6
1
8
7
5
4
F3 F4 F130 4
X93 3
0.011.3610.3
2
2
40A
1
1
87
85
RL30 86
D0040030 30
GND7
2 1 30 86 85 87 87a 30 86 85 87 87a 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2
0.011.3606.4
M M
X105 X106
RL55 RL54
X104

Legend
l RL52 Compressor and A/C 1st speed start relay
l RL54 Auxiliary air conditioner heat exchanger fan control relay
l X93 LH resistor
l X94 A/C on switch
l X96 RH resistor
l X98 LH fan
l X99 RH fan
l X106 Auxiliary A/C system heat exchanger fan
40-105
Wiring diagrams



l 0.011.3610.3/20 - A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
m See para. 40.4.61 - Air conditioning coole... - page 40-223
l 0.010.2560.0 - A/C system wiring loom - Tractor with high visibility cab
40.3.30 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2470 - Transmission

Key
40-106
Wiring diagrams
1. Starter switch
2. Instrument panel
3. H/L lever
5. Differential lock control switch
6. H/L travel control power supply relay
7. Lights switch
8. 4WD control switch
9. Operator present sensor
10. Not used
11. Not used
12. Not used
13. Clutch pedal pressed switch
14. H/L control solenoid valve
15. Differential lock control solenoid valve
16. 4WD control solenoid valve
17. Wheel speed sensor
18. Transmission oil filter clogging pressure switch
19. Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter clogging
20. 4WD engagement switch


l 0.014.9193.4/20 - LH drivetrain wiring

l 0.014.8630.4/20 - RH drivetrain wiring

40-107
Wiring diagrams
40.3.31 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
5K 3K X50 X109 X51
X54 X47 RL2 RL4
DOUBLE TRACTION
0
OBSTRUCTION
21
WHEEL SPEED
DIFFERENTIAL
+12/30
+12/30
HI-LO
SEAT
+12V
GND
GND
75 83 15 50 30 14 13 18 22 8 14 15 17 18 1 21 1 2 3 4 87a 87 85 86 30 7 8 2 3 87a 87 85 86 30 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 2 1 3 5 4 6
GND4 GND3
0.014.8628.4
F9 F6 F1 F15
GND8
7.5A
7.5A
15A
5A
3
2 F
X36
1
G11 G9 G2 G3 G5 G6
1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 4 5 1 2 3 4
0.015.1983.4
0.014.9193.4
X58 X59 X60
X73
60A
0.014.8630.4
0.014.8806.4
1
X11 2
3
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
freq.
X13 P
1
X19 X20 X22 X24

GND2
D0040050
G37 G4
11
10
9
+30 GND1
8
0.015.1418.4
0.015.1998.4
7
BATTERY 6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 4 5 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 4 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2
pos freq freq
REVERSE SPEED SENSOR
+30
+30
SEAT SENSOR
OIL TEMPERATURE
-31
-31
P P t
+15V
CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCH PEDAL
+5V
WHEEL SPEED
PROGRAM FAILURE
COMFORT CLUTCH
EV ON-OFF FRONT
PRESS. SWITCH
DIG. CLUTCH S.
X129 X131 X122 X115 X117 X118 X120 X119 X114 X116
EV REVERSE +
EV REVERSE -
EV PROP +
EV PROP -
X130

Legend
l RL4 H/L range selector power relay
l X11 Dual traction selector switch
l X13 Transmission oil filter clogged pressure switch
l X19 Wheel speed sensor
l X20 Dual traction selector solenoid valve
l X22 Differential lock selector solenoid valve
l X24 H/L range selector solenoid valve
l X36 Operator present sensor
l X47 H/L lever
l X50 Differential lock selector switch
l X51 Dual traction selector switch
l X58 Configuration connector
l X114 Engine speed sensor
l X115 Shuttle sensor
l X116 Oil temperature sensor
l X117 Clutch oil pressure switch
l X118 Forward drive selection solenoid valve
l X119 Reverse drive selection solenoid valve
l X120 Proportional solenoid valve
l X122 PALL filter clogging sensor
40-108
Wiring diagrams
5K 3K X50 X109 X51
X54 X47 RL2 RL4
DOUBLE TRACTION
0
OBSTRUCTION
21
WHEEL SPEED
DIFFERENTIAL
+12/30
+12/30
HI-LO
SEAT
+12V
GND
GND
75 83 15 50 30 14 13 18 22 8 14 15 17 18 1 21 1 2 3 4 87a 87 85 86 30 7 8 2 3 87a 87 85 86 30 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 2 1 3 5 4 6
GND4 GND3
0.014.8628.4
F9 F6 F1 F15
GND8
7.5A
7.5A
15A
5A
3
2 F
X36
1
G11 G9 G2 G3 G5 G6
1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 4 5 1 2 3 4
0.015.1983.4
0.014.9193.4
X58 X59 X60
X73
60A
0.014.8630.4
0.014.8806.4
1
X11 2
3
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 1 2
freq.
X13 P
1
X19 X20 X22 X24

GND2
D0040050
G37 G4
11
10
9
+30 GND1
8
0.015.1418.4
0.015.1998.4
7
BATTERY 6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 4 5 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 4 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 1 2
pos freq freq
REVERSE SPEED SENSOR
+30
+30
SEAT SENSOR
OIL TEMPERATURE
-31
-31
P P t
+15V
CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCH PEDAL
+5V
WHEEL SPEED
PROGRAM FAILURE
COMFORT CLUTCH
EV ON-OFF FRONT
PRESS. SWITCH
DIG. CLUTCH S.
X129 X131 X122 X115 X117 X118 X120 X119 X114 X116
EV REVERSE +
EV REVERSE -
EV PROP +
EV PROP -
X130

l X129 Not used
l X131 Clutch pedal position sensor





l 0.015.1998.4/10 - Drivetrain shuttle wiring loom

m See para. 40.4.31 - Drivetrain shuttle wir... - page 40-176
m See para. 40.4.32 - Position of drivetrain... - page 40-176
40-109
Wiring diagrams
40.3.32 - PTO (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
PTO ECU 5K 3K
X109 X48 X49

X54 RL2
FRONT PTO SWITCH
REAR PTO SWITCH

FRONT PTO LED
1 0
FRONT PTO EV
REAR PTO LED
2
REAR PTO EV
PTO SYNCRO
FRONT PTO
REAR PTO
PTO 1000
PTO ECO
PTO 540
+12/30
+12/30
GND
+12V
GND
GND
+15
D+
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 9 2 17 6 1 15 14 7 12 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 7 8 13 16 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 21 24 2 3 7 8
0.014.8628.4
GND4 GND3 GND8
F9 F1 F15 F10
7.5A
15A
15A
5A
G11 G1 G6 G2
2 8 9 3 4 3 4 5
0.015.1983.4
60A
0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4
0.014.8630.4
GND2
+30B 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 4 1 4 1 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 0.014.9193.4
D0040060
+30 GND1
X3 D+ B+ X21 X14 X15 X43 X42 X39 X46
BATTERY
Fig. 2472 - PTO

Legend
l D+ B+ Alternator
l PTO ECU
l X3 Front PTO solenoid valve
l X14 PTO ECO selector switch
l X15 Ground speed PTO selector switch
l X21 Rear PTO control solenoid valve
l X39 LH rear PTO control switch (on mudguard)
l X42 PTO 540 selector switch
l X46 RH rear PTO control switch (on mudguard)
l X48 Front PTO control switch
l X49 Rear PTO control switch

40-110
Wiring diagrams




40.3.33 - PTO (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
PTO ECU 5K 3K
X109 X48 X49

X54 RL2
FRONT PTO SWITCH
REAR PTO SWITCH

FRONT PTO LED
1 0
FRONT PTO EV
REAR PTO LED
2
REAR PTO EV
PTO SYNCRO
FRONT PTO
REAR PTO
PTO 1000
PTO ECO
PTO 540
+12/30
+12/30
GND
+12V
GND
GND
+15
D+
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 9 2 17 6 1 15 14 7 12 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 7 8 13 16 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 21 24 2 3 7 8
0.014.8628.4
GND4 GND3 GND8
F9 F1 F15 F10
7.5A
15A
15A
5A
G11 G1 G6 G2
2 8 9 3 4 3 4 5
0.015.1983.4
60A
0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4
0.014.8630.4
GND2
+30B 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 4 1 4 1 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 0.014.9193.4
D0040060
+30 GND1
X3 D+ B+ X21 X14 X15 X43 X42 X39 X46
BATTERY
Fig. 2472 - PTO

Legend
l D+ B+ Alternator
l PTO ECU
l X3 Front PTO solenoid valve
l X14 PTO ECO selector switch
l X15 Ground speed PTO selector switch
l X21 Rear PTO control solenoid valve
l X39 LH rear PTO control switch (on mudguard)
40-111
Wiring diagrams
PTO ECU 5K 3K
X109 X48 X49

X54 RL2
FRONT PTO SWITCH
REAR PTO SWITCH

FRONT PTO LED
1 0
FRONT PTO EV
REAR PTO LED
2
REAR PTO EV
PTO SYNCRO
FRONT PTO
REAR PTO
PTO 1000
PTO ECO
PTO 540
+12/30
+12/30
GND
+12V
GND
GND
+15
D+
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 9 2 17 6 1 15 14 7 12 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 3 7 8 13 16 8 9 10 11 13 14 15 21 24 2 3 7 8
0.014.8628.4
GND4 GND3 GND8
F9 F1 F15 F10
7.5A
15A
15A
5A
G11 G1 G6 G2
2 8 9 3 4 3 4 5
0.015.1983.4
60A
0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4
0.014.8630.4
GND2
+30B 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 3 4 1 4 1 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 0.014.9193.4
D0040060
+30 GND1
X3 D+ B+ X21 X14 X15 X43 X42 X39 X46
BATTERY
Fig. 2472 - PTO

l X46 RH rear PTO control switch (on mudguard)
l X48 Front PTO control switch
l X49 Rear PTO control switch





40-112
Wiring diagrams
40.3.34 - Brakes (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
X109
X54 RL2 X57 X56 X40 X45 X38
1 0
2
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 1 2 - + G 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 6
GND4
0.014.8628.4
F1 F5 F9 F15
7.5A
10A
15A
5A
GND3
GND8
G11 G1
9 10 13 GND
5K
0.015.1983.4
8 GND
7 BRAKES OIL LEVEL
12 TRAILER PRESSURE
14
15
+12V
+12/30
3K
21 +12/30
60A
22 HAND BRAKE
GND2 G2
1 2 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 L 0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4
0.014.9193.4
D0040040
+30 GND1
X1 X44
BATTERY
G14 G12
0.014.1645.4
P
X16
Fig. 2473 - Brakes

Legend
l X1 Brake fluid level sensor
l X16 Trailer braking low pressure switch
l X40 LH taillight
l X44 Handbrake switch
l X45 RH taillight
l X56 Brake pedal depressed switch
l X57 Trailer pressure indicator

40-113
Wiring diagrams


l 0.014.1645.4/10 - Hydraulic trailer braking wiring loom

m See para. 40.4.99 - Trailer hydraulic brak... - page 40-273

40.3.35 - Brakes (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
X109
X54 RL2 X57 X56 X40 X45 X38
1 0
2
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 1 2 - + G 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 6
GND4
0.014.8628.4
F1 F5 F9 F15
7.5A
10A
15A
5A
GND3
GND8
G11 G1
9 10 13 GND
5K
0.015.1983.4
8 GND
7 BRAKES OIL LEVEL
12 TRAILER PRESSURE
14
15
+12V
+12/30
3K
21 +12/30
60A
22 HAND BRAKE
GND2 G2
1 2 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 L 0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4
0.014.9193.4
D0040040
+30 GND1
X1 X44
BATTERY
G14 G12
0.014.1645.4
X16
Fig. 2473 - Brakes

Legend
l X1 Brake fluid level sensor
l X16 Trailer braking low pressure switch
l X40 LH taillight
l X45 RH taillight
40-114
Wiring diagrams
X109
X54 RL2 X57 X56 X40 X45 X38
1 0
2
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 1 2 - + G 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 6
GND4
0.014.8628.4
F1 F5 F9 F15
7.5A
10A
15A
5A
GND3
GND8
G11 G1
9 10 13 GND
5K
0.015.1983.4
8 GND
7 BRAKES OIL LEVEL
12 TRAILER PRESSURE
14
15
+12V
+12/30
3K
21 +12/30
60A
22 HAND BRAKE
GND2 G2
1 2 1 2 1 2
0.014.8806.4 L 0.014.8629.4
0.015.1597.4
0.014.9193.4
D0040040
+30 GND1
X1 X44
BATTERY
G14 G12
0.014.1645.4
P
X16
Fig. 2473 - Brakes

l X56 Brake pedal depressed switch




l 0.014.1645.4/10 - Hydraulic trailer braking wiring loom


40-115
Wiring diagrams
40.3.36 - CAN BUS (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2474 - CAN BUS

Key
1. Starter switch
3. Instrument panel
40-116
Wiring diagrams


40.3.37 - CAN BUS (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
5K 3K
X54 RL2
1 0
2
CAN RES
CAN H
+12/30
+12/30
CAN L
0.014.8628.4
+12V
GND
GND
75 83 15 50 30 87a 87 85 86 30 13 2 3 4 8 14 15 21
GND4
F1 F6 F9
7.5A
15A
5A
G11 G9
1 2 3 4 5
0.015.1983.4
60A
0.015.1418.4
GND2
1 2 3 4 1 2 8 9 10 11 15
0.014.8806.4
+15
+30
+30
-31
-31
D0040070
CAN H
X128
CAN L
+30 GND1
X130
BATTERY
Fig. 2475 - Can bus

Legend
l X128 Auxiliary CANBUS socket

40-117
Wiring diagrams

40-118
Wiring diagrams
40.4 - Wiring harnesses
40.4.1 - Hood lights wiring - 0.014.8107.4/20
Fig. 2476 - Hood lights wiring

Connectors list
l G7 - To instrument panel wiring
l X25 - RH front work light
l X26 - RH high beam headlight
l X27 - RH low beam headlight
l X28 - Horn
l X29 - LH low beam headlight
l X30 - LH high beam headlight
l X31 - LH front work light
40-119
Wiring diagrams
40.4.2 - Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring loom
Fig. 2477 - Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors

0.014.8107.4/20
l See para. 40.4.1 - Hood lights wiring - 0... - page 40-119
Connector positioning
Table 49
Connec- Connector position Connec- Connector position
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G7 X25
- 40-82
40-86
X26
40-67
40-69
X27
40-67
40-69
Fig. 2478 Fig. 2479
40-120
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X28 X31
40-67 40-82
40-69 40-86
X29
40-67
40-69
X30
40-67
40-69
Fig. 2479 Fig. 2479
40.4.3 - Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
G7
X27 X28
X29
X26
X30
X25
X31
F0123151
Fig. 2480 - Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors

0.014.8107.4/20
l See para. 40.4.1 - Hood lights wiring - 0... - page 40-119
40-121
Wiring diagrams
Table 50
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G7 X25
- 40-84
40-88
X26
40-68
40-71
X27
40-68
40-71
Fig. 2481 Fig. 2481
40.4.4 - Engine wiring - version with front battery - 0.014.8629.4/20
Fig. 2483 - Engine wiring - version with front battery 1/2
40-122
Wiring diagrams
Connectors list
l +50 - Starter motor
l +30B - Battery
l B+ - Alternator
l D+ - Alternator
l RL42 - Preheating relay
l RL42B - Preheating relay
l W - Alternator
l X1 - Brake fluid level sensor
l X2 - Air filter clogging sensor
l X3 - Front PTO solenoid valve
l X5 - Engine temperature sensor
l X6 - Overboost device
l X7 - Engine stop device
l X8 - Engine oil pressure switch
l X9 - Air conditioning system compressor
Fig. 2484 - Engine wiring - version with front battery 2/2
40-123
Wiring diagrams
40.4.5 - Engine wiring connector positions - version with front battery (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
Fig. 2485 - Engine wiring connector positions - version with front battery
0.014.8629.4/20
l See para. 40.4.4 - Engine wiring - versio... - page 40-122
Connector positions
Table 51
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL42 +30B
40-64 –
RL42B
40-64
Fig. 2486 Fig. 2487
40-124
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X2 X8
40-79 40-79
Fig. 2488 Fig. 2489

X9 X7
40-100 40-64
40-103
Fig. 2490 Fig. 2491

X5 X1
40-64 40-113
40-79
X6
40-64
Fig. 2492 Fig. 2493

G1 +50
– 40-64
Fig. 2494 Fig. 2495
40-125
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
W
40-64
D+
40-64
40-110
B+
40-64
40-110
Fig. 2496
40.4.6 - Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with front battery (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
Fig. 2496 - Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with front battery
0.014.8629.4/20
l See para. 40.4.4 - Engine wiring - versio... - page 40-122
40-126
Wiring diagrams
Table 52
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL42 +30B
40-65 -
RL42B
40-65
Fig. 2496 Fig. 2496

X2 X8
40-81 40-81
Fig. 2496 Fig. 2496

X9 X7
40-101 40-65
40-104
Fig. 2496 Fig. 2496

X5 X1
40-65 40-114
40-81
X6
40-65
Fig. 2496 Fig. 2496
40-127
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G1 +50
- 40-65
Fig. 2496 Fig. 2496

W
40-65
D+
40-65
40-111
B+
40-65
40-111
Fig. 2496
40.4.7 - Engine wiring (version with lateral battery) - 0.015.1597.4/20
Fig. 2497 - Engine wiring - version with lateral battery 1/2

Connectors list
l +50 - Starter motor
40-128
Wiring diagrams

l +30B - Battery
l B+ - Alternator
l D+ - Alternator
l RL42 - Preheating relay
l W - Alternator
l X1 - Brake fluid level sensor
l X2 - Air filter clogging sensor
l X3 - Front PTO solenoid valve
l X5 - Engine temperature sensor
l X6 - Overboost device
l X7 - Engine stop device
l X8 - Engine oil pressure switch
l X9 - Air conditioning system compressor
40-129
Wiring diagrams
40-130
Wiring diagrams
40.4.8 - Engine wiring connector positions - version with lateral battery (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
Fig. 2499 - Engine wiring connector positions - version with lateral battery
0.015.1597.4/20
l See para. 40.4.7 - Engine wiring (version... - page 40-128
Connector positions
Table 53
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X3 X2
40-110 40-79
Fig. 2500 Fig. 2501
40-131
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30B X8
– 40-79
RL42
40-64
RL42B
40-64
Fig. 2502 Fig. 2503

X9 X7
40-100 40-64
40-103
Fig. 2504 Fig. 2505

X5 X1
40-64 40-113
40-64
X6
40-64
Fig. 2506 Fig. 2507

G1
–
Fig. 2508
40-132
Wiring diagrams
40.4.9 - Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with lateral battery (Agrofarm
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
Fig. 2508 - Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with lateral battery
0.015.1597.4/20
l See para. 40.4.7 - Engine wiring (version... - page 40-128
Table 54
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X3 X2
40-111 40-81
Fig. 2508 Fig. 2508
40-133
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30B X8
- 40-81
RL42
40-65
RL42B
40-65
Fig. 2508 Fig. 2508

X9 X7
40-101 40-65
40-104
Fig. 2508 Fig. 2508

X5 X1
40-65 40-114
40-65
X6
40-65
Fig. 2508 Fig. 2508

G1
-
Fig. 2508
40-134
Wiring diagrams
40.4.10 - Battery wiring - 0.014.8806.4/20
Fig. 2509 - Battery wiring

Connectors list
l +30 - Battery
l +30A - Battery
l +30B - Battery
l +30C - Starter motor
l GND1 - Battery
l GND2 - Earthing point 2
40-135
Wiring diagrams
40.4.11 - Battery wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
GND5
GND6
D0037101
Fig. 2510 - Battery wiring connector positions

40-136
Wiring diagrams
+30 +30A +30B

+30C
GND1
GND2
F0123281
Fig. 2511 - Battery wiring connector positions - version with front battery
0.014.8806.4/20
l See para. 40.4.10 - Battery wiring - 0.014... - page 40-135
Connector positions
Table 55
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30A GND1
– –
+30B
–
+30
–
Fig. 2512 Fig. 2513

+30C GND5
40-64 –
GND6
–
Fig. 2514 Fig. 2515
40-137
Wiring diagrams
View of wiring
GND1
GND2
+30C
+30 +30A
+30B
F0123271
Fig. 2516 - Battery wiring connector positions - version with lateral battery
0.014.8806.4/20
Connector positions
Table 56
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30C +30 +30A
– – +30B
+30A GND2
+30
–
+30B GND1
–
GND1
–
GND2
–
F0123201
Fig. 2517
40-138
Wiring diagrams
40.4.12 - Battery wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
View of wiring loom
GND5
GND6
D0037101
Fig. 2518 - Battery wiring loom connector locations
40-139
Wiring diagrams
+30 +30A +30B

+30C
GND1
GND2
F0123281
Fig. 2518 - Battery wiring loom connector locations - Version with front battery
0.014.8806.4/20
Table 57
Connec- Connector location Connec- Connector location
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30A1. GND1
- -
+30B
-
+30
-
Fig. 2518 Fig. 2518

+30C GND5
40-65 -
GND6
-
Fig. 2518 Fig. 2518
40-140
Wiring diagrams
View of wiring loom
GND1
GND2
+30C
+30 +30A
+30B
F0123271
Fig. 2518 - Battery wiring loom connector locations - Version with lateral battery
0.014.8806.4/20
Table 58
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30C +30 +30A
- - +30B
+30A1. GND2
+30
-
+30B GND1
-
GND1
-
GND2
-
F0123201
Fig. 2518
40-141
Wiring diagrams
40.4.13 - Preheating wiring - 0.014.9195.4/20
Fig. 2519 - Preheating wiring

Connectors list
l +30A - Battery
l RL42A - Preheating relay
l X113 - Preheating device
40-142
Wiring diagrams
40.4.14 - Pre-heating wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
X113
RL42B
RL42A
+30A
F0123282
Fig. 2520 - Pre-heating wiring connector positions - version with front battery
0.014.9195.4/20
l See para. 40.4.13 - Preheating wiring - 0.... - page 40-141
Connector positions
Table 59
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL42A
40-64
RL42B
40-64
+30A
Fig. 2521
40-143
Wiring diagrams
View of wiring
X113
+30A
RL42A
RL42B
F0123272
Fig. 2522 - Pre-heating wiring connector positions - version with lateral battery
0.014.9195.4/20
Connector positions
Table 60
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL42A
40-64 +30A
RL42B
40-64
+30A
RL42A
RL42B
F0123202
Fig. 2523
40-144
Wiring diagrams
40.4.15 - Pre-heat wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X113
RL42B
RL42A
+30A
F0123282
Fig. 2523 - Preheat wiring loom connector locations - Version with front battery
0.014.9195.4/20
Table 61
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL42A
40-65
RL42B
40-65
+30A1.
Fig. 2523
40-145
Wiring diagrams
View of wiring loom
X113
+30A
RL42A
RL42B
F0123272
Fig. 2523 - Preheat wiring loom connector locations - Version with lateral battery
0.014.9195.4/20
Table 62
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL42A
40-65 +30A
RL42B
40-65
+30A1.
RL42A
RL42B
F0123202
Fig. 2523
40-146
Wiring diagrams
40.4.16 - Power supply wiring - 0.015.1983.4/10
Fig. 2524 - Power supply wiring

Connectors list
l +30C - Starter motor
l G38 - To cab power supply wiring
40-147
Wiring diagrams
40.4.17 - Power supply wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
G38
+30C
G11
F0123273
Fig. 2525 - Power supply wiring connector positions

0.015.1983.4/10
l See para. 40.4.16 - Power supply wiring - ... - page 40-146
Connector positions
Table 63
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30C G11
40-64 –
G38
–
Fig. 2526 Fig. 2527
40-148
Wiring diagrams
40.4.18 - Power wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
View of wiring loom
G38
+30C
G11
F0123273
Fig. 2527 - Power wiring loom connector locations

0.015.1983.4/10
Table 64
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
+30C G11
40-65 -
G38
-
Fig. 2527 Fig. 2527
40-149
Wiring diagrams
40.4.19 - Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2528 - Instrument panel wiring (1/3)

Connectors list
l 3K - Instrument panel
l 5K - Instrument panel
l FRL1 - Engine starting relay fuse
l G1 - To engine wiring
l G2 - To LH drivetrain wiring
l G5 - To RH drivetrain wiring
l G7 - To front wiring
l G8 - To front lights wiring
l G9 - To reverse shuttle wiring (cab)
l G11 - To power supply wiring
l G13 - To work lights wiring (platform version)
l P.T.O. ECU - P.T.O. control unit
l RL1 - Engine starting relay
l RL2 - Key-on power relay
l RL3 - Work lights power relay
l RL4 - H/L travel control power supply relay
l X34 - Windscreen washer pump
l X35 - Rear window washer pump
l X36 - Operator present sensor
l X37 - Pneumatic seat compressor
l X38 - Trailer socket
l X39 - LH rear P.T.O. control switch (on fender)
l X40 - LH rear light
l X41 - Number plate light
l X42 - P.T.O. engage switch
40-150
Wiring diagrams

l X43 - P.T.O. engage switch
l X44 - Handbrake switch
l X45 - RH rear light
l X46 - RH rear P.T.O. control switch (on fender)
l X47 - H/L lever
l X48 - Front P.T.O. control switch
l X49 - Rear P.T.O. control switch
l X50 - Differential lock control switch
l X51 - 4WD control switch
l X52 - Platform rotating beacon switch
l X53 - Cigar lighter
l X54 - Starter switch
l X55 - Hazard warning lights switch
l X56 - Brake pedal pressed switch
l X57 - Trailer pressure indicator
l X58 - Not utilised
l X61 - Hazard warning lights control unit
l X62 - Diagnostic socket
l X73 - Clutch pedal pressed switch
l X109 - Lights switch
l X110 - Corner lights switch
l X111 - Low work lights switch
l X112 - Lights selector switch
40-151
Wiring diagrams
40-152
Wiring diagrams
40.4.20 - Positions of instrument panel wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
Fig. 2531 - Positions of instrument panel wiring connectors

0.014.8628.4/20
l See para. 40.4.19 - Instrument panel wirin... - page 40-149
40-153
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 65
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G11 FRL1
- -
RL1
-
RL2
-
RL3
-
RL4
-
X62
40-72
Fig. 2532 40-76 Fig. 2533
G1 3K - 5K
- 40-64
G8 40-67
40-69
G9 40-72
40-76
G10 40-79
40-113
X61 40-106
40-67 40-110
40-69 40-116
X58
Fig. 2534 - Fig. 2535
X59
-
X60
-
X56 X112
40-113 40-67
X57 40-69
40-113
G7
-
GND4
-
Fig. 2536 Fig. 2537
40-154
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X54 X48
40-64 40-110
40-67 X49
40-69 40-110
40-72 X50
40-76 40-106
40-79 X51
40-82 40-106
40-90 X52
40-95 40-72
40-100 40-76
40-86 X53
40-92 Fig. 2538 40-72 Fig. 2539
40-97 40-76
40-103
40-106
40-110
40-113
40-116
X55
40-67
40-69
ECU X46
P.T.O.
40-106 40-106
X45
40-67
40-69
40-113
Fig. 2540 Fig. 2541

G5 GND3
- -
G6
-
G13
-
Fig. 2542 Fig. 2543

X36 X34
40-106 40-90
X37 40-92
40-72 X35
40-76 40-90
40-92
Fig. 2544 Fig. 2545
40-155
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G2 X41
- 40-67
G3 40-69
-
Fig. 2546 Fig. 2547

X39 X38
40-110 40-67
X40 40-69
40-67 40-113
40-69
40-113
Fig. 2548 Fig. 2549

X42 GND8
40-110 -
X43
40-110
Fig. 2550 Fig. 2551

X44 X110
40-113 40-82
40-86
X111
40-82
40-86
X109
40-67
40-69
40-72
40-76
40-82
Fig. 2552 40-86 Fig. 2553
40-113
40-106
40-110
40-156
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X73
40-64
40-106
Fig. 2554
40.4.21 - Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/40 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001)
Fig. 2555 - Instrument panel wiring - 1/3

Connectors list
l F100 - 25A outlet socket fuse
l FRL1 - Engine starting relay fuse
l G1 To engine wiring
l G2 To LH drivetrain wiring
40-157
Wiring diagrams

l G3 To LH drivetrain wiring
l G5 To RH drivetrain wiring
l G7 To hood lights wiring
l G8 To front lights wiring
l G9 To shuttle wiring (cab)
l G10 To cab power supply wiring
l G11 To power supply wiring
l G13 To work lights wiring (platform version)
l G15 Not utilised
l GND3 Earthing point 3
l P.T.O. ECU P.T.O. control unit
l RL1 Engine starting relay
l RL4 H/L gear control power supply relay
l X35 Rear window washer pump
l X36 Operator present sensor
l X39 LH rear P.T.O. control switch (on fender)
l X40 Left tail light
40-158
Wiring diagrams

l X42 P.T.O. engage switch
l X43 P.T.O. engage switch
l X45 Right tail light
l X46 RH rear P.T.O. control switch (on fender)
l X47 H/L lever
l X48 Front P.T.O. control switch
l X49 Rear P.T.O. control switch
l X50 Differential lock control switch
l X51 4WD control switch
l X52 Platform rotating beacon switch
l X53 Cigar lighter
l X56 Brake pedal pressed switch
l X61 Hazard warning lights control unit
l X62 Diagnostic socket
l X73 Clutch pedal pressed switch
l X110 Corner lights switch
l X112 Lights selector switch
40-159
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2556 - Instrument panel wiring 2/3
Fig. 2557 - Instrument panel wiring 3/3

NOTE
Use eye connectors at earthing points.
40-160
Wiring diagrams
40.4.22 - Location of instrument panel wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
View of wiring loom
X60 3K 5K G7
G8
X58 X59 GND4
G1
X57
X62
F100
X56
FRL1
X112 X48
RL1 X49
G10
G11 X54 X51 X50
X61
X52 X46
X55 GND3
G15 X53
X111
X110 X47 PTO ECU
RL4 - RL3 X109
G9 X4
RL2
X73 X36
X35
X44 X37 X45
X38 G6
GND8
X43
G3 G34 G13
G2 G5
X42
X39
X40
D0040270
X41
Fig. 2558 - Location of instrument panel wiring loom connectors

0.014.8628.4/40
l See para. 40.4.21 - Instrument panel wirin... - page 40-157
40-161
Wiring diagrams
Table 66
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G11 X62 F100
- 40-74 X62
FRL1
G11
40-78
F100 RL1
-
FRL1
-
RL1 RL4
40-65 RL2
RL2
40-65 RL3
F0130230
40-68 F0130240
Fig. 2559 40-71 Fig. 2560

40-74
40-78
40-81
40-84
40-91
40-96
40-101
40-88
40-94
40-98
40-104
40-107
40-111
40-114
40-117
RL4
40-107
RL3
40-84
40-88
40-162
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X61 G8
3K
40-68 G10 40-65
40-71 G1 40-68
G1 40-71
X59
- 40-74 3K
G8 40-78
- X61 40-81
G9 40-114 X58 5K
- 40-107
G10 40-111
G9 X60
- 40-117
F0130250
5K F0130260
Fig. 2561 40-65 Fig. 2562

40-68
40-71
40-74
40-78
40-81
40-114
40-107
40-111
40-117
X58
40-107
X59
40-107
X60
40-107
G7 X45
- 40-68
GND4 40-71
- 40-114
X56 X46
40-114 40-111
X57
40-114
Fig. 2563 Fig. 2564
40-163
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X54 X48
40-65 40-111
40-68 X49
40-71 40-111
40-74 X50
40-78 40-107
40-81 X53
40-84 40-74
40-91 40-78
40-96 X51
40-101 40-107
40-88 X52
40-94 Fig. 2565 40-74 Fig. 2566
40-98 40-78
40-104
40-107
40-111
40-114
40-117
X55
40-68
40-71
PTO ECU X45
40-111 40-68
40-71
40-114
X46
40-111
Fig. 2567 Fig. 2568

G5 GND3
- -
G6
-
G13
-
Fig. 2569 Fig. 2570

X36 X34
40-107 40-91
X37 40-94
40-74 X35
40-78 40-91
40-94
Fig. 2571 Fig. 2572
40-164
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G2 X41
- T.H14.01.
G3 40-71
-
Fig. 2573 Fig. 2574

X39 X38
40-111 40-68
X40 40-71
40-68 40-114
40-71
40-114
Fig. 2575 Fig. 2576

X42 GND8
40-111 -
X43
40-111
Fig. 2577 Fig. 2578

X4 G15
40-74 -
40-78 X47
40-107
G15
X47
X4
F0130280 F0130290
Fig. 2579 Fig. 2580
40-165
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X44 X109
40-114 40-68
40-71
40-74
40-78
40-84
40-88
40-114
40-107
40-111
X110
40-84
Fig. 2581 40-88 Fig. 2582
X111
40-84
40-88
X73
40-65
40-107
Fig. 2583
40.4.23 - RH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.8630.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2584 - RH drivetrain wiring
40-166
Wiring diagrams
Connectors list
l X18 - Start enable switch
l X19 - Wheel speed sensor
l X20 - 4WD control solenoid valve
l X21 - Rear PTO control solenoid valve
l X22 - Differential lock control solenoid valve
l X23 - Services circuit alarm pressure switch
l X24 - H/L gear control solenoid valve
40.4.24 - RH drivetrain wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)

View of wiring
Fig. 2585 - RH drivetrain wiring connector positions

0.014.8630.4/20
l See para. 40.4.23 - RH drivetrain wiring -... - page 40-166
40-167
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 67
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G5 X18
– 40-64
G6
–
Fig. 2586 Fig. 2587

X19
40-106
X20
40-106
X21
40-110
X22
40-106
X23
40-79
X24
40-106
Fig. 2588
40.4.25 - RH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.8630.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)

Connectors list
l G5 To instrument panel wiring
l X19 Wheel speed sensor
l X20 4WD control solenoid valve
l X21 - Rear P.T.O. control switch
40-168
Wiring diagrams

l X22 Differential lock control solenoid valve
l X23 Services circuit alarm pressure switch
l X24 H/L gear control solenoid valve
40-169
Wiring diagrams
40.4.26 - Location of RH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X18
G5
X24
X22
G6
X19 X21 X23

X20
D0040280
Fig. 2590 - Location of RH drivetrain wiring loom connectors

0.014.8630.4/30
l See para. 40.4.25 - RH drivetrain wiring -... - page 40-168
40-170
Wiring diagrams
Table 68
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G5 X18
- 40-65
G6
-
Fig. 2591 Fig. 2592

X19
40-107 X21
X20 X20
X22
40-107
X21 X19
40-111
X22
40-107 X24
X23
40-81
X24 X23
40-107
F0130300
Fig. 2593
40.4.27 - LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Fig. 2594 - LH drivetrain wiring

Connectors list
l G12 - To hydraulic trailer braking wiring
l G14 - To air trailer braking wiring
l X10 - Fuel level sensor
l X11 - 4WD engagement control switch
l X12 - Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch
l X13 - Transmission oil filter clogging pressure switch
l X14 - ECO P.T.O. engagement switch
l X15 - Groundspeed P.T.O. engagement switch
40-171
Wiring diagrams
40.4.28 - LH drivetrain wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
Fig. 2595 - LH drivetrain wiring connector positions

0.014.9193.4/20
l See para. 40.4.27 - LH drivetrain wiring -... - page 40-171
Connector positions
Table 69
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G2 G12
– –
G3 G14
– –
X12
40-106
X14
40-110
X15
40-110
Fig. 2596 Fig. 2597
40-172
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X13 X10
40-106 40-79
X11
40-106
Fig. 2598 Fig. 2599
40.4.29 - LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 ->
5001)
Fig. 2600 - LH drivetrain wiring

Connectors list
l G4 To shuttle wiring (drivetrain)
l G12 To hydraulic trailer braking wiring
l G14 To air trailer braking wiring
l X11 4WD engagement control switch
l X13 Transmission oil filter clogging pressure switch
l X14 ECO P.T.O. engagement switch
l X15 Groundspeed P.T.O. engagement switch
40-173
Wiring diagrams
40.4.30 - Location of LH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
G2
G3
G14
G12
X15
X14
G4
X13
X11
X10
D0040290
Fig. 2601 - Location of LH drivetrain wiring loom connectors

0.014.9193.4/30
l See para. 40.4.29 - LH drivetrain wiring -... - page 40-173
40-174
Wiring diagrams
Table 70
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G2 X14 X15
- 40-111 G14
G3 X15
- 40-111 X14
G12
F0130320
Fig. 2602 Fig. 2603

X13 X10
40-107 40-81
X11
40-107
X13
F0130310
Fig. 2604 Fig. 2605

G4
-
G4
F0130110
Fig. 2606
40-175
Wiring diagrams
40.4.31 - Drivetrain shuttle wiring - 0.015.1998.4/10 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85
-> 5001)
Fig. 2607 - Shuttle drivetrain wiring

Connectors list
l G37 - To shuttle wiring (cab)
l X114 - Engine speed sensor
l X115 - Shuttle sensor
l X116 - Oil temperature sensor
l X117 - Clutch oil pressure switch
l X118 - Forward gear selection solenoid valve
l X119 - Reverse gear selection solenoid valve
l X120 - Solenoid operated proportional valve
l X122- PALL filter clogging sensor
40-176
Wiring diagrams
40.4.32 - Position of drivetrain shuttle lever wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
View of wiring
Fig. 2608 - Position of drivetrain shuttle lever wiring connectors

0.015.1998.4/10
l See para. 40.4.31 - Drivetrain shuttle wir... - page 40-176
40-177
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 71
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G4 X122
– 40-107
Fig. 2609 Fig. 2610

X117 X115
40-107 40-107
X116 X118
40-107 40-107
X119
40-107
X120
40-107
Fig. 2611 Fig. 2612

X114 G37
40-107 –
Fig. 2613 Fig. 2614
40-178
Wiring diagrams
40.4.33 - Cab shuttle wiring - 0.015.1418.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Fig. 2615 - Cab shuttle wiring 1/2

Connectors list
l G37 To shuttle wiring (drivetrain)
l X128 Supplementary CANBUS socket
l X129 Not utilised
l X131 Clutch pedal position sensor
40-179
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2616 - Cab shuttle wiring 2/2
40-180
Wiring diagrams
40.4.34 - Positions of cab shuttle lever wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring
Fig. 2617 - Positions of cab shuttle lever wiring connectors

0.015.1418.4/30
l See para. 40.4.33 - Cab shuttle wiring - 0... - page 40-179
40-181
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 72
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X131 G9
40-107 –
Fig. 2618 Fig. 2619

X128 G37
40-117 –
X129
40-107
Fig. 2620 Fig. 2621

X130
40-74
40-78
40-107
40-117
Fig. 2622
40-182
Wiring diagrams
40.4.35 - Power supply wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.014.9375.4/20
Fig. 2623 - Power supply wiring - Tractor with standard cab

Connectors list
l G16 - To roof wiring
l RL30 - Roof power relay
40-183
Wiring diagrams
40.4.36 - Power supply wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
View of wiring
Fig. 2624 - Power supply wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
0.014.9375.4/20
40-184
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 73
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G10 G38
– –
Fig. 2625 Fig. 2626
40.4.37 - Roof wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7850.4/50
Fig. 2627 - Roof wiring - Tractor with standard cab (1/2)

Connectors list
l G18 - To air conditioner condenser fan wiring
l G19 - To worklights wiring
l G20 - To windscreen wiper wiring
l G21 - To heating/air conditioning wiring
l G22 - To air conditioner wiring
l X63 - Cab courtesy light
l X64 - Rear worklights switch
40-185
Wiring diagrams

l X65 - Rear window wiper switch
l X66 - Windscreen washer pump switch
l X67 - Rotating beacon on/off switch
l X68 - Windscreen wiper intermittent timer
l X69 - Clock
l X70 - Windscreen wiper switch
l X71 - Front worklights switch
l X72 - Radio
40-186
Wiring diagrams

40.4.38 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
farm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring loom
GND9
X72 G22 G21
X65 X68
RL30 X70 G18
X69
G20
G19
X63
X71 G17
X66
X64 X67 G16
D0040310
Fig. 2629 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
40-187
Wiring diagrams
0.009.7850.4/50
l See para. 40.4.37 - Roof wiring - Tractor ... - page 40-185
Table 74
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X72 G20
40-72 -
Fig. 2630 Fig. 2631

X63 G16
40-72 -
G17
-
G19
-
Fig. 2632 Fig. 2633

X69 G18
40-72 -
RL30
40-72
40-82
40-90
40-95
40-100
Fig. 2634 Fig. 2635

G21 X68
- 40-90
G22
-
Fig. 2636 Fig. 2637
40-188
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
GND9 X64
- 40-82
X65
40-90
X66
40-90
X67
40-72
Fig. 2638 Fig. 2639

X70
40-90
X71
40-82
Fig. 2639
40.4.39 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
farm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
40-189
Wiring diagrams
GND9
X72 G22 G21
X65 X68
RL30 X70 G18
X69
G20
G19
X63
X71 G17
X66
X64 X67 G16
D0040310
Fig. 2639 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.009.7850.4/50
Table 75
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X72 G20
40-74 -
Fig. 2639 Fig. 2639
40-190
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X63 G16
40-74 -
G17
-
G19
-
Fig. 2639 Fig. 2639

X69 G18
40-74 -
RL30
40-74
40-84
40-91
40-96
40-101
Fig. 2639 Fig. 2639

G21 X68
- 40-91
G22
-
Fig. 2639 Fig. 2639

GND9 X64
- 40-84
X65
40-91
X66
40-91
X67
40-74
Fig. 2639 Fig. 2639
40-191
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X70
40-91
X71
40-84
Fig. 2639
40.4.40 - Heating wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.2147.2
Fig. 2640 - Heating wiring - Tractor with standard cab

Connectors list
l X100 - Fan
l X101 - Resistor
l X102 - Fan speed selector switch
40.4.41 - Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
40-192
Wiring diagrams
View of wiring
X100
X101
G21
X102
D0040340
Fig. 2641 - Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
0.010.2147.2
l See para. 40.4.40 - Heating wiring - Tract... - page 40-192
Connector positions
Table 76
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G21 X100
– 40-95
X101
40-95
Fig. 2642 Fig. 2643
40-193
Wiring diagrams
40.4.42 - Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
farm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X100
X101
G21
X102
D0040340
Fig. 2643 - Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.010.2147.2
l See para. 40.4.40 - Heating wiring - Tract... - page 40-192
Table 77
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G21 X100
- 40-96
X101
40-96
Fig. 2643 Fig. 2643
40-194
Wiring diagrams
40.4.43 - Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.2153.2
Fig. 2644 - Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with standard cab

Connectors list
l RL53 - Compressor relay
l X100 - Fan
l X101 - Resistor
l X103 - Air conditioner temperature control thermostat
40-195
Wiring diagrams
40.4.44 - Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
View of wiring
X100
G22
X101
G21
X103
X102 RL53
D0040370
Fig. 2645 - Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
0.010.2153.2
l See para. 40.4.43 - Air conditioning wirin... - page 40-194
Connector positions
Table 78
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X100
40-100
X101
40-100
Fig. 2646
40.4.45 - Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
(Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
40-196
Wiring diagrams
View of wiring loom
X100
G22
X101
G21
X103
X102 RL53
D0040370
Fig. 2646 - Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.010.2153.2
Table 79
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X100
40-101
X101
40-101
Fig. 2646
40-197
Wiring diagrams
40.4.46 - Air conditioning condenser fan wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7853.3/20
Fig. 2647 - Air conditioning condenser fan wiring - Tractor with standard cab 1/2
Connectors list
l RL55 - Control relay for air conditioning condenser fan
l X104 - Air conditioning pressure switch
l X105 - Air conditioning cooler fan
l X107 - Air conditioner pressure switch
40-198
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2648 - Air conditioning condenser fan wiring - Tractor with standard cab 2/2
40-199
Wiring diagrams
40.4.47 - Air conditioner exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with stan-
dard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
X104 X105
X107
G18
RL55
D0040360
Fig. 2649 - Air conditioner exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
0.009.7853.3/20
l See para. 40.4.46 - Air conditioning conde... - page 40-197
Connector positions
Table 80
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X104 X105
40-100 40-100
X107
40-100
Fig. 2650 Fig. 2651
40-200
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G18
–
Fig. 2652
40.4.48 - Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor
with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X104 X105
X107
G18
RL55
D0040360
Fig. 2652 - Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.009.7853.3/20
l See para. 40.4.46 - Air conditioning conde... - page 40-197
40-201
Wiring diagrams
Table 81
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X104 X105
40-101 40-101
X107
40-101
Fig. 2652 Fig. 2652

G18
-
Fig. 2652
40.4.49 - Cab power supply wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.014.9376.4/10
Fig. 2653 - Cab power supply wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab
40-202
Wiring diagrams
Connectors list
40.4.50 - Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
(Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring loom
40-203
Wiring diagrams
G17
G16
RL30
G10
G38
D0040240
Fig. 2654 - Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.014.9376.4/10
l See para. 40.4.49 - Cab power supply wirin... - page 40-202
40-204
Wiring diagrams
Table 82
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G10 G38
- -
G38
G10
F0130210 F0130220
Fig. 2655 Fig. 2656

G16
-
G17
-
RL30
40-76
40-86
40-92
40-97
40-103
Fig. 2657
40-205
Wiring diagrams
40.4.51 - Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
View of wiring loom
G17
G16
RL30
G10
G38
D0040240
Fig. 2657 - Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.014.9376.4/10
l See para. 40.4.49 - Cab power supply wirin... - page 40-202
40-206
Wiring diagrams
Table 83
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G10 G38
- -
G38
G10
F0130210 F0130220
Fig. 2657 Fig. 2657

G16
-
G17
-
RL30
40-78
40-88
40-94
40-98
40-104
Fig. 2657
40.4.52 - Roof wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3606.4/50
Fig. 2658 - Roof wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab (1/2)
40-207
Wiring diagrams
Connectors list
l F130 - Roof power fuse
l G20 - To windscreen wiper wiring
l G21 - To air conditioner wiring
l G23 - To loudspeaker, radio, rear wiper, flashing light and clock wiring
l G24 - To air conditioner heat exchanger fan wiring
l G25 - To heating/air conditioner wiring
l X63 - Cab courtesy light
l X64 - Rear worklights switch
l X65 - Rear window wiper switch
l X66 - Windscreen washer pump switch
l X67 - Rotating beacon on/off switch
l X68 - Windscreen wiper intermittent timer
l X70 - Windscreen wiper switch
l X71 - Front worklights switch
Fig. 2659 - Roof wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab (2/2)
40-208
Wiring diagrams
40.4.53 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
View of wiring loom
G25
X68 G21
X67 RL30
X65 G19
X70
X23
X64
X24
X71
X130
X66
GND7
X63
G17 G20
G17
D0040330
Fig. 2660 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.011.3606.4/50
Table 84
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G16 X64
- G17 GND7 40-86
G17 X65
- RL30
40-92 X64 X65
GND7 X66
- 40-92
RL30 X67
40-76 40-76 X66
X67
40-86 X70 X71 X70
40-92 G16 40-92
40-97 X71
40-103 F0026772
40-86 F0026782
Fig. 2661 Fig. 2662
40-209
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X68 G19
40-92 - G25
F130 G21
- - G21
X68
G25
-
F130 G19
F0026792 F0026802
Fig. 2663 Fig. 2664

G23 X63
- 40-76
G24
-
G23
G24 X63
F0026822 F0026812
Fig. 2665 Fig. 2666

G20
-
G20
F0026833
Fig. 2667
40-210
Wiring diagrams
40.4.54 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
View of wiring loom
G25
X68 G21
X67 RL30
X65 G19
X70
X23
X64
X24
X71
X130
X66
GND7
X63
G17 G20
G17
D0040330
Fig. 2667 - Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.011.3606.4/50
Table 85
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G16 X64
- G17 GND7 40-88
G17 X65
- RL30
40-94 X64 X65
GND7 X66
- 40-94
RL30 X67
40-78 40-78 X66
X67
40-88 X70 X71 X70
40-94 G16 40-94
40-98 X71
40-104 F0026772
40-88 F0026782
Fig. 2667 Fig. 2667
40-211
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X68 G19
40-94 - G25
F130 G21
- - G21
X68
G25
-
F130 G19
F0026792 F0026802
Fig. 2667 Fig. 2667

G23 X63
- 40-78
G24
-
G23
G24 X63
F0026822 F0026812
Fig. 2667 Fig. 2667

G20
-
G20
F0026833
Fig. 2667
40-212
Wiring diagrams
40.4.55 - Heating system wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.010.2554.2
Fig. 2668 - Heating system wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

Connectors list
l G34 - Wiring connector
l RL50 - 3rd fan speed relay
l RL51 - Max. fan speed relay
l X93 - LH resistor
l X96 - RH resistor
l X98 - LH fan
l X99 - RH fan
40-213
Wiring diagrams
Fig. 2669 - Heating system wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab (2/2)
40.4.56 - Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
View of wiring
G25 G35
RL50 X99
RL51 X96
X95
X98
G34
X93
D0040350
Fig. 2670 - Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
0.010.2554.2
l See para. 40.4.55 - Heating system wiring ... - page 40-213
40-214
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 86
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X95 RL50
40-97 40-97
RL51
40-97
Fig. 2671 Fig. 2672

G25 X93
– 40-97
X96
40-97
X98
40-97
X99
40-97
Fig. 2673 Fig. 2674

G34
–
G35
–
Fig. 2675
40-215
Wiring diagrams
40.4.57 - Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
View of wiring loom
G25 G35
RL50 X99
RL51 X96
X95
X98
G34
X93
D0040350
Fig. 2675 - Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.010.2554.2
l See para. 40.4.55 - Heating system wiring ... - page 40-213
Table 87
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X95 RL50
40-98 40-98
RL51
40-98
Fig. 2675 Fig. 2675
40-216
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G25 X93
- 40-98
X96
40-98
X98
40-98
X99
40-98
Fig. 2675 Fig. 2675

G34
-
G35
-
Fig. 2675
40.4.58 - Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.010.2560.0
Fig. 2676 - Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab (1/2)
Connectors list
40-217
Wiring diagrams
l RL50 - 3rd fan speed relay
l RL51 - Max. fan speed relay
l RL52 - Compressor and A/C 1st speed start relay
l X93 - LH resistor
l X94 - A/C switch
l X96 - RH resistor
l X97 - Air conditioning temperature thermostat
l X98 - LH fan
l X99 - RH fan
40-218
Wiring diagrams
40.4.59 - Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
View of wiring
G25
RL50 G21 G35
RL51
X99
RL52 X96
X95
X94
G34
X97
X98
X93
D0040380
Fig. 2678 - Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
0.010.2560.0
40-219
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 88
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X94 X95
40-103 40-103
Fig. 2679 Fig. 2680

RL50 G21
40-103 –
RL51 G25
40-103 –
RL52
40-103
Fig. 2681 Fig. 2682

X93 G34
40-103 –
X96 G35
40-103 –
X98
40-103
X99
40-103
Fig. 2683 Fig. 2684

X97
40-103
Fig. 2685
40-220
Wiring diagrams
40.4.60 - Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
View of wiring loom
G25
RL50 G21 G35
RL51
X99
RL52 X96
X95
X94
G34
X97
X98
X93
D0040380
Fig. 2685 - Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.010.2560.0
Table 89
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X94 X95
40-104 40-104
Fig. 2685 Fig. 2685
40-221
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL50 G21
40-104 -
RL51 G25
40-104 -
RL52
40-104
Fig. 2685 Fig. 2685

X93 G34
40-104 -
X96 G35
40-104 -
X98
40-104
X99
40-104
Fig. 2685 Fig. 2685

X97
40-104
Fig. 2685
40-222
Wiring diagrams
40.4.61 - Air conditioning cooler fan wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3610.3/20
Fig. 2686 - Air conditioning cooler fan wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab (1/2)
l RL54 - Control relay for supplementary air conditioning cooler fan
l RL55 - Control relay for air conditioning cooler fan
l X104 - Air conditioning pressure switch
l X105 - Air conditioning cooler fan
l X106 - Supplementary air conditioning cooler fan
Fig. 2687 - Air conditioning cooler fan wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab (2/2)
40-223
Wiring diagrams
40.4.62 - Air conditioning exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-
visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
X104
G24
RL54 X105
RL55
X106
D0040390
Fig. 2688 - Air conditioning exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
0.011.3610.3/20
l See para. 40.4.61 - Air conditioning coole... - page 40-223
40-224
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 90
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL54 G24
40-103 –
RL55
40-103
Fig. 2689 Fig. 2690

X104
40-103
X105
40-103
X106
40-103
Fig. 2691
40-225
Wiring diagrams
40.4.63 - Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor
with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X104
G24
RL54 X105
RL55
X106
D0040390
Fig. 2691 - Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.011.3610.3/20
l See para. 40.4.61 - Air conditioning coole... - page 40-223
40-226
Wiring diagrams
Table 91
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
RL54 G24
40-104 -
RL55
40-104
Fig. 2691 Fig. 2691

X104
40-104
X105
40-104
X106
40-104
Fig. 2691
40.4.64 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7851.4/50
Fig. 2692 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab
40-227
Wiring diagrams
Connectors list
l G26 - To rotating beacon wiring
l X76 - RH front worklight (on cab roof)
l X77 - LH front worklight (on cab roof)
l X78 - LH rear worklight (on cab roof)
l X79 - RH rear worklight (on cab roof)
l X108 - Rear window wiper motor
Fig. 2693
40.4.65 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard

cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
40-228
Wiring diagrams
X79
X108
X76
X78
X26
X77 G19
D0040400
Fig. 2694 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
0.009.7851.4/50
l See para. 40.4.64 - Front-rear worklights ... - page 40-227
Connector positions
Table 92
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X77 G19
40-82 –
X78
40-82
X76
40-82
X79
40-82
Fig. 2695 Fig. 2696
40-229
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G26 X108
– 40-90
Fig. 2697 Fig. 2698
40.4.66 - Location of front-rear work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with stan-
dard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X79
X108
X76
X78
X26
X77 G19
D0040400
Fig. 2698 - Location of front-rear work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.009.7851.4/50
40-230
Wiring diagrams
Table 93
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X77 G19
40-84 -
X78
40-84
X76
40-84
X79
40-84
Fig. 2698 Fig. 2698

G26 X108
- 40-91
Fig. 2698 Fig. 2698
40-231
Wiring diagrams
40.4.67 - Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.015.1435.4/10
Fig. 2699 - Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab

Connectors list
l G32 - To lower front lights wiring
l X132 - RH supplementary worklight
l X133 - LH supplementary worklight
40-232
Wiring diagrams
40.4.68 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard
cab
View of wiring
Fig. 2700 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab
0.015.1435.4/10
l See para. 40.4.67 - Supplementary workligh... - page 40-231
40-233
Wiring diagrams
40.4.69 - Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.4516.3
Fig. 2701 - Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with standard cab

Connectors list
l X81 - Windscreen wiper motor
40-234
Wiring diagrams
40.4.70 - Windscreen wiper connector positions wiring - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
View of wiring
G20
D0040520
X81
Fig. 2702 - Windscreen wiper connector positions wiring - Tractor with standard cab
0.010.4516.3
l See para. 40.4.69 - Windscreen wiper wirin... - page 40-233
40-235
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 94
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G20 X81
– 40-90
Fig. 2703 Fig. 2704
40-236
Wiring diagrams
40.4.71 - Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard
cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
G20
D0040520
X81
Fig. 2704 - Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.010.4516.3
40-237
Wiring diagrams
Table 95
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G20 X81
- 40-91
Fig. 2704 Fig. 2704
40.4.72 - Loudspeaker wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.011.0729.4/10
Fig. 2705 - Loudspeaker wiring - Tractor with standard cab

Connectors list
l X90 - Radio
l X91 - LH loudspeaker
l X92 - RH loudspeaker
40-238
Wiring diagrams
40.4.73 - Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
View of wiring loom
X92
X91
X90
D0040530
Fig. 2706 - Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.011.0729.4/10
l See para. 40.4.72 - Loudspeaker wiring - T... - page 40-238
40-239
Wiring diagrams
Connector locations - tractor with mechanical reverse shuttle
Table 96
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X90 X91
40-72 40-72
X92
40-72
Fig. 2707 Fig. 2708
Connector locations - tractor with hydraulic reverse shuttle

Table 97
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X90 X91
40-72 40-72
X92
40-72
Fig. 2708 Fig. 2708
40-240
Wiring diagrams
40.4.74 - Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agro-
farm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X92
X91
X90
D0040530
Fig. 2708 - Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
0.011.0729.4/10
l See para. 40.4.72 - Loudspeaker wiring - T... - page 40-238
40-241
Wiring diagrams
Table 98
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X90 X91
40-74 40-74
X92
40-74
Fig. 2708 Fig. 2708

Table 99
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X90 X91
40-74 40-74
X92
40-74
Fig. 2708 Fig. 2708
40-242
Wiring diagrams
40.4.75 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3595.3/10
Fig. 2709 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

Connectors list
l G39 - To supplementary worklights wiring
40-243
Wiring diagrams
40.4.76 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.015.2979.4
Fig. 2710 - Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

Connectors list
l G19- To roof wiring
40-244
Wiring diagrams
40.4.77 - Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
View of wiring loom
G40
G19
GND7
G39
G41
G42
D0040420
Fig. 2711 - Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.015.2979.4
Table 100
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
GND7 G19
- -
Fig. 2712 Fig. 2713
40-245
Wiring diagrams
40.4.78 - Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
View of wiring loom
G40
G19
GND7
G39
G41
G42
D0040420
Fig. 2713 - Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.015.2979.4
Table 101
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
GND7 G19
- -
Fig. 2713 Fig. 2713
40-246
Wiring diagrams
40.4.79 - Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.015.1437.4/10
Fig. 2714 - Supplementary worklights wiring (on roof) - Tractor with high-visibility cab
Connectors list
l X76 - RH front worklight (on cab roof)
l X77 - LH front worklight (on cab roof)
l X78 - LH rear worklight (on cab roof)
40-247
Wiring diagrams
l X79 - RH rear worklight (on cab roof)
Fig. 2715 - Supplementary worklights wiring (front) - Tractor with high-visibility cab
Connectors list
l X132 - RH supplementary worklight
l X133 - LH supplementary worklight
40-248
Wiring diagrams
40.4.80 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visi-
bility cab
View of wiring
Roof version
Fig. 2716 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
0.015.1437.4/10
40-249
Wiring diagrams
Front version
Fig. 2717 - Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
0.015.1437.4/10
40-250
Wiring diagrams
40.4.81 - Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3597.3
Fig. 2718 - Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab

Connectors list
l X81 - Windscreen wiper motor
40-251
Wiring diagrams
40.4.82 - Windscreen wiper wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
View of wiring
G20
D0040480
X81
Fig. 2719 - Windscreen wiper wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab
0.011.3597.3
Connector positions
Table 102
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G20 X81
– 40-92
G20
F0027113
Fig. 2720 Fig. 2721
40-252
Wiring diagrams
40.4.83 - Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high vis-
ibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
G20
D0040480
X81
Fig. 2721 - Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.011.3597.3
Table 103
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G20 X81
- 40-94
G20
F0027113
Fig. 2721 Fig. 2721
40-253
Wiring diagrams
40.4.84 - Loudspeaker, radio, rear wiper, flashing light and clock wiring - Tractor with
high-visibility cab - 0.011.3596.3/40
Fig. 2722 - Loudspeaker, radio, rear wiper, flashing light and clock wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab
Connectors list
l G26 - To rotating beacon wiring
l X84 - RH loudspeaker
l X85 - Rear window wiper motor
l X86 - LH loudspeaker
l X87 - Radio
l X88 - Radio
l X89 - Clock
40-254
Wiring diagrams
40.4.85 - Location of connectors of wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper,
flashing beacon and clock - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring loom
X84
X85
G23
X86
GND7
X88
G26
X87
X89
D0040490
Fig. 2723 - Location of connectors of wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing beacon and
clock - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.011.3596.3/40
l See para. 40.4.84 - Loudspeaker, radio, re... - page 40-254
Table 104
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
GND7 X84
- [LNK]
G23 X86
- [LNK]
Fig. 2724 Fig. 2725
40-255
Wiring diagrams
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
X85 G26
40-92 -
Fig. 2726 Fig. 2727

X87
[LNK]
X88
[LNK]
X89
[LNK]
Fig. 2728
40-256
Wiring diagrams
40.4.86 - Location of connectors of wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper,
flashing beacon and clock - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro-
farm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
X84
X85
G23
X86
GND7
X88
G26
X87
X89
D0040490
Fig. 2728 - Location of connectors of wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing beacon and
clock - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.011.3596.3/40
l See para. 40.4.84 - Loudspeaker, radio, re... - page 40-254
40-257
Wiring diagrams
Table 105
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
GND7 X84
- 40-78
G23 X86
- 40-78
Fig. 2728 Fig. 2728

X85 G26
40-94 -
Fig. 2728 Fig. 2728

X87
40-78
X88
40-78
X89
40-78
Fig. 2728
40-258
Wiring diagrams
40.4.87 - Front lights wiring - Tractor with cab - 0.010.8189.3/40
Fig. 2729 - Front lights wiring - Tractor with cab

Connectors list
40-259
Wiring diagrams
40.4.88 - Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with cab
View of wiring
Fig. 2730 - Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with cab
0.010.8189.3/40
l See para. 40.4.87 - Front lights wiring - ... - page 40-259
Connector positions
Table 106
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G8
–
Fig. 2731
40-260
Wiring diagrams
40.4.89 - Wiring for lower front lights - Tractor with cab - 0441.1923.4
Fig. 2732 - Wiring for lower front lights - Tractor with cab
Connectors list
l X74 - Front RH sidelight and direction indicator
40-261
Wiring diagrams
l X75 - Front LH sidelight and direction indicator
40.4.90 - Lower front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100,
Agrofarm 85)
View of wiring
G28
X74
G31
G30
G29
G32
G33
X75
D0040450
Fig. 2733
0441.1923.4
l See para. 40.4.89 - Wiring for lower front... - page 40-261
40-262
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 107
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G32
–
G33
G32-G33
–
X74 X74-X75
40-67
X75
40-67
F0113060
Fig. 2734
40.4.91 - Location of lower front lights wiring loom - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 ->
5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
View of wiring loom
40-263
Wiring diagrams
G28
X74
G31
G30
G29
G32
G33
X75
D0040450
Fig. 2734
0441.1923.4
l See para. 40.4.89 - Wiring for lower front... - page 40-261
Table 108
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G32
-
G33
G32-G33
-
X74 X74-X75
40-68
X75
40-68
F0113060
Fig. 2734
40-264
Wiring diagrams
40.4.92 - Front lights wiring - Tractor with platform - 0.015.3094.4
Fig. 2735 - Front lights wiring - Tractor with platform

Connectors list
l X126 - Front LH sidelight and direction indicator
l X127 - Front RH sidelight and direction indicator
40-265
Wiring diagrams
40.4.93 - Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform
View of wiring
Fig. 2736 - Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform
0.015.3094.4
l See para. 40.4.92 - Front lights wiring - ... - page 40-265
Connector positions
Table 109
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G8 G13
– –
Fig. 2737 Fig. 2738
40-266
Wiring diagrams
40.4.94 - Worklights wiring - Tractor with platform - 0.014.9281.4
Fig. 2739 - Worklights wiring - Tractor with platform

Connectors list
l X123 - Worklight
l X124 - Rotating beacon
X125 - Worklight
40-267
Wiring diagrams
40.4.95 - Worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform
View of wiring
Fig. 2740 - Worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform

0.014.9281.4
l See para. 40.4.94 - Worklights wiring - Tr... - page 40-267
Connector positions
Table 110
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G13
–
Fig. 2741
40-268
Wiring diagrams
40.4.96 - Rotating beacon wiring - 0.012.9909.4
Fig. 2742 - Rotating beacon wiring

Connectors list
l G26 - To worklights wiring/To loudspeaker, radio, rear wiper, flashing light and clock wiring
l X80 - Rotating beacon
40.4.97 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85)
View of wiring loom
X80
G26
D0040500
Fig. 2743 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
40-269
Wiring diagrams
X80
G26
D0040510
Fig. 2744 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.012.9909.4*
l See para. 40.4.96 - Rotating beacon wiring... - page 40-269
Table 111
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G26 X80
- 40-72
40-76
Fig. 2745 Fig. 2746
40-270
Wiring diagrams
Table 112
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G26 X80
- 40-72
40-76
Fig. 2746 Fig. 2746
40.4.98 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
View of wiring loom
X80
G26
D0040500
Fig. 2746 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab
40-271
Wiring diagrams
X80
G26
D0040510
Fig. 2746 - Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab
0.012.9909.4*
l See para. 40.4.96 - Rotating beacon wiring... - page 40-269
Table 113
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G26 X80
- 40-74
40-78
Fig. 2746 Fig. 2746
40-272
Wiring diagrams
Table 114
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G26 X80
- 40-74
40-78
Fig. 2746 Fig. 2746
40.4.99 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring - 0.014.1645.4/10
Fig. 2747 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring

Connectors list
l X16 - Trailer braking low pressure switch
40-273
Wiring diagrams
40.4.100 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm
85)
View of wiring
Fig. 2748 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions

0.014.1645.4/10
l See para. 40.4.99 - Trailer hydraulic brak... - page 40-273
Connector positions
Table 115
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G12
–
Fig. 2749
40-274
Wiring diagrams
40.4.101 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001,
View of wiring
Fig. 2750 - Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions

0.014.1645.4/10
l See para. 40.4.99 - Trailer hydraulic brak... - page 40-273
40-275
Wiring diagrams
Connector positions
Table 116
tor/Sys- tor/Sys-
tem tem
G12
-
Fig. 2751
40-276
INDEX
2
2 and 4-speed PTO and Groundspeed PTO 10-46
3
3-point linkage 30-650
4
4WD front axle (F0.03.01) 30-419
4WD shaft (F0.04.01) 30-473
A
A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-104
A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-103
A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-101
A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-100
Adjusting the front axle end float 30-421
Adjustment of rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-541
Adjustment of steering knuckle housing and axle shaft 30-433
Adjustment of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-460
Adjustment of the control levers (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-529
Adjustment of the control levers (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-526
Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-297
Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100) 30-281
Adjustment of the differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-289
Adjustment of the differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85) 30-273
Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 100) 30-535
Adjustment of the rear lift control levers (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-538
Air conditioner exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 40-199
85)
Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-219
Air conditioner wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-195
Air conditioning compressor 30-514
Air conditioning condenser fan wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7853.3/20 40-197
Air conditioning cooler fan wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3610.3/20 40-223
Air conditioning exchanger fan wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, 40-223
Agrofarm 85)
Air conditioning system - Standard roof version 30-511
Air conditioning system controls - High-visibility roof system (G0.09.01) 30-508
Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.010.2560.0 40-217
Air conditioning wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.2153.2 40-194
Air-conditioning evaporator - Version with high-visibility roof 30-517
All Round Tester (ART®) 20-2
All-Round Tester Manual - Alarms Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-16
All-Round Tester Manual - Calibrations Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-13
All-Round Tester Manual - Introduction (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-8
All-Round Tester Manual - Monitor Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-9
All-Round Tester manual - Parameters Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-12
All-Round Tester Manual - Test Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-18
Alternator 30-585
Alternator, fuel pump and water pump drive belt 30-94
Antifreeze sensor - Version with high visibility roof 30-519
Auxiliary lift cylinders 30-633
B
B0 - Engine 30-2
Basic electronics for mechanics (1/2) 40-19
Battery - Version without front PTO 30-585
I
INDEX
Battery wiring - 0.014.8806.4/20 40-135
Battery wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-135
Battery wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-138
Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-446
Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear brakes (E0.03.01) 30-412
Bleeding the braking circuit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-577
Brake master cylinders 30-524
Brakes (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-114
Brakes (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-113
Braking system 10-98
Bushes (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-633
C
C0 - Engine accessories 30-143
Cab (G0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-490
Cab (G0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-484
Cab access steps (G0.03.03) 30-497
Cab power supply wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.014.9376.4/10 40-202
Cab shuttle wiring - 0.015.1418.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-179
Calibration of the clutch pedal (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-57
CAN BUS (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-117
CAN BUS (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-116
Canbus alarms 20-98
Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (C0.01.02) 30-143
Changing the transmission oil (D0.00.01) 30-157
Check injectors 30-135
Checking and setting the valve clearance 30-106
Checking rocker arm bracket 30-108
Checking the camshaft 30-105
Checking the compression pressure 30-18
Checking the crankshaft 30-90
Checking the cylinder head 30-110
Checking the gearcase 30-105
Checking the piston 30-98
Clutch control circuit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-523
Clutch housing - assembly (D0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-166
Clutch housing - assembly (D0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-162
Clutch master cylinder (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-521
Clutch pedal potentiometer 30-587
Clutch piston (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-523
Clutch plate (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-161
Clutch thrust bearing (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-162
Clutch-brake assembly 30-607
Commissioning and calibrating the tractor 20-32
Complete gearbox assembly - Version with Hi-Lo (D0.09.04) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-264
Complete gearbox assembly - Version with Hi-Lo (D0.09.05) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-266
Components 40-40
Components (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-50
Components (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-40
Condenser - Version with high-visibility roof 30-515
Condenser cooling fans - Version with high-visibility roof 30-520
Condenser fan control pressure switch - Version with high visibility roof 30-520
Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-6
Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-6
Control and adjustment thermostat 30-155
Conversion factors 0-10
D
D0 - Transmission 30-157
Determining commencement of delivery 30-127
Diagnostic accessories - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-72
Diagnostic tool screens 20-24
Diagnostic tools 20-2
Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-78
Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-76
Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-74
Differential disassembly 30-436
Differential unit 30-435
Differential unit adjustment 30-439
Disassembly of complete gearbox unit - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-267
II
INDEX
Disassembly of front lift cylinders 30-616
Disassembly of gearbox and shuttle assy. - complete unit (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-261
Disassembly of LH/RH rear axle (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-398
Disassembly of LH/RH rear axle (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-393
Disassembly of rear pinion (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-313
Disassembly of the 4WD engagement device 30-370
Disassembly of the 4WD output shaft 30-317
Disassembly of the bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-442
Disassembly of the cover unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-179
Disassembly of the differential (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-470
Disassembly of the forward drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-185
Disassembly of the gearbox input shaft (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-227
Disassembly of the Groundspeed PTO engagement device 30-368
Disassembly of the Groundspeed PTO output shaft 30-365
Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-205
Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit output shaft (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-223
Disassembly of the Hi-Lo unit output shaft (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-222
Disassembly of the lift - complete assembly (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-624
Disassembly of the lift- complete assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-628
Disassembly of the lift control valve (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-640
Disassembly of the lift control valve (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-635
Disassembly of the Lo range clutch housing (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-211
Disassembly of the main shaft- Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-230
Disassembly of the parking brake 30-369
Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-210
Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-404
Disassembly of the planet carrier (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-403
Disassembly of the planetary reduction gear 30-477
Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-232
Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-231
Disassembly of the PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-336
Disassembly of the PTO clutch (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-332
Disassembly of the PTO output shaft - 2-speed version 30-357, 30-358
Disassembly of the PTO output shaft - 4-speed version 30-354, 30-361
Disassembly of the range selector 30-159
Disassembly of the rear axle brake piston (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-414
Disassembly of the rear differential (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-410
Disassembly of the rear pinion (Agrofarm 100) 30-309
Disassembly of the rear pinion (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-305
Disassembly of the reverse drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-194, 30-197
Disassembly of the reverse drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-189
Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-255
Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-252
Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-249
Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-237
Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-241
Disassembly of the secondary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-234
Disassembly of the shuttle unit (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-176
Dismantling of engine 30-20
Drivetrain shuttle wiring - 0.015.1998.4/10 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-176
E
E0 - Rear axle 30-376
Earthing points 40-61
ECU alarms 20-60
ECU interrogation 20-24
Electrical and electronic components (1/2) 40-27
Engine 10-2
Engine - Separation from the transmission (B0.00.02) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-6
Engine - Separation from the transmission (B0.00.02) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-2
Engine (B0.00.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-14
Engine (B0.00.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-10
Engine wiring - version with front battery - 0.014.8629.4/20 40-122
Engine wiring (version with lateral battery) - 0.015.1597.4/20 40-128
Engine wiring connector positions - version with front battery (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-123
Engine wiring connector positions - version with lateral battery (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-130
Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with front battery (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 40-126
5001)
III
INDEX
Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with lateral battery (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 40-133
5001)
Exhaust pipe - Tractor with cab (C0.06.02) 30-153
Expansion valve - Version with high visibility roof 30-518
F
F0 - Front axle 30-417
Fan and air conditioning compressor drive belts 30-93
Fenders (G0.04.01) 30-497
Four-wheel drive engagement device - Easyshift (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-372
Front axle 10-49, 10-49
Front axle brake piston 30-482
Front brake discs 30-482
Front gearbox - Separation from the transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-170
Front gearbox oil seal (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-270
Front hood and side panels 30-496
Front instrument panel (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-500
Front instrument panel (G0.06.04) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-497
Front lift 30-614
Front lights wiring - Tractor with cab - 0.010.8189.3/40 40-259
Front lights wiring - Tractor with platform - 0.015.3094.4 40-265
Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with cab 40-260
Front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform 40-265
Front pivot bracket (F0.01.01) 30-417
Front PTO (M0.00.01) 30-593
Front wheels (S0.01.01) 30-653
Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3595.3/10 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-242
Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.015.2979.4 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 40-243
85 -> 5001)
Front-rear worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7851.4/50 40-227
Fuel cooler 30-151
Fuel tank (C0.03.01) 30-149
G
G0 - Bodywork - Cab - Platform 30-484
Gearbox and Hi-Lo assembly (D0.04.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-203
Gearbox and shuttle assy. - complete unit (D0.09.05) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-259
Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-232
Gearbox oil coolers - Version with front PTO 30-567
Gearbox oil coolers - Version without front PTO 30-568
Gearbox support and gear selector rods 30-271
General safety rules 0-2
H
H0 - Hydraulic system 30-546
Heater matrix - Version with high-visibility roof 30-517
Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-98
Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-97
Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-96
Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-95
Heating and air conditioning assembly - Version with standard roof 30-505
Heating system wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.010.2554.2 40-213
Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-214
Heating system wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-192
Heating wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.2147.2 40-192
Hood lights wiring - 0.014.8107.4/20 40-119
Hydraulic lift control valve 30-635
Hydraulic lift control valve (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-91
Hydraulic shuttle alarms 20-60
Hydraulic system 10-54
Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-70
Hydraulic system (Agrofarm 100) 10-59
IV
INDEX
I
Index of wiring looms and components (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-11
Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-81
Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-79
Instrument panel alarms 20-87
Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-149
Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/40 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-157
Introduction 0-2, 40-2
Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-28
Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-26
L
L0 - Electrical system 30-585
Left-hand console (G0.06.02) 30-505
LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-171
LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-173
LH drivetrain wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-172
LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-390
LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 100) 30-386
LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-384
LH rear axle (E0.02.02) (Agrofarm 85) 30-381
Lift - Complete assembly (R0.02.03) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-621
Lift - Complete assembly (R0.02.03) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-619
Lift cylinder (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-632
Lifting instructions 0-4
Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 40-225
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 40-201
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro- 40-221
farm 85 -> 5001)
Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 40-196
85 -> 5001)
Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro- 40-205
farm 85 -> 5001)
Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-203
Location of connectors of wiring loom for speakers, radio, rear screen wiper, flashing beacon and clock - Trac- 40-256
tor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
tor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Location of front-rear work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, 40-230
Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 40-215
85 -> 5001)
Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 40-193
-> 5001)
Location of instrument panel wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-161
Location of LH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-173
Location of lower front lights wiring loom - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-263
Location of RH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-169
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 40-211
85 -> 5001)
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-208
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 40-189
-> 5001)
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-187
Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-271
Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-269
Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 40-240
-> 5001)
Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-239
Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, 40-253
V
INDEX
Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, 40-236
Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro- 40-246
farm 85 -> 5001)
Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-244
Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-121
Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-120
Loudspeaker wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.011.0729.4/10 40-238
Loudspeaker, radio, rear wiper, flashing light and clock wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3596.3/40 40-254
Lower front lights wiring connector positions - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-262
M
M0 - Front PTO 30-593
Mechanical draft sensor (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-648
Mechanical draft sensor (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-646
Mechanical draft sensor disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-648
Mechanical draft sensor disassembly (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-646
N
N0 - Front lift 30-614
P
Planetary reduction gear (F0.06.01) 30-475
Position of drivetrain shuttle lever wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-176
Positions of cab shuttle lever wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-180
Positions of instrument panel wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-153
Power steering (H0.02.01) 30-549
Power steering disassembly 30-551
Power steering pump (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-565
Power steering pump (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-564
Power steering valve 10-79
Power supply wiring - 0.015.1983.4/10 40-146
Power supply wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.014.9375.4/20 40-182
Power supply wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab 40-183
Power supply wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-147
Power wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-148
Pre-heat wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-144
Preheating wiring - 0.014.9195.4/20 40-141
Pre-heating wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-142
Pressure relief valve setting 30-551
PTO (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-111
PTO (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-110
PTO assembly. 30-597
PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-324
PTO clutch (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-320
PTO clutch disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-328
PTO output shaft - 2-speed version 30-352
PTO output shaft. - 4-speed version 30-350
PTO pumps drive - Inner gear (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-348
PTO. pumps drive - Inner gear (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-346
Pump assembly 30-606
Pump drive PTO - Inner gear (Agrofarm 85) 30-344
Pump drive PTO - Outer gear (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-342
Pump drive PTO - Outer gear (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-340
Pump for hydraulic lift and auxiliary services (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-547
Pump for hydraulic lift and auxiliary services (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-546
Putting the tractor into service (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-37
Putting the tractor into service (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-32
R
R0 - Rear lift 30-619
Radiator - Tractor with front PTO (C0.01.01) 30-146
Radiator - Tractor without front PTO 30-144
Range gearbox and differential assembly - complete assembly 30-264
VI
INDEX
Range selector assembly 30-158
Rear axle brake discs 30-414
Rear axle brake piston disassembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-415
Rear differential 30-405
Rear P.T.O. 10-42
Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-573
Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 100) 30-570
Rear remote control valve (H0.07.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-568
Rear wheels (S0.02.01) 30-653
Re-assembly of engine 30-32
Receiver drier - Version with high visibility roof 30-516
Remote control valve 10-81
Remote valve control cables 30-545
Removal and re-installation of injection pump 30-120
Removing and installing front cover 30-77
Removing and installing the flywheel 30-95
Removing and installing the thermostat 30-155
Repair of air compressor 30-154
Repair of connecting rod 30-101
Repair of control rod 30-141
Repair of crankcase 30-83
Repair of flywheel 30-98
Repair of front cover 30-81
Repair of hydraulic pump drive 30-115
Repair of hydraulic pump with fastening flange 30-118
Repair of mass balancing shaft 30-90
RH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.8630.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-166
RH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.8630.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-168
RH drivetrain wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-167
RH rear axle (E0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-378
RH rear axle (E0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-376
Right-hand console (G0.06.01) 30-503
Roof wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3606.4/50 40-207
Roof wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.009.7850.4/50 40-185
Rotating beacon wiring - 0.012.9909.4 40-269
S
S0 - Wheels 30-653
Safety notes 0-2
Safety precautions for removal and refitting operations 0-3
SDF Analyser 20-19
SDF Analyser - Diagnostic socket 20-22
Secondary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-245
Separate-Brakes valve 10-99
Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-581
Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 10-108, 30-579
Services solenoid valves assembly - Pressure holding valves (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-109
Shuttle assembly - complete unit (D0.03.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-174
Shuttle ECU and forward/reverse selector 30-592
Shuttle output speed sensor (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-588
Shuttle shaft (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-224
Shuttle solenoid valves assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-114, 30-584
Shuttle solenoid valves assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-112, 30-583
Silencer (C0.06.01) 30-152
Solenoid valve assembly 30-612
Starter motor 30-151
Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-65
Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-64
Steering circuit pump - lift circuit 10-77
Steering column switch (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-591
Steering column switch (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 30-590
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-68
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-67
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-71
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-69
Steering cylinders 30-423
Steering cylinders disassembly 30-425
Steering knuckle housing and axle shaft 30-428
Structure of the unit 40-2
Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.015.1437.4/10 40-247
Supplementary worklights wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.015.1435.4/10 40-231
Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab 40-249
Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab 40-233
Supplementary worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-228
VII
INDEX
Systems 40-61
T
Technical data 10-2
Tension adjustment of the alternator, fuel pump and water pump drive belt 30-94
Tension adjustment of the fan and air conditioning compressor drive belt 30-93
Threadlockers, adhesives, sealants and lubricants 0-8
Tightening torques 0-5
Torsional spring plate (D0.05.01) (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-229
Towing hitch slide (V0.02.01) (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-655
Towing hitch slide (V0.02.01) (Agrofarm 85, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-655
Trailer braking valve 10-104
Trailer hydraulic braking wiring - 0.014.1645.4/10 40-273
Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-275
Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-274
Transmission 10-4
Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-30
Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-107
Transmission (Agrofarm 100) 10-11
Transmission (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-106
Transmission alarms 20-97
V
V0 - Ballast - towing hitches 30-655
W
Windscreen wiper connector positions wiring - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-234
Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with high-visibility cab - 0.011.3597.3 40-250
Windscreen wiper wiring - Tractor with standard cab - 0.010.4516.3 40-233
Windscreen wiper wiring connector positions - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-251
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-94
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-92
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-91
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-90
Wiring and components index (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-6
Wiring for lower front lights - Tractor with cab - 0441.1923.4 40-261
Wiring harnesses 40-119
Work lights - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-88
Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-84
Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-82
Worklights - Tractor with high-visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-86
Worklights wiring - Tractor with platform - 0.014.9281.4 40-267
Worklights wiring connector positions - Tractor with platform 40-267
VIII
MODIFICATIONS SINCE LAST VERSION
Power steering valve 10-79
All Round Tester (ART®) 20-2
Services solenoid valve assembly (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 10-108
Wiring and components index (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-6
Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-120
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-187
Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-203
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-208
Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-239
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-69
Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-97
A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-103
Brakes (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-113
Removing and installing front cover 30-77
Checking the compression pressure 30-18
Repair of mass balancing shaft 30-90
Checking the crankshaft 30-90
Repair of flywheel 30-98
Checking the piston 30-98
Checking and setting the valve clearance 30-106
Repair of control rod 30-141
Disassembly of the rear pinion (Agrofarm 100) 30-309
Services solenoid valves assembly - Pressure holding valves (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-109
Index of wiring looms and components (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-11
Location of RH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-169
Location of LH drivetrain wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-173
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 40-189
-> 5001)
Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 40-196
85 -> 5001)
Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 40-225
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
tor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-271
Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-6
Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-74
Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-81
PTO (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-111
Shuttle ECU alarm - code 0.015.0363.4/20 20-60
All-Round Tester Manual - Introduction (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-8
Air conditioning system controls - High-visibility roof system (G0.09.01) 30-508
Shuttle solenoid valves assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 10-114
Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-297
Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/40 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-157
ECU interrogation 20-24
Remote control valve 10-81
Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-26
Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-82
Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-95
Changing the coolant and flushing the circuit (C0.01.02) 30-143
Changing the transmission oil (D0.00.01) 30-157
Dismantling of engine 30-20
Removing and installing the flywheel 30-95
IX
Repair of connecting rod 30-101
Repair of hydraulic pump drive 30-115
Repair of hydraulic pump with fastening flange 30-118
Determining commencement of delivery 30-127
Control and adjustment thermostat 30-155
Shuttle solenoid valves assembly (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 10-112
Putting the tractor into service (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-37
Battery wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-138
Location of cab power wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro- 40-205
farm 85 -> 5001)
Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro- 40-246
farm 85 -> 5001)
Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, 40-253
Location of lower front lights wiring loom - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-263
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with platform (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-71
Work lights - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-84
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-94
Shuttle ECU alarms - SPN Code 5370 FMI 5 20-81
All-Round Tester Manual - Monitor Menu (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-9
Disassembly of the Lo range clutch housing (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-211
Rear P.T.O. 10-42
Instrument panel wiring - 0.014.8628.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-149
RH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.8630.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-168
SDF Analyser 20-19
Location of work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-244
tor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85)
Connection of tester to tractor (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 20-6
Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-64
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-67
Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-76
Instrument panel (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-79
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-92
Instrument panel alarm - code 2.8339.248.0 20-87
P.T.O. selfdiagnosis indicator light. 20-97
Technical data 10-2
Re-assembly of engine 30-32
Removing and installing the thermostat 30-155
Repair of front cover 30-81
Locations of cowl lights wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-121
Power wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-148
Location of instrument panel wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-161
Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 40-193
-> 5001)
Location of roof line wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 40-211
85 -> 5001)
Location of heating wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 40-215
85 -> 5001)
Location of A/C system wiring loom connectors - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agro- 40-221
farm 85 -> 5001)
Location of front-rear work lights wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, 40-230
X
Location of windscreen wiper wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, 40-236
Location of speaker wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 40-240
-> 5001)
Trailer hydraulic braking wiring connector positions (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-275
Starting and preheating (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-65
Steering column switch lights - Tractor with cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-68
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-91
A/C system - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-104
Brakes (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-114
Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version without Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-231
Front gearbox oil seal (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-270
Adjustment of the differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-289
Disassembly of the reverse drive clutch assembly (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001) 30-197
SDF Analyser - Diagnostic socket 20-22
Hood lights wiring - 0.014.8107.4/20 40-119
LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/20 (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-171
LH drivetrain wiring - 0.014.9193.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-173
Drivetrain shuttle wiring - 0.015.1998.4/10 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-176
Cab shuttle wiring - 0.015.1418.4/30 (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-179
Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear brakes (E0.03.01) 30-412
Components (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-40
Positions of instrument panel wiring connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-153
Location of rotating beacon wiring loom connectors (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-269
Windscreen wipers - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-90
A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-100
PTO (Agrofarm 100, Agrofarm 85) 40-110
Removal and re-installation of injection pump 30-120
Repair of crankcase 30-83
Checking the camshaft 30-105
Checking the gearcase 30-105
Checking rocker arm bracket 30-108
Checking the cylinder head 30-110
Check injectors 30-135
Repair of air compressor 30-154
Adjustment of the Differential - Bevel gear pair (Agrofarm 100) 30-281
Introduction to the tractor’s electronic system (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 20-28
Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with front battery (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 40-126
5001)
Engine wiring loom connector locations - Version with lateral battery (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 40-133
5001)
Pre-heat wiring loom connector locations (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-144
Location of A/C system heat exchanger fan wiring loom connectors - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 40-201
100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)
Diagnostics accessories - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-78
Heating - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-96
A/C system - Tractor with standard cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-101
Work lights - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-88
Heating - Tractor with high visibility cab (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-98
Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-107
CAN BUS (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 40-117
Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-232
Air conditioning system - Standard roof version 30-511
Disassembly of the primary shaft - Version with Hi-Lo (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001, Agrofarm 85 -> 5001) 30-232
XI
*307.W.0030.en.6.04*
09/2014
SAME DEUTZ-FAHR ITALIA S.p.A.
Viale F. Cassani, 15 - 24047 Treviglio (BG) Italy
T + 39.0363.4211 F + 39.0363.421638
www.samedeutz-fahr.com
Deutz-Fahr is a trademark
www.deutz-fahr.com

Agrofarm 85 - 100

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Agrofarm 85 - 100

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agrofarm 85 - 100

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Agrofarm 85 -> 5001

20 - Calibrations and electronic diagnosis

0.1.3 - Safety precautions for removal and refitting operations

0.1.4 - Lifting instructions

Wire ropes - slings

8 650 620 500 25 500 400 860 700

Lifting capacities are calculated with a safety coefficient.

0.1.5 - Tightening torques

Thread size Wrench Torque Nm ±10% Wrench Torque Nm ±10%

Thread size Wrench Torque Nm ±10%

Thread size Wrench Torque Nm Wrench Torque Nm Wrench Torque Nm

0.1.6 - Threadlockers, adhesives, sealants and lubricants

0.1.7 - Conversion factors

PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK

Fig. 3 - Main assemblies

Fig. 4 - Power flow diagram

Fig. 5 - Clutch housing

Fig. 6 - Shuttle gearbox assembly

Fig. 7 - Bevel pinion and range gearbox assembly

Fig. 8 - Four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Fig. 9 - Differential unit

Fig. 10 - Brakes and rear axle assembly

Fig. 11 - Main assemblies

Fig. 12 - Power flow diagram

Fig. 13 - Clutch housing

Fig. 14 - Shuttle gearbox assembly

Fig. 15 - Bevel pinion and range gearbox assembly

Fig. 16 - Four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Fig. 17 - Differential unit

Fig. 18 - Brakes and rear axle assembly

10.2.3 - Transmission (Agrofarm 85 -> 5001)

Fig. 19 - Main assemblies

Fig. 20 - Power flow diagram

Fig. 21 - Shuttle unit

Fig. 22 - Hi-Lo unit

Fig. 23 - Gearbox assembly

Fig. 24 - Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo

Fig. 25 - Bevel pinion and range gearbox assembly

Fig. 26 - Mechanical four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Fig. 27 - Electrohydraulic four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Fig. 27 - Electrohydraulic four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Fig. 28 - Differential unit

Fig. 28 - Differential unit

Fig. 29 - Brakes and rear axle assembly

10.2.4 - Transmission (Agrofarm 100 -> 5001)

Fig. 29 - Main assemblies

Fig. 29 - Power flow diagram

Fig. 30 - Shuttle unit

Fig. 31 - Hi-Lo unit

Fig. 32 - Gearbox assembly

Fig. 32 - Gearbox assembly

Fig. 33 - Gearbox assembly - version with Hi-Lo

Fig. 34 - Bevel pinion and range gearbox assembly

Fig. 35 - Mechanical four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Fig. 36 - Electrohydraulic four-wheel drive engagement and parking brake assembly

Fig. 37 - Differential unit

Fig. 38 - Brakes and rear axle assembly